At-CP1E CPU Unit Software

Cat. No.
W480-E1-04
SYSMAC CP Series
CP1E-E@@D@-@
CP1E-N@@D@-@
CP1E-NA@@D@-@
CP1E CPU Unit Software
USERS MANUAL
OMRON, 2009
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form, or
by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of
OMRON.
No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because OMRON is con-
stantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is subject to change without
notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Nevertheless, OMRON assumes no responsibility
for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in
this publication.
SYSMAC CP Series
CP1E-E@@D@-@
CP1E-N@@D@-@
CP1E-NA@@D@-@
CP1E CPU Unit Software
Users Manual
Revised June 2010
Introduction
Thank you for purchasing a SYSMAC CP-series CP1E Programmable Controller.
This manual contains information required to use the CP1E. Read this manual completely and be sure
you understand the contents before attempting to use the CP1E.
Intended Audience
This manual is intended for the following personnel, who must also have knowledge of electrical sys-
tems (an electrical engineer or the equivalent).
Personnel in charge of installing FA systems
Personnel in charge of designing FA systems
Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities
Applicable Products
CP-series CP1E CPU Units

Basic Models CP1E-ED-
A basic model of CPU Unit that support basic control applications using instructions such as
basic, movement, arithmetic, and comparison instructions.
Application Models CP1E-N/NAD-
An application model of CPU Unit that supports connections to Programmable Terminals, invert-
ers, and servo drives.
The CP Series is centered around the CP1H, CP1L, and CP1E CPU Units and is designed with the
same basic architecture as the CS and CJ Series.
Always use CP-series Expansion Units and CP-series Expansion I/O Units when expanding I/O
capacity. I/O words are allocated in the same way as for the CPM1A/CPM2A PLCs, i.e., using fixed
areas for inputs and outputs.
CP1E CPU Unit Software Users Manual(W480) 1

CP1E CPU Unit Manuals
Information on the CP1E CPU Units is provided in the following manuals.
Refer to the appropriate manual for the information that is required.
This Manual
CP1E CPU Unit Hardware CP1E CPU Unit Software CP1E CPU Unit Instructions
Users Manual(Cat. No. W479) Users Manual(Cat. No. W480) Reference Manual(Cat. No. W483)
Mounting and
1 Setting Hardware
Names and specifications of the parts of all Units
Basic system configuration for each CPU Unit
Connection methods for Expansion I/O Units
and Expansion Units
2 Wiring
Wiring methods for the power supply

Wiring methods between external I/O devices
and Expansion I/O Units or Expansion Units
Connecting
3 Online to the PLC
Connecting Cables for CX-Programmer Procedures for connecting the

Support Software CX-Programmer Support Software
4 Software Setup
Software setting methods for the CPU
Units (PLC Setup)
5 Creating the Program

Program types and basic information Detailed information on
CPU Unit operation programming instructions
Internal memory
Built-in CPU functions
Settings
Checking and
6 Debugging Operation
Checking I/O wiring, setting the Auxiliary Area
settings, and performing trial operation
Monitoring and debugging with the
Maintenance and CX-Programmer
7 Troubleshooting
Error codes and remedies if a problem occurs
2 CP1E CPU Unit Software Users Manual(W480)

Manual Configuration
The CP1E CPU manuals are organized in the sections listed in the following tables. Refer to the appro-
priate section in the manuals as required.
CP1E CPU Unit Software Users Manual (Cat. No. W480)

(This Manual)
Section Contents
Section 1 Overview This section gives an overview of the CP1E, describes its application
procedures.
Section 2 CPU Unit Memory This section describes the types of internal memory in a CP1E CPU
Unit and the data that is stored.
Section 3 CPU Unit Operation This section describes the operation of a CP1E CPU Unit.
Section 4 Programming Concepts This section provides basic information on designing ladder programs
for a CP1E CPU Unit.
Section 5 I/O Memory This section describes the types of I/O memory areas in a CP1E CPU
Unit and the details.
Section 6 I/O Allocation This section describes I/O allocation used to exchange data between
the CP1E CPU Unit and other units.
Section 7 PLC Setup This section describes the PLC Setup, which are used to perform basic
settings for a CP1E CPU Unit.
Section 8 Overview and Allocation This section lists the built-in functions and describes the overall applica-
of Built-in Functions tion flow and the allocation of the functions.
Section 9 Quick-response Inputs This section describes the quick-response inputs that can be used to
read signals that are shorter than the cycle time.
Section 10 Interrupts This section describes the interrupts that can be used with CP1E PLCs,
including input interrupts and scheduled interrupts.
Section 11 High-speed Counters This section describes the high-speed counter inputs, high-speed
counter interrupts, and the frequency measurement function.
Section 12 Pulse Outputs This section describes positioning functions such as trapezoidal control,
jogging, and origin searches.
Section 13 PWM Outputs This section describes the variable-duty-factor pulse (PWM) outputs.
Section 14 Serial Communications This section describes communications with Programmable Terminals
(PTs) without using communications programming, no-protocol commu-
nications with general components, and connections with a Modbus-
RTU Easy Master, Serial PLC Link, and host computer.
Section 15 Analog I/O Function This section describes the built-in analog function for NA-type CPU
Units.
Section 16 Built-in Functions This section describes PID temperature control, clock functions, DM
backup functions, security functions.
Section 17 Ethernet Option Board This section gives an overview of the Ethernet Option Board, describes
its setting methods, I/O memory allocations, troubleshooting, how to
connect the CX-Programmer, and how to install an Ethernet network.
Section 18 Operating the Program- This section describes basic functions of the CX-Programmer, such as
ming Device using the CX-Programmer to write ladder programs to control the CP1E
CPU Unit, to transfer the programs to the CP1E CPU Unit, and to debug
the programs.
Appendices The appendices provide lists of programming instructions, the Auxiliary
Area, cycle time response performance, PLC performance at power
interruptions.

CP1E CPU Unit Hardware Users Manual (Cat. No. W479)
Section Contents
Section 1 Overview and Specifica- This section gives an overview of the CP1E, describes its features, and
tions provides its specifications.
Section 2 Basic System Configura- This section describes the basic system configuration and unit models
tion and Devices of the CP1E.
Section 3 Part Names and Functions This section describes the part names and functions of the CPU Unit,
Expansion I/O Units, and Expansion Units in a CP1E PLC .
Section 4 Programming Device This section describes the features of the CX-Programmer used for pro-
gramming and debugging PLCs, as well as how to connect the PLC with
the Programming Device by USB.
Section 5 Installation and Wiring This section describes how to install and wire CP1E Units.
Section 6 Troubleshooting This section describes how to troubleshoot problems that may occur
with a CP1E PLC, including the error indications provided by the CP1E
Units.
Section 7 Maintenance and Inspec- This section describes periodic inspections, the service life of the Bat-
tion tery, and how to replace the Battery.
Section 8 Using Expansion Units This section describes application methods for Expansion Units.
and Expansion I/O Units
Appendices The appendices provide information on dimensions, wiring diagrams,
and wiring serial communications for the CP1E.
CP1E CPU Unit Instructions Reference Manual (Cat. No. W483)

Section Contents
Section 1 Summary of Instructions This section provides a summary of instructions used with a CP1E CPU
Unit.
Section 2 Instruction This section describes the functions, operands and sample programs of
the instructions that are supported by a CP1E CPU Unit.
Section 3 Instruction Execution This section provides the execution times for all instructions used with a
Times and Number of Steps CP1E CPU Unit.
Section 4 Monitoring and This section describes how to monitor and calculate the cycle time of a
Computing the Cycle Time CP1E CPU Unit that can be used in the programs.
Appendices The appendices provide a list of instructions by Mnemonic and ASCII
code table for the CP1E CPU Unit.

Manual Structure
Page Structure and Icons
The following page structure and icons are used in this manual.
5 Installation and wiring

Level 1 heading
Level 2 heading
Level 2 heading 5-2 Installation Level 3 heading
Gives the current
Level 3 heading 5-2-1 Installation Location
headings.
DIN Track Installation
Step in a procedure 1
5-2 Installation
Use a screwdriver to pull down the DIN Track mounting pins from the back of the Units to release
them, and mount the Units to the DIN Track.
Indicates a step in a
procedure.
DIN Track mounting pins
5 Page tab
Release Gives the number
5-2-1 Installation Location

2 Fit the back of the Units onto the DIN Track by catching the top of the Units on the Track and then of the section.
pressing in at the bottom of the Units, as shown below.
DIN Track
3 Press in all of the DIN Track mounting pins to securely lock the Units in place.
Special Information
(See below.)
Icons are used to indicate
precautions and
additional information. DIN Track mounting pins
Precautions for Correct Use

Tighten terminal block screws and cable screws to the following torques.
M4: 1.2 Nm
M3: 0.5 Nm
Manual name CP1E CPU Unit Hardware Users Manual(W479) 5-3
This illustration is provided only as a sample and may not literally appear in this manual.
Special Information
Special information in this manual is classified as follows:
Precautions for Safe Use

Precautions on what to do and what not to do to ensure using the product safely.

Precautions on what to do and what not to do to ensure proper operation and performance.
Additional Information
Additional information to increase understanding or make operation easier.
References to the location of more detailed or related information.

Terminology and Notation
Term Description
E-type CPU Unit A basic model of CPU Unit that support basic control applications using instructions such
as basic, movement, arithmetic, and comparison instructions.
Basic models of CPU Units are called E-type CPU Units in this manual.
N-type CPU Unit An application model of CPU Unit that supports connections to Programmable Terminals,
inverters, and servo drives.
Application models of CPU Units are called N-type CPU Units in this manual.
NA-type CPU Unit An application model of CPU Unit that supports built-in analog and connections to Pro-
grammable Terminals, inverters, and servo drives.
Application models of CPU Units with built-in analog are called NA-type CPU Units in
this manual.
CX-Programmer A programming device that applies for programming and debugging PLCs.
The CX-Programmer includes the Micro PLC Edition CX-Programmer (CX-One Lite), the
CX-Programmer (CX-One) and the CX-Programmer for CP1E.
This manual describes the unique applications and functions of the Micro PLC Edition
CX-Programmer version 9.03 or higher/CX-Programmer for CP1E.
CX-Programmer refers to the Micro PLC Edition CX-Programmer version 9.03 or higher/
CX-Programmer for CP1E in this manual.
Note E20/30/40 and N20/30/40 CPU Units are supported by CX-Programmer version 8.2
or higher. E10/14, N14/60 and NA20 CPU Units are supported by CX-Programmer
version 9.03 or higher.

Sections in this Manual
1 11
2 12
1 Overview 11 High-speed Counters
3 13
Internal Memory
2 in the CPU Unit 12 Pulse Outputs
4 14
3 CPU Unit Operation 13 PWM Outputs

5 15
Understanding Serial
4 Programming 14 Communications 6 16
7 17
5 I/O Memory 15 Analog I/O Function
8 18
6 I/O Allocation 16 Other Functions
APP
9
Ethernet
7 PLC Setup 17 Option Board
10
Overview of Built-in
Programming
8 Functions and
Allocations
18 Device Operations
Quick-response
9 Inputs A Appendices
10 Interrupts

CONTENTS
Introduction ............................................................................................................... 1
CP1E CPU Unit Manuals ........................................................................................... 2
Manual Structure ....................................................................................................... 5
Safety Precautions .................................................................................................. 18
Precautions for Safe Use........................................................................................ 21
Regulations and Standards.................................................................................... 23
Related Manuals ...................................................................................................... 24
Section 1 Overview
1-1 CP1E Overview ........................................................................................................................ 1-2
1-1-1 Overview of Features .................................................................................................................. 1-2
1-2 Basic Operating Procedure .................................................................................................... 1-3
Section 2 Internal Memory in the CPU Unit

2-1 Internal Memory in the CPU Unit............................................................................................ 2-2
2-1-1 CPU Unit Memory Backup Structure .......................................................................................... 2-2
2-1-2 Memory Areas and Stored Data ................................................................................................. 2-3
2-1-3 Transferring Data from a Programming Device ........................................................................... 2-4
2-1-4 Backup ........................................................................................................................................ 2-4
Section 3 CPU Unit Operation

3-1 CPU Unit Operation ................................................................................................................. 3-2
3-1-1 Overview of CPU Unit Operation ................................................................................................ 3-2
3-1-2 CPU Unit Operating Modes......................................................................................................... 3-3
3-2 Backing Up Memory ................................................................................................................ 3-5
3-2-1 CPU Unit Memory Configuration................................................................................................. 3-5
3-2-2 Backing Up Ladder Programs and PLC Setup............................................................................ 3-6
3-2-3 I/O Memory Backup .................................................................................................................... 3-6
3-2-4 Initializing I/O Memory at Startup................................................................................................ 3-8
Section 4 Understanding Programming

4-1 Programming ........................................................................................................................... 4-2
4-1-1 User Programs ............................................................................................................................ 4-2
4-1-2 Program Capacity ....................................................................................................................... 4-3
4-1-3 Basics of Programming ............................................................................................................... 4-3
4-2 Tasks, Sections, and Symbols ............................................................................................... 4-6
4-2-1 Overview of Tasks ....................................................................................................................... 4-6
4-2-2 Overview of Sections .................................................................................................................. 4-6
4-2-3 Overview of Symbols .................................................................................................................. 4-6

4-3 Programming Instructions...................................................................................................... 4-8
4-3-1 Basic Understanding of Instructions ........................................................................................... 4-8
4-3-2 Operands .................................................................................................................................... 4-9
4-3-3 Instruction Variations................................................................................................................. 4-10
4-3-4 Execution Conditions ................................................................................................................ 4-10
4-3-5 Specifying Data in Operands .................................................................................................... 4-12
4-3-6 Data Formats ............................................................................................................................ 4-13
4-3-7 I/O Refresh Timing .................................................................................................................... 4-15
4-4 Constants ............................................................................................................................... 4-16
4-5 Specifying Offsets for Addresses ........................................................................................ 4-19
4-5-1 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 4-19
4-5-2 Application Examples for Address Offsets ................................................................................ 4-21
4-6 Ladder Programming Precautions...................................................................................... 4-22
4-6-1 Special Program Sections......................................................................................................... 4-22
Section 5 I/O Memory

5-1 Overview of I/O Memory Areas............................................................................................... 5-2
5-1-1 I/O Memory Areas....................................................................................................................... 5-2
5-1-2 I/O Memory Area Address Notation ............................................................................................ 5-5
5-1-3 I/O Memory Areas....................................................................................................................... 5-6
5-2 I/O Bits ...................................................................................................................................... 5-7
5-3 Work Area (W) .......................................................................................................................... 5-8
5-4 Holding Area (H) ...................................................................................................................... 5-9
5-5 Data Memory Area (D) ........................................................................................................... 5-11
5-6 Timer Area (T) ........................................................................................................................ 5-13
5-7 Counter Area (C) .................................................................................................................... 5-15
5-8 Auxiliary Area (A)................................................................................................................... 5-17
5-9 Condition Flags...................................................................................................................... 5-19
5-10 Clock Pulses .......................................................................................................................... 5-21
Section 6 I/O Allocation

6-1 Allocation of Input Bits and Output Bits ............................................................................... 6-2
6-1-1 I/O Allocation............................................................................................................................... 6-2
6-1-2 I/O Allocation Concepts............................................................................................................... 6-3
6-1-3 Allocations on the CPU Unit........................................................................................................ 6-3
6-1-4 Allocations to Expansion Units and Expansion I/O Units ............................................................ 6-4
Section 7 PLC Setup

7-1 Overview of the PLC Setup..................................................................................................... 7-2
7-2 PLC Setup Settings ................................................................................................................. 7-3
7-2-1 Startup and CPU Unit Settings ................................................................................................... 7-3
7-2-2 Timing and Interrupt Settings ...................................................................................................... 7-3
7-2-3 Input Constant Settings............................................................................................................... 7-4
7-2-4 Built-in RS-232C Port.................................................................................................................. 7-5
7-2-5 Serial Option Port........................................................................................................................ 7-8
7-2-6 Built-in Inputs ............................................................................................................................ 7-11
7-2-7 Pulse Output 0 Settings ............................................................................................................ 7-13
7-2-8 Pulse Output 1 Settings ............................................................................................................ 7-14
7-2-9 Built-in AD/DA: Built-in Analog I/O Settings .............................................................................. 7-16

Section 8 Overview of Built-in Functions and Allocations
8-1 Built-in Functions .................................................................................................................... 8-2
8-2 Overall Procedure for Using CP1E Built-in Functions ......................................................... 8-3
8-3 Terminal Allocations for Built-in Functions .........................................8-4
8-3-1 Specifying the Functions to Use.................................................................................................. 8-4
8-3-2 Selecting Functions in the PLC Setup......................................................................................... 8-4
8-3-3 Allocating Built-in Input Terminals ............................................................................................... 8-6
8-3-4 Allocating Built-in Output Temrinals ............................................................................................ 8-8
Section 9 Quick-response Inputs

9-1 Quick-response Inputs............................................................................................................ 9-2
9-1-1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 9-2
9-1-2 Flow of Operation........................................................................................................................ 9-3
Section 10 Interrupts
10-1 Interrupts ................................................................................................................................ 10-2
10-1-1 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 10-2
10-2 Input Interrupts ...................................................................................................................... 10-3
10-2-1 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 10-3
10-2-2 Flow of Operation...................................................................................................................... 10-4
10-2-3 Application Example.................................................................................................................. 10-7
10-3 Scheduled Interrupts........................................................................................................... 10-10
10-3-1 Overview ................................................................................................................................. 10-10
10-3-2 Flow of Operation.................................................................................................................... 10-11
10-4 Precautions for Using Interrupts........................................................................................ 10-13
10-4-1 Interrupt Task Priority and Order of Execution ........................................................................ 10-13
10-4-2 Related Auxiliary Area Words and Bits ................................................................................... 10-13
10-4-3 Duplicate Processing in each Task ......................................................................................... 10-13
Section 11 High-speed Counters

11-1 Overview................................................................................................................................. 11-2
11-1-1 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 11-2
11-1-3 Specifications ............................................................................................................................ 11-7
11-2 High-speed Counter Inputs................................................................................................... 11-8
11-2-1 Pulse Input Methods Settings ................................................................................................... 11-8
11-2-2 Counting Ranges Settings ...................................................................................................... 11-10
11-2-3 Reset Methods ........................................................................................................................ 11-11
11-2-4 Reading the Present Value ..................................................................................................... 11-12
11-2-5 Frequency Measurement ........................................................................................................ 11-13
11-3 High-speed Counter Interrupts........................................................................................... 11-14
11-3-1 Overview ................................................................................................................................. 11-14
11-3-2 Present Value Comparison ..................................................................................................... 11-17
11-3-3 High-speed Counter Interrupt Instruction................................................................................ 11-21
11-4 Related Auxiliary Area Bits and Words ............................................................................. 11-26
11-5 Application Example .......................................................................................................... 11-27

Section 12 Pulse Outputs
12-1 Overview................................................................................................................................. 12-2
12-1-1 Overview................................................................................................................................... 12-2
12-1-2 Flow of Operation ..................................................................................................................... 12-3
12-1-3 Specifications.......................................................................................................................... 12-10
12-2 Positioning Control ............................................................................................................. 12-11
12-2-1 Positioning Control Configuration ........................................................................................... 12-11
12-2-2 Relative Positioning and Absolute Positioning ........................................................................ 12-11
12-2-3 Application Example ............................................................................................................... 12-13
12-3 Jogging................................................................................................................................. 12-15
12-3-1 High-speed Jogging................................................................................................................ 12-15
12-3-2 Low-speed Jogging................................................................................................................. 12-15
12-3-3 Application Example ............................................................................................................... 12-15
12-4 Defining Origin Position...................................................................................................... 12-18
12-4-1 Origin Searches...................................................................................................................... 12-18
12-4-2 Flow of Operation ................................................................................................................... 12-19
12-4-3 Settings in PLC Setup............................................................................................................. 12-19
12-4-4 Origin Search Instructions ...................................................................................................... 12-22
12-4-5 Origin Search Operations ....................................................................................................... 12-23
12-4-6 Origin Return .......................................................................................................................... 12-30
12-4-7 Changing the Present Value of the Pulse Output ................................................................... 12-31
12-5 Reading the Pulse Output Present Value .......................................................................... 12-32
12-6 Related Auxiliary Area Flags .............................................................................................. 12-33
12-7 Application Examples ......................................................................................................... 12-34
12-7-1 Vertically Conveying PCBs (Multiple Progressive Positioning) ............................................... 12-34
12-7-2 Feeding Wrapping Material: Interrupt Feeding ....................................................................... 12-39
12-8 Precautions when Using Pulse Outputs ........................................................................... 12-42
12-9 Pulse Output Pattern ........................................................................................................... 12-47
12-9-1 Speed Control (Continuous Mode) ......................................................................................... 12-47
12-9-2 Positioning Control (Independent Mode) ................................................................................ 12-49
Section 13 PWM Outputs

13-1 PWM Outputs (Variable-duty-factor Pulse Outputs)........................................................... 13-2
13-1-2 Ladder Program Example......................................................................................................... 13-3
Section 14 Serial Communications

14-1 Serial Communications......................................................................................................... 14-2
14-1-1 Types of CPU Units and Serial Ports ........................................................................................ 14-2
14-1-2 Overview of Serial Communications......................................................................................... 14-3
14-2 Program-free Communications with Programmable Terminals ........................................ 14-5
14-2-1 Overview................................................................................................................................... 14-5
14-2-2 Flow of Connection ................................................................................................................... 14-6
14-2-3 PLC Setup and PT System Settings......................................................................................... 14-6
14-3 No-protocol Communications with General Components................................................. 14-8
14-3-1 Overview................................................................................................................................... 14-8
14-3-3 PLC Setup ................................................................................................................................ 14-9
14-3-4 Related Auxiliary Area Bits and Words................................................................................... 14-10
14-4 Modbus-RTU Easy Master Function .................................................................................. 14-11
14-4-1 Overview................................................................................................................................. 14-11
14-4-2 Flow of Operation ................................................................................................................... 14-11

14-4-3 Setting and Word Allocation.................................................................................................... 14-12
14-4-4 Programming Examples.......................................................................................................... 14-14
14-5 Serial PLC Links .................................................................................................................. 14-20
14-5-1 Overview ................................................................................................................................. 14-20
14-5-3 PLC Setup............................................................................................................................... 14-21
14-5-4 Operating Specifications ......................................................................................................... 14-23
14-5-5 Example Application................................................................................................................ 14-28
14-6 Connecting the Host Computer (Not Including Support Software) ................................ 14-30
14-6-1 Overview ................................................................................................................................. 14-30
14-6-3 Command/response Format and List of Commands .............................................................. 14-31
Section 15 Analog I/O Function

15-1 Overview................................................................................................................................. 15-2
15-1-2 Analog I/O Specifications .......................................................................................................... 15-6
15-2 Analog Input and Output Signal Ranges............................................................................. 15-7
15-2-1 Analog Input Signal Ranges...................................................................................................... 15-7
15-2-2 Analog Output Signal Ranges................................................................................................... 15-9
15-2-3 Special functions ..................................................................................................................... 15-11
15-3 I/O Allocation and Related Auxiliary Area Flags............................................................... 15-12
15-3-1 I/O Allocation........................................................................................................................... 15-12
15-3-2 Related Auxiliary Area Flags................................................................................................... 15-12
Section 16 Other Functions

16-1 PID Temperature Control ...................................................................................................... 16-2
16-1-1 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 16-2
16-1-3 Application Example.................................................................................................................. 16-4
16-2 Clock ....................................................................................................................................... 16-7
16-3 DM Backup Function ............................................................................................................. 16-8
16-3-1 Backing Up and Restoring DM Area Data................................................................................. 16-8
16-3-2 Procedure................................................................................................................................ 16-10
16-4 Security Functions .............................................................................................................. 16-12
16-4-1 Ladder Program Read Protection ........................................................................................... 16-12
Section 17 Ethernet Option Board

17-1 Features and Specifications ................................................................................................. 17-2
17-1-1 Ethernet Option Board Function Guide..................................................................................... 17-2
17-1-2 Features .................................................................................................................................... 17-3
17-1-3 Specifications ............................................................................................................................ 17-5
17-1-4 Software Configuration.............................................................................................................. 17-5
17-1-5 FINS Communications .............................................................................................................. 17-6
17-1-6 Differences in version of the Ethernet Option Board................................................................. 17-8
17-2 Startup Procedure ................................................................................................................. 17-9
17-2-1 Startup Procedure..................................................................................................................... 17-9
17-3 Settings ................................................................................................................................ 17-11
17-3-1 Ethernet Option Board Setup.................................................................................................. 17-11
17-3-2 Transferring Data from the CPU Unit ...................................................................................... 17-12
17-3-3 Default Settings....................................................................................................................... 17-13

17-3-4 Web Browser Setting Function ............................................................................................... 17-15
17-4 Memory Allocations ............................................................................................................ 17-25
17-4-1 DM Area Allocation ................................................................................................................. 17-25
17-4-2 CIO Area Allocation ................................................................................................................ 17-30
17-5 Trouble Shooting ................................................................................................................. 17-32
17-5-1 Error Log................................................................................................................................. 17-32
17-5-2 Error Codes ............................................................................................................................ 17-33
17-5-3 Error Status............................................................................................................................. 17-35
17-6 Connection Method with the CX-Programmer .................................................................. 17-36
17-7 Network Installation............................................................................................................. 17-39
17-7-1 Devices Required for Constructing a Network ........................................................................ 17-39
17-7-2 Network Installation ................................................................................................................ 17-39
17-8 Comparison with Previous Models .................................................................................... 17-41
Section 18 Programming Device Operations

18-1 Programming Devices Usable with the CP1E ..................................................................... 18-2
18-2 Overview of CX-Programmer................................................................................................ 18-3
18-2-1 CX-Programmer........................................................................................................................ 18-3
18-2-2 CX-Programmer Flow from Startup to Operation ..................................................................... 18-3
18-2-3 Help .......................................................................................................................................... 18-6
18-3 Creating a Ladder Program .................................................................................................. 18-7
18-3-1 Inputting a Ladder Program ...................................................................................................... 18-7
18-3-2 Saving and Reading Ladder Programs................................................................................... 18-14
18-3-3 Editing Ladder Programs ........................................................................................................ 18-15
18-4 Connecting Online to the CP1E and Transferring the Program ...................................... 18-18
18-4-1 Connecting Online .................................................................................................................. 18-18
18-4-2 Changing Operating Modes.................................................................................................... 18-19
18-4-3 Transferring a Ladder Program and the PLC Setup................................................................ 18-20
18-4-4 Starting Operation .................................................................................................................. 18-21
18-5 Online Monitoring and Debugging..................................................................................... 18-23
18-5-1 Monitoring Status.................................................................................................................... 18-23
18-5-2 Force-set/Reset Bits ............................................................................................................... 18-25
18-5-3 Online Editing ......................................................................................................................... 18-26
Section A Appendices
A-1 Instruction Functions..............................................................................................................A-2
A-1-1 Sequence Input Instructions ....................................................................................................... A-2
A-1-2 Sequence Output Instructions .................................................................................................... A-3
A-1-3 Sequence Control Instructions ................................................................................................... A-5
A-1-4 Timer and Counter Instructions .................................................................................................. A-7
A-1-5 Comparison Instructions........................................................................................................... A-10
A-1-6 Data Movement Instructions ..................................................................................................... A-12
A-1-7 Data Shift Instructions .............................................................................................................. A-15
A-1-8 Increment/Decrement Instructions............................................................................................ A-17
A-1-9 Symbol Math Instructions ......................................................................................................... A-18
A-1-10 Conversion Instructions ............................................................................................................ A-22
A-1-11 Logic Instructions...................................................................................................................... A-26
A-1-12 Special Math Instructions ......................................................................................................... A-27
A-1-13 Floating-point Math Instructions ............................................................................................... A-27
A-1-14 Table Data Processing Instructions .......................................................................................... A-30
A-1-15 Data Control Instructions .......................................................................................................... A-31
A-1-16 Subroutine Instructions............................................................................................................. A-35
A-1-17 Interrupt Control Instructions .................................................................................................... A-36
A-1-18 High-speed Counter/Pulse Output Instructions ........................................................................ A-37

A-1-19 Step Instructions .......................................................................................................................A-44
A-1-20 Basic I/O Unit Instructions.........................................................................................................A-45
A-1-21 Serial Communications Instructions..........................................................................................A-49
A-1-22 Clock Instructions......................................................................................................................A-50
A-1-23 Failure Diagnosis Instructions ...................................................................................................A-51
A-1-24 Other Instructions......................................................................................................................A-51
A-2 Auxiliary Area Allocations by Address................................................................................A-52
A-2-1 Read-only Words ......................................................................................................................A-52
A-2-2 Read/Write Words.....................................................................................................................A-70
A-3 Response Performance.........................................................................................................A-80
A-3-1 I/O Response Time ...................................................................................................................A-80
A-3-2 Interrupt Response Time ..........................................................................................................A-82
A-3-3 Serial PLC Link Response Performance...................................................................................A-83
A-3-4 Pulse Output Start Time............................................................................................................A-84
A-3-5 Pulse Output Change Response Time......................................................................................A-84
A-4 PLC Operation for Power Interruptions ...............................................................................A-85
Index ..................................................................................................................................Index-1
Revision History ................................................................................Revision-1

Read and Understand this Manual
Please read and understand this manual before using the product. Please consult your OMRON representative
if you have any questions or comments.
Warranty and Limitations of Liability

WARRANTY
OMRONs exclusive warranty is that the products are free from defects in materials and workmanship for a
period of one year (or other period if specified) from date of sale by OMRON.
OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING NON-

INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE
PRODUCTS. ANY BUYER OR USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE BUYER OR USER ALONE HAS
DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR
INTENDED USE. OMRON DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED.
LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY
OMRON SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,
LOSS OF PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS,
WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, OR STRICT
LIABILITY.
In no event shall the responsibility of OMRON for any act exceed the individual price of the product on which
liability is asserted.
IN NO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANTY, REPAIR, OR OTHER CLAIMS

REGARDING THE PRODUCTS UNLESS OMRONS ANALYSIS CONFIRMS THAT THE PRODUCTS
WERE PROPERLY HANDLED, STORED, INSTALLED, AND MAINTAINED AND NOT SUBJECT TO
CONTAMINATION, ABUSE, MISUSE, OR INAPPROPRIATE MODIFICATION OR REPAIR.

Application Considerations
SUITABILITY FOR USE
OMRON shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards, codes, or regulations that apply to the
combination of products in the customers application or use of the products.
At the customers request, OMRON will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying
ratings and limitations of use that apply to the products. This information by itself is not sufficient for a
complete determination of the suitability of the products in combination with the end product, machine,
system, or other application or use.
The following are some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given. This is not
intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of the products, nor is it intended to imply that the uses
listed may be suitable for the products:
Outdoor use, uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference, or conditions or
uses not described in this manual.
Nuclear energy control systems, combustion systems, railroad systems, aviation systems, medical
equipment, amusement machines, vehicles, safety equipment, and installations subject to separate
industry or government regulations.
Systems, machines, and equipment that could present a risk to life or property.
Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to the products.
NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR
PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO
ADDRESS THE RISKS, AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCTS ARE PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED
FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM.
PROGRAMMABLE PRODUCTS
OMRON shall not be responsible for the users programming of a programmable product, or any
consequence thereof.

Disclaimers
CHANGE IN SPECIFICATIONS
Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other
reasons.
It is our practice to change model numbers when published ratings or features are changed, or when
significant construction changes are made. However, some specifications of the products may be changed
without any notice. When in doubt, special model numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key
specifications for your application on your request. Please consult with your OMRON representative at any
time to confirm actual specifications of purchased products.
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Dimensions and weights are nominal and are not to be used for manufacturing purposes, even when
tolerances are shown.
PERFORMANCE DATA
Performance data given in this manual is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does
not constitute a warranty. It may represent the result of OMRONs test conditions, and the users must
correlate it to actual application requirements. Actual performance is subject to the OMRON Warranty and
Limitations of Liability.
ERRORS AND OMISSIONS

The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate; however, no
responsibility is assumed for clerical, typographical, or proofreading errors, or omissions.

Safety Precautions
Definition of Precautionary Information
The following notation is used in this manual to provide precautions required to ensure safe usage of a
CP-series PLC. The safety precautions that are provided are extremely important to safety. Always read
and heed the information provided in all safety precautions.
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which,

WARNING if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
Additionally, there may be severe property damage.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which,

Caution if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate
injury, or property damage.

Indicates precautions on what to do and what not to do to ensure using the product safely.

Indicates precautions on what to do and what not to do to ensure proper operation
and performance.
Symbols
The triangle symbol indicates precautions (including
warnings). The specific operation is shown in the triangle
and explained in text. This example indicates a precau-
tion for electric shock.
The circle and slash symbol indicates operations that you

must not do. The specific operation is shown in the circle
and explained in text.
The filled circle symbol indicates operations that you

must do. The specific operation is shown in the circle and
explained in text. This example shows a general precau-
tion for something that you must do.

and explained in text. This example indicates a general
precaution.

and explained in text. This example indicates a precau-
tion for hot surfaces.

Caution
Be sure to sufficiently confirm the safety at the destination when you transfer
the program or I/O memory or perform procedures to change the I/O memory.
Devices connected to PLC outputs may incorrectly operate regardless of the operat-
ing mode of the CPU Unit.
With an E-type CPU Unit or with an N/NA-type CPU Unit without a Battery, the con-
tents of the DM Area (D) *, Holding Area (H), the Counter Present Values (C), the sta-
tus of Counter Completion Flags (C), and the status of bits in the Auxiliary Area (A)
related to clock functions may be unstable when the power supply is turned ON.
*This does not apply to areas backed up to EEPROM using the DM backup function.
If the DM backup function is being used, be sure to use one of the following methods
for initialization.
1. Clearing All Areas to All Zeros
Select the Clear Held Memory (HR/DM/CNT) to Zero Check Box in the Startup
Data Read Area in the PLC Setup.
2. Clearing Specific Areas to All Zeros or Initializing to Specific Values
Make the settings from a ladder program.
If the data is not initialized, the unit or device may operate unexpectedly because of
unstable data.
Execute online edit only after confirming that no adverse effects will be caused
by extending the cycle time.
Otherwise, the input signals may not be readable.
The DM Area (D), Holding Area (H), Counter Completion Flags (C), and Counter
Present Values (C) will be held by the Battery if a Battery is mounted in a CP1E-
N/NAD- CPU Unit. When the battery voltage is low, however, I/O memory
areas that are held (including the DM, Holding, and Counter Areas) will be unstable.
The unit or device may operate unexpectedly because of unstable data.
Use the Battery Error Flag or other measures to stop outputs if external out-
puts are performed from a ladder program based on the contents of the DM
Area or other I/O memory areas.
Sufficiently check safety if I/O bit status or present values are monitored in the
Ladder Section Pane or present values are monitored in the Watch Pane.
If bits are set, reset, force-set, or force-reset by inadvertently pressing a shortcut key,
devices connected to PLC outputs may operate incorrectly regardless of the operat-
ing mode.

Caution
Program so that the memory area of the start address is not exceeded when
using a word address or symbol for the offset.
For example, write the program so that processing is executed only when the indirect
specification does not cause the final address to exceed the memory area by using
an input comparison instruction or other instruction.
If an indirect specification causes the address to exceed the area of the start address,
the system will access data in other area, and unexpected operation may occur.
Set the temperature range according to the type of temperature sensor con-
nected to the Unit.
Temperature data will not be converted correctly if the temperature range does not
match the sensor.
Do not set the temperature range to any values other than those for which tem-
perature ranges are given in the following table.
An incorrect setting may cause operating errors.

Observe the following precautions when using a CP-series PLC.
Handling
To initialize the DM Area, back up the initial contents for the DM Area to backup memory using
one of the following methods.
Set the number of words of the DM Area to be backed up starting with D0 in the Number of CH
of DM for backup Box in the Startup Data Read Area.
Include programming to back up specified words in the DM Area to built-in EEPROM by turning
ON A751.15 (DM Backup Save Start Bit).
Check the ladder program for proper execution before actually running it on the Unit. Not checking
the program may result in an unexpected operation.
The ladder program and parameter area data in the CP1E CPU Units are backed up in the built-in
EEPROM backup memory. The BKUP indicator will light on the front of the CPU Unit when the
backup operation is in progress. Do not turn OFF the power supply to the CPU Unit when the
BKUP indicator is lit. The data will not be backed up if power is turned OFF and a memory error
will occur the next time the power supply is turned ON.
With a CP1E CPU Unit, data memory can be backed up to the built-in EEPROM backup memory.
The BKUP indicator will light on the front of the CPU Unit when backup is in progress. Do not turn
OFF the power supply to the CPU Unit when the BKUP indicator is lit. If the power is turned OFF
during a backup, the data will not be backed up and will not be transferred to the DM Area in RAM
the next time the power supply is turned ON.
Before replacing the battery, supply power to the CPU Unit for at least 30 minutes and then com-
plete battery replacement within 5 minutes. Memory data may be corrupted if this precaution is
not observed.
The equipment may operate unexpectedly if inappropriate parameters are set. Even if the appro-
priate parameters are set, confirm that equipment will not be adversely affected before transfer-
ring the parameters to the CPU Unit.
Before starting operation, confirm that the contents of the DM Area is correct.
After replacing the CPU Unit, make sure that the required data for the DM Area, Holding Area, and
other memory areas has been transferred to the new CPU Unit before restarting operation.
Do not attempt to disassemble, repair, or modify any Units. Any attempt to do so may result in mal-
function, fire, or electric shock.
Confirm that no adverse effect will occur in the system before attempting any of the following. Not
doing so may result in an unexpected operation.
Changing the operating mode of the PLC (including the setting of the startup operating mode).
Force-setting/force-resetting any bit in memory.
Changing the present value of any word or any set value in memory.
External Circuits
Always configure the external circuits to turn ON power to the PLC before turning ON power to the
control system. If the PLC power supply is turned ON after the control power supply, temporary
errors may result in control system signals because the output terminals on DC Output Units and
other Units will momentarily turn ON when power is turned ON to the PLC.
Fail-safe measures must be taken by the customer to ensure safety in the event that outputs from
output terminals remain ON as a result of internal circuit failures, which can occur in relays, tran-
sistors, and other elements.

If the I/O Hold Bit is turned ON, the outputs from the PLC will not be turned OFF and will maintain
their previous status when the PLC is switched from RUN or MONITOR mode to PROGRAM
mode. Make sure that the external loads will not produce dangerous conditions when this occurs.
(When operation stops for a fatal error, including those produced with the FALS instruction, all out-
puts from PLC will be turned OFF and only the internal output status in the CPU Unit will be main-
tained.)

Regulations and Standards
Trademarks
SYSMAC is a registered trademark for Programmable Controllers made by OMRON Corporation.
CX-One is a registered trademark for Programming Software made by OMRON Corporation.
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
Other system names and product names in this document are the trademarks or registered trademarks
of their respective companies.

Related Manuals
The following manuals are related to the CP1E. Use them together with this manual.
Manual name Cat. No. Model numbers Application Contents
SYSMAC CP Series W480 CP1E-ED- To learn the software Describes the following information for CP1E
CP1E CPU Unit Soft- CP1E-ND- specifications of the PLCs.
ware Users Manual CP1E PLCs CPU Unit operation
(this manual) CP1E-NAD-
Internal memory
Programming
Settings
CPU Unit built-in functions
Interrupts
High-speed counter inputs
Pulse outputs
Serial communications
Analog I/O function
Other functions
Use this manual together with the CP1E CPU Unit Hardware Users
Manual (Cat. No. W479) and Instructions Reference Manual (Cat. No.
W483).
SYSMAC CP Series W479 CP1E-ED- To learn the hard- Describes the following information for CP1E
CP1E CPU Unit Hard- CP1E-ND- ware specifications PLCs.
ware Users Manual of the CP1E PLCs Overview and features
CP1E-NAD-
Basic system configuration
Part names and functions
Installation and settings
Troubleshooting
Use this manual together with the CP1E CPU Unit Software Users
Manual (Cat. No. W480) and Instructions Reference Manual (Cat. No.
W483).
SYSMAC CP Series W483 CP1E-ED- To learn program- Describes each programming instruction in
CP1E CPU Unit Instruc- CP1E-ND- ming instructions in detail.
tions Reference Manual detail When programming, use this manual together
CP1E-NAD-
with the CP1E CPU Unit Software Users Man-
ual (Cat. No. W480).
CS/CJ/CP/NSJ Series W342 CS1G/H-CPUH To learn communica- Describes
Communications Com- CS1G/H-CPU-V1 tions commands for 1) C-mode commands and
mands Reference Man- CS/CJ/CP/NSJ- 2) FINS commands in detail.
ual CS1D-CPUH series Controllers in
CS1D-CPUS detail Read this manual for details on C-mode and
FINS commands addressed to CPU Units.
CS1W-SCU-V1
CS1W-SCB-V1 Note This manual describes commands addressed to CPU Units. It
does not cover commands addressed to other Units or ports (e.g.,
CJ1G/H-CPUH serial communications ports on CPU Units, communications ports
CJ1G-CPUP on Serial Communications Units/Boards, and other Communica-
tions Units).
CJ1M-CPU
CJ1G-CPU
CJ1W-SCU-V1
SYSMAC CP Series W461 CP1L-L10D- To learn the basic Describes the following information for
CP1L/CP1E CPU Unit CP1L-L14D- setup methods of the CP1L/CP1E PLCs.
CP1L/CP1E PLCs Basic configuration and component names
Introduction Manual CP1L-L20D-
CP1L-M30D- Mounting and wiring
CP1L-M40D- Programming, data transfer, and debugging
CP1L-M60D- using the CX-Programmer
CP1E-ED- Application program examples
CP1E-ND-
CP1E-NAD-

1 1
Overview
This section gives an overview of the CP1E and describes its procedures.
1-1 CP1E Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

1-1-1 Overview of Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1-2 Basic Operating Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
CP1E CPU Unit Software Users Manual(W480) 1-1

1 Overview
1-1 CP1E Overview
1-1-1 Overview of Features
The SYSMAC CP1E Programmable Controller is a package-type PLC made by OMRON that is
designed for easy application. The CP1E includes E-type CPU Units (basic models) for standard control
operations using basic, movement, arithmetic, and comparison instructions, and N/NA-type CPU Units
(application models) that supports connections to Programmable Terminals, Inverters, and Servo Drives.
CP1E Application Models
Basic Models
NA-type CPU
(E-type CPU Units) N-type CPU Units
Units
CPU Unit with
CPU with 10, 14 CPU Unit with 30 or 40 CPU with 14 or CPU Unit with
30, 40 or 60 I/O
or 20 I/O Points I/O Points 20 I/O Points 20 I/O Points
Points
Appearance
Program capacity 2K steps 8K steps

DM Area capacity 2K words 8K words
Of these 1,500 words can be written to the Of these 7,000 words can be written to the built-in
built-in EEPROM. EEPROM.
Mounting Expan- Not possible. 3 Units maximum Not possible. 3 Units maximum
sion I/O Units and
Expansion Units
Model with transis- Available (CPU Unit with 10 I/O points only) Available
tor outputs
Pulse outputs Not supported. Supported (Model with transistor outputs only)
Built-in serial com- Not provided. RS-232C port provided
munications port
Built-in analog Not available. Not available. Available
Option Board Not supported. Not supported. Supported (for one port)
Connection port for USB port USB port
Programming Device
Clock Not provided. Provided
Using a Battery Cannot be used. Can be used (sold separately).
Backup time of 50 hours at 25C 40 hours at 25C
built-in capacitor
Battery-free opera- Always battery-free operation. Battery-free operation if no battery is attached. Only
tion Only data in the built-in EEPROM will be retained data in the built-in EEPROM will be retained if power is
if power is interrupted for longer than 50 hours. interrupted for longer than 40 hours.

For CP1E CPU Units, the following I/O memory area will be unstable after a power interruption.
DM Area (D) (excluding words backed up to the EEPROM using the DM function)
Holding Area (H)
Counter Present Values and Completion Flags (C)
Auxiliary Area related to clock functions(A)
Mount the CP1W-BAT01 Battery (sold separately) to an N/NA-type CPU Unit if data in the above
areas need to be retained after a power interruption. A Battery cannot be mounted to an E-type
CPU Unit.
1-2 CP1E CPU Unit Software Users Manual(W480)

1 Overview
1-2 Basic Operating Procedure

1-2 Basic Operating Procedure
In general, use the following procedure.
1. Setting Devices and Hardware

Connect the CPU Unit, Expansion I/O Units, and Expansion Units.
Set the DIP switches on the Option Board and Expansion Units as required.
1
Refer to Section 3 Part Names and Functions and Section 5 Installation and Wiring in the CP1E CPU Unit
Hardware Users Manual (Cat. No. W479).
2. Wiring
Wire the power supply, I/O, and communications.
Refer to Section 5 Installation and Wiring in the CP1E CPU Unit Hardware Users Manual (Cat. No. W479).
3. Connecting Online to the PLC

Connect the personal computer online to the PLC.
Refer to Section 4 Programming Device in the CP1E CPU Unit Hardware Users Manual (Cat. No. W479).
4. I/O Allocations
Allocations for built-in I/O on the CPU Unit are predetermined and memory is allocated automatically
to Expansion I/O Units and Expansion Units, so the user does not have to do anything.
Refer to Section 6 I/O Allocation in the CP1E CPU Unit Software Users Manual (Cat. No. W480).
5. Software Setup
Make the PLC software settings.
With a CP1E CPU Unit, all you have to do is set the PLC Setup.
When using an E-type CPU Unit or when using an N/NA-type CPU Unit without a Battery, be sure to
consider selecting the Clear retained memory area (HR/DM/CNT) Check Box in the Startup Data
Read Area in the PLC Settings.
Refer to 3-2-4 Initializing I/O Memory at Startup, Section 7 PLC Setup in the CP1E CPU Unit Software
Users Manual (Cat. No. W480).
6. Writing the Programs

Write the programs using the CX-Programmer.
Refer to Section 4 Programming Concepts in the CP1E CPU Unit Software Users Manual (Cat. No. W480).
7. Checking Operation
Check the I/O wiring and the Auxiliary Area settings, and perform trial operation.
The CX-Programmer can be used for monitoring and debugging.
Refer to Section 8 Overview and Allocation of Built-in Functions.
8. Basic Program Operation

Set the operating mode to RUN mode to start operation.

1 Overview

2
2
Internal Memory in the CPU Unit
This section describes the types of internal memory in a CP1E CPU Unit and the data
that is stored.
2-1 Internal Memory in the CPU Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

2-1-1 CPU Unit Memory Backup Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2-1-2 Memory Areas and Stored Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2-1-3 Transferring Data from a Programming Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2-1-4 Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

2 Internal Memory in the CPU Unit
2-1 Internal Memory in the CPU Unit
2-1-1 CPU Unit Memory Backup Structure
The internal memory in the CPU Unit consists of built-in RAM and built-in EEPROM. The built-in RAM is
used as execution memory and the built-in EEPROM is used as backup memory.
CPU Unit
Built-in EEPROM Built-in RAM
Backup memory Execution Memory
Automatic backup
User Program Area
User Program Area
(Backup) Read at startup
Area where data is backed up
even if the power supply is
interrupted for longer than the
Automatic backup back-up time of the built-in
PLC Setup PLC Setup capacitor. *
Read at startup
I/O Memory Areas Area where data is cleared if

the power supply is
Backup using bit in Auxiliary Area
interrupted for longer than the
back-up time of the built-in
DM Area DM Area capacitor. *
DM Area data read at startup
* E-type CPU Units: 50 hours at 25,

N/NA-type CPU Units: 40 hours at 25
Data is retained even if the power If a CP1W-BAT01 Battery (sold

supply is interrupted for longer separately) is mounted to an N/NA-type
than the backup time of the built-in CPU Unit, which is normally backed up
capacitor. by a built-in capacitor, data will be
backed up by the battery.
Built-in RAM
The built-in RAM is the execution memory for the CPU Unit.
The user programs, PLC Setup, and I/O memory are stored in the built-in RAM.
The data is unstable when the power is interrupted.
If a CP1W-BAT01 Battery (sold separately) is mounted to an N/NA-type CPU Unit, the data is backed
up by the Battery.
The user programs and parameters are backed up to the built-in EEPROM, so they are not lost.
Built-in EEPROM
The built-in EEPROM is the backup memory for user programs, PLC Setup, and Data Memory backed
up using control bits in the Auxiliary Area.
Data is retained even if the power supply is interrupted. Only the Data Memory Area words that have
been backed up using the Auxiliary Area control bits are backed up (Refer to 16-3 DM Backup Func-
tion). All data in all other words and areas is not backed up.

2-1 Internal Memory in the CPU Unit

Caution
With an E-type CPU Unit or with an N/NA-type CPU Unit without a Battery, the con-
tents of the DM Area (D) *, Holding Area (H), the Counter Present Values (C), the sta-
tus of Counter Completion Flags (C), and the status of bits in the Auxiliary Area (A)
related to clock functions may be unstable when the power supply is turned ON.
*This does not apply to areas backed up to EEPROM using the DM backup function.
If the DM backup function is being used, be sure to use one of the following methods
for initialization.
1. Clearing All Areas to All Zeros 2
Select the Clear retained memory area (HR/DM/CNT) to Zero Check Box in
the Startup Data Read Area in the PLC Setup.
2-1-2 Memory Areas and Stored Data

2. Clearing Specific Areas to All Zeros or Initializing to Specific Values
Make the settings from a ladder program.
If the data is not initialized, the unit or device may operate unexpectedly because of
unstable data.
2-1-2 Memory Areas and Stored Data

The following table lists the CPU Unit memory areas and the data stored in each area.
Built-in Built-in
Memory area and stored data Details
RAM EEPROM
User Program Area Stored Stored

User Program The User Program Area stores the object code for executing
the user program that was created using the CX-Programmer.
Symbol Table The symbol table contains symbols created using the CX-Pro-
grammer (symbol names, addresses, and I/O comments).
Comments Comments are created using the CX-Programmer and include
annotations and row comments.
Program Index The program index provides information on program sections
created using the CX-Programmer, as well as program com-
ments.
Parameter Area Stored Stored
Setting PLC Setup Various initial settings are made in the PLC Setup using soft-
ware switches.
Refer to Section 7 PLC Setup.
I/O Memory Areas The I/O Memory Areas are used for reading and writing from Stored Not stored
the user programs.It is partitioned into the following regions
according to purpose.
Regions where data is cleared when power to the CPU Unit
is reset, and regions where data is retained.
Regions where data are exchanged with other Units, and
regions that are used internally.
DM Area words backed up to backup memory (built-in Stored Stored
EEPROM) using control bits in the Auxiliary Area.

2-1-3 Transferring Data from a Programming Device

Data that has been created using the CX-Programmer is transferred to the internal memory in the CPU
Unit as shown in the following diagram.
CX-Programmer CPU Unit
User-created Programs
User Program Area
User programs User programs
Symbol Table Symbol Table
Comments and Comments and

program index program index
Parameter Area
PLC Setup PLC Setup
PLC Memory
I/O Memory Areas

CIO Area, Work Area, Holding
Area, Timer Area, Counter The CX-Programmer can be
Area, DM Area, and Auxiliary used to set status in each I/O
Area memory area and to write data
to the I/O memory areas.
2-1-4 Backup
The CPU Unit will access the backup memory in the following process.
The program or PLC Setup are transferred from the CX-Programmer.
The program is changed during online editing.
DM backup is operated by the Auxiliary Area.
During these processes, BKUP LED will light, indicating that the CX-Programmer is being backed up.
There are the following limitations during backup.

The operation mode cannot be switched from PROGRAM mode to MONITOR/RUN mode.
If the power is interrupted when the program or PLC Setup are being backed up, memory error may
occur the next time power is turned ON.
If the power is interrupted when the DM area is being backed up, the reading of backed up DM area
will fail the next time power is turned ON.

3
CPU Unit Operation
3
This section describes the operation of the CP1E CPU Unit. Make sure that you under-
stand the contents of this section completely before writing ladder programs.
3-1 CPU Unit Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

3-1-1 Overview of CPU Unit Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3-1-2 CPU Unit Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3-2 Backing Up Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3-2-1 CPU Unit Memory Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3-2-2 Backing Up Ladder Programs and PLC Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3-2-3 I/O Memory Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3-2-4 Initializing I/O Memory at Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

3 CPU Unit Operation
3-1 CPU Unit Operation

This section gives an overview of the CPU Unit operation, describes the operating modes, and explains
how the Unit operates when there is a power interruption.
3-1-1 Overview of CPU Unit Operation

The CPU Unit reads and writes data to the internal I/O memory areas while executing user ladder pro-
grams by executing the instructions in order one at a time from the start to the end.
CPU Unit Internal Memory
Overhead processing
(self-diagnosis)
Change in status
after all instructions
I/O memory have been executed Inputs
Program execution
Access 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 Exchange
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0
CPU Unit 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0
processing 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1
cycle 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1
Outputs
I/O refreshing
Refreshes external devices at this timing
Peripheral servicing
Overhead Processing (Self-diagnosis)

Self-diagnosis, such as an I/O bus check, is performed.
Ladder Program Execution

Instructions are executed from the beginning of the program and I/O memory is refreshed.
I/O Refresh
Data to and from external devices, such as sensors and switches, directly connected to the built-in I/O
terminals and expansion I/O terminals, is exchanged with data in the I/O memory of the PLC. This pro-
cess of data exchange is called the I/O refresh.
Peripheral Servicing
Peripheral servicing is used to communicate with devices connected to the communications port or for
exchanging data with the CX-Programmer.
Cycle Time
The cycle time is the time between one I/O refresh and the next. The cycle time can be determined
beforehand for SYSMAC PLCs.

The average cycle time during operation will be displayed in the status bar on the bottom right of
the Ladder Program Window on the CX-Programmer.
3-1 CPU Unit Operation

I/O Memory
These are the PLC memory areas that are accessed by the ladder programs. SYSMAC PLCs refer to
these areas as the I/O memory. It can be accessed by specifying instruction operands. There are words
in the I/O memory area where data is cleared and words where data is retained when recovering from a
power interruption. There are also words that can be set to be cleared or retained. Refer to Section 5
I/O Memory.
3
3-1-2 CPU Unit Operating Modes
3-1-2 CPU Unit Operating Modes

Overview of Operating Modes
CPU Units have the following three operating modes.
PROGRAM mode: The programs are not executed in PROGRAM mode.This mode is used for the initial
settings in PLC Setup, transferring ladder programs, checking ladder programs, and
making prepartions for executing ladder programs such as force-setting/resetting bits.
MONITOR mode: In this mode, it is possible to perform online editing, force-set/reset bits, and change
I/O memory present values while the ladder programs are being executed. Adjust-
ments during trial operation are also made in this mode.
RUN mode: This is the mode in which the ladder program is executed. Some operations are dis-
abled during this mode. It is the startup mode at initial value when the CPU Unit is
turned ON.
Changing the Operating Mode

The operating mode can be changed from the CX-Programmer.
Changing the Startup Mode

The default operating mode when the CPU Unit is turned ON is RUN mode.
To change the startup mode to PROGRAM or MONITOR mode, set the desired mode in Startup
Setting in PLC Setup from the CX-Programmer.

Changing the Operating Mode after Startup

Use one of the following procedures.
Select PROGRAM, MONITOR, or RUN from the Startup Mode Menu.
Right-click the PLC in the project tree, and then select PROGRAM, MONITOR, or RUN from the
Startup Mode Menu.
Operating Modes and Operation

The following table lists status and operations for each mode.
Operating mode PROGRAM MONITOR RUN
Ladder program execution Stopped Executed Executed
I/O refresh Executed Executed Executed
External I/O status OFF after changing to Controlled by Controlled by
PROGRAM mode but the ladder pro- the ladder pro-
can be turned ON from grams. grams.
the CX-Programmer
afterward.
I/O memory Non-retained memory Cleared Controlled by Controlled by
Retained memory Retained the ladder pro- the ladder pro-
grams. grams.
CX-Program- I/O memory monitoring Yes Yes Yes
mer opera- Ladder program monitoring Yes Yes Yes
tions
Ladder pro- From CPU Unit Yes Yes Yes
gram transfer To CPU Unit Yes No No
Checking programs Yes No No
Setting the PLC Setup Yes No No
Changing ladder programs Yes Yes No
Forced-set/reset operations Yes Yes No
Changing timer/counter SV Yes Yes No
Changing timer/counter PV Yes Yes No
Change I/O memory PV Yes Yes No
The Retaining of I/O Memory When Changing the Operating Mode

Non-retained areas Retained areas
I/O bits Holding Area
Serial PLC Link Words DM Area
Mode changes Work bits Counter PV and Completion Flags
Timer PV/Completion Flags (Auxiliary Area bits/words are
Data Registers retained or not retained depending
(Auxiliary Area bits/words are retained or on the address.)
not retained depending on the address.)
RUN or MONITOR to Cleared* Retained
PROGRAM
PROGRAM to RUN or Cleared* Retained
MONITOR
RUN to MONITOR or Retained* Retained
MONITOR to RUN
* The data is cleared when the IOM Hold Bit is OFF. The outputs from the Output Units will be turned OFF when a
fatal error is occurred, regardless of the status of the IOM Hold Bit, and the status of the output bits in CPU Units
I/O memory is retained.
Refer to Section 5 I/O Memory for details on the I/O memory.

3-2 Backing Up Memory

This section describes backing up the CP1E CPU Unit memory areas.
3-2-1 CPU Unit Memory Configuration

Data backup to the CP1E CPU Units built-in RAM memory describes as below.
Ladder programs and PLC Setup

Automatically backed up to the built-in EEPROM whenever changed.
DM Area in the I/O memory

Data in specified words of the DM Area can be backed up to the built-in EEPROM by using bits in
the Auxiliary Area. Other words are not backed up.
3
Other areas in the I/O memory (including Holding Area data, Counter PVs,
3-2-1 CPU Unit Memory Configuration

and Counter Completion Flags)
Not backed up to the built-in EEPROM.
CP1E CPU Unit

Built-in EEPROM
Built-in RAM
backup memory
Ladder programs Ladder programs

Changing program
PLC power turned ON
PLC Setup changed Parameter Area

Parameter Area
PLC Setup
PLC Setup
I/O Memory Areas

PLC power turned ON
I/O Area
Work Area
Holding Area
Operation using control Auxiliary Area
bits in Auxiliary Area Timer/Counter
Areas
Part of DM Area DM Area
PLC power turned ON

3-2-2 Backing Up Ladder Programs and PLC Setup

Ladder programs and the PLC Setup are automatically backed up to and restored from the built-in
EEPROM backup memory.
Backing Up Memory
Ladder programs and PLC Setup are backed up to the built-in EEPROM backup memory by trans-
ferring them from the CX-Programmer or writing them using online editing.
Restoring Memory
Ladder programs and PLC Setup are automatically transferred from the built-in EEPROM backup
memory to the RAM memory when power is turned ON again or at startup.

The BKUP indicator on the front of the CPU Unit turns ON when data is being written to the built-
in EEPROM backup memory. Never turn OFF the power supply to the CPU Unit when the BKUP
indicator is lit.
3-2-3 I/O Memory Backup

I/O memory is backed up to the built-in EEPROM backup memory only when a bit in the Auxiliary Area
is turned ON to back up specified words in the DM Area.
Status at startup
Backup to built-in
Area EEPROM backup N/NA-type CPU Unit with
N/NA-type CPU Unit with
memory no Battery mounted or
Battery mounted
E-type CPU Unit
CIO Area Not backed up. Cleared to all zeros.
Work Area (W)
Timer Area (T)
Holding Area (H) Unstable when the power The values immediately
supply is OFF for longer before power interruption
than the I/O memory are retained.
backup time.*
Counter Area (C)
Auxiliary Area (A) Initialized (For N/NA-type Initialized (For N/NA-type
CPU Units, status of bits CPU Units, status of bits
related to clock functions related to clock functions
is unstable when the are retained at their sta-
power supply is OFF for tus immediately before
longer than the I/O mem- power interruption.)
ory backup time.*)
DM Area Number of words start- The specified number of The specified number of words starting from D0 is
(D) ing from D0 set in the words starting from D0 is restored from the built-in EEPROM backup memory if
Number of CH of DM for backed up by turning ON the Restore D0- from backup memory Check Box is
backup Box in the Star- A751.15 (DM Backup selected in the Startup Data Read Area in the PLC Set-
tup Data Read Area in Save Start Bit). tings.
the PLC Settings.
Ranges not given Not backed up. Unstable when the power The values immediately
above. supply is OFF for longer before power interruption
than the I/O memory are retained.
backup time.
* The values will be cleared to all zeros at startup if the Clear retained memory area (HR/DM/CNT) Check Box is
selected in the PLC Settings.

I/O Memory Backup Time

The built-in capacitors backup time for I/O memory during a power interruption is listed below for E-type
CPU Units and N/NA-type CPU Units.
E-type CPU Units: 50 hours at 25C

N/NA-type CPU Units (without a battery): 40 hours at 25C
CP1E E-type CPU Unit

50 hours
Backup time for I/O memory
40 hours
CP1E N/NA-type CPU Unit
without a battery
25 hours
20 hours 3
9 hours
7 hours
3-2-3 I/O Memory Backup

25C 40C 60C
Ambient temperature
The following areas are unstable when power is interrupted for longer than the I/O memory backup
times given above.
DM Area (D) (excluding words backed up to the EEPROM using the DM backup function)
Holding Area (H)
Counter PVs and Completion Flags (C)
Auxiliary Area related to clock function (A)
Words in the Auxiliary Area related to clock function are unstable. Others are cleared to default
values.
Power interruption time CPU Unit
Words Name Less than I/O Longer than I/O

E-type CPU N/NA-type
memory backup memory backup
Unit CPU Unit
time time
A100 to A199 Error Log Area Retained Unstable Supported Supported
A300 Error Log Pointer Supported
A351 to A354 Clock Area Not supported.
A510 to A511 Startup Time Not supported.
A512 to A513 Power Interruption Time Not supported.
A514 Number of Power Interruptions Supported
A515 to A517 Operation Start Time Not supported.
A518 to A520 Operation End Time Not supported.
A720 to A749 Power ON Clock Data 1 to 10 Not supported.

Use an N/NA-type CPU Unit with a Battery mounted if it is necessary to retain the contents of the
DM Area (D) and Holding Area (A), the Counter Present Values (C), the status of Counter Com-
pletion Flags (C), and the status of bits in the Auxiliary Area (A) related to clock functions when
the power supply is turned ON after the power has been OFF for a period of time. These con-
tents and status cannot be retained with an E-type CPU Unit.

3-2-4 Initializing I/O Memory at Startup

For E-type or N/NA-type (without a battery) CPU Units, the held areas in I/O memory (i.e., Holding
Area, Counter Present Values, Counter Completion Flags, and DM Area) may be unstable when the
power supply is turned ON. Therefore, use one of the following ways to clear these areas.
Clearing All Held Areas to Zero at Startup

Select the Clear retained memory area (HR/DM/CNT) Check Box in the PLC Settings.
Note If the Restore D0- from backup memory Check Box is selected, only the specified words in the DM Area will
be restored from the built-in EEPROM backup memory when the power supply is turned ON.
Initializing Specific Held Areas at Startup

Write the following type of ladder programming.
Example
P_First_Cycle
BSET D100 to D2047 are cleared
to Zero
First Cycle Flag #0000
(A200.11)
D100
D2047
BSET H10 to H49 are cleared

to Zero
#0000
H10
D49
CNR C0 to C255 are cleared

to Zero
C0
C255

4
Understanding Programming
This section provides basic information on ladder programming for CP1E CPU Units.
4-1 Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

4-1-1 User Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4-1-2 Program Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4-1-3 Basics of Programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4-2 Tasks, Sections, and Symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4-2-1 Overview of Tasks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4-2-2 Overview of Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4-2-3 Overview of Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4-3 Programming Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4-3-1 Basic Understanding of Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4-3-2 Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4-3-3 Instruction Variations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4-3-4 Execution Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4-3-5 Specifying Data in Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
4-3-6 Data Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4-3-7 I/O Refresh Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
4-4 Constants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
4-5 Specifying Offsets for Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
4-5-1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
4-5-2 Application Examples for Address Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
4-6 Ladder Programming Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
4-6-1 Special Program Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

4 Understanding Programming
4-1 Programming
4-1-1 User Programs
Structure of User Programs
User programs are created by using the CX-Programmer.

The user programs consist of the following parts.
Programs
A program consists of more than one instruction and ends with an END instruction.
Tasks (Smallest Executable Unit)
A program is assigned to an interrupt task to execute it. (In the CX-Programmer, the interrupt task
number is specified in the program properties.)
Tasks include cyclic tasks (executed with normal cyclic processing), interrupt tasks (executed when
interrupt conditions have been completed) and scheduled interrupt tasks (executed at specified inter-
vals).
The CP1E can use only one cyclic task.
Sections
When creating and displaying programs with the CX-Programmer, the one program can be divided
into any number of parts.
Each part is called a section.
Sections are created mainly to make programs easier to understand.
Subroutines
You can create subroutines within a program.
User Program Data

The user programs are saved in a project file (.CXP) for the CX-Programmer along with other parame-
ters, such as the symbol table, PLC Setup data, and I/O memory data.
Programming Languages
Programs can be written using only ladder programs.

4-1-2 Program Capacity

The maximum program capacities of the CP1E CPU Units for all ladder programs (including symbol
table and comments) are given in the following table.
The total number of steps must not exceed the maximum program capacity.
Unit type Model numbers Program capacity
E-type CPU Unit CP1E-E- 2K steps
N/NA-type CPU Unit CP1E-N/NA- 8K steps
It is possible to check the program size by selecting Program - Memory View in the CX-Programmer.
4-1 Programming
The size of a ladder instruction depends on the specific instruction and operands that are used.
4-1-3 Basics of Programming

This section describes the basics of programming for the CP1E.
4
Basic Concepts of Ladder Programming
4-1-2 Program Capacity

Instructions are executed in the order that they are stored in memory (i.e., in the order of the mnemonic
code). Be sure you understand the concepts of ladder programming, and write the programs in the
proper order.
Basic Points in Creating Ladder Programs
Order of Ladder Program Execution

When the ladder diagram is executed by the CPU Unit, the execution condition (i.e., power flow)
flows from left to right and top to bottom.
The flow is different from that for circuits that consist of hard-wired control relays.
For example, when the diagram in figure A is executed by the CPU Unit, power flows as though the
diodes in brackets were inserted so that output R2 is not controlled by input condition D.
The actual order of execution is indicated on the right with mnemonics.
To achieve operation without these imaginary diodes, the diagram must be rewritten. Also, the power
flow in figure B cannot be programmed directly and must be rewritten.
Figure A (Good example)

A Signal flow Order of execution (mnemonics)
() B
R1 LD A AND B
() LD C OUT R1
C D
OUT TR0 LD TR0
() AND D AND E
E OR LD OUT R2
R2
Figure B (Bad example)

A B
R1
E
C E
R2

Number of Times Bits Can be Used and Connection Method

There is no limit to the number of I/O bits, work bits, timers, and other input bits that can be used.
Program structure should be kept as clear and simple as possible to make the programs easier to
understand and maintain even if it means using more input bits.
There is no limit to the number of input conditions that can be connected in series or in parallel on
the rungs.
Two or more OUT instructions can be connected in parallel.
0.00 0.05
TIM
0000
#100
102.00
Output bits can also be used in input conditions.
102.00
102.00
Ladder Programming Restrictions

A rung error will occur if a ladder program is not connected to both bus bars.
The ladder program must be connected to both bus bars so that the execution condition will flow
from the left bus bar to the right bus bar.
If the rungs are not connected to both bus bars, a rung error will occur during the program check
on the CX-Programmer and program transfer will be impossible.
A rung error will occur if the instruction shown below is made to directly connect to the bus bar
without an input condition.
OUT instructions, timers, counters, and other output instructions cannot be connected directly to
the left bus bar.
If one of these instructions is connected directly to the left bus bar, a rung error will occur and pro-
gram transfer will be impossible.
MOV

A location error will occur if an instruction is not connected directly to the right bus bar.
An input condition cannot be inserted after an OUT instruction or other output instruction. The
input condition must be inserted before an OUT instruction or other output instruction. If it is
inserted after an output instruction, then a location error will occur during the program check in the
CX-Programmer.
0.00 0.03 102.01 0.04
0.01 102.01
4-1 Programming
A warning will occur if the same output bit is used more than once in an OUT instruction.
One output bit can be used in one instruction only. Instructions in a ladder program are executed
in order from the top rung in each cycle. The result of an OUT instruction in a lower rung will be
eventually saved in the output bit. The results of any previous instructions controlling the same bit
will be overwritten and not output.
Output bit CIO 100.00
4
Output bit CIO 100.00
4-1-3 Basics of Programming

4-2 Tasks, Sections, and Symbols
4-2-1 Overview of Tasks
There are basically two types of tasks.

Task settings must be made to use interrupt tasks with a CP1E CPU Unit.
Applicable
Task type Description programming Execution condition
language
Cyclic task Executed once per cycle Ladder diagram Only one for the CP1E.
(Normally, the user does not have to con-
sider this.)
Interrupt tasks Executed when a specific Ladder diagram An interrupt task is placed into READY
condition occurs. The process status when the interrupt condition
being executed is interrupted. occurs. A condition can be set for the fol-
lowing interrupt tasks.
Scheduled interrupt tasks
I/O interrupt tasks
4-2-2 Overview of Sections

With the CX-Programmer, programs can be created and displayed in functional units called sections.
Any program in a task can be divided into sections.
Sections improve program legibility and simplifies editing.
4-2-3 Overview of Symbols
Symbols
I/O memory area addresses or constants can be specified by using character strings registered as symbols.
The symbols are registered in the symbol table of the CX-Programmer.
Programming with symbols enables programming with names without being aware of the addresses.
The symbol table is saved in the CX-Programmer project file (.CXP) along with other parameters, such
as the user programs.
Symbol Types
There are two types of symbols that can be used in programs.
Global Symbols
Global symbols can be accessed from all ladder programs in the PLC.
Local Symbols
Local symbols can be accessed from only one task. They are assigned to individual tasks.

Addresses are allocated to symbols using one of the following methods.

User Specified allocation
Automatic allocation using the CX-Programmer
The area of memory used for automatic allocations is set by selecting Memory Allocation - Auto-
matic Address Allocation from the PLC Menu in the CX-Programmer.
Scope
Address and I/O
Access
4-2 Tasks, Sections, and Symbols

Types of sym- Project tree in the Access Access comment (with-
bols CX-Programmer using sym- out a symbol
from other from the
bols from a name)
tasks local task
network
Global PLC tree Not Possible. Possible. Supported
symbols possible.
Local Program tree Not Possible. Not supported

symbols possible.
4
Note Global and local indicate only the applicable scope of the symbol.
4-2-3 Overview of Symbols

They have nothing to do with the applicable scope of memory addresses.
Therefore, a warning but not an error will occur in the following cases, and it will be possible to
transfer the user program.
The same addresses is used for two different local symbols.
The same addresses is used for a global symbol and a local symbol.
In programs in the CX-Programmer, global symbols and local symbols can be identified by the
following character colors and symbol icons.
Classification Display color Example (default color)
Global symbols Black (default) Start
3.00
Local symbols Blue (default) Error
W0.00
Select Tools - Options, and select Local Symbols or Global Symbols in Appearance to change
the color.

4-3 Programming Instructions
4-3-1 Basic Understanding of Instructions
Structure of Instructions
Programs consist of instructions. The conceptual structure of the inputs to and outputs from an instruc-
tion is shown in the following diagram.
Power flow (P.F., execution condition) Power flow (P.F., execution condition)*1
Instruction condition Instruction Instruction condition*2
Flags Flag
*1: Input instructions only.
*2: Not output for all instructions.
Operands Operands
(sources) (destinations)
I/O memory
Power Flow
The power flow is the execution condition that is used to control the execution and instructions when
programs are executing normally. In a ladder program, power flow represents the status of the exe-
cution condition.
Input Instructions
Load instructions indicate a logical start and outputs the execution condition.
Outputs the execution
condition.
Intermediate instructions input the power flow as an execution condition and output the power flow
to an intermediate or output instruction.
Outputs the execution
condition.
=
D0
#1215
Output Instructions
Output instructions execute all functions, using the power flow as an execution condition.
LD power flow
Power flow for
output instruction
Input block Output block

4-3-2 Operands
Operands specify preset instruction parameters that are used to specify I/O memory area contents or
constants. Operands are given in boxes in the ladder programs.
Addresses and constants are entered for the operands to enable executing the instructions.
Operands are classified as source, destination, or number operands.

Example:
MOV SBS
&0 S (source) 2 N (number)

D0 D (destination)
Operand
Operand type Description
symbol
Source oper- Specifies the address of S Source oper- Source operand other than control
and the data to be read or a and data (C) 4
constant. C Control data Compound data in a source operand
that has different meanings depend-
4-3-2 Operands
ing on bit status.
Destination Specifies the address D
operand where data will be writ-
(results) ten.
Number Specifies a particular N With numbers, it is not possible to specify an address
number used in the for indirect specification (except for jump instruction
instruction, such as a numbers).
subroutine number.
Operands are also called the first operand, second operand, and so on, starting from the top of the
instruction.
MOV
#0 First operand
D0 Second operand

4-3-3 Instruction Variations

The following variations are available for instructions to differentiate executing conditions and to refresh
data when the instruction is executed (immediate refreshing).
Variation Symbol Description
No variation used. These instructions are executed once every cycle while
the execution condition is satisfied.
Differentiation ON @ These instructions are executed only once when the exe-
variations cution condition turns ON.
OFF % These instructions are executed only once when the exe-
cution condition turns OFF.
Immediate refreshing ! Data in the built-in I/O area specified by the operands is
refreshed when the instruction is executed.
Example:
! @ MOV
Instruction (mnemonic)
Differentiation variation
Immediate refresh variation
4-3-4 Execution Conditions

The following two types of basic and special instructions can be used.
Non-differentiated instructions: Executed every cycle
Differentiated instructions: Executed only once
Non-differentiated Instructions
Output Instructions (Instructions That Require Input Conditions)

These instructions are executed once every cycle while the execution condition is satisfied (ON or
OFF).
Non-differentiated Example:
Output instructions MOV
executed every cycle
Input Instructions (Logical Starts and Intermediate Instructions)

These instructions read bit status, make comparisons, test bits, or perform other types of processing
every cycle. If the results are ON, the input condition is output (i.e., the execution condition is turned
ON).
Input instruction executed every cycle Example:

Input-differentiated Instructions
Upwardly Differentiated Instructions (Instructions Preceded by @)

Output Instructions
The instruction is executed only during the cycle in which the execution condition changes from
OFF to ON.

The instruction is not executed in the following cycle.
Example: 1.02
@ Upwardly
differentiated @MOV
instruction
Executes the MOV instruction once

when CIO 1.02 turns ON.

The instruction reads bit status, makes comparisons, tests bits, or performs other types of pro-
cessing every cycle and will output an ON execution condition (power flow) when the result
changes from OFF to ON. 4
The execution condition will turn OFF the next cycle.
4-3-4 Execution Conditions

Upwardly differentiated instruction Example: 1.03

ON execution condition created for one

cycle when CIO 1.03 turns ON.
Downwardly Differentiated Instructions (Instruction Preceded by %)

Output Instructions
The instruction is executed only during the cycle in which the execution condition changes from
ON to OFF.
The instruction is not executed in the following cycle.
Example: 1.02
% Downwardly
differentiated %SET
instruction
Executes the SET instruction once

when CIO 1.02 turns OFF.

The instruction reads bit status, makes comparisons, tests bits, or performs other types of pro-
cessing every cycle and will output an ON execution condition (power flow) when the result
changes from ON to OFF.
The execution condition will turn OFF the next cycle.
Downwardly differentiated instruction Example: 1.03

ON execution condition created for one cycle

when CIO 1.03 turns ON.

4-3-5 Specifying Data in Operands
Specifying Addresses
Application
Operand Description Example
examples
Specifying The word address and bit number are speci- 1 . 02 1.02
bit fied directly to specify a bit.
addresses Bit number 02
.
Bit number Word address CIO 1
(00 to 15)
Word address
Specifying The word address is specified directly to 3

MOV 3 D200
word specify a 16-bit word.
Word address CIO 3
addresses
D200
Word address Word address D200
Specifying In brackets, specify the number of bits to off- 10.00[2] 10.00[2]

offsets for bit set the specified starting bit address. Number of bits to offset the address
addresses Specify 10.02
. Starting bit address
Offset Constant
10.00 [W0]
0 to 15 or word
address in I/O memory Number of bits to offset the address
When W0 = &2Specify 10.02
Starting bit address Starting bit address
A symbol can also be specified for the start-

ing bit address. Only Holding, Work, and DM
Area addresses can be used regardless of
whether a physical address or symbol is
used.
A constant or word address in I/O memory
can be used for the offset. If a word address
is specified, the contents of the word is used
as the offset.
Specifying In brackets, specify the number of words to D0[2] MOV 3 D0[200]
offsets for offset the specified starting bit address. Number of words to offset the address
word Specify D2
[ ] Starting word address
addresses
Offset Constant of 0 or
higher or word address in D0 [W0]
I/O memory Number of bits to offset the address
Starting word address When W0 = &2Specify D2
Starting word address
A symbol can also be specified for the start-
ing word address. Only Holding, Work, and
DM Area addresses can be used regardless
of whether a physical address or symbol is
used.
A constant or word address in I/O memory
can be used for the offset. If a word address
is specified, the contents of the word is used
as the offset.

Application
Operand Description Example
examples
Specifying An offset from the beginning of the DM Area @D300
MOV #0001 @D300
indirect DM is specified. The contents of the address will
addresses in be treated as binary data (E-type CPU Unit
&256 decimal Contents
Binary Mode 0000 to 2047, N/NA-type CPU Unit 0000 to
8191) to specify the word address in DM (#0100 hexadecimal)
Area.
Add the @ symbol at the front to specify an Specify D00256

indirect address in Binary Mode.
Add @
Specifying An offset from the beginning of the DM Area * D200 MOV #0001 *D200
indirect DM is specified. The contents of the address will
Addresses be treated as BCD data (E-type CPU Unit Contents
#0100
in BCD 0000 to 2047, N/NA-type CPU Unit 0000 to
Mode 8191) to specify the word address in the DM
Area. Specify D100
Add an asterisk (*) at the front to specify an
indirect address in BCD Mode.
Add *
4
Note For Timer Completion Flags and Counter Completion Flags, there is no distinction between word addresses and bit
4-3-6 Data Formats

addresses.
4-3-6 Data Formats

The following table shows the data formats that the CP1E CPU Units can handle.
4-digit
Decimal
Type Data format hexadeci-
equivalent
mal
Unsigned &0 to #0000 to
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
binary &65535 #FFFF
Binary 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
Hexadecimal 23 22 21 20 23 22 21 20 23 22 21 20 23 22 21 20
Decimal 32768 16384 8192 4096 2048 1024 512 256 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1
Signed 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Negative: Negative:
binary -1 to #8000 to
Binary: 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 - 32768 #FFFF
Hexadecimal: 23 22 21 20 23 22 21 20 23 22 21 20 23 22 21 20
Decimal: -32768 16384 8192 4096 2048 1024 512 256 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 Positive: Positive:
0 to 32767 #0000 to
Sign bit: #7FFF
1:Negative, 0:Non-negative
The data is treated as 16-bit signed binary data using the leftmost bit as the
sign bit. The value is expressed in 4-digit hexadecimal.
Positive numbers: If the leftmost bit is OFF, it indicates a non-negative value.
For 4-digit hexadecimal, the value will be 0000 to 7FFF hex.
Negative numbers: If the leftmost bit is ON, it indicates a negative value. For 4-
digit hexadecimal, the value be 8000 to FFFF hex. It will be expressed as the
2s complement of the absolute value of the negative value (decimal).

4-digit
Decimal
Type Data format hexadeci-
equivalent
mal
BCD (binary 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
#0 to #9999 #0000 to
coded deci- #9999
mal) BCD 23 22 21 20 23 22 21 20 23 22 21 20 23 22 21 20
Decimal 0 to 9 0 to 9 0 to 9 0 to 9
Single-preci- 31 30 29 23 22 21 20 19 2 1 0
*
sion floating-
point decimal
Sign of Exponent Mantissa

mantissa Binary
sign Exponent
Value = (-1) 1.[Mantissa] 2
Sign bit (bit 31): 1: Negative, 0: Positive
Mantissa: The 23 bits from bit 00 to bit 22 contain the mantissa, i.e., the portion
below the decimal point in 1. .....,in binary.
Indicates this value.

The 8 bits from bit 23 to bit 30 contain the exponent. The exponent
n n-127
is expressed in binary as the n in 2 . The actual value is 2 .
This format conforms to the IEEE 754 standard for single-precision floating-
point data. It is used only with instructions that convert or calculate floating-
point data.
Input using operands in the CX-Programmer as signed decimal or 32-bit
hexadecimal with the # symbol.
When inputting operands in the I/O Memory Edit/Monitor Window of the CX-
Programmer as signed decimal values with seven digits or less, the value will
be automatically converted to scientific notation (mantissa 10Exponent) for
setting and monitoring. Inputs must be made using scientific notation for val-
ues with eight or more digits.
Example: When -1234.00 is input, it will become -1.234000e+003 in scientific
notation. For the mantissa10Exponent, the value before the e is the man-
tissa and the value after the e is the signed exponent.
* Data range for single-precision floating-point decimal: -3.402823 1038 Value -1.175494 10-38, 0, +1.175494
10-38 Value 3.402823 1038

4-3-7 I/O Refresh Timing

The following methods are used to refresh external I/O.
Cyclic refreshing
Immediate refreshing (instructions with the ! variation and IORF)
Cyclic Refreshing

I/O is all refreshed after ladder programs are executed.
Start
15 0
LD1.01 CIO 0001
16-bit increments
15 0
OUT2.09 CIO 0002
END
All actual I/O data

4

Cyclic refreshing
(batch)
4-3-7 I/O Refresh Timing

I/O refresh
Execute an instruction with the immediate refresh variation or an IORF instruction to perform I/O
refreshing while ladder programming is being executed.
Immediate Refresh
The method of specifying immediate refreshing depends on whether the object to be refreshed is built-
in I/O or an Expansion Unit.
To specify immediate refreshing for the CPU Units built-in I/O, specify the immediate refresh variation
(!) of the instruction.
To specify immediate refreshing for Expansion I/O or an Expansion Unit, use the IORF instruction.
Instructions with Refresh Variation (!)
Add an exclamation mark (!) in front of the instruction to specify immediate refreshing.
I/O will be refreshed as shown below when an instruction is executing if a real I/O bit in the CPU
Units built-in I/O is specified as an operand.
Bit Operands: I/O refreshing for the bit will be performed.
Word Operands: I/O refreshing for the 16 specified bits will be performed.
Input or Source Operands: Inputs are refreshed immediately before the instruction is executed.
Output or Destination Operands: Outputs are refreshed immediately after the instruction is executed.
IORF(097) Instruction
An I/O refresh (IORF) instruction is supported as a special instruction to refresh actual I/O data in
the specified word range. By using this instruction, it is possible to refresh all data or data in a spec-
ified range of actual I/O in CP-series Expansion I/O and Expansion Unit during the cycle.
IORF instruction can also refresh actual I/O data in an NA-type CPU Unit at CIO 90, CIO 91 and CIO 190.

It is not possible to use the immediate refresh variation (!) for the actual I/O of Expansion I/O or
an Expansion Unit. Use the IORF instruction.

4-4 Constants
Overview
Constants are numeric values expressed in 16 or 32 bits and can be specified as instruction operands.
The following types of constants are supported.
Bit Strings or Numeric Values (Integers)
Decimal values (with & symbol), hexadecimal values (with # symbol), BCD values (with # symbol), or
signed decimal values (with + or - symbol)
Operands Specifying Numbers
Decimal Notation (No Symbol)
Floating Point (Real Number) Notation
Signed decimal notation (with + or - symbol and decimal point)
Notation and Ranges
Using Operands for Bit Strings or Numeric Values (Integers)
Unsigned Binary
Data type Decimal values Hexadecimal values
Notation With & symbol With # symbol
& 10 # 000A
Decimal value Hexadecimal value

(integer) using 0 to F
Decimal symbol Hexadecimal symbol
Application MOV &10 D0 MOV #000A D0

example Stores 10 decimal (#000A hex) in D0. Stores #000A hex (&10 decimal) in D0.
Precautions for An error will occur and the left bus bar An error will occur and the left bus bar will be
correct use will be displayed in red if a hexadecimal displayed in red if a hexadecimal value
value including A to F is input with & including A to F is input without # from the
from the CX-Programmer. CX-Programmer.
The input will be treated as an address The input will be treated as an address in the
in the CIO Area and the contents of that CIO Area and the contents of that address
address will be specified if a decimal will be specified if a decimal value without #
value without & is input from the CX- is input from the CX-Programmer.
Programmer.
Range 16 bits &0 to 65535 #0000 to #FFFF
32 bits &0 to 4294967295 #00000000 to #FFFFFFFF

Signed Binary
Notation Signed + or - With # symbol
- 10 # FFF6
Decimal value Hexadecimal value

(integer) using 0 to F
+ or - sign Hexadecimal symbol
Application MOV -10 D0 MOV # FFF6 D0

example Stores 10 decimal (#FFF6 hex) in D0. Stores #FFF6 hex (10 decimal) in D0.
Precautions for The input will be treated as an address in An error will occur and the left bus bar will be
correct use the CIO Area and the contents of that displayed in red if a hexadecimal value
4-4 Constants
address will be specified if a decimal including A to F is input without # from the
value without + or - is input from the CX- CX-Programmer.
Programmer. The input will be treated as an address in the
CIO Area and the contents of that address
will be specified if a decimal value without #
is input from the CX-Programmer.
Range 16 bits Negative: -32768 to -1 Negative: #8000 to #FFFF 4
Positive: 0 to +32767 Positive: #0000 to #7FFF
32 bits Negative: -2147483648 to -1 Negative: #80000000 to #FFFFFFFF
Positive: 0 to +2147483647 Positive: #00000000 to #7FFFFFFF
Unsigned BCD
Data type Decimal values BCD values
Notation None # 0010
Decimal value using
0 to 9
BCD symbol
Application +B #0010 D0 D1
example Adds #0010 and the contents of D0 as BCD data
and stores the result in D1.
Precautions for The input will be treated as an address in the CIO
correct use Area and the contents of that address will be
specified if a decimal value without # is input from
the CX-Programmer.
Range 16 bits None #0000 to #9999
32 bits #0000 0000 to #99999999
CP1E CPU Unit Software Users Manual(W480) 4 - 17

Using Operands to Specify Numbers

Data type Decimal values Hexadecimal values or BCD values
Notation No symbol (value only) Not possible.
10
Number only
Application SBS 0
example Jumps to subroutine 0.
Precautions for An error will occur and the left bus bar
correct use will be displayed in red if a decimal
value is input with & from the CX-Pro-
grammer.
Using Floating-point (Real Number) Notation for Operands

Notation With + or - With # symbol
(for single-precision data)
+ 0.10
Decimal value # 3DCCCCCD
(real number) Hexadecimal value
+ or - sign using 0 to F
Hexadecimal symbol
Application FIX +0.10 D0 FIX #3DCCCCCD D0

example Converts floating point +0.10 into 16- Converts floating point #3DCCCCCD (+0.10 deci-
bit signed binary data and stores the mal) into 16-bit signed binary data and stores the
integer portion in D0. integer portion in D0.
Precautions for The input will be treated as an address The input will be treated as an address in the CIO
correct use in the CIO Area, an error will occur, Area, an error will occur, and the left bus bar will be
and the left bus bar will be displayed in displayed in red if a hexadecimal value including A
red if a decimal value with a decimal to F is input without # from the CX-Programmer.
point is input without + from the CX-
Programmer.
Zero suppression can be used when inputting any data type.

For example, &2 and &02, #000F and #F are treated as the same.
BIN indicates binary data.
BCD data is binary coded decimal.

4-5 Specifying Offsets for Addresses
4-5-1 Overview

When an address is specified for an instruction operand, it is possible to change the specified address
by specifying in brackets an offset for the specified address.
0.00[W0]
MOV
When the start address

is CIO 0.00 and W0 is Examples of When the start
&2, 2 is added, Specifying Bit address is D100 and
resulting in CIO 0.02. Address Offsets W1 is &3, 3 is added,
resulting in D103.
10.00[4]
Examples of
MOV Specifying Word
Address Offsets
An offset of 4 is added An offset of 12 is
to the start address of added to the start
CIO 10.00, resulting in address of D100,
CIO 10.04. resulting in D112. 4
4-5-1 Overview
Bit Addresses
The bit address is offset by the amount specified by n (number of bits) from A (start bit address).
A [n]
Offset
Starting bit address
Number of bits to offset: +n
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Word
Starting bit address A
Start Bit Address

It is possible to specify the start bit address with a bit address or with a symbol (except the NUMBER
data type cannot be used).
Offsetting is possible for all addresses except the DM Areas.
When specifying symbols, make the symbol table setting as the array variation. The number of
arrays will be the maximum number of offset + 1 bit at least.
The I/O comment for the start bit address is displayed.
Offset
The offset can be specified as a decimal constant, word address (but CIO Area addresses cannot
be specified), or a one-word symbol (i.e., symbols with the following data types: INT, UINT, WORD,
CHANNEL).
Words in the Auxiliary Area (A) can only be specified as a decimal constant.
If a word address is specified, the contents of the specified word is used as the offset.
If the offset exceeds bit 15 in the specified word, offsetting will continue from bit 00 in the next word.
If the offset is specified indirectly, make sure that the final bit address does not exceed the upper
limit of the memory area by using input comparison or other instruction.

Examples:
10.0 [2] 10.02 a [2] 10.02
Offset (decimal value) Offset (decimal value)

Start bit address; symbol a = 10.0
Start bit address (bit symbol named a)
(bit address in I/O memory)
10.00 [W0] 10.02
a [b] 10.02
Offset when W0 = &2
(word address in I/O memory) Offset; symbol b = &2
Start bit address Start bit address; symbol a = 10.0
(bit address in I/O memory)
Word Addresses
The word address is offset by the amount specified by n (number of offset words) from A (start word
address).
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
A [n] Word
Start word address A
Offset +n
Start Word Address

It is possible to specify the start word address with a word address or with a symbol (except the
NUMBER data type cannot be used).
Offsetting is possible only for addresses in the Holding, Word, and DM Areas.
The I/O comment for the start bit address is displayed.
When specifying symbols, make the symbol table setting as the array variation. The number of
arrays will be the maximum number of offset + 1 word at least.
Offset
The offset can be specified as a decimal constant, word address (but CIO Area addresses cannot
be specified), or one-word symbol (i.e., symbols with the following data types: INT, UINT, WORD,
CHANNEL).
If a word address or symbol is specified, the contents of the specified word is used as the offset.
If the offset exceeds bit 15 in the specified word, offsetting will continue from bit 00 in the next word.
If the offset is specified indirectly, make sure that the final bit address does not exceed the upper
limit of the memory area by using input comparison or other instruction.
Examples:
D0[2] D2 a [2] D2
Offset (decimal value) Offset (decimal value)

Start word address;
Start word address symbol a (one-word symbol) = D0
(word address in I/O memory)
D0 [W0] D2
a [b] D2
Offset; W0 = &2
(word address in I/O memory) Offset;
Start bit address symbol b(one-word symbol) = &2
(bit address in I/O memory) Start word address;
symbol a (one-word symbol) = D0

Caution
Program so that the memory area of the start address is not exceeded when using a
word address or symbol for the offset.
For example, write the program so that processing is executed only when the indirect

specification does not cause the final address to exceed the memory area by using
an input comparison instruction or other instruction.
If an indirect specification causes the address to exceed the area of the start address,
the system will access data in other area, and unexpected operation may occur.
4-5-2 Application Examples for Address Offsets

It is possible to dynamically specify the offset by specifying a word address in I/O memory for the offset
in the brackets. The contents of the specified word address will be used as the offset.
For example, execution can be performed by increasing the address by incrementing the value in the
brackets and using only one instruction.
4
Ladder Program Example
In this example, two areas of consecutive data are used: D0 to D99 and D100 to D199.
4-5-2 Application Examples for Address Offsets

The contents of corresponding words are added starting from the specified starting point, W0, to the
end of the areas and the sums are output to D200 to D299 starting from the specified offset from
D200.
For example, if W0 is 30, the corresponding words from D30 to D99 and D130 to D199 are added,
and the sums are output to D230 to D299.
Set the value of W0 to the offset word (W1) using the MOV instruction.
Use the operand of the addition instruction to specify and execute D0[W1] +
D100[W1] = D200[W1]. Repeat this process
Increment W1 to increase the offset. 100 times.
Each process is performed with an input comparison instruction (<) as the execution condition so
that W1 does not exceed &100 to make sure that the upper limit of the indirect addressing range is
not exceeded.
Execution condition
a
MOV When execution condition a (upwardly

W0 differentiated) turns ON, the value of W0 is
set to W1.
W1
FOR Starts FOR loop

Execution condition &100
a
< If execution condition a is ON and the
+
value of W1 is less than &100, the data
W1 D0[W1] from the start position until D99 and
&100 D100[W1] the data until D199 are added, and the
D200[W1] sum for each is output until D299.
++ While execution condition a is ON, W0 is

incremented.
W1
NEXT Returns to FOR

4-6 Ladder Programming Precautions
4-6-1 Special Program Sections
For CP1E CPU Units, programs have special program sections that will control instruction conditions.
The following special program sections are available.
Instruction
Program sections Instructions Status
conditions
Subroutine sections SBS, SBN, and RET instruc- Subroutine program The subroutine program
tions is executed. section between SBN and
RET instructions is exe-
cuted.
IL-ILC sections IL and ILC instructions During IL The output bits are turned
Step ladder sections STEP instructions OFF and timers are reset.
Other instructions will not be
executed and previous sta-
tus will be maintained.
FOR-NEXT sections FOR and NEXT instructions Break in progress. Looping
Instruction Combinations
The following table shows which of the special instructions can be used inside other program sections.
MILH and
Subroutine IL-ILC Step ladder FOR-NEXT
MILR-MILC
sections sections sections sections
sections
Subroutine sections No No No No No
IL-ILC sections Yes No No No Yes
MILH and MILR-MILC sections Yes No Yes No Yes
Step ladder sections No Yes Yes No No
FOR-NEXT sections Yes Yes Yes No Yes
Subroutines
Place all the subroutines together just after all of the main program and before the END instruction.
A subroutine cannot be placed in a step ladder, block program, or FOR-NEXT section.
If instructions other than those in a subroutine are placed after a subroutine (SBN to RET), those
instructions will not be executed.
Program
Subroutines

Instructions not Supported in Subroutines

The following instructions cannot be used in a subroutine.
Classification
Mnemonic Instruction
by function
4-6 Ladder Programming Precautions

Step Ladder STEP STEP DEFINE
Instructions SNXT STEP NEXT
Instructions not Supported in Step Ladder Program Sections

The following instructions cannot be used in step ladder program sections.
Classification
Mnemonic Instruction
by function
Sequence Con- FOR, NEXT, and BREAK FOR, NEXT, and BREAK LOOP
trol Instructions END END
IL and ILC INTERLOCK and INTERLOCK CLEAR
4
JMP and JME JUMP and JUMP END
CJP CONDITIONAL JUMP and CONDITIONAL JUMP NOT
4-6-1 Special Program Sections

Subroutines SBN and RET SUBROUTINE ENTRY and SUBROUTINE RETURN
Note A step ladder program section can be used in an interlock section (between IL and ILC).
The step ladder section will be completely reset when the interlock condition is ON.


5
I/O Memory
This section describes the types of I/O memory areas in a CP1E CPU Unit and the
details.
Be sure you understand the information in the section before attempting to write ladder
diagrams.
Refer to the CP1E CPU Unit Instructions Reference Manual (Cat. No. W483) for
detailed information on programming instructions.
5
5-1 Overview of I/O Memory Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

5-1-1 I/O Memory Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5-1-2 I/O Memory Area Address Notation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5-1-3 I/O Memory Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5-2 I/O Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5-3 Work Area (W) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5-4 Holding Area (H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5-5 Data Memory Area (D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
5-6 Timer Area (T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
5-7 Counter Area (C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5-8 Auxiliary Area (A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
5-9 Condition Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
5-10 Clock Pulses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

5 I/O Memory
5-1 Overview of I/O Memory Areas

This section describes the I/O memory areas in a CP1E CPU Unit.
5-1-1 I/O Memory Areas

Data can be read and written to I/O memory from the ladder programs. I/O memory consists of an area
for I/O with external devices, user areas, and system areas.
System Areas
Input bits (starting from CIO 0)
User Areas Auxiliary Area

(A)
Timer Area (T)

Work Area (W)
DM Area (D)
Counter Area (C)
Condition Flags
Holding Area (H)
Clock Pulses
Output bits (starting from CIO 100)
CIO Area (CIO 0 to CIO 289)

In the CIO Area, input bit addresses range from CIO 0 to CIO 99, output bit addresses range from CIO
100 to CIO 199 and addresses for serial PLC links range from CIO 200 to CIO 289.
For NA-type CPU Units, built-in analog input terminals are CIO 90 and CIO 91, built-in analog output
terminal is CIO 190.
The bits and words in the CIO Area are allocated to built-in I/O terminals on the CP1E CPU Unit and to
the Expansion Units and Expansion I/O Units.
Input words and output bits that are not allocated may be used as work bits in programming.
Refer to 5-2 I/O Bits

5 I/O Memory
User Areas
These areas can be used freely by the user.
Work Area (W)

The Word Area is part of the internal memory of the CPU Unit. It is used in programming. Unlike the
input bits and output bits in the CIO Area, I/O to and from external devices is not refreshed for this
area.
Use this area for work words and bits before using any words in the CIO Area. These words should

be used first in programming because they will not be assigned to new functions in future versions of
CP1E CPU Units.
Refer to 5-3 Work Area (W)
Holding Area (H)

The Holding Area is part of the internal memory of the CPU Unit. It is used in programming. Unlike
the input bits and output bits in the CIO Area, I/O to and from external devices is not refreshed for
this area.
These words retain their content when the PLC is turned ON or the operating mode is switched
between PROGRAM mode and RUN or MONITOR mode.
This data is unstable if power is reset when the battery is not mounted. 5
Refer to 5-4 Holding Area (H)

Data Memory Area (D)
This data area is used for general data storage and manipulation and is accessible only by word (16
bits).
Specified words can be retained in the built-in EEPROM backup memory using Auxiliary Area bits.
This data is unstable if power is reset when the battery is not mounted.
Refer to 5-5 Data Memory Area (D)
Timer Area (T)

There are two parts to the Timer Area: the Timer Completion Flags and the timer Present Values
(PVs).
Up to 256 timers with timer numbers T0 to T255 can be used.
Timer Completion Flags
Each Timer Completion Flag is accessed as one bit using the timer number.
A Completion Flag is turned ON when the set time of the timer elapses.
Timer PVs
Each timer PV is accessed as one word (16 bits) using the timer number.
The PV increases or decreases as the timer operates.
Refer to 5-6 Timer Area (T)

5 I/O Memory
Counter Area (C)

There are two parts to the Counter Area: the Counter Completion Flags and the Counter Present
Values (PVs).
Up to 256 counters with counter numbers C0 to C255 can be used.
This data is unstable if power is reset, when the battery is not mounted.
Counter Completion Flags
Each Counter Completion Flag is accessed as one bit using the counter number.
A Completion Flag is turned ON when the set value of the counter is reached.
Counter PVs
Each counter PV is accessed as one word (16 bits) using the timer number.
The PVs count up or down as the counter operates.
Refer to 5-7 Counter Area (C)
System Areas
System Areas contain bits and words with preassigned functions.
Auxiliary Area (A)

The words and bits in this area have preassigned functions.
Refer to A-2 Auxiliary Area Allocations by Address
Condition Flags
The Condition Flags include the flags that indicate the results of instruction execution, as well as the
Always ON and Always OFF Flags.
The Condition Flags are specified with global symbols rather than with addresses. For example: P_on
Clock Pulses
The Clock Pulses are turned ON and OFF by the CPU Units internal timer.
The Clock Pulses are specified with global symbols rather than with addresses. For example: P_0_02

5 I/O Memory
5-1-2 I/O Memory Area Address Notation

An I/O memory can be addressed using word addresses or bit addresses. The word addresses and bit
addresses are given in decimal format.
Word Addresses
Specifies a16-bit word.
W 1 0 0

I/O memory area The word number within
designator the area given in decimal
Examples: D, A, W
Bit Addresses
A bit addresses specifies one of the 16 bits in a word.
The word number and bit number are separated with a period.
W 1 0 0 . 0 2 5
I/O memory Word number Period Bit number
area designator (00 to 15)
5-1-2 I/O Memory Area Address Notation

On the CX-Programmer, addresses in the CIO Area (including addresses for Serial PLC Links) are
given with no I/O memory area designator. CIO is used as the I/O memory area designator in this
manual for clarity.
0 . 0 3
IN C 1 3 5 7 9 11
CIO 0 0 2 4 6 8 10
Inputs begin from CIO 0 Period Bit number
Outputs begin from CIO 100 (00 to 15)

5 I/O Memory

Name No. of bits Word addresses Remarks Reference
CIO Area Input Bits 1,600 bits CIO 0 to CIO 99 Refer to 5-2 I/O Bits.
(100 words)
Output Bits 1,600 bits CIO 100 to CIO 199
(100 words)
Serial PLC 1,440 bits CIO 200 to CIO 289 Refer to Section 14 Serial
Link Words (90 words) Communications.
Work Area (W) 1,600 bits W0 to W99 Refer to 5-3 Work Area
(100 words) (W).
Holding Area (H) 800 bits (50 words) H0 to H49 The data is unstable if Refer to 5-4 Holding Area
power is interrupted, when (H).
the battery is not mounted.
Data Memory E-type CPU 2K words D0 to D2047 Data in specified words of Refer to 5-5 Data Memory
Area (D) Unit the DM Area can be Area (D).
retained in the built-in
EEPROM in the backup
memory by using a bit in
the Auxiliary Area. Applica-
ble words: D0 to D1499
(One word can be speci-
fied at a time.)
N/NA-type 8K words D0 to D8191 Data in specified words of
CPU Unit the DM Area can be
retained in the built-in
EEPROM in the backup
memory by using a bit in
the Auxiliary Area.Applica-
ble words: D0 to D6999
(One word can be speci-
fied at a time.)
Timer Area (T) Present values 256 T0 to T255 Refer to 5-6 Timer Area
(T).
Timer Comple- 256
tion Flags
Counter Area (C) Present values 256 C0 to C255 The data is unstable if Refer to 5-7 Counter Area
power is interrupted, when (C).
Counter Com- 256
pletion Flags
Auxiliary Area Read only 7,168 bits A0 to A447 The data is unstable if Refer to A-2 Auxiliary Area
(A) (448 words) power is interrupted, when Allocations by Address.
Read-write 4,896 bits A448 to A753
(306 words)

5 I/O Memory
5-2 I/O Bits
Overview
These words are allocated to built-in I/O terminals of CP1E CPU Units, built-in analog I/O terminals of
CP1E NA-type CPU Units and CP-series Expansion Units and Expansion I/O Units.
Notation
0 . 02
Bit number: 02
Word number: 0
5-2 I/O Bits

I/O memory area designator:
None on CX-Programmer,
CIO in documentation
Range
Input bits: CIO 0.00 to CIO 99.15 (100 words) 5
Output bits: CIO 100.00 to CIO 199.15 (100 words)
Applications
Built-in inputs can be used as basic inputs, interrupt inputs, quick-response inputs or high-speed
counters.
Built-in outputs can only be used as basic outputs.
Refer to Section 8 Overview of Built-in Functions and Allocations for details.
Details
Bits in the CIO Area can be force-set and force-reset.
The contents of the CIO Area will be cleared in the following cases:
When the operating mode is changed between PROGRAM or MONITOR mode and RUN mode
When the PLC power is reset
When the CIO Area is cleared from the CX-Programmer
When PLC operation is stopped due to a fatal error other than an FALS error occurs. (The con-
tents of the CIO Area will be retained when FALS is executed.)
Words that are not allocated to the built-in I/O terminals of the CPU Units, built-in analog I/O ter-
minals of CP1E NA-type CPU Units and the Expansion Units and Expansion I/O Units can only
be used in programming. It is the same as the Work Area.

5 I/O Memory
5-3 Work Area (W)

Overview
The Work Area is part of the internal memory of the CPU Unit. It is used in programming. Unlike the
input bits and output bits in the CIO Area, I/O to and from external devices is not refreshed for this area.
Notation
W 20 . 02
Bit number: 02
Word number: 20
I/O memory area designator: W
Range
The Work Area contains 100 words with addresses ranging from W0 to W99.
Applications
It is sometimes necessary to use the same set of input conditions many times in the same program. In
this case a work bit can be used to store the final condition to simplify programming work and program
design.
W10.0
W10.0
NO bit
W10.0
NC bit
Storing a Condition in a Work Bit
Details
Bits in the Work Area can be force-set and force-reset.
The contents of the Work Area will be cleared in the following cases:
When the operating mode is changed between PROGRAM or MONITOR mode and RUN mode
When the PLC power is reset
When the Work Area is cleared from the CX-Programmer
When PLC operation is stopped due to a fatal error other than an FALS error occurs. (The con-
tents of the Work Area will be retained when FALS is executed.)

5 I/O Memory
5-4 Holding Area (H)

Overview
The Holding Area is part of the internal memory of the CPU Unit. It is used in programming. Unlike the
input bits and output bits in the CIO Area, I/O to and from external devices is not refreshed for this area.

With an E-type CPU Unit or with an N/NA-type CPU Unit without a Battery, the contents of the
DM Area (D) *, Holding Area (H), the Counter Present Values (C), the status of Counter Comple-
5-4 Holding Area (H)

tion Flags (C), and the status of bits in the Auxiliary Area (A) related to clock functions may be
unstable when the power supply is turned ON.
* This does not apply to areas backed up to EEPROM using the DM backup function.
If the DM backup function is being used, be sure to refer to 3-2-4 Initializing I/O Memory at Star-
tup for details.
Notation 5
H 20 . 02
Bit number: 02
Word number: 20
I/O memory area designator: H
Range
The Holding area contains 50 words with addresses ranging from H0 to H49.
Applications
The Holding Area is used when you want to resume operation after a power interruption using the same
status as before the power interruption.

5 I/O Memory
Details
Bits in the Holding Area can be force-set and force-reset.
When a self-maintaining bit is programmed with a Holding Area bit, the self-maintaining bit will not be
cleared even when the power is reset.
If a Holding Area bit is not used for the self-maintaining bit, the bit will be turned OFF and the self-
maintaining bit will be cleared when the power is reset.
H0.00
H0.00
If a Holding Area bit is used but not programmed as a self-maintaining bit, the bit will be turned OFF
by execution condition A when the power is reset.
A H0.00

When a Holding Area bit is used in a KEEP instruction, never use a normally closed condition
for the reset input.
When the power supply goes OFF or is temporarily interrupted, the input will go OFF before
the PLCs internal power supply and the Holding Area bit will be reset.
A B
Set
KEEP
Input Unit
H1.00
Bad ~ A
Reset
A B
Set
KEEP
H1.00
Input Unit
OK ~ A
Reset

5 I/O Memory
5-5 Data Memory Area (D)
Overview
This data area is used for general data storage and manipulation and is accessible only by word (16
bits).
These words retain their contents when the PLC is turned ON or the operating mode is switched
Some words in the DM Area can be saved to the built-in EEPROM backup memory using Auxiliary Area
bits. These words are specifically referred to as the backed up words in the DM Area.
5-5 Data Memory Area (D)

tup for details. 5
Notation
D 200
Word number: 200
I/O memory area designator: D
Range
E-type CPU Units have DM Area addresses ranging from D0 to D2047.
Of these, D0 to D1499 can be backed up in backup memory (built-in EEPROM).
N/NA-type CPU Units have DM Area addresses ranging from D0 to D8191.
Of these, D0 to D6999 can be backed up in backup memory (built-in EEPROM).
[ E-type CPU Unit ] [ N/NA-type CPU Unit ]

All CPU Units Regardless N14/20 CPU Unit N30/40/60 or NA20 CPU Unit
of I/O Capacity
D0 D0 D0
to Words that can be backed
to Words that can be backed
Words that can be up to backup memory
to up to backup memory
backed up to backup D1199 D1199
memory D1200 DM Fixed Allocation Words DM Fixed Allocation Words
D1200 for the Modbus-RTU Easy
for the Modbus-RTU Easy
to Master (for Built-in RS- to Master (for Built-in RS-232C
232C Port) Port)
D1299 D1299
D1499
D1300 D1300 DM Fixed Allocation Words
D1500 for the Modbus-RTU Easy
to
to Master (for Serial Option
to D1399 Port)
D2047
D1400
to
D6999 D6999
D7000 D7000
to to
D8191 D8191

5 I/O Memory
Applications
The DM Area is for storing numeric data. It can be used for data exchange with Programmable Termi-
nals, serial communications devices, such as Inverters, and Analog I/O Units or Temperature I/O Units.
Details
Bits in the DM Area cannot be addressed individually.
Backing Up to the Built-in EEPROM Backup Memory
The number of words set in the PLC Setup can be saved to the built-in EEPROM backup memory
during operation by turning ON the DM Backup Start bit (A751.15).
Specify in the PLC Setup whether to read the data in the DM Area words to the RAM as the initial
values when the power supply is turned ON.
Refer to 16-3 DM Backup Function for how to use DM Area words and bits.
DM Fixed Allocation Words for the Modbus-RTU Easy Master

The following DM area words are used as command and response storage areas with the Modbus-
RTU Easy Master function. These words are used for other applications if the Modbus-RTU Easy
Master function is not served.
Refer to 14-4 Modbus-RTU Easy Master Function for how to use the DM Area words and bits.
Indirect Addressing of the DM Area

Indirect addressing can be used in the DM Area.
There are two modes that can be used.
Binary-mode Addressing (@D)

If a @ symbol is input before a DM Area address, the contents of that DM Area word is treated as
a hexadecimal (binary) address and the instruction will operate on the DM Area word at that
address.
The entire DM Area can be indirectly addressed with hexadecimal values 0000 to 1FFF.
Example: @D0 0100 D256

Address actually used.
BCD-mode Addressing (*D)

If a * symbol is input before a DM Area address, the content of that DM Area word is treated as a
BCD address and the instruction will operate on the DM Area word at that address.
Only part of the DM Area (D0 to D8192) can be indirectly addressed with BCD values 0 to 8192.
Example: *D0 0100 D100

Address actually used.

5 I/O Memory
5-6 Timer Area (T)
Overview
The Timer Area contains Timer Completion Flags (1 bit each) and timer PVs (16 bits each). The Com-
pletion Flag is turned ON when a decrementing timer PV reaches 0 (counting out) or an increment-
ing/decrementing timer PV reaches the set value or 0.
Notation
T 002
5-6 Timer Area (T)

Time number: 002
I/O memory area designator: T
Range
Timer numbers range from T0 to T255.
5
Details
Types of Timers
The following table shows which instructions are used to refresh timer PVs in BCD and binary mode.
Timer instruction BCD mode Binary mode
HUNDRED-MS TIMER TIM TIMX
TEN-MS TIMER TIMH TIMHX
ONE-MS TIMER TMHH TMHHX
ACCUMULATIVE TIMER TTIM TTIMX
Timer numbers 0 to 255 are used by all timers listed above.
Timer Example: Timer Number 0 and a Timer Set Value of 1 s

BCD mode
Timer Completion Flag
TIM
T000
000
#10
Binary mode
Timer Completion Flag

TIMX
T000
000
#A or &10

5 I/O Memory
Timer PV Refresh Method

Timer num-
Timer PV refresh method
bers
T0 to T255 The timer PV is refreshed when the instruction is executed. This can cause a delay depending
on the cycle time.
When the cycle time is longer than 100 ms, delay is generated by the TIM/TIMX instruction.
When the cycle time is longer than 10 ms, delay is generated by the TIMH/TIMHX instruction.
When the cycle time is longer than 1 ms, delay is generated by the TMHH/TMHHX instruction.

It is not recommended to use the same timers number in two timer instructions because the tim-
ers will not operate correctly if they are operating simultaneously.
Do not use the same timer number for more than one instruction.
If two or more timer instructions use the same timer number, an error will be generated during
the program check.
Resetting or Maintaining Timers

Timer Completion Flags can be force-set and force-reset.
Timer PVs cannot be force-set or force-reset, although the PVs can be refreshed indirectly by
force-setting/resetting the Completion Flag.
There are no restrictions in the order of using timer numbers or in the number of N.C. or N.O. con-
ditions that can be programmed.
Timer PVs can be read as word data and used in programming.
The following table shows when timers will be reset or maintained.
TMHH/ TTIM/
TIM/TIMX TIMH/TIMHX
TMHHX TTIMX
Instruction
HUNDRED-MS ACCUMULA
TEN-MS TIMER ONE-MS TIMER
TIMER TIVE TIMER
When the operating mode is PV=0
changed between PROGRAM or Flag=OFF
MONITOR mode and RUN mode*1
When the PLC power is reset PV=0
Flag=OFF
CNR/CNRX instructions PV= 9999/FFFF
(timer/counter reset)*2 Flag=OFF
Jumps (JMP-JME) Retained
Interlocks (IL-ILC) with OFF inter- Reset (PV = SV, Timer Completion Flag = OFF) Retained
lock conditions
*1 If the IOM Hold Bit (A500.12) is ON, the PV and Completion Flag will be retained when a fatal error occurs
(including execution of FALS instructions) or the operating mode is changed from PROGRAM mode to
RUN or MONITOR mode or vice-versa. (The PV and Completion Flag will be cleared when power is
cycled.)
*2 Since the TIML/TIMLX instructions do not use timer numbers, they are reset under different conditions.
The PV for a TIML/TIMLX instruction is reset to the SV.
Refer to the descriptions of these instructions for details.

5 I/O Memory
5-7 Counter Area (C)
Overview
The Counter Area contains Completion Flags (1 bit each) and counter PVs (16 bits each). A Comple-
tion Flag is turned ON when the counter PV reaches the set value (counting out).

5-7 Counter Area (C)

tup for details.
Notation
5
C 002
Counter number: 002
I/O memory area designator: C
Range
Counter numbers range from C0 to C255.
.
Details
Types of Counters
The following table shows which instructions are used to refresh counter PVs in BCD and binary
mode.
Counter instruction BCD mode Binary mode
COUNTER CNT CNTX
REVERSIBLE COUNTER CNTR CNTRX
Counter numbers 0 to 255 are used by all counters given above.

The refresh method for counter PVs can be set from the CX-Programmer to either BCD or binary.
Built-in high-speed counters 0 to 5 do not use counter numbers.

5 I/O Memory

It is not recommended to use the same counter number in two counter instructions because the
counters will not operate correctly if they are counting simultaneously.
If two or more counter instructions use the same counter number, an error will be generated dur-
ing the program check.
Counter Example: Counter Number 0 with a Counter Set Value of 10

BCD mode
Counter Completion Flag

CNT C000
000
#10
Binary mode
Counter Completion Flag

CNTX
C000
000
&10 or #A
Resetting or Maintaining Counter PVs

Counter Completion Flags can be force-set and force-reset.
Counter PVs cannot be force-set or force-reset, although the PVs can be refreshed indirectly by
force-setting/resetting the Counter Completion Flag.
There are no restrictions in the order of using counter numbers or in the number of N.C. or N.O.
conditions that can be programmed.
Counter PVs can be read as word data and used in programming.
The following table shows when counters PVs are reset or maintained.
CNT/CNTX CNTR/CNTRX
Instruction
COUNTER REVERSIBLE COUNTER
PV and Counter Completion Flag when counter PV=0
is reset Counter Completion Flag = OFF
When the operating mode is changed between Retained
PROGRAM or MONITOR mode and RUN mode
When the PLC power is reset Retained (Unstable when the battery is not mounted)
Reset Input Reset
CNR/CNRX instructions Reset
Interlocks (IL-ILC) with OFF interlock conditions Retained

5 I/O Memory
5-8 Auxiliary Area (A)
Overview
The words and bits in this area have preassigned functions.

Refer to A-2 Auxiliary Area Allocations by Address for details.

DM Area (D) *, Holding Area (H), the Counter Present Values (C), the status of Counter Com-
pletion Flags (C), and the status of bits in the Auxiliary Area (A) related to clock functions may
5-8 Auxiliary Area (A)

be unstable when the power supply is turned ON.
If the DM backup function is being used, be sure to refer to 3-2-4 Initializing I/O Memory at
Startup for details.
Words in the Auxiliary Area related to clock function are unstable.
Power interruption time CPU Unit
Bit/word Name Within I/O Longer than

E-type CPU N/NA-type
memory I/O memory
backup time backup time
Unit CPU Unit 5
A100 to A199 Error Log Area Retained Unstable Supported Supported
A300 Error Log Pointer Supported
A351 to A354 Calendar/Clock Area Not provided.
A510 to A511 Startup Time Not provided.
A512 to A513 Power Interruption Time Not provided.
A514 Number of Power Interruptions Supported
A515 to A517 Operation Start Time Not provided.
A518 to A520 Operation End Time Not provided.
A720 to A749 Power ON Clock Data 1 to 10 Not provided.
Notation
A 20. 02
Bit number: 02
Word number: 20
I/O memory area designator: A
Range
The Auxiliary Area contains 754 words with addresses ranging from A0 to A753.

5 I/O Memory
Applications
Applications of the bits and words in the Auxiliary Area are predefined. Ladder programs can be simpli-
fied and controllability can be improved by effectively using the bits and words in this area.
Details
Some words or bits are set automatically by the system and others are set and manipulated by the
user.
The Auxiliary Area includes error flags set by self-diagnosis, initial settings, control bits, and status
data.
Words and bits in this area can be read and written from the program or the CX-Programmer.
The Auxiliary Area contains words that are read-only (A0 to A447) and words that can be read and
written (A448 to A753).
Even the read/write bits in the Auxiliary Area cannot be force-set and force-reset continuously.
Auxiliary Area Words and Bits in the CX-Programmers System-defined

Symbols
The following table gives the Auxiliary Area bits and words pre-registered in the CX-Programmers
global symbol table as system-defined symbols.
Refer to A-2 Auxiliary Area Allocations by Address for details.
Word/Bit Name Name in CX-Programmer
A200.11 First Cycle Flag P_First_Cycle
A200.12 Step Flag P_Step
A200.15 First Cycle Task Flag P_First_Cycle_Task
A262 Maximum Cycle Time P_Max_Cycle_Time
A264 Present Cycle Time P_Cycle_Time_Value
A401.08 Cycle Time Too Long Flag P_Cycle_Time_Error
A402.04 Battery Error Flag P_Low_Battery
A500.15 Output OFF Bit P_Output_Off_Bit

5 I/O Memory
5-9 Condition Flags
Overview
These flags include the flags that indicate the results of instruction execution, as well as the Always ON
and Always OFF Flags. These bits are specified with symbols rather than addresses.
The CX-Programmer treats condition flags as system-defined symbols (global symbols) beginning with P_.
Notation
P_ ER
5-9 Condition Flags

Condition flag name: ER

P_ (indicates a system symbol name)
Details
The Condition Flags are read-only; they cannot be written from instructions or from the CX-Program-
mer. 5
The Condition Flags cannot be force-set and force-reset.
Types of Condition Flags

Refer to 4-6 Ladder Programming Precautions for details.
Name in CX-
Name Function
Programmer
Always ON Flag P_On Always ON.
Always OFF Flag P_Off Always OFF.
Error Flag P_ER Turned ON when the operand data in an instruction is incorrect (an
instruction processing error) to indicate that an instruction ended
because of an error.
When the PLC Setup is set to stop operation for an instruction error
(Instruction Error Operation), program execution will be stopped and
the Instruction Processing Error Flag (A295.08) will be turned ON
when the Error Flag is turned ON.
Access Error Flag P_AER Turned ON when an Illegal Access Error occurs. The Illegal Access
Error indicates that an instruction attempted to access an area of
memory that should not be accessed.
When the PLC Setup is set to stop operation for an instruction error
(Instruction Error Operation), program execution will be stopped and
the Instruction Processing Error Flag (A4295.10) will be turned ON
when the Access Error Flag is turned ON.
Carry Flag P_CY Turned ON when there is a carry in the result of an arithmetic opera-
tion or a 1 is shifted to the Carry Flag by a Data Shift instruction.
The Carry Flag is part of the result of some Data Shift and Symbol
Math instructions.
Greater Than Flag P_GT Turned ON when the first operand of a Comparison Instruction is
greater than the second or a value exceeds a specified range.
Equals Flag P_EQ Turned ON when the two operands of a Comparison Instruction are
equal or the result of a calculation is 0.

5 I/O Memory
Name in CX-
Name Function
Programmer
Less Than Flag P_LT Turned ON when the first operand of a Comparison Instruction is less
than the second or a value is below a specified range.
Negative Flag P_N Turned ON when the most significant bit of a result is ON.
Overflow Flag P_OF Turned ON when the result of calculation overflows the capacity of the
result word(s).
Underflow Flag P_UF Turned ON when the result of calculation underflows the capacity of
the result word(s).
Greater Than or P_GE Turned ON when the first operand of a Comparison Instruction is
Equals Flag greater than or equal to the second.
Not Equal Flag P_NE Turned ON when the two operands of a Comparison Instruction are
not equal.
Less than or Equals P_LE Turned ON when the first operand of a Comparison Instruction is less
Flag than or equal to the second.
Using the Condition Flags

The Condition Flags are shared by all of the instructions. Their status may change after each
instruction execution in a single cycle.
Therefore, be sure to use Condition Flags on a branched output with the same execution condition
immediately after an instruction to reflect the results of instruction execution.
Example: Using Instruction A Execution Results
Instruction A Instruction Operand

LD
Instruction A
The result from instruction A
is reflected in the Equals Flag AND =
Condition Flag
Example: = Instruction B
Instruction B

The Condition Flags are shared by all of the instructions. This means that program operation can
be changed from its expected course by interruption of a single task. Be sure to consider the
effects of interrupts when writing ladder programs to prevent unexpected operation.

5 I/O Memory
5-10 Clock Pulses
Overview
The Clock Pulses are turned ON and OFF by the CPU Units internal timer. These bits are specified
with symbols rather than addresses.
The CX-Programmer treats condition flags as system-defined symbols (global symbols) beginning with P_.
Notation
P_ 0_02s
5-10 Clock Pulses

Clock pulse name: 0_02s

P_ (indicates a system symbol name)
Details
The Clock Pulses are read-only; they cannot be written from instructions or from the CX-Programmer. 5
Clock Pulses
Name in CX-
Name Description
Programmer
0.02-s Clock Pulse P_0_02s 0.01s ON for 0.01 s
OFF for 0.01 s
0.01s
0.1-s clock pulse P_0_1s 0.05s ON for 0.05 s

OFF for 0.05 s
0.05s
0.2-s clock pulse P_0_2s 0.1s ON for 0.1 s

OFF for 0.1 s
0.1s
1-s clock pulse P_1s 0.5s

ON for 0.5 s
OFF for 0.5 s
0.5s
1-min clock pulse P_1min 30s ON for 30 s

OFF for 30 s
30s

5 I/O Memory
Using the Clock Pulses

The following example turns a bit ON and OFF at 0.5-s intervals.
P_1s 100.00 Instruction Operand

LD P_1s 100.00
OUT 100.00 0.5s 0.5s

6
I/O Allocation
This section describes I/O allocation used to exchange data between the CP1E CPU
Unit and other units.
Be sure you understand the information in the section before attempting to write ladder
diagrams.
6-1 Allocation of Input Bits and Output Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

6-1-1 I/O Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6-1-2 I/O Allocation Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 6
6-1-3 Allocations on the CPU Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6-1-4 Allocations to Expansion Units and Expansion I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

6 I/O Allocation
6-1 Allocation of Input Bits and Output

Bits
This section describes the allocation of input bits and output bits.
6-1-1 I/O Allocation

OMRON calls allocating I/O bits in memory I/O allocation.
The I/O on Expansion I/O Units are allocated I/O bits in the words following the allocated words to the
built-in I/O on the CPU Units.
Allocated 12 bits
Allocated 12 bits in the next word
00 to 11 00 to 11
Inputs 0CH (CIO 0) 1CH (CIO 1)
CPU Unit Expansion I/O Unit
Outputs 100CH (CIO 100) 101CH (CIO 101)
00 to 07 00 to 07
Allocated 8 bits Allocated 8 bits in

the next word
Bit 03 in CIO 0 Bit 05 in CIO 1
0CH (CIO 0) 1CH (CIO 1)
C 1 3 5 7 9 11 C 1 3 5 7 9 11
Inputs
0 2 4 6 8 10 0 2 4 6 8 10
CPU Unit Expansion I/O Unit
0 1 2 4 5 7 0 1 2 4 5 7
Outputs
C C C 3 c 6 C C C 3 c 6
Bit 02 in CIO 101
100CH (CIO 100) Bit 03 in CIO 100 101CH
(CIO 101)

6 I/O Allocation
6-1-2 I/O Allocation Concepts

The CPU Unit automatically allocates I/O bits to the Expansion I/O Units and Expansion Units, if con-
nected when the power supply is turned ON.
It is not necessary to specify I/O bits allocation.
6-1-3 Allocations on the CPU Unit

Input bits are allocated from CIO 0 and output bits are allocated from CIO 100
6-1 Allocation of Input Bits and Output Bits

The first word from which input bits are allocated is CIO 0. The first word from which output bits are allo-
cated is CIO 100. These cannot be changed.
Words Allocated by the System and the Number of Connected Units
The starting words for inputs and outputs are predetermined for a CP1E CPU Unit. Input bits in CIO 0,
or CIO 0 and CIO 1, and output bits in CIO 100, or CIO 100 and CIO 101, are automatically allocated to
the built-in I/O on the CPU Unit.
The words from which bits are allocated by the system and the number of Expansion I/O Units and
Expansion Units that can be connected are given in the following table.
Allocated words Number of Expansion
CPU Unit Units and Expansion I/O
Input Bits Output Bits Units connected
E10/14/20 or CIO 0 CIO 100 0 Unit
N14/20 CPU Unit
E30/40 or N30/40 CIO 0 and CIO 1 CIO 100 and CIO 101 3 Units 6
CPU Unit
N60 CPU Unit CIO 0, CIO 1 and CIO 2 CIO 100, CIO 101 and CIO 102 3 Units
6-1-2 I/O Allocation Concepts

NA20 CPU Unit CIO 0, CIO 90 and CIO 91 CIO 100 and CIO 190 3 Units
Application Example: CPU Unit with 40 I/O Points

CPU Unit with 40 I/O Points
CIO 0 (CIO 0.00 to CIO 0.11)
Input Bits CIO 1 (CIO 1.00 to CIO 1.11)
24 inputs
16 outputs
Output Bits CIO 100 (CIO 100.00 to CIO 100.07)
CIO 101 (CIO 101.00 to CIO 101.07)
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
Input Bits CIO 0 Input bits: 24
Cannot be used
CIO 1
CIO 100
Output Bits Cannot be used Output bits: 16
CIO 101
For a CPU Unit with 40 I/O points, a total of 24 input bits are allocated to the input terminal block. The
bits that are allocated are input bits CIO 0.00 to CIO 0.11 (i.e., bits 00 to 11 in CIO 0) and input bits CIO
1.00 to CIO 1.11 (i.e., bits 00 to 11 in CIO 1).
In addition, a total of 16 output bits are allocated to the output terminal block. The bits that are allocated
are output bits CIO 100.00 to CIO 100.07 (i.e., bits 00 to 07 in CIO 0) and output bits CIO 101.00 to CIO
101.07 (i.e., bits 00 to 07 in CIO 1).

6 I/O Allocation
6-1-4 Allocations to Expansion Units and Expansion I/O Units

Expansion Units and Expansion I/O Units connected to the CPU Unit are automatically allocated input
bits and output bits in words following those allocated to the CPU Unit.
For example, if a CPU Unit with 40 I/O points is used, CIO 0 and CIO 1 are allocated for inputs and CIO
100 and CIO 101 are allocated for outputs. Thus, words from CIO 2 onward for inputs and words from
CIO 102 onward for outputs are automatically allocated to the Expansion I/O Units and Expansion Units
in the order that the Units are connected.
Allocations to Expansion I/O Units

There are Expansion I/O Units for expanding inputs, for expanding outputs, and for expanding both
input and outputs.
I/O bits starting from bit 00 in the next word after the word allocated to the previous Expansion Unit,
Expansion I/O Unit, or CPU Unit are automatically allocated. This word is indicated as CIO m for input
words and as CIO n for output words.
Input bits Output bits
Model No. of No. of No. of No. of
Addresses Addresses
bits words bits words
8-point Input Unit CP1W-8ED 8 1 CIO m, bits 00 to 07 None None
8-point Relay outputs CP1W-8ER None None 8 1 CIO n, bits 00
Output Unit Sinking transistor CP1W-8ET to 07
outputs
Sourcing transis- CP1W-8ET1
tor outputs
outputs CIO n+1, bits
00 to 07
Sourcing transis- CP1W-16ET1
tor outputs
20-point Relay outputs CP1W-20EDR1 12 1 CIO m, bits 00 to 11 8 1 CIO n, bits 00
I/O Units Sinking transistor CP1W-20EDT to 07
outputs
Sourcing transis- CP1W-20EDT1
tor outputs
outputs CIO n+1, bits
00 to 07
CIO n+2, bits
Sourcing transis- CP1W-32ET1 00 to 07
tor outputs
CIO n+3, bits
00 to 07
40-point Relay outputs CP1W-40EDR 24 2 CIO m, bits 00 to 11 16 2 CIO n, bits 00
I/O Unit Sinking transistor CP1W-40EDT CIO m+1, bits 00 to to 07
outputs 11 CIO n+1, bits
00 to 07
Sourcing transis- CP1W-40EDT1
tor outputs

6 I/O Allocation
I/O Bits Allocation with Expansion I/O Units Connected
Allocation Example: Expansion I/O Unit with 40 I/O Points (CP1W-40ED)

Twenty-four input bits in two words are allocated (bits 00 to 11 in CIO m and bits 00 to 11 CIO m+1).
Sixteen output bits in two words are allocated in two words (bits 00 to 07 in CIO n and bits 00 to 07
in CIO n+1).
bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
Input bits CIO m
Cannot be used
CIO m+1
CIO n
6-1 Allocation of Input Bits and Output Bits

Output bits Cannot be used
CIO n+1
Two input words (24 bits) and two output words (16 bits) are allocated to a 40-point I/O Unit.
Allocation Example: Expansion Input Units and Expansion Output Units

If Expansion Input Units or Expansion Output Units are connected, the input or output word not used
by an Expansion I/O Unit is allocated to the next Unit that requires it.
1st Unit: 2nd Unit: 3rd Unit:
8-point Expansion 16-point Expansion 20-point Expansion
CPU Unit with 30 I/O Points Input Unit Output Unit I/O Unit
Input bits CIO 0.00 to CIO 0.11
CIO 2.00 to CIO 2.07 CIO 3.00 to CIO 3.11
CIO 1.00 to CIO 1.05
No inputs
18 inputs 12 inputs
8 inputs 16 outputs
12 outputs 8 outputs
No outputs
Output bits CIO 100.00 to CIO 100.07 CIO 102.00 to CIO 102.07
CIO 104.00 to CIO 104.07
CIO 101.00 to CIO 101.03 CIO 103.00 to CIO 103.07 6
6-1-4 Allocations to Expansion Units and Expansion I/O Units

bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
CIO 0
CPU Unit with 30 I/O Points
CIO 1
Input bits Cannot be used
CIO 2 8-point Expansion Input Unit
CIO 3 20-point Expansion I/O Unit
CIO 100 CPU Unit with

CIO 101 30 I/O Points
Output bits CIO 102 Cannot be used
16-point Expansion Output Unit
CIO 103
CIO 104 20-point Expansion I/O Unit

6 I/O Allocation
Allocations for Expansion Units
I/O Word Allocations to Expansion Units

m: Indicates the next input word after the input word allocated to the Expansion Unit, Expansion I/O
Unit, or CPU Unit connected to the left of the current Unit.
n: Indicates the next output word after the output word allocated to the Expansion Unit, Expansion
I/O Unit, or CPU Unit connected to the left of the current Unit.
Model Input words Output words
Name
number No. of words Addresses No. of words Addresses
Analog I/O Unit CP1W-MAD11 2 words CIO m and 1 word CIO n
m+1
Analog Input Unit CP1W-AD041 4 words CIO m to m+3 None
Analog Output Unit CP1W-DA021 None 2 words CIO n to CIO n+1
CP1W-DA041 None 4 words CIO n to CIO n+3
Temperature Sensor Units CP1W-TS001 2 words CIO m and None
m+1
CP1W-TS002 4 words CIO m to m+3 None
CP1W-TS101 2 words CIO m and None
m+1
CP1W-TS102 4 words CIO m to m+3 None
CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit CP1W-SRT21 1 word CIO m 1 word CIO n
I/O Word Allocations to Expansion Units
Allocation Example: CPU Unit with 40 I/O Points + Temperature Senser Unit
(TS002) + Analog Output Unit (DA041) + Expansion I/O Unit with 40 I/O points
1st Unit: 2nd Unit: 3rd Unit:
CPU Unit with 40 I/O Points CP1W-TS002 CP1W-DA041 Expansion I/O Unit with 40
Temperature Sensor Unit Analog Output Unit I/O Points
Input bits CIO 0.00 to CIO 0.11 CIO 6.00 to CIO 6.11
CIO 2 to CIO 5 None
24 inputs 24 inputs
TS002 DA041
16 outputs 16 outputs
Output bits CIO 100.00 to CIO 100.07 CIO 106.00 to CIO 106.07
None CIO 102 to CIO 105
bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
CIO 0
Cannot be used CPU Unit with 40 I/O Points
CIO 1
CIO 2
CIO 3 Temperature Sensor Unit
Input bits
CIO 4
CIO 5
CIO 6 Cannot be used Expansion I/O Unit with 40 I/O Points
CIO 7
CIO 100
Cannot be used CPU Unit with 40 I/O Points
CIO 101
CIO 102
Output bits CIO 103
Analog Output Unit
CIO 104
CIO 105
CIO 106
Cannot be used Expansion I/O Unit with 40 I/O Points
CIO 107

7
PLC Setup
This section describes the parameters in the PLC Setup, which are used to make basic
settings for the CP1E CPU Unit.
7-1 Overview of the PLC Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

7-2 PLC Setup Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7-2-1 Startup and CPU Unit Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7-2-2 Timing and Interrupt Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7-2-3 Input Constant Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
7-2-4 Built-in RS-232C Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
7-2-5 Serial Option Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
7-2-6 Built-in Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 7
7-2-7 Pulse Output 0 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
7-2-8 Pulse Output 1 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
7-2-9 Built-in AD/DA: Built-in Analog I/O Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16

7 PLC Setup
7-1 Overview of the PLC Setup

The PLC Setup contains basic CPU Unit software parameter settings that the user can change to cus-
tomize PLC operation.
These settings can be changed from a CX-Programmer. Change the PLC Setup in the following case.
There is no need to reset, if the default (initial) settings are correct.
The setting from the CX-Programmer are saved to the built-in EEPROM backup memory.
Application Parameter
Reading the DM area words saved to the backup memory when Startup Data Read
power is turned ON.
Changing the Startup Mode to PROGRAM or MONITOR mode Startup Mode
when debugging.
Detection of low-battery errors is not required when using bat- Detect Low Battery
tery-free operation.
Finding instruction errors when debugging. Stop CPU on Instruction Error
A minimum cycle time setting to create a consistent I/O refresh Minimum Cycle Time
cycle.
Setting a watch cycle time. Watch Cycle Time
Recording user-defined errors for FAL in the error log is not FAL Error Log Registration
required.
Related Auxiliary Area Flags

Name Word Description Read/write
PLC Setup Error A402.10 ON when there is a setting error in the PLC Setup. Read only
Flag (Non-fatal error)
Setting Methods for the PLC Setup

Set using the CX-Programmer
CX-Programmer
CP1E CPU Unit
PLC Setup
PLC Setup

7 PLC Setup
7-2 PLC Setup Settings
7-2-1 Startup and CPU Unit Settings
Startup Data Read Setting

When setting is read by
Name Default Possible settings
CPU Unit
1 Clear Held Memory (HR/DM/CNT) to Zero Do not clear. Do not clear. When power is turned ON
Clear.
2 Read D0- from backup memory Do not read. Do not read. When power is turned ON
Read.
3 Number of CH of DM for backup 0 E-type CPU Unit: 0 to 1,499 When power is turned ON
N/NA-type CPU Unit: 0 to 6,999
Startup Mode Setting


CPU Unit
1 Startup Mode Setting Run: RUN mode Program: PROGRAM mode When power is turned ON
Monitor: MONITOR mode
Run: RUN mode
Execute Process Settings

CPU Unit
1 Stop CPU on Instruction Error Do not stop. Do not stop. At start of operation 7
Stop.
2 Dont register FAL to error log Register. Register. When power is turned ON
7-2-1 Startup and CPU Unit Settings

Do not register.
3 Do not detect Low Battery Do not detect. Do not detect. Every cycle
(N/NA-type CPU Unit only) Detect.
7-2-2 Timing and Interrupt Settings
Timing and Interrupt Settings

CPU Unit
1 Watch Cycle Time 1s Other than initial setting (any) At start of operation
1ms
:
1,000 ms
2 Constant Cycle Time No setting (variable) Setting At start of operation
1ms
:
1,000 ms

7 PLC Setup
7-2-3 Input Constant Settings
Input Constants
CPU Unit
1 0CH: CIO 0 8 ms No filter (0 ms) When power is turned ON
1 ms
2 ms
4 ms
8 ms
16 ms
32 ms
2 1CH: CIO 1 Same as above. Same as above. Same as above.
3 2CH: CIO 2
4 3CH: CIO 3
5 4CH: CIO 4
6 5CH: CIO 5
7 6CH: CIO 6
8 7CH: CIO 7
9 8CH: CIO 8
10 9CH: CIO 9
11 10CH: CIO 10
12 11CH: CIO 11
13 12CH: CIO 12
14 13CH: CIO 13
15 14CH: CIO 14
16 15CH: CIO 15
17 16CH: CIO 16
18 17CH: CIO 17
Note The input constants of CP1W-40EDR/EDT/EDT1 are always 16ms regardless of the settings.

7 PLC Setup
7-2-4 Built-in RS-232C Port

The settings are applicable to the N/NA-type CPU Units.
Since this setting is reflected by power OFF and ON, the PLC Setup and the actual operation settings
may be different. The actual operation settings can be confirmed in words A617/A618.
Communications Settings
CPU Unit
1 Communications Settings Standard (9,600; Standard When power is turned ON
1, 7, 2, E) Baud rate: 9,600 bps
(Default settings) Start bits: 1 bit
Data length: 7 bits
Parity: Even
Stop bits: 2 bits
Host Link
Custom
2 Mode Host Link Host Link When power is turned ON
(When custom settings have been selected.) NT Link (1:N): 1:N NT Links

RS-232C (No-protocol)
PC Link (Slave)
PC Link (Master)
Modbus-RTU Easy Master
2-1 Host Link Settings
2-1-1 Baud 9,600 bps 1,200 bps When power is turned ON
2,400 bps
4,800 bps
9,600 bps
7
19,200 bps
38,400 bps

57,600 bps
115,200 bps
2-1-2 Format (data length, stop 7 bits, 2 bits, even 7 bits, 2 bits, even When power is turned ON
bits, parity)
7 bits, 2 bits, odd
7 bits, 2 bits, no parity
7 bits, 1 bit, even
7 bits, 1 bit, odd
7 bits, 1 bit, no parity
8 bits, 2 bits, even
8 bits, 2 bits, odd
8 bits, 1 bit, even
8 bits, 1 bit, odd
2-1-3 Unit Number 0 0 When power is turned ON
:
31
2-2 NT Link (1:N) Settings
2-2-1 Baud 115,200 bps 38,400 bps (standard) When power is turned ON
115,200 bps (high speed)
2-2-2 No.NT/PC Link Max. 1 0 When power is turned ON
(Highest unit number of PT
:
that can be connected to
the PLC) 7

7 PLC Setup

CPU Unit
2 2-3 RS-232C (No-protocol) Settings
2,400 bps
4,800 bps
9,600 bps
19,200 bps
38,400 bps
57,600 bps
115,200 bps
2-3-2 Format 7 bits, 2 bits, even 7 bits, 2 bits, even When power is turned ON
(data length, stop bits, par-
7 bits, 2 bits, odd
ity)
7 bits, 1 bit, even
7 bits, 1 bit, odd
8 bits, 2 bits, odd
8 bits, 1 bit, even
8 bits, 1 bit, odd
2-3-3 Start Code Disable. Disable. When power is turned ON
Set.
2-3-4 Start Code (setting) 00 Hex 00 Hex When power is turned ON
:
FF hex
2-3-5 End Code None Received Bytes (no end code) When power is turned ON
(Received Bytes)
CR, LF
Set End Code
2-3-6 Received Bytes 256 bytes 256 bytes When power is turned ON
(setting)
1 byte
:
255 bytes
2-3-7 Set End Code 00 Hex 00 Hex When power is turned ON
(setting)
:
FF Hex
2-3-8 Delay 0 ms 0 (10 ms) When power is turned ON
:
9999 (10 ms)
2-5 Modbus-RTU Easy Master Settings
2,400 bps
4,800 bps
9,600 bps
19,200 bps
38,400 bps
57,600 bps
115,200 bps

7 PLC Setup

CPU Unit
2 2-5 2-5-2 Format 7 bits, 2 bits, even 7 bits, 2 bits, even When power is turned ON
7 bits, 2 bits, odd
ity)
7 bits, 1 bit, even
7 bits, 1 bit, odd
8 bits, 2 bits, odd
8 bits, 1 bit, even
8 bits, 1 bit, odd
2-5-3 Response Timeout 5s 5s When power is turned ON
1 (100 ms)
:
255 (100 ms)
2-6 PC Link (Slave) Settings
2,400 bps

4,800 bps
9,600 bps
19,200 bps
38,400 bps
57,600 bps
115,200 bps
2-6-2 PLC Link Unit No. 0 0 When power is turned ON
:
7 7
2-7 PC Link (Master) Settings

2,400 bps
4,800 bps
9,600 bps
19,200 bps
38,400 bps
57,600 bps
115,200 bps
2-7-2 Link Words 10 Words 1 word When power is turned ON
:
10 words
2-7-3 PC Link Mode ALL ALL When power is turned ON
Masters
2-7-4 No.NT/PC Link Max. 1 0 When power is turned ON
:
the PLC) 7

7 PLC Setup
7-2-5 Serial Option Port

The setting are applicable to N30/40/60 or NA20 CPU Units.
Since this setting is reflected by power OFF and ON, the PLC Setup and the actual operation settings
may be different. The actual operation settings can be confirmed in words A617/A618.
CPU Unit
1 Communications Settings Standard (9600; Standard When power is turned ON
1, 7, 2, E) Baud rate: 9,600 bps
(Default settings)
Start bits: 1 bit
Data length: 7 bits
Parity: Even
Stop bits: 2 bits
Custom
2 Mode Host Link Host Link When power is turned ON
NT Link (1:N): 1:N NT Links
RS-232C (No-protocol)
PC Link (Slave)
PC Link (Master)
Modbus-RTU Easy Master
2-1 Host Link Settings
2,400 bps
4,800 bps
9,600 bps
19,200 bps
38,400 bps
57,600 bps
115,200 bps
7 bits, 2 bits, odd
ity)
7 bits, 1 bit, even
7 bits, 1 bit, odd
8 bits, 2 bits, odd
8 bits, 1 bit, even
8 bits, 1 bit, odd
2-1-3 Unit Number 0 0 When power is turned ON
:
31
2-2 NT Link (1:N) Settings
2-2-1 Baud 115,200 bps 38,400 bps (standard) When power is turned ON
115,200 bps (high speed)
2-2-2 No. NT/PC Link Max. 1 0 When power is turned ON
:
the PLC) 7

7 PLC Setup

CPU Unit
2 2-3 RS-232C (No-protocol) Settings
2,400 bps
4,800 bps
9,600 bps
19,200 bps
38,400 bps
57,600 bps
115,200 bps
7 bits, 2 bits, odd
ity)
7 bits, 1 bit, even
7 bits, 1 bit, odd
8 bits, 2 bits, odd
8 bits, 1 bit, even

8 bits, 1 bit, odd
2-3-3 Start Code Disable. Disable. When power is turned ON
Set.
2-3-4 Start Code 00 hex 00 hex When power is turned ON
(setting)
:
FF hex
2-3-5 End Code None Received Bytes (no end code) When power is turned ON
(Received Bytes)
CR, LF 7
Set End Code
2-3-6 Received Bytes (setting) 256 bytes 256 bytes When power is turned ON
7-2-5 Serial Option Port

1 byte
:
255 bytes
2-3-7 Set End Code (setting) 00 hex 00 hex When power is turned ON
:
FF hex
2-3-8 Delay 0 ms 0 (10 ms) When power is turned ON
:
9999 (10 ms)
2-5 Modbus-RTU Easy Master Settings

2,400 bps
4,800 bps
9,600 bps
19,200 bps
38,400 bps
57,600 bps
115,200 bps

7 PLC Setup

CPU Unit
2 2-5 2-5-2 Format 7 bits, 2 bits, even 7 bits, 2 bits, even When power is turned ON
7 bits, 2 bits, odd
ity)
7 bits, 1 bit, even
7 bits, 1 bit, odd
8 bits, 2 bits, odd
8 bits, 1 bit, even
8 bits, 1 bit, odd
2-5-3 Response Timeout 5s 5s When power is turned ON
1 (100 ms)
:
255 (100 ms)
2-6 PC Link (Slave) Settings
2,400 bps
4,800 bps
9,600 bps
19,200 bps
38,400 bps
57,600 bps
115,200 bps
2-6-2 PLC Link Unit No. 0 0 When power is turned ON
:
7
2-7 PC Link (Master) Settings
2,400 bps
4,800 bps
9,600 bps
19,200 bps
38,400 bps
57,600 bps
115,200 bps
2-7-2 Link Words 10 words 1 word When power is turned ON
:
10 words
2-7-3 PC Link Mode ALL ALL When power is turned ON
Masters
2-7-4 No. NT/PC Link Max. 1 0 When power is turned ON
:
the PLC) 7

7 PLC Setup
7-2-6 Built-in Inputs
High-speed Counter Settings

CPU Unit
1 Use high-speed counter 0 Do not use. Do not use. When power is turned ON
Use.
1-1 Counting mode Linear mode Linear mode At start of operation
Circular mode
1-1-1 Circular Max. Count 0 0 At start of operation
:
4,294,967,295
1-2 Reset Z phase, software reset Z phase, software reset (stop When power is turned ON
(stop comparing) comparing)
Note Only a software reset can be
set if an increment pulse Software reset
input is set for the input set- (stop comparing)
ting.
Phase Z, software reset (compar-
ing)
Software reset (comparing)

1-3 Input Setting Differential phase input Differential phase input (4) When power is turned ON
(4)
Note Make the same input setting Pulse + direction input
for high-speed counters 0, 1,
Up/Down pulse input
and 2.
Increment pulse input
Use.
Circular mode
7
:
4,294,967,295
7-2-6 Built-in Inputs

2-2 Reset Z phase, software reset Z phase, software reset (stop When power is turned ON
(stop comparing) comparing)
Note Only a software reset can be
set if an increment pulse Software reset
input is set for the input set- (stop comparing)
ting.
Phase Z, software reset (compar-
ing)
2-3 Input Setting Differential phase input Differential phase input (4) When power is turned ON
(4)
Note Make the same input setting Pulse + direction input
for high-speed counters 0, 1,
Up/Down pulse input
and 2.
Increment Pulse input
Use.
Circular mode
:
4,294,967,295
3-2 Reset Software reset Software reset When power is turned ON
3-3 Input Setting Increment pulse input Increment pulse input When power is turned ON

7 PLC Setup

CPU Unit
Use.
Circular mode
:
4,294,967,295
Use.
Circular mode
:
4,294,967,295
Use.
Circular mode
:
4,294,967,295
Interrupt Input Settings

CPU Unit
1 IN2: CIO 0.02 Normal Normal When power is turned ON
Interrupt
Quick
Interrupt
Quick
Interrupt
Quick
Interrupt
Quick
Interrupt
Quick
Interrupt
Quick

7 PLC Setup
7-2-7 Pulse Output 0 Settings

The settings are applicable to the N/NA-type CPU Units with transistor outputs.
Base Settings
CPU Unit
1 Undefined Origin (operation for limit signal Hold Hold At start of operation
turning ON)
Undefined
2 Limit Input Signal Operation Search Only Search Only When power is turned ON
Always
3 Limit Input Signal NC NC At start of operation
NO
4 Search/Return Initial Speed 0 pps 0 pps At start of operation
:
100,000 pps
Origin Search Settings

CPU Unit
1 Use define origin operation Do not use. Do not use. When power is turned ON
Use.
1-1 Search Direction CW CW At start of operation
CCW
1-2 Detection Method Method 0 Method 0 At start of operation
Method 1
Method 2
1-3 Search Operation Inverse 1 Inverse 1 At start of operation
7
Inverse 2

1-4 Operation Mode Mode 0 Mode 0 At start of operation
Mode 1
Mode 2
1-5 Origin Input Signal NC NC At start of operation
NO
1-6 Proximity Input Signal NC NC At start of operation
NO
1-7 Search High Speed 0 pps (disabled) 1 pps At start of operation
:
100,000 pps
1-8 Search Proximity Speed 0 pps (disabled) 1 pps At start of operation
:
100,000 pps
1-9 Origin Compensation Value 0 pps -2,147,483,648 At start of operation
:
0
:
+2,147,483,647
1-10 Origin Search Acceleration Ratio 0 (disabled) 1 (pulse/4 ms) At start of operation
(Rate)
:
65,535 (pulse/4 ms)

7 PLC Setup

CPU Unit
1 1-11 Origin Search Deceleration Ratio 0 (disabled) 1 (pulse/4 ms) At start of operation
(Rate)
:
65,535 (pulse/4 ms)
1-12 Positioning Monitor Time 0 (ms) 0 (ms) At start of operation
:
9,999 (ms)
Origin Return Settings

CPU Unit
1 Speed 0 pps (disabled) 1 pps At start of operation
:
100,000 pps
2 Acceleration Ratio (rate) 0 (disabled) 1 (pulse/4 ms) At start of operation
:
65,535 (pulse/4 ms)
3 Deceleration rate 0 (disabled) 1 (pulse/4 ms) At start of operation
:
65,535 (pulse/4 ms)

The settings are applicable to the N/NA-type CPU Units with transistor outputs.
Base Settings
CPU Unit
1 Undefined Origin Hold Hold At start of operation
(operation for limit signal turning ON) Undefined
2 Limit Input Signal Operation Search Only Search Only When power is turned ON
Always
3 Limit Input Signal NC NC At start of operation
NO
4 Search/Return Initial Speed 0 pps 0 pps At start of operation
:
100,000 pps

7 PLC Setup
Origin Search Settings

CPU Unit
1 Use define origin operation Do not use. Do not use. When power is turned ON
Use.
1-1 Search Direction CW CW At start of operation
CCW
1-2 Detection Method Method 0 Method 0 At start of operation
Method 1
Method 2
1-3 Search Operation Inverse 1 Inverse 1 At start of operation
Inverse 2
1-4 Operation Mode Mode 0 Mode 0 At start of operation
Mode 1
Mode 2
1-5 Origin Input Signal NC NC When power is turned ON
NO
1-6 Proximity Input Signal NC NC At start of operation
NO

1-7 Search High Speed 0 pps (disabled) 1 pps At start of operation
:
100,000 pps
1-8 Search Proximity Speed 0 pps (disabled) 1 pps At start of operation
:
100,000 pps
1-9 Origin Compensation Value 0 pps -2,147,483,648 At start of operation
:
0 7
:
+2,147,483,647

1-10 Origin Search Acceleration Ratio 0 (disabled) 1 (pulse/4 ms) At start of operation
(Rate)
:
65,535 (pulse/4 ms)
1-11 Origin Search Deceleration Ratio 0 (disabled) 1 (pulse/4 ms) At start of operation
(Rate)
:
65,535 (pulse/4 ms)
1-12 Positioning Monitor Time 0 (ms) 0 (ms) At start of operation
:
9,999 (ms)

7 PLC Setup
Origin Return Settings

CPU Unit
1 Speed 0 pps (disabled) 1 pps At start of operation
:
100,000 pps
2 Acceleration Ratio (rate) 0 (disabled) 1 (pulse/4 ms) At start of operation

:
65,535 (pulse/4 ms)
3 Deceleration rate 0 (disabled) 1 (pulse/4 ms) At start of operation
:
65,535 (pulse/4 ms)
7-2-9 Built-in AD/DA: Built-in Analog I/O Settings
AD 0CH/AD 1CH: Analog Input Settings

CPU Unit
1 Analog Input 0: Use Do not use. Do not use. When power is turned ON
Use.
1-1 Range -10 to 10 V -10 to 10 V When power is turned ON
0 to 10 V
1 to 5 V
0 to 5 V
0 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
1-2 Use averaging Do not use. Do not use. When power is turned ON
Use.
2 Analog Input 1: Use Do not use. Do not use. When power is turned ON
Use.
0 to 10 V
1 to 5 V
0 to 5 V
0 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
2-2 Use averaging Do not use Do not use. When power is turned ON
Use.
DA 0CH: Analog Output Settings

CPU Unit
1 Analog Output 0: Use Do not use. Do not use. When power is turned ON
Use.
0 to 10 V
1 to 5 V
0 to 5 V
0 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA

8
Overview of Built-in Functions
and Allocations
This section describes the built-in functions, overall procedure, and allocations for func-
tions of the CP1E.
8-1 Built-in Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

8-2 Overall Procedure for Using CP1E Built-in Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
8-3 Terminal Allocations for Built-in Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8-3-1 Specifying the Functions to Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8-3-2 Selecting Functions in the PLC Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8-3-3 Allocating Built-in Input Terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
8-3-4 Allocating Built-in Output Temrinals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

8 Overview of Built-in Functions and Allocations
8-1 Built-in Functions

The following built-in functions are provided by the CP1E E-type and N/NA-type CPU Units.
Type CP1E Basic Models CP1E Application Models
Function Reference
E-type CPU Units N-type CPU Units NA-type CPU Units
Appearance
E10 CPU Units: 4 inputs 6 inputs Section 9

Quick-response inputs
E14/20/30/40 CPU Units: 6 inputs
E10 CPU Units: 4 inputs 6 inputs Section 10
Input interrupts
E14/20/30/40 CPU Units: 6 inputs
Scheduled interrupts 1 interrupt 1 interrupt
High-speed counter Incremental: Incremental: 100 kHz2 counters, 10 kHz4 Section 11
E10 CPU Units: 10 kHz5 counters counters
E14/20/30/40 CPU Units: 10 kHz6 Up/down: 100 kHz1 counter, 10 kHz1
counters counter
Up/down: 10 kHz2 counters Pulse plus direction: 100 kHz2 counters
Pulse plus direction: 10 kHz2 counters Differential phases (4): 50 kHz1 counter,
Differential phases (4): 5 kHz2 5 kHz1 counter
counters
Pulse outputs Not supported 2 outputs (pulse plus direction only) Section 12
PWM outputs Not supported 1 output Section 13
Serial communications Not supported N14/20 CPU Units: 1 port Section 14
N30/40/60 or NA20 CPU Units: One standard
port plus option slot
Analog I/O function Not supported Not supported Supported Section 15
PID temperature control Supported Supported Section16-1
Clock functions Not supported Supported (While power is supplied.) Section16-2
DM backup Supported Supported Section16-3
Security function Supported Supported Section16-4

8-2 Overall Procedure for Using CP1E

Built-in Functions
The overall procedure for using built-in CP1E functions is described in this section.
1 Select the functions to use.

Select Functions Example: Interrupts, high-speed counter
inputs, and pulse outputs.
2 Set the functions with the applicable numbers Refer to Section 7
8-2 Overall Procedure for Using CP1E Built-in Functions

Make the Settings in using the CX-Programmer. PLC Setup and 8-3
Example: Using input interrupt IN3 and high- Terminal Allocations
the PLC Setup
speed counter 0, parameters in the for Built-in Func-
PLC Setup must be set for the fol- tions.
lowing functions.
Input interrupts Origin searches

Quick-response Minimum cycle time
inputs Serial communications
High-speed counters
3 Create Ladder Program

Write ladder diagrams using the CX-Pro-
grammer.
Example: Permitting interrupts with the

Special Instructions
MSKS instruction and program-
ming high-speed counters with the
CTBL instruction.
Writing Related Example: Stopping high-speed counters.

Auxiliary Area Words
8
Refer to A-2 Auxil-
Example: Reading the present value of a
Reading Related iary Area Alloca-
high-speed counter.
Auxiliary Area Words tions by Address.
4 Transfer PLC Setup

Transfer the PLC Setup and ladder program
from the CX-Programmer to the CP1E CPU
and Ladder Program Unit.
5 Restart the CP1E

Once turn OFF the power supply to the CP1E
CPU Unit, then turn ON again.
6 Start Operation
Start the CP1E CPU Unit operation.

8-3 Terminal Allocations for Built-in

Functions
8-3-1 Specifying the Functions to Use
A CP1E CPU Unit uses the same built-in I/O terminals for different functions. Allocate the I/O terminals
in advance, making sure that each terminal is used for only one function.
Specify the input functions in the PLC Setup from the CX-Programmer, and specify the output functions
in PLC Setup and programming instructions.
8-3-2 Selecting Functions in the PLC Setup

Functions are enabled by setting parameters in the PLC Setup. Set the functions so that no more than
one function uses the same terminal. Select function numbers so that high-speed counter inputs and
inputs for other functions, such as interrupt inputs, quick-response inputs, and origin inputs do no con-
flict with each other.
Input functions can be selected by selecting the Use high speed counter Check Box in a High-
speed Counter Area on the Built-in Input Tab Page or by setting an input to Interrupt or Quick in the
Interrupt Input Area of the same page.
Select the Use high speed

counter Check Box for a High-
speed Counter

The input and output terminals used by the origin search function can be enabled by selecting the
Use define origin operation Check Box on a Pulse Output Tab Page.
Select the Use define origin

operation Check Box.
8-3 Terminal Allocations for Built-in Functions

8
8-3-2 Selecting Functions in the PLC Setup

8-3-3 Allocating Built-in Input Terminals
Allocating Functions to Built-in Input Terminals
Input terminals are allocated functions by setting parameters in the PLC Setup. Set the PLC Setup so
that each terminal is used for only one function.
E20/30/40, N20/30/40/60 or NA20 CPU Units

PLC Setup
Origin search set-
Interrupt input settings on Built-in Input Tab High-speed counter 0 to 3 settings on Built- tings on Pulse
Termi-
Page in Input Tab Page Output 0/1 Tab
nal Terminal
Page
block number
Normal Interrupt Quick Use Use
label
Quick- Differential
Interrupt Increment Pulse/direc-
Normal input response phase 4 or Origin search
inputs pulse input tion
inputs up/down
CIO 0 00 Normal input 0 Counter 0, Counter 0, Counter 0,
increment input phase A or up pulse input
input
01 Normal input 1 Counter 1, Counter 0, Counter 1,
increment input phase B or pulse input
down input
02 Normal input 2 Interrupt Quick- Counter 2, Counter 1, Counter 0,
input 2 response increment input phase A or up direction
input 2 input
03 Normal input 3 Interrupt Quick- Counter 1, Counter 1,
input 3 response phase B or direction
input 3 down input
Counter 3,
input 4 response phase Z or reset input
increment input
input 4 reset input
Counter 4,
input 5 response phase Z or reset input
increment input
input 5 reset input
06 Normal input 6 Interrupt Quick- Pulse 0: Origin input
Counter 5,
input 6 response signal
increment input
input 6
input 7
08 Normal input 8
09 Normal input 9
10 Normal input 10 Pulse 0, Origin
proximity input signal
11 Normal input 11 Pulse 1, Origin
proximity input signal
CIO 1 00 to 05 Normal input 12 to 17
06 to 11 Normal input 18 to 23
CIO 2 00 to 11 Normal input 24 to 35

E14 or N14 CPU Units

PLC Setup
Origin search set-
Interrupt input settings on Built-in Input Tab High-speed counter 0 to 3 settings on Built- tings on Pulse
Termi-
Page in Input Tab Page Output 0/1 Tab
nal Terminal
Page
block number
Normal Interrupt Quick Use Use
label
Quick- Differential
Interrupt Increment Pulse/direc-
Normal input response phase 4 or Origin search
inputs up/down
input
down input
input 2 input
03 Normal input 3 Interrupt Quick- Counter 1, Counter 1, Pulse 0, Origin
input 3 response phase B or direction proximity input signal
input 3 down input
8-3 Terminal Allocations for Built-in Functions

input 4 response increment input Phase Z or reset input
input 4 reset input
05 Normal input 5 Interrupt Quick- Counter 4, Counter 1, Counter 1, Pulse 1, Origin
input 5 response increment input Phase Z or reset input proximity input signal
input 5 reset input
06 Normal input 6 Interrupt Quick- Counter 5, Pulse 0: Origin input
input 6 response increment input signal
input 6
input 7
E10 CPU Units

PLC Setup
Interrupt input settings on Built-in Input Tab High-speed counter 0 to 3 settings on Built-
Termi-
Page in Input Tab Page
nal Terminal
block number
Normal Interrupt Quick
Quick-
Use
Differential
8
label Interrupt Increment Pulse/direc-
Normal input response phase 4 or
inputs up/down
8-3-3 Allocating Built-in Input Terminals

input
down input
input 2 input
input 3 response phase B or direction
input 3 down input
input 4 reset input
input 5 reset input
Note 1 The same pulse inputs must be used for high-speed counter 0 and high-speed counter 1.
2 High-speed counter 2 cannot be used if the input setting of high-speed counter 0 or high-speed counter 1
is set for differential phase inputs (4), pulse + direction inputs, or up/down pulse inputs.

Prohibiting Repeated Use of Input Terminal Number

The input terminals 00 to 11 of CIO 0 are used for input interrupts, quick-response inputs, high-speed
counters, origin searches and normal inputs. Therefore, do not use the input terminals repeatedly. For
example, if quick-response input 2 is used, then input terminal 02 is occupied, so it cannot be used for
normal input 2, input interrupt 2, quick-response input 2, counter 2 (increment), counter 1 (phase-
A/increment) or counter 0 (direction).
8-3-4 Allocating Built-in Output Temrinals
Allocating Functions to Built-in Output Terminals

Output terminals are allocated functions by setting parameters in the PLC Setup. Set the PLC Setup so
that each terminal is used for only one function.
E14/20/30/40, N14/20/30/40/60 or NA20 CPU Units

When a pulse output instruc- PLC Setup When the PWM
Other than those
Output terminal block tion (SPED, ACC, PLS2, or Origin search settings on instruction is exe-
shown at the right
ORG) is executed Pulse Output 0/1 Tab Page cuted
Variable-duty-fac-
Terminal Terminal Fixed duty ratio pulse output
Normal outputs tor output
block label number
Pulse + Direction Mode Use PWM output
CIO 100 00 Normal output 0 Pulse output 0, pulse
01 Normal output 1 Pulse output 1, pulse PWM output 0
02 Normal output 2 Pulse output 0, direction
03 Normal output 3 Pulse output 1, direction
04 Normal output 4 Pulse 0, Error counter reset
output
05 Normal output 5 Pulse 1, Error counter reset
output
06 Normal output 6
07 Normal output 7
CIO 101 00 to 03 Normal output 8 to 11
04 to 07 Normal output 12 to 15
CIO 102 00 to 07 Normal output 16 to 23
E10 CPU Units

Other than those
Output terminal block
shown at the right
Terminal Terminal
Normal outputs
block label number
CIO 100 00 Normal output 0

01 Normal output 1
02 Normal output 2
03 Normal output 3
Prohibiting Repeated Use of Output Terminal Number

The output terminals 00 to 07 of CIO 100 are used for pulse outputs, PWM outputs and normal outputs.
Therefore, do not use the output terminals repeatedly. For example, if pulse output 0 (direction) is used,
then output terminal 02 is occupied, so it cannot be used for normal output 2.

9
Quick-response Inputs
This section describes the quick-response inputs that can be used to read signals that
are shorter than the cycle time.
9-1 Quick-response Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

9-1-1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9-1-2 Flow of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

9 Quick-response Inputs
9-1 Quick-response Inputs

Quick-response inputs can be used with any model of CP1E CPU Unit.
9-1-1 Overview
The quick-response inputs can read pulses with an ON time as short as 50 s even if they are shorter
than the cycle time. Use the quick-response inputs to read signals shorter than the cycle time, such as
inputs from photomicrosensors.
Pulse signal from photomicrosensor

or other device
I/O refresh
Cycle time
Built-in input
Input bit
Input bit
ON for one scan
in the next cycle
Cyclic tasks
(ladder programs)
Cycle time
Can read ON signals
shorter than this time.
END
I/O refresh
The pulse widths of quick-response input signals must meet the following conditions.
50s min. 50s min.

9-1-2 Flow of Operation
1 PLC Setup
Set IN2 to IN7 for quick-response inputs on the Built-in Input
Tab Page of the PLC Setup using the CX-Programmer.
The terminals 02 to 07 of CIO 0 can be used for quick-
response inputs. Bits CIO 0.02 to CIO 0.07 correspond to ter-
minals 02 to 07.
2 Create ladder Cyclic task or
Read the status of CIO 0.02 to CIO 0.07 using the LD instruction
or other instructions.
program interrupt task

A built-in input cannot be used as a quick-response input if it is being used as a normal input,
interrupt input, or high-speed counter input. Refer to 8-3-3 Allocating Built-in Input Terminals for
details.
PLC Setup
Click the Built-in Input Tab and select Quick in the interrupt input settings.
9-1 Quick-response Inputs

9
Select Quick
Built-in Input Tab Page

Quick-response input setting Corresponding bit address
IN2 Select Quick for IN2 CIO 0.02
IN3 to IN7. CIO 0.03
IN4 CIO 0.04
IN5 CIO 0.05
IN6 CIO 0.06
IN7 CIO 0.07
Note 1 The power supply must be restarted after the PLC Setup is transferred in order to validate the quick-
response input settings.
2 IN6 and IN7 are not supported by E10 CPU Units.

Quick-response Input Terminal

The following terminals can be used for quick-response inputs.
Input Terminal Block on CPU Unit with 20 I/O Points
Quick-response input IN5: CIO 0.05

Upper Terminal Block
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 09 11
NC 00 02 04 06 08 10
CIO 0
DC Power Supply
+ - COM
NC

Creating Ladder Programs

Pulse inputs shorter than the cycle time can be read in the CPU Unit I/O memory using normal instruc-
tions. Simply set the interrupt setting for the required input to Quick in the PLC Setup.
The status of CIO 0.02 to CIO 0.07 can be read using instructions such as the LD instruction.
Example: Setting IN2 to Quick in the PLC Setup Interrupt Settings.
Even if the signal that is input to terminal 02 on terminal block

0CH is shorter than the cycle time, the signal will be latched in
one cycle and the status will be stored in CIO 0.02.
0.02
The minimum pulse width (ON time) that can be read for a quick-response input is 50 s.
The status of the input that is stored in the I/O memory for a short input will be cleared during the next
I/O refresh period.

10
Interrupts
This section describes the interrupts that can be used with CP1E PLCs, including input
interrupts and scheduled interrupts.
10-1 Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

10-1-1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
10-2 Input Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
10-2-1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
10-2-2 Flow of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
10-2-3 Application Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
10-3 Scheduled Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
10-3-1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
10-3-2 Flow of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
10-4 Precautions for Using Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
10-4-1 Interrupt Task Priority and Order of Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
10-4-2 Related Auxiliary Area Words and Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
10-4-3 Duplicate Processing in each Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
10

10 Interrupts
10-1 Interrupts
10-1-1 Overview
CP1E CPU Units normally repeat processes in the following order: overseeing processes, program exe-
cution, I/O refreshing, peripheral servicing. During the program execution stage, cyclic tasks (ladder
programs) are executed.
The interrupt function, on the other hand, allows a specified condition to interrupt a cycle and execute a
specified program.
Interrupts can thus be used to perform high-speed processing that is not restricted by the cycle time.
The CP1E performs the following processing when an interrupt occurs.
(1)When an interrupt occurs, execution of the ladder programs in cyclic tasks is interrupted.
(2)The ladder program in the interrupt task is executed.
(3)When the interrupt task is finished, the ladder program that was being executed is returned to.
(2)Interrupt task executed

Cyclic tasks
(ladder programs) Ladder program
(1)Interrupt occurs
Cycle END
END (3)When the interrupt task is finished,

I/O refreshing the ladder diagram that was being
executed is returned to.
Interrupt Factors and Types of Interrupts

Interrupts are classified by the interrupt factor. There are the following three types of interrupts.
Changes in status of built-in inputs on the CPU Unit Input Interrupts in Page 10-3
Specified intervals measured by internal timers Scheduled Interrupts in Page 10-10
PVs of high-speed counter High-speed Counter Interrupts in Page 11-14

10 Interrupts
10-2 Input Interrupts

Input interrupts can be used with any model of CP1E CPU Unit.
10-2-1 Overview
A corresponding interrupt task can be executed when a built-in input on the CPU Unit turns ON or turns
OFF.
Interrupt input
Built-in input
Interrupt input bit turns ON or OFF
Interrupt task
Cyclic tasks
(ladder programs) Ladder program
Interrupt occurs
Cycle
END
END
I/O refreshing
Condition for

accepting interrupt
Example: CIO 0.02
(interrupt input IN2)
MSKS instruction
executed to enable
the interrupt
Processing Processing
Cyclic task execution
interrupted Cyclic task execution
interrupted
Interrupt task
10
Interrupt task
2 executed
2 executed
10-2-1 Overview
The pulse widths of interrupt input signals must meet the following conditions.
50s min.50s min.

10 Interrupts
1 PLC Setup
Set IN2 to IN7 for interrupt inputs on the Built-in Input
Tab Page of the PLC Setup using the CX-Programmer.
Terminals 02 to 07 on the CIO 0 terminal block can be
used for interrupt inputs. Bits CIO 0.02 to CIO 0.07 cor-
respond to terminals 02 to 07.
2 Write the program in the interrupt task. Interrupt tasks 2 to

7 correspond to interrupt inputs 2 to 7.
Interrupt task
Create
Specify whether the interrupt is executed when the input
ladder
turns ON or when it turns OFF in the MSKS instruction.
program Execute MSKS
Set N to 112 to 117 in the MSKS instruction.
instruction in a
cyclic task Enable input interrupts in the MSKS instruction. Set N to
102 to 107 in the MSKS instruction.

A built-in input cannot be used as a normal input, high-speed counter input, or quick-response
input if it is being used as an interrupt input. Refer to 8-3-3 Allocating Built-in Input Terminals for
details.
PLC Setup
Click the Built-in Input Tab and select Interrupt in the interrupt intput settings.
Select Interrupt

10 Interrupts

Corresponding Scheduled
Interrupt input settings
bit address interrupt task
IN2 Select Interrupt for CIO 0.02 2
IN3 IN2 to IN7. CIO 0.03 3
IN4 CIO 0.04 4
IN5 CIO 0.05 5
IN6 CIO 0.06 6
IN7 CIO 0.07 7
Note 1 The power supply must be restarted after the PLC Setup is transferred in order to enable the interrupt
input settings.
2 IN6 and IN7 are not supported by E10 CPU Units.
Assigning Interrupt Input Terminals

The following input terminals can be used for interrupt inputs. These terminals correspond to CIO 0.02
to CIO 0.07 in I/O memory.
Input Terminal Block on CPU Unit with 20 I/O Points
Interrupt input IN5: CIO 0.05

Upper Terminal Block

L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 09 11
DC Power Supply
+ - COM NC 00 02 04 06 08 10
CIO 0
NC

Writing the Ladder Program
Writing the Interrupt Tasks Ladder Program

Create ladder programs for interrupt tasks 2 to 7, which are executed for the corresponding interrupt
inputs. Right-click a program in the CX-Programmer and select Properties. Select interrupt tasks 2 10
to 7 in the Task Type Field of the Program Properties Dialog Box.

10 Interrupts
Execute MSKS Instruction in a Cyclic Task

Execute the MSKS instruction from the ladder program in a cyclic task to use input interrupts.
MSKS has the following two functions and two of this instruction are normally used in combination.
(1)Specifying whether to detect ON or OFF signals.
(2)Enabling input interrupts.
Execution condition
@MSKS (1)Specifies creating an interrupt when
N the input turns OFF or when it turns
C ON.
@MSKS (2)Enables input interrupts.
N
C
The MSKS instruction must be executed only once to make the settings, so in general execute
MSKS in just one cycle using the upwardly differentiated variation of the instruction.
The first MSKS instruction can be omitted. If it is omitted, an interrupt will be created when the input
turns ON by default.
Specifying MSKS Operands (N and C)

(1)Specifying to Detect ON or OFF Input Signals
Operand N Operand C
PLC Setup on
Corresponding Interrupt Specifying up/down
Terminal Built-in Input Interrupt
bit address task number differentiation of an
Tab Page identifier
interrupt input
02 on CIO 0 CIO 0.02 Interrupt input 2 112 #0000:
terminal block IN2 Up-differentiation
terminal block IN3
Down-differentiation
04 on CIO 0 CIO 0.04 Interrupt input 4 114
terminal block IN4
terminal block IN5
terminal block IN6*
terminal block IN7*
* Interrupt input 6 and 7 are not supported by E10 CPU Units.
(2)Enabling the Input Interrupt
PLC Setup on Operand N Operand C
Corresponding Interrupt
Terminal Built-in Input Interrupt
bit address task number Enable/Disable
Tab Page identifier
terminal block IN2 Enable interrupt
terminal block IN3
Disable interrupt
terminal block IN4
terminal block IN5
terminal block IN6*
terminal block IN7*
* Interrupt input 6 and 7 are not supported by E10 CPU Units.

10 Interrupts
Example
(1)Specifying Detecting ON or OFF Input Signals
For interrupt input IN2: Specify 112.
Cyclic task
Specifies an interrupt when the input turns ON.
MSKS (2)Enabling Input Interrupt CIO 0.02 turns ON
112 For interrupt input IN2: Specify 102.
#0000 Enables Input interrupt. Built-in input terminal
The specified input interrupt (here, IN2) is 01 03 05 07 09 11
MSKS enabled when the MSKS instruction is executed.
102 00 02 04 06 08 10
#0000
Interrupt CIO 0
Interrupt task 2
END
END
10-2-3 Application Example

In this example, bent parts are detected in a moving workpiece, such as an IC component. When the
sensor input (terminal 02 on terminal block 0CH = CIO 0.02) changes from OFF to ON, the interrupt
task is executed.
Sensor input (interrupt input 2)

Sensor input (interrupt) CIO 0.02 Interrupt task Interrupt task Interrupt task
Workpiece execution execution execution
Sensor input
CIO 0.00
Sensor input
Sensor input 3 Sensor input 1 CIO 0.01

Sensor input 2 Sensor input
CIO 0.03
Reset input
CIO 0.04
OK output
CIO 100.00
NG output 1
CIO 100.01
NG output 2
CIO 100.02
NG output 3
CIO 100.03
10
NG output 4
CIO 100.04

10 Interrupts
1 PLC Setup
Set IN2 to Interrupt in the interrupt input settings on the Built-in Input Tab Page.
2 Connecting Interrupt Input Terminals

Terminal 2 on terminal block 0CH is interrupt input IN2.
Interrupt task 2 corresponds to interrupt input 2.
Interrupt input (sensor input):

Sensor input 3: CIO 0.03 CIO 0.02
Sensor input 2: CIO 0.01 Reset input: CIO 0.04
Sensor input 1: CIO 0.00
OK output: CIO 100.00

NG output 2: CIO 100.04
NG output 1: CIO 100.01 NG output 3: CIO 100.03
NG output 4: CIO 100.02

10 Interrupts
Programming Example
Cyclic Task
P_First_Cycle
Interrupt input 2 The MSKS instruction is used

Specifies executing to specify an interrupt when the
interrupt when input input turns ON and then it is
turns ON. used to unmask the input
interrupt.
Interrupt input 2
Unmasks the input
interrupt.
NG output sensor input 1
0.04
Reset input
Interrupt Task 2 10
OK output
Sensor input 1 Sensor input 2 Sensor input 3
NG output 2
Sensor input 1
Sensor input 1
NG output 3
Sensor input 2
Sensor input 2
NG output 4
Sensor input 3
Sensor input 3

10 Interrupts
10-3 Scheduled Interrupts

Scheduled interrupts can be used with any model of CP1E CPU Unit.
10-3-1 Overview
Scheduled interrupts can be used to execute interrupt tasks at fixed time intervals measured by the
CPU Units internal timer.
Minimum interval: 1 ms
Specified interval
Interrupt task
Cyclic tasks
Interrupt occurs Ladder program
(ladder programs)
Cycle
END
END
I/O refresh
Condition for
accepting interrupts
MSKS instruction executed Scheduled Interrupt Interval =
to set the scheduled 0.5 ms (example)
interrupt interval
1ms 1ms 1ms
Internal timer
Execution Cyclic task Execution Cyclic task Execution

Cyclic task execution interrupted interrupted interrupted
execution execution
Executing Executing Executing

scheduled scheduled scheduled
interrupt interrupt interrupt
task 1 task 1 task 1

10 Interrupts
Interrupt task Write the program for the corresponding interrupt task 1 (fixed).
Create
ladder Execute MSKS Use MSKS to specify the scheduled interrupt interval.
program instruction in a cyclic The setting can be 1 ms or longer.
task Set N to 4 or 14 in the MSKS instruction.
Writing the Interrupt Task Program

Create the program for interrupt task 1, which is executed for the scheduled interrupt. Right-click a
program in the CX-Programmer and select Properties. Select Interrupt Tasks 01 (scheduled inter-
rupt) in Task Type Field of the Program Properties Dialog Box.
10-3 Scheduled Interrupts

Execute MSKS in a Cyclic Task
The MSKS instruction must be executed from the ladder program in a cyclic task in order to use
scheduled interrupts.
Execution condition
10
@MSKS
N Specifies scheduled interrupt (interrupt task 1)
C Sets the scheduled interrupt interval and starts timing
The MSKS instruction must be executed only once to make the settings, so in general execute
MSKS in just one cycle using the upwardly differentiated variation of the instruction.

10 Interrupts
Specifying MSKS Operands (N and C)

MSKS Operands
MSKS Operands
N C
Interrupt number Scheduled interrupt interval
Scheduled interrupt (interrupt 0 decimal: Disable interrupt (stop internal timer)
task 1)* 10 to 9,999 decimal:Enable interrupt (Reset internal timer
14: Reset and restart and then start timer with interrupt interval between 1.0
4: Reset and restart and 999.9 ms)
* Either is reset.
Example
Scheduled Interrupt Time Unit

Scheduled interrupt
Cyclic tasks
1 ms
MSKS
4
&10
In intervals of 1 ms
Interrupt
Interrupt task 1
END
END

Set a scheduled interrupt interval is longer than the time required to execute the correspond-
ing interrupt task.
If you shorten the scheduled interrupt interval and increase the execution frequency of the
scheduled interrupt task, the cycle time will increase, and this will affect the execution timing of
cyclic tasks.
If an interrupt task is being executed for another interrupt (input interrupt or high-speed
counter interrupt) when the scheduled interrupt occurs, the scheduled interrupt will not be exe-
cuted until the other interrupt task had been completed.
Even in this case, measurement of internal timer is continually executed in parallel, so the exe-
cution of scheduled interrupt tasks will not be delayed.
Scheduled interrupt interval cannot be changed during the startup of scheduled interrupt.
Change the interval after the scheduled interrupt has stopped.

10 Interrupts
10-4 Precautions for Using Interrupts
10-4-1 Interrupt Task Priority and Order of Execution
The priority of interrupt tasks is the same order for input interrupts, scheduled interrupts and high-speed
counter interrupts. Therefore, if interrupt task A (an input interrupt, for example) is being executed when
interrupt task B (a scheduled interrupt, for example) occurs, task A execution will not be interrupted.
Task B execution will be started when task A had been completed.
For example, if an interrupt task is being executed for another interrupt (input interrupt or high-speed
counter interrupt) when a scheduled interrupt occurs, the scheduled interrupt will not be executed until
execution of the other interrupt task had been completed. Even in this case, internal timer is continually
measured in parallel, so the execution of the scheduled interrupt task will not be delayed.
10-4-2 Related Auxiliary Area Words and Bits

When the processing time of an interrupt task exceeds 0.1ms, the processing time of the interrupt task
and the task number of the interrupt with the maximum processing time can be found in the Auxiliary
Area. The actual processing time can also be checked.
Name Addresses Description
Maximum A440 Contains the maximum interrupt task processing time in units of 0.1 ms.
Interrupt Task This value is cleared at the start of operation.
Processing Time
Interrupt Task A441 Contains the task number of the interrupt task with the maximum processing
With Maximum time. Here, #8000 to #800F correspond to tasks 0 to 15 (00 to 0F hex).
10-4 Precautions for Using Interrupts

Processing Time A441.15 will turn ON when the first interrupt occurs after the start of operation.
The maximum processing time for subsequent interrupt tasks will be stored in
the rightmost digit in hexadecimal. This value is cleared at the start of opera-
tion.
Total of Interrupt A442 Contains the total of interrupt task processing time in one cycle in units of
Task Processing 0.1ms. Sets when the value is bigger than the last one once a cycle by com-
Time in One mon processing.This value is cleared at the start of operation. The value is
Cycle unstable for CPU Unit version 1.0 or earlier.
10-4-3 Duplicate Processing in each Task

Observe the following precautions, if a word address in I/O memory is manipulated by instructions both
in a cyclic task and an interrupt task. 10
If the interrupt task overwrites an I/O memory address used by one of the interrupted instructions
operands, the data may be overwritten when the saved data is restored when processing returns to
10-4-1 Interrupt Task Priority and
the cyclic task.

To prevent certain instructions from being interrupted during processing, insert the DI or EI instruction
Order of Execution
just before and after the instructions, using the DI or EI instruction before the instructions to disable
interrupts and the DI or EI instruction after the instructions to enable interrupts again.
Normally, if an interrupt occurs, execution of the cyclic task will be interrupted immediately, even
during execution of an instruction in the cyclic task, and the partially processed data is saved.
After the interrupt task had been completed, the cyclic task restarts with the data saved before
the interrupt processing.

10 Interrupts

11 11
High-speed Counters
This section describes the high-speed counter inputs, high-speed counter interrupts,
and the frequency measurement function.
11-1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2

11-1-1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
11-1-3 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
11-2 High-speed Counter Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
11-2-1 Pulse Input Methods Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
11-2-2 Counting Ranges Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
11-2-3 Reset Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
11-2-4 Reading the Present Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
11-2-5 Frequency Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
11-3 High-speed Counter Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
11-3-1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
11-3-2 Present Value Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17
11-3-3 High-speed Counter Interrupt Instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-21
11-4 Related Auxiliary Area Bits and Words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-26
11-5 Application Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-27

11 High-speed Counters
11-1 Overview
High-speed counters can be used with any model of CP1E CPU Unit.
11-1-1 Overview
High-speed counters are used to measure high-speed pulse input signals that cannot be measured by
counter (CNT) instructions.
Applications
Detecting the position or length of a workpiece with an input from an incremental rotary encoder.
Measuring the speed of a workpiece from its position data using frequency measurement and
rotational speed conversion.
High-speed processing according to the workpieces position data.
The present value of the high-speed counter is stored in the Auxiliary Area and can be used as posi-
tion data. When it reaches preset values, interrupts can be generated. The count can be started and
stopped. Depending on the instruction, the frequency (speed) can be read from the present value of
the high-speed counter.
Changes to PV
Read Reading PV (from Auxiliary Area

Count High-speed counter PV or using PRV instruction)
Encoder
input (stored in Auxiliary Area) Reading frequency (using PRV instruction)
Phase A/phase B
Up/down pulse inputs Read PRV
Reset input (phase Z)
Etc. High-speed counter PV comparison
Target value comparison
Range comparison for Interrupt task

upper and lower limits
Settings
Setting target values or range upper/lower

limits and starting comparison, specifying
interrupt task to be started
CTBL

11-1 Overview
1 PLC Setup
Enable the required high-speed counters.
Select the Use high speed counter Check Box for high-
speed counters 0 to 5. Set the input setting, counting
mode and reset method on the Built-in Input Tab Page of
the PLC Setup using the CX-Programmer.
Terminals 00 to 06 on the CIO 0 terminal block can be 11
used for high-speed counters. High-speed counters 0 to
5 correspond to terminals 00 to 06.

2 Create Read counter PV
Read the PV from Auxiliary Area or by executing a PRV
instruction.
ladder
Execute a PRV instruction.
program Read counter frequency

A built-in input cannot be used as a normal input, interrupt input, or quick-response input if it is
being used as a high-speed counter input. Refer to 8-3-3 Allocating Built-in Input Terminals for
details.
PLC Setup
Click the Built-in Input Tab and select the Use high speed counter Check Box for high-speed counters
0 to 5. Set the counting mode, reset method, and input setting.


Item Setting
Use high Use high-speed Select Use high speed counter for each counter to be used.
speed counter
counter 0 Counting Mode Select Linear mode or Circular mode.
to 5
Circular Max. Count If circular mode is selected, set the maximum ring count.
(maximum ring count) 0 to 4,294,967,295 decimal
Reset Phase Z and software reset
Software reset*
Phase Z and software reset (continue comparing)
Software reset (continue comparing)*
Input Setting Differential phase inputs (4)
Pulse + direction inputs
Up/down pulse inputs
* Only a software reset can be used if an increment pulse input is specified.
Note The power supply must be restarted after the PLC Setup is transferred in order to enable the high-speed
counter settings.
Determining High-speed Counter

Pulse Input Method and High-speed Counter Input Terminals
The following input terminals can be used for high-speed counters with the pulse input method.
E20/30/40, N20/30/40/60 or NA20 CPU Units

Input terminal block Pulse input method (Counting mode) Other functions that cannot be used at the same time
Terminal Differential phase Pulse/ Quick-

block Increment Interrupt Origin searches for
Terminal pulse input
4 or up/down direction Normal input input
response
pulse outputs 0 and 1
label input input input
CIO 0 00 High-speed High-speed High-speed Normal input 0
Counter 0, Counter 0, phase A Counter 0,
increment or up input pulse input
input
01 High-speed High-speed High-speed Normal input 1
Counter 1, Counter 0, phase B Counter 1,
increment or down input pulse input
input
02 High-speed High-speed High-speed Normal input 2 Interrupt input 2 Quick-
Counter 2, Counter 1, phase A Counter 0, response
increment or up input direction input 2
input
03 High-speed High-speed Normal input 3 Interrupt input 3 Quick-
Counter 1, phase B Counter 1, response
or down input direction input 3
Counter 3, Counter 0, phase Z Counter 0, response
increment or reset input reset input input 4
input
input
06 High-speed Normal input 6 Interrupt input 6 Quick- Pulse 0:
Counter 5, response Origin input signal
increment input 6
input
07 Normal input 7 Interrupt input 7 Quick- Pulse 1:
response Origin input signal
input 7

E14 or N14 CPU Units

Input terminal block Pulse input method (Counting mode) Other functions that cannot be used at the same time
11-1 Overview
Terminal Increment Differential phase Pulse/ Interrupt Quick- Origin searches for
block Terminal
pulse input 4 or up/down direction Normal input
input response pulse outputs 0 and 1
label input input input
input
Counter 1,
increment
Counter 0, phase B Counter 1,
or down input pulse input
11
input

input
03 High-speed High-speed Normal input 3 Interrupt input 3 Quick- Pulse 0, Origin
Counter 1, phase B Counter 1, response proximity input signal
input
05 High-speed High-speed High-speed Normal input 5 Interrupt input 5 Quick- Pulse 1, Origin
Counter 4, Counter 1, phase Z Counter 1, response proximity input signal
input
06 High-speed Normal input 6 Interrupt input 6 Quick- Pulse 0:
Counter 5, response Origin input signal
increment input 6
input
07 Normal input 7 Interrupt input 7 Quick- Pulse 1:
response Origin input signal
input 7
E10 CPU Units

Other functions that cannot be used at the
Input terminal block Pulse input method (Counting mode) same time
Terminal Differential phase Pulse/ Quick-

Increment Interrupt
block Terminal 4 or up/down direction Normal input response
label pulse input input input input input
input
Counter 1, Counter 0, phase B Counter 1,
increment or down input pulse input
input
input
03 High-speed High-speed Normal input 3 Interrupt input 3 Quick-
Counter 1, phase B Counter 1, response
input
input
Note 1 The same pulse input must be used for high-speed counter 0 and high-speed counter 1.
2 High-speed counter 2 cannot be used if the input setting of high-speed counter 0 or high-speed counter 1
is set for differential phase inputs (4x), pulse + direction inputs, or up/down pulse inputs.

Wiring Example for High-speed Counter Input Terminals
Using a 24-VDC Open-collector Encoder

The following example shows the connections of an encoder with phase-A, phase-B, and phase-Z
inputs to high-speed counter 0.
CP1E CPU Unit

(Differential Phase Input Mode)
Black Phase A 0.00
Encoder (High-speed counter 0: Phase A 0 V)
(power supply: 24 VDC)
White Phase B 0.01
(High-speed counter 0: Phase B 0 V)
Orange Phase Z
0.04
(High-speed counter 0: Phase Z 0 V)
Example: E6B2-CWZ6C
Brown+Vcc COM
NPN open-collector output (COM 24V)
Blue 0V(COM)
24 VDC power supply

0V
+24V
(Do not use the same I/O power supply as other equipment.)
1
Power provided 0V Power supply
Encoder 2 24V 0V
Shielded twisted-pair cable
CP1E CPU Unit
IA
Phase A 0.00
IB 0.01
Phase B
IZ
Phase Z 0.04
COM

Execution Program Reference
Generating interrupts for the Specify interrupt tasks with CTBL 11-3 High-speed
high-speed counter PV (num- instructions. Counter Interrupts
ber of pulses) and perform
high-speed processing.
Reading the high-speed Read the high-speed counter PV from 11-2-4 Reading the
counter PV (number of the Auxiliary Area and convert it to Present Value
pulses). position or length data using instruc-
tions or measure the length using con-
mparison instructions such as =, >,
and <.
Reading the high-speed Execute a PRV instruction. 11-2-5 Frequency
counter frequency (speed). Measurement

11-1-3 Specifications
11-1 Overview
Item Description
Pulse input method Increment pulse Differential phase Up/down pulse Pulse + direction
(Counting mode) inputs inputs (4) inputs inputs
Input signal Increment Phase-A Up pulse Pulse
Phase-B Down pulse Direction 11
Phase-Z Reset Reset
Frequency N/NA-type 100 kHz: 50 kHz: 100 kHz: 100 kHz:
and number CPU Unit 2 counters, 1 counter, 1 counter, 2 counters
of high- 10 kHz: 4 counters 5 kHz: 1 counter 10 kHz: 1 counter
speed E-type CPU E10 CPU Unit: 5 kHz: 10 kHz: 10 kHz:
counters Unit 10 kHz: 5 counters 2 counters 2 counters 2 counters
E14/20/30/40
CPU Unit:
10 kHz: 6 counters
Counting mode Linear mode or circular (ring) mode
Count values Linear mode: 8000 0000 to 7FFF FFFF hex
Ring Mode: 0000 0000 to Ring SV
High-speed counter PV High-speed counter 0: A271 (upper 4 digits) and A270 (lower 4 digits)
storage locations High-speed counter 1: A273 (upper 4 digits) and A272 (lower 4 digits)
High-speed counter 2: A317 (upper 4 digits) and A316 (lower 4 digits)
The PVs are refreshed in the overseeing processes at the start of each cycle. Use
PRV to read the most recent PVs.
Data format: 8 digit hexadecimal
Range in linear mode: 8000 0000 to 7FFF FFFF hex
Range in Ring Mode: 0000 0000 to Ring SV (Circular Max. Count)
Control Target value Up to 6 target values and corresponding interrupt task numbers can be registered.
method comparison
Range Up to 6 ranges can be registered, with a separate upper limit, lower limit, and inter-
comparison rupt task number for each range.
Counter reset method Phase-Z + Software reset
The high-speed counter is reset when the phase-Z signal goes ON while the
Reset Bit (A531.00 to A531.05) is ON. (Phase Z cannot be used for the increment
pulse.)
Software reset
The high-speed counter is reset when the Reset Bit (A531.00 to A531.05) is
turned ON.
Operation can be set to stop or continue the comparison operation when the high-
speed counter is reset.

11-2 High-speed Counter Inputs

11-2-1 Pulse Input Methods Settings
There are four pulse input methods for high-speed counters.
Differential phase input (4)
Up/Down pulse input
Pulse+direction input
Increment Pulse Input

The Increment Pulse Input counts signals on a single-phase pulse input. Only incrementing the count is
possible in this mode.
Conditions for Incrementing
the Count
Pulse Pulse Count value

OFFON Increment
ON No change
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 ONOFF No change
OFF No change
Only rising edges are counted.
Differential Phase Input (4)

The Differential Phase Input uses two phase signals (phase A and phase B) and increments/decre-
ments the count according to the status of Differential Phase (4).
Conditions for Incrementing/
Decrementing the Count
Phase A Phase A Phase B Count value

OFFON OFF Increment
Phase B ON OFFON Increment
ONOFF ON Increment
OFF ONOFF Increment
4 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 OFF OFFON Decrement
OFFON ON Decrement
ON ONOFF Decrement
ONOFF OFF Decrement
Up/Down Pulse Input

The Up/Down Pulse Input uses two signals, an increment pulse and a decrement pulse.
Increment Decrement Increment Count value
pulse pulse pulse
OFFON OFF Decrement
Decrement ON OFFON Increment
pulse ONOFF ON No change
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 OFF ONOFF No change
OFF OFFON Increment
OFFON ON Decrement
ON ONOFF No change
ONOFF OFF No change
The count is incremented for each increment
pulse and decremented for each decrement
pulse.


Pulse + Direction Input
The Pulse + Direction Input uses a direction signal and a pulse signal. The count is incremented or dec-
remented depending on the status (ON or OFF) of the direction signal.
Pulse Direction Pulse Count value
Direction
OFFON OFF No change 11
ON OFFON Increment
ONOFF ON No change
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 OFF ONOFF No change
11-2-1 Pulse Input Methods Settings

OFF OFFON Decrement
OFFON ON No change
ON ONOFF No change
ONOFF OFF No change
The count is incremented when the
direction signal is ON and
decremented when it is OFF.

Interval of Phase-Z input signal
Do not input the phase-Z signal at a high frequency. The interval of phase-Z input signal must
be longer than 500s.
If the phase-Z signal is input at a high frequency, cycle time exceeded error may occur.
Phase-Z signal
500s min.
Interval of direction changing

If the input setting is set for pulse+direction inputs, do not change the direction at a high fre-
quency. The interval of direction signal ON or OFF must be longer than 3ms plus the sum of
execution time for interrupt tasks that may possibly happen at the same time. (For CPU Unit
version 1.0 or earlier, the interval must be longer than 6 ms plus the sum of execution time for
interrupt tasks that may possibly happen at the same time.)
The sum of execution time for interrupt tasks in one cycle is stored in A442.
If the direction signal is ON or OFF at a high frequency, count values may not agree.
Pulse
Direction
3ms plus the sum of execution time

for interrupt tasks
Interval of pulse input after direction changing

If the input setting is set for pulse+direction inputs, the Interval of pulse input after the direction
changing must be longer than 500s.
If the pulse is output immediately after the direction changing, count values may not agree.
Pulse
Direction
500s min.

The count of a high-speed counter can be monitored to see if it is currently being incremented or
decremented. The count in the current cycle is compared with the count in the previous cycle to
determine if it is being incremented or decremented.
The results are reflected in the High-speed Counter Count Direction Flags.
Address of High-speed
High-speed counter
Counter Count Direction Flag
High-speed counter 0 A274.10
High-speed counter 5* A327.10
* High-speed counter 5 is not supported by E10 CPU Units.
11-2-2 Counting Ranges Settings

The following counting modes can be selected for high-speed counters: Linear Mode that counts in a
fixed range and Circular (Ring) Mode that counts in a set range of any maximum value.
Linear Mode
Input pulses can be counted in the range between the lower limit and upper limit values. If the pulse
count goes beyond the lower/upper limit, an underflow/overflow will occur and counting will stop.
Increment Mode
0 4294967295
(000000 Hex) (FFFFFFFF Hex)
PV overflow
Up/Down Mode
-2147483648 0 +2147483647
(80000000 Hex) (00000000 Hex) (7FFFFFFF Hex)
PV underflow PV overflow


Circular (Ring) Mode
Input pulses are counted in a loop within the set range.
If the count is incremented from the maximum ring count, the count will be reset to 0 automatically
and incrementing will continue.
If the count is decremented from 0, the count will be set to the maximum ring count automatically and
decrementing will continue.
11
Consequently, underflows and overflows cannot occur when Ring Mode is used.
Count value
11-2-3 Reset Methods

2 32-1
Maximum ring
count
Maximum Ring Count

Use the PLC Setup to set the maximum ring count (Circular Max. Count), which is the maximum
value of the input pulse counting range. The maximum ring count can be set to any value between
0000 0001 and FFFF FFFF hex (1 to 4,294,967,295 decimal).

There are no negative values in Ring Mode.
If the maximum ring count is set to 0 in the PLC Setup, the counter will operate with a maxi-
mum ring count of FFFF FFFF hex.
11-2-3 Reset Methods

It is called reset that a high-speed counters PV is set to 0.
There are two reset methods
Phase-Z signal + software reset
software reset
Phase-Z Signal + Software Reset

The high-speed counters PV is reset when the phase-Z signal (reset input) goes from OFF to ON while
the corresponding High-speed Counter Reset Bit (A531.00 to A531.05) is ON.
The CPU Unit recognizes the ON status of the High-speed Counter Reset Bit only at the beginning of
the PLC cycle during the overseeing processes. Consequently, when the Reset Bit is turned ON in the
ladder program, the phase-Z signal does not become effective until the next PLC cycle.
One cycle
Phase Z
Reset bit
PV not PV reset PV reset PV reset PV not reset PV reset

reset
Note The phase-Z signal cannot be used if an incremental counter is specified. Only a software reset can be used.

Software Reset
The high-speed counters PV is reset when the corresponding High-speed Counter Reset Bit (A531.00
to A531.05) goes from OFF to ON.
The CPU Unit recognizes the OFF-to-ON transition of the High-speed Counter Reset Bit only at the begin-
ning of the PLC cycle during the overseeing processes. Reset processing is performed at the same time.
The OFF-to-ON transition will not be recognized if the Reset Bit goes OFF again within the same cycle.
One cycle
Reset bit
PV reset PV not reset PV not reset PV not reset
The comparison operation can be set to stop or continue when a high-speed counter is reset.
This enables applications where the comparison operation can be restarted from a counter PV of
0 when the counter is reset.
11-2-4 Reading the Present Value

The present value of a high-speed counter can be read in the following two ways.
Value refreshed at the I/O refresh timing Read PV from Auxiliary Area.
Value updated when a ladder program is executed Read PV by executing a PRV instruction.
Reading the Value Refreshed at the I/O Refresh Timing

The PV that is stored in the following words can be read using the MOVL instruction or other instructions.
Read PV Auxiliary Area word
High-speed counter 0 A271 (upper digits) and A270 (lower digits)
High-speed counter 5* A325 (upper digits) and A324 (lower digits)
Reading the Value When a Ladder Program is Executed
Reading the High-speed Counter PV with a PRV Instruction

Execution condition
@PRV
#0010 C1: Port specifier (example for high-speed counter input 0 (fixed))
#0000 C2: Control data (for reading PV)
D100 S: First destination word
15 0
D100 PV data lower bytes

High-speed counter PV that was read
D101 PV data upper bytes


11-2-5 Frequency Measurement
Overview
This function measures the frequency of the high-speed counter (input pulses.)
The input pulse frequency can be read by executing the PRV instruction. The measured frequency is
output in 8-digit hexadecimal and expressed in Hz. The frequency measurement function can be used 11
with high-speed counter 0 only.
The frequency can be measured while a high-speed counter 0 comparison operation is in progress.
11-2-5 Frequency Measurement

Frequency measurement can be performed at the same time as functions such as the high-speed
counter and pulse output without affecting the performance of those functions.
Reading the High-speed Counter Frequency with a PRV Instruction

Execution condition
@PRV
#0010 C1: Port specifier (example for high-speed counter input 0 (fixed))
#0013 C2: Control data for reading frequency (10-ms sampling)
D100 S: First destination word
15 0
Present frequency
D100 data lower bytes High-speed counter frequency
D101
Present frequency that was read
data upper bytes

The frequency measurement function can be used with high-speed counter 0 only.
Specifications
Item Specifications
Number of frequency mea- 1 input (high-speed counter 0 only)
surement inputs
Frequency measurement High-speed counter 0:
range Differential phase inputs: 0 to 50 kHz
All other input modes: 0 to 100 kHz*
Measurement method Execution of the PRV instruction
Stored data Unit Hz
Output data Differential phase input: 0000 0000 to 0003 0D40 hex
range All other input modes: 0000 0000 to 0001 86A0 hex
* If the frequency exceeds the maximum value, the maximum value will be stored.

11-3 High-speed Counter Interrupts

High-speed counter interrupts can be used with any model of CP1E CPU Unit.
11-3-1 Overview
This function counts input pulses with the CPU Units built-in high-speed counter and executes an inter-
rupt task when the count reaches the preset value or falls within a preset range (target-value or zone
comparison). An interrupt task between 0 and 15 can be allocated with the CTBL instruction.
Rotary Encoder
Built-in input
Present value Present value matches set target value
Time
Interrupt task
Cyclic tasks
(ladder programs) Interrupt occurs Ladder diagram
Cycle
END
END
I/O refresh
Target value comparison Range comparison

The specified interrupt program can be started when the The specified interrupt program can be started when the
present value of the high-speed counter matches a target present value of the high-speed counter enters a set range.
value.
Instruction execution Instruction execution

condition condition
CTBL instruction executed CTBL instruction executed

High-speed High-speed
Counter Unit Counter Unit
High-speed counter PV High-speed counter PV
Target value 1
Target value range
Target value 2
0 0
Time Time
Counting enabled Counting enabled
Cyclic task Interrupted Cyclic task Interrupted Cyclic task Cyclic task Interrupted Cyclic task Interrupted Cyclic task
execution execution execution execution execution execution
Interrupt task Interrupt task Interrupt task Interrupt task

execution execution execution execution

11-3 High-speed Counter

Flow of Operation
Interrupts
1 PLC Setup
Enable the required high-speed counters.
Select the Use high speed counter Check Box for
high-speed counters 0 to 5. Set the input setting,
counting mode and reset method on the Built-in
Tab Page of the PLC Setup using the CX-Pro-
grammer. 11
Terminals 00 to 06 on the 0CH terminal block can
be used for high-speed counters. High-speed
counters 0 to 5 correspond to terminals 00 to 05.
11-3-1 Overview
2 Interrupt task
Write a program for interrupt tasks 0 to 15.
Set the comparison values for the high-speed

Create
Execution of CTBL and counter and the interrupt tasks (0 to 15) to be
ladder
INI instructions in a started using the CTBL instruction.
program
cyclic task Start the comparison using the INI instruction.
The comparison can be started simultaneously
when registering the comparison values using
the CTBL instruction.
High-speed Counter Interrupts Settings

Setting in PLC Setup Interrupt task
Instruction CTBL port specifier (C1)
on Built-in Input Tab Page number
High-speed counter 0 Select Use Check CTBL #0000 0 to 15 (Specified by
High-speed counter 1 Box. #0001 user.)
High-speed counter 2 #0002

High-speed counter 5* #0005

A built-in input cannot be used as a normal input, interrupt input, or quick-response input if it is
being used as a high-speed counter input. Refer to 8-3-3 Allocating Built-in Input Terminals for
details.

PLC Setup
Click the Built-in Input Tab and select the Use high-speed counter Check Box for high-speed counters 0
to 5, and then set the counting mode, reset method, and input setting.
Refer to 11-1-2 Flow of Operation in Page 11-3 for details.
Determining High-speed Counter

High-speed counters 0 to 5 can be used for high-speed counter interrupts.
Refer to 8-3-3 Allocating Built-in Input Terminals for high-speed counter interrupt.
Refer to 10-1 Interrupts for the interrupts excluding high-speed counter interrupts.
Writing the Interrupt Task Program

Create programs for interrupt tasks 0 to 15, which are executed for the corresponding high-speed
counter interrupts. Right-click a program in the CX-programmer and select Properties. Select any
interrupt task in the Task type Field of the Program Properties Dialog Box.


Execution of CTBL and INI Instructions for Cyclic Task
Execute the instructions in the following order.
Register the comparison table with the CTBL (COMPARISON
Register the comparison table TABLE LOAD) instruction. Specify the interrupt tasks to be
Interrupts
started in this step.
Start comparison with the CTBL (COMPARISON TABLE

Start comparison LOAD) or INI (MODE CONTROL) instruction. Here, high-
speed counter interrupts will be valid.
11
11-3-2 Present Value Comparison

Stop with the INI (MODE CONTROL) instruction.
Stop comparison
Refer to 11-3-2 Present Value Comparison for details.

The comparison of the high-speed counter PV has the following two ways: Target Value Comparison
and Range Comparison.
Target Value Comparison

The specified interrupt task is executed when the high-speed counter PV matches a target value regis-
tered in the table.
The comparison conditions (target values and counting directions) are registered in the comparison
table along with the corresponding interrupt task number. The specified interrupt task will be exe-
cuted when the high-speed counter PV matches the registered target value.
Comparison is executed in the order set in the comparison table. Once comparison has cycled
through the comparison table, it will return and wait for a match with the first target value again.
The following examples show the operation of an interrupt task for a comparison table.
Example 1
High-speed counter PV
Comparison table
Number of values = 4
Target value 4 Target value 1 (when counting up)
Target value 3
Comparison is Interrupt task = 0
executed according Target value 2 (when counting up)
to the order of the Interrupt task = 1
Target value 2
values in the table. Target value 3 (when counting up)
Interrupt task = 5
Interrupt task = 8
Time
Interrupt task number that is started. No.0 No.1 No.5 No.8 No.0

Example 2
High-speed counter PV
Comparison table
Number of values = 4
Target value 2
Comparison is Interrupt task = 0
executed according Target value 2 (when counting down)
to the order of the Interrupt task = 1
Target value 3
values in the table. Target value 3 (when counting down)
Interrupt task = 5
Target value 4 Target value 4 (when counting down)
Interrupt task = 8
Time
Interrupt task number that is started. No.0 No.1 No.5 No.8
Up to 6 target values (between 1 and 6) can be registered in the comparison table.

A different interrupt task can be registered for each target value.
If the PV is changed, the changed PV will be compared with the target values in the table, even if the
PV is changed while the target value comparison operation is in progress.

When the count direction (incrementing/decrementing) changes at a PV that matches a target
value or a count after a target value, the next target value cannot be matched in that direction.
Set the target values so that they do not occur at the peak or trough of count value changes.
Bad OK
Match / Target value + 1 Target value + 2
Target value 1 Target value 1
Target value 2 Target value 2
Match / Target value + 1 Target value + 2
The maximum response frequencies of the high-speed counters are given in the following table.
Item E-type CPU Unit N/NA-type CPU Unit
Incremental pulse 10kHz 100kHz
Up and down pulses
High-speed counter 0
Pulse plus direction
Differential phase (4) 5kHz 50kHz
Incremental pulse 10kHz 100kHz
Up and down pulses 10kHz
High-speed counter 1
Pulse plus direction 100kHz
Differential phase (4) 5kHz 5kHz
High-speed counter 2 Incremental pulse 10kHz 10kHz
High-speed counter 3 Incremental pulse
High-speed counter 4 Incremental pulse
High-speed counter 5* Incremental pulse


There are restrictions on the maximum response frequencies of the high-speed counters
Interrupts
when using target matching.
Use the counters for target matching under the frequencies in the following table.
If the pulse frequencies input to the high-speed counters are higher than those in the table,
count values may not agree.
For unit version 1.0

11
Increment pulse
Counter numbers for
Pulse plus direction Differential phase (4)

target matching
Up and down pulses
More than 1 point 20kHz max. 5kHz max.
For unit version 1.1

Increment pulse
Enabling/Disabling Counter numbers for
Pulse plus direction Differential phase (4)
pulse outputs target matching
Up and down pulses
Disabling pulse Only one point 100kHz max. 30kHz max.
outputs
More than two points 60kHz max. 15kHz max.
Enabling pulse outputs Only one point 50kHz max. 10kHz max.
More than two points 40kHz max.
When using target matching, the interval between interrupts for target matches and the
interval between interrupts for the next target matches after the count direction (increment-
ing/decrementing) changing must be longer than 3 ms plus the sum of execution time for
interrupt tasks that may possibly happen at the same time.
The sum of execution time for interrupt tasks in one cycle is stored in A442. (For CPU Unit
version 1.0 or earlier, the interval must be longer than 6 ms plus the sum of execution time
for interrupt tasks that may possibly happen at the same time and the data in A442 is unsta-
ble.)
If the input setting is set for up/down pulse inputs or differential phase inputs (4), do not
change the direction at a high frequency when using target matching. If changing direction
at a high frequency, the interval of direction changing must be longer than 500s.
If changing direction at a high frequency when using target matching, cycle time exceeded
error may occur.
There is no restriction when target matching is not used.
Example: Up/down pulse inputs

Increment Pulse
Decrement Pulse
9 10 11 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 6 7 8 9
500s min.
Cycle time exceeded error occurs when using target matching

When using target matching, if the encoder input values change fast due to vibration, the
direction changing may be at a high frequency, cycle time exceeded error may occur as a
result. At this time, take measures to stabilize the encoder inputs or use range comparison.

Range Comparison
The specified interrupt task is executed when the high-speed counter PV is within the range defined by
the upper and lower limit values.
The comparison conditions (upper and lower limits of the range) are registered in the comparison
table along with the corresponding interrupt task number. The specified interrupt task will be exe-
cuted once when the high-speed counter PV is in the range (Lower limit PV Upper limit).
High-speed counter PV Comparison table

Upper limit 1
Upper limit 1 Lower limit 1
Lower limit 1 Interrupt task = 1
Comparison is executed Upper limit 2
regardless of the order of Lower limit 2
the ranges in the table. Interrupt task = 2
Upper limit 2
Lower limit 2
Time
Interrupt task number to execute No.2 No.1 No.1 No.2
A total of 6 ranges (upper and lower limits) are registered in the comparison table.
The ranges can overlap.
A different interrupt task can be registered for each range.
The counter PV is compared with the 6 ranges once each cycle.
The interrupt task is executed just once when the comparison condition goes from unmet to met.
When more than one comparison condition is met in a cycle, the first interrupt task in the table
will be executed in that cycle. The next interrupt task in the table will be executed in the next
cycle.
The range comparison table can be used without starting an interrupt task when the comparison
condition is met. The range comparison function can be useful when you just want to know
whether or not the high-speed counter PV is within a particular range.
Use the Range Comparison Condition Met Flags to determine whether the high-speed counter
PV is within a registered range.


11-3-3 High-speed Counter Interrupt Instruction
Interrupts
COMPARISON TABLE LOAD Instruction: CTBL
The CTBL instruction compares the PV of a high-speed counter (0 to 5) to target values or ranges and
executes the corresponding interrupt task (0 to 15) when the specified condition is met.
Execution condition
11
@CTBL
C1: Port specifier

C1
C2 C2: Control data
S S: First comparison table word
Operand Settings
C1 Port specifier #0000 High-speed counter 0
~
~
#0005 High-speed counter 5

C2 Control data #0000 Registers a target-value comparison table and starts the com-
parison operation.
#0001 Registers a range comparison table and starts the comparison
operation.
#0002 Registers a target-value comparison table.
#0003 Registers a range comparison table.
S First compari- Specifies the first word address of the comparison table, which is described
son table word below.
Contents of the Comparison Table

Target-value Comparison Table
Depending on the number of target values in the table, the target-value comparison table requires
a continuous block of 4 to 19 words.
15 0
S Number of target values 0001 to 0006 hex (1 to 6 target values)
S+1 Lower word of target value 1

00000000 to FFFFFFFF hex
S+2 Upper word of target value 1
S+3 Interrupt task number for target value 1
S+16 Lower word of target value 6

S+17 Upper word of target value 6
S+18 Interrupt task number for target value 6
Interrupt Task Number

15 14 12 11 87 4 3 0
0 0 0 0
Interrupt task number

Direction 00 to 0F hex (0 to 15)
OFF: Incrementing,
ON: Decrementing

Range Comparison Table

The range comparison table requires a continuous block of 30 words for comparison conditions 1
to 6 require 5 words each (two words for the upper range value, two words for the lower range
value, and one word for the interrupt task number).
15 0
S Lower word of range 1 lower limit
0000 0000 to FFFF FFFF hex (See note.)
S+1 Upper word of range 1 lower limit
S+2 Lower word of range 1 upper limit
S+3 Upper word of range 1 upper limit
Range 1 interrupt task number
S+25 Lower word of range 6 lower limit

S+26 Upper word of range 6 lower limit
S+27 Lower word of range 6 upper limit
S+28 Upper word of range 6 upper limit
S+29 Range 6 interrupt task number

0000 to 000F hex: Interrupt task number 0 to 15
AAAA hex: Do not execute interrupt task.
FFFF hex: Ignore the settings for this range.
Note Always set the upper limit greater than or equal to the lower limit for any one range.
MODE CONTROL Instruction: INI

The INI instruction is used for the following items.
Starting and stopping comparison with the high-speed counter comparison table
Use the CTBL instruction to register the target value or range comparison table before using INI to
start or stop comparison.
If the comparison is started simultaneously when registering the comparison table and then the
high-speed counter interrupts are always valid, the INI instruction is not required.
Changing the PV of a High-speed Counter
Execution condition
@INI
C1 C1: Port specifier
C2 C2: Control data
S S: First word of new PV
Operand Settings
C1 Port specifier #0010 High-speed counter 0
~
~
#0015 High-speed counter 5

C2 Control data #0000 Start comparison.
#0001 Stop comparison.
#0002 Change the PV.
S First word of S contains the first word of the new PV when C is set to #0002
new PV (change the PV).


Example 1: Target Value Comparison
In this example, high-speed counter 0 operates in linear mode and starts interrupt task 10 when the
Interrupts
PV reaches 30,000 (0000 7530 hex) and starts interrupt task 11 when the PV reaches 20,000 (0000
4E20 hex).
1 Set high-speed counter 0 in the PLC Setup's Built-in Input Tab.

11
Item Setting
High-speed counter 0 Use counter

Counting mode Linear mode
Circular Max. Count
Reset method Software reset
Input Setting Up/Down inputs
2 Set the target-value comparison table in words D1000 to D1006.

Word Setting Function
D1000 #0002 Number of target values = 2
D1001 #7530 Rightmost 4 digits of the target value 1 data (30000) Target value =
D1002 #0000 Leftmost 4 digits of the target value 1 data (30000) 30,000(0000 7530 hex)
D1003 #000A Target value 1
Bit 15: 0 (incrementing)
Bits 00 to 07: A hex (interrupt task number 10)
D1004 #4E20 Rightmost 4 digits of the target value 2 data (20000) Target value =
D1005 #0000 Leftmost 4 digits of the target value 2 data (20000) 20,000(0000 4E20 hex)
D1006 #800B Target value 2
Bit 15: 1 (decrementing)
Bits 00 to 07: B hex (interrupt task number 11)
3 Create the programs for interrupt tasks 10 and 11.
4 Use the CTBL instruction to start the comparison operation with high-speed counter 0 and inter-
rupt tasks 10 and 11.
W0.00
@CTBL
#0000 Use high-speed counter 0.
#0000 Register a target-value comparison
D1000 table and start comparison operation.
First comparison table word.
When execution condition W0.00 turns ON, the comparison starts with high-speed counter 0.
When the PV of high speed counter 0 reaches 30,000, cyclic task execution is interrupted, and
interrupt task 10 is executed.
When the PV of high speed counter 0 reaches 20,000, cyclic task execution is interrupted, and
interrupt task 11 is executed.
When interrupt task 10 or 11 execution has been completed, execution of the interrupted cyclic
task resumes.

W0.00
0.00
0.01
Upper limit: 30,000 (7530 Hex)

High-speed counter 0 PV
(in A270 and A271)
Lower limit: 20,000 (4E20 Hex)
Counting enabled
Cyclic task Processing Cyclic task Processing Cyclic task

execution interrupted execution interrupted execution
Interrupt task Interrupt task

10 execution 11 execution
Example 2: Range Comparison

In this example, high-speed counter 1 operates in circular (ring) mode and starts interrupt task 12
when the PV is between 25,000 (0000 61A8 hex) and 25,500 (0000 639C hex).
The maximum ring count is set to 50,000 (0000 C350 hex).
1 Set high-speed counter 1 on the PLC Setups Built-in Input Tab Page.
Item Setting
High-speed counter 1 Use counter
Counting mode Circular mode
Circular Max. Count 50,000
Reset method Software reset (continue comparing)
Input Setting Up/Down inputs
2 Set the range comparison table starting at word D2000. Even though range 1 is the only range
being used, all 30 words must still be dedicated to the range comparison table.
Word Setting Function
D2000 #61A8 Rightmost 4 digits of range 1 lower Lower limit value: 25,000
limit
D2001 #0000 Leftmost 4 digits of range 1 lower limit
D2002 #639C Rightmost 4 digits of range 1 upper Upper limit value: 25,500
limit
D2003 #0000 Leftmost 4 digits of range 1 upper limit
D2004 #000C Range 1 interrupt task number = 12 (C hex)
D2005 All Range 2 lower and upper limit values Range 2 settings
to #0000 (Not used and do not need to be set.)
D2008
D2009 #FFFF Disables range 2.
~
D2014 #FFFF Set the fifth word for ranges 3 to 6 (listed at left) to #FFFF (Range
D2019 settings are invalid) to disable those ranges.
D2024
D2029


3 Create the program for interrupt task 12.
4 Use the CTBL instruction to start the comparison operation with high-speed counter 1 and inter-
Interrupts
rupt task 12.
W0.00
@CTBL
#0001 Use high-speed counter 1.
#0001 Register a range comparison table 11
D2000 and start comparison operation.
First comparison table word.

When execution condition W0.00 turns ON, the comparison starts with high-speed counter 1.
When the PV of high speed counter 1 is between 25,000 and 25,500, cyclic task execution is
interrupted, and interrupt task 12 is executed.
When interrupt task 12 execution is completed, execution of the interrupted cyclic task resumes.
W0.00
0.02
0.03
High-speed counter 1 PV
(in A272 and A273)
Upper limit: 25,500 (639C hex)
Lower limit: 25,000 (61A8 hex)
Counting enabled
Cyclic task Processing Cyclic task Processing Cyclic task

execution interrupted execution interrupted execution
Interrupt task Interrupt task

12 execution 12 execution

11-4 Related Auxiliary Area Bits and Words
Bits and Words Allocated in the Auxiliary Area

High- High- High- High- High- High-
Contents speed speed speed speed speed speed
counter 0 counter 1 counter 2 counter 3 counter 4 counter 5*
High-speed Leftmost 4 digits A271 A273 A317 A319 A323 A325
counter PV Rightmost 4 digits A270 A272 A316 A318 A322 A324
storage
words
Range Range 1 Compari- A274.00 A275.00 A320.00 A321.00 A326.00 A327.00
Comparison son Condition Met
Condition Flag (ON for
Met Flags match.)
Range 2 Compari- A274.01 A275.01 A320.01 A321.01 A326.01 A327.01
son Condition Met
Flag (ON for
match.)
son Condition Met
Flag (ON for
match.)
son Condition Met
Flag (ON for
match.)
son Condition Met
Flag (ON for
match.)
son Condition Met
Flag (ON for
match.)
Comparison ON when a com- A274.08 A275.08 A320.08 A321.08 A326.08 A327.08
In-progress parison operation
Flags is being executed
for the high-speed
counter.
Overflow/ ON when an over- A274.09 A275.09 A320.09 A321.09 A326.09 A327.09
Underflow flow or underflow
Flags has occurred in
the high-speed
counters PV.
Count Direc- 0: Decrementing A274.10 A275.10 A320.10 A321.10 A326.10 A327.10
tion Flags 1: Incrementing
High-speed ON at a software A531.00 A531.01 A531.02 A531.03 A531.04 A531.05
Counter reset
Reset Flags

11-5 Application Example

Using a Rotary Encoder to Measure Positions
Functions Used: High-speed Counting for a Built-in Input 11

A high-speed counter input can be used by connecting a rotary encoder to a built-in input. A CP1E
CPU Unit is equipped with more than one high-speed counter input, making it possible to control
devices for multiple axes with a single PLC.
High-speed counters can be used for high-speed processing, using either target value comparison
or range comparison to create interrupts. Interrupt tasks are executed when the counter value
reaches a specific target value or range.
Operation Overview
A sheet feeder is controlled to feed constant lengths in a given direction, e.g., for vacuum packing of
food products.
Motor speed
Motor start input:

CIO 0.02
Motor run output:
CIO 100.00
Motor low speed
output: CIO 100.01
Normal stop position
output: CIO 100.02
Error stop position
output: CIO 100.03
3550
Number of pulses 3500
counted by high- 3000
speed counter (Pulses)
(A270)
The High-speed Counter Reset Bit

(A531.00) is turned ON in the ladder
program as soon a operation starts
and the reset process is performed.
While the pulse count is between 3,500 and 3,550, normal stop position output (CIO 100.02) will be
ON. If the pulse count exceeds 3550, the error stop position output (CIO 100.03) will turn ON.

System Configuration
Wiring Example
Encoder (power Black Phase A

supply: 24 VDC)
White Phase B
Orange Phase Z
Brown
Example: E6B2-CWZ6C
NPN open-collector output Blue
24 VDC
power supply
Start motor
100 to 240 VAC
CP1E-N20DR-A
Motor running: CIO 100.00

Error stop
Motor low speed output: CIO 100.01 position output:
CIO 100.03
(indicator)
Example: Inverter
Normal stop
position output:
CIO 100.02
(indicator)
PLC Setup
Use the following procedure to enable high-speed counter 0.
1 Open the PLC Settings Dialog Box.
2 Click the Built-in Input Tab.


3 Select the Use high speed counter 0 Check Box for high-speed counter 0.
4 Select Linear Mode for the counting mode.
5 Select Software reset (comparing) for the reset method.
6 Select Differential phase input for the input setting.

11
7 Close the PLC Settings Dialog Box.
8 Restart the PLC.

The changes made to the PLC Setup is applied.
Programming Example 1
In this example, the CTBL (COMPARISON TABLE LOAD) instruction is used to create an interrupt
when the target value is reached. Slowing and stopping are executed as interrupt tasks, allowing
high-speed processes to be executed without affecting the cycle time.
Ladder Program
Use the CTBL instruction to execute interrupt tasks when the target positions are reached.
Reset with motor stopped

Motor start
The High-speed Counter Reset

Bit 0 is turned ON and the reset
process is performed
Specifies high-speed counter 0

Specifies comparision with target
values and starts comparison
First word of comparision table
Turns ON motor run output
After motor stops, the stop position is checked.

The stop position is normal if the
present value of the high-speed
counter (A270) is between 3500
Motor stopped Normal stop (0DAC hex) and 3550 (0DDE hex).
&3500 &3550 position
The stop position is in error if

the present value of the high-
speed counter (A270) is
Error stop
greater than 3550 (0DDE hex).
position
&3550

When the PV of the high-speed counter matches target value 1 (3000), interrupt task 4 is executed.
Interrupt task 4
Turns ON the motor
low speed output
When the present vale of the high-speed counter matches target value 2 (3500), interrupt task 5 is
executed.
Turns OFF the

motor run output
Interrupt task 5
Turns OFF the motor
low speed output
Turns OFF the motor

stopped output
DM Area Setup
The comparison table for the CTBL (COMPARISON TABLE LOAD) instruction is set in D600 through
D606.
Word Value Contents
D600 0002 Number of target values: 2
D601 0BB8 Target value 1: 3000 (BB8 hex)
D602 0000
D603 0004 Target value 1: Interrupt task No.4
D604 0DAC Target value 2: 3500 (DAC hex)
D605 0000
D606 0005 Target value 2: Interrupt task No.5

12
12
Pulse Outputs
This section describes positioning functions such as trapezoidal control, jogging, and
origin searches.
12-1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

12-1-1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
12-1-2 Flow of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
12-1-3 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10
12-2 Positioning Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
12-2-1 Positioning Control Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
12-2-2 Relative Positioning and Absolute Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
12-3 Jogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
12-3-1 High-speed Jogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
12-3-2 Low-speed Jogging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
12-4 Defining Origin Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18
12-4-1 Origin Searches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18
12-4-3 Settings in PLC Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19
12-4-4 Origin Search Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-22
12-4-5 Origin Search Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-23
12-4-6 Origin Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-30
12-4-7 Changing the Present Value of the Pulse Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-31
12-5 Reading the Pulse Output Present Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-32
12-6 Related Auxiliary Area Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-33
12-7 Application Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-34
12-7-1 Vertically Conveying PCBs (Multiple Progressive Positioning) . . . . . . . . . . . 12-34
12-7-2 Feeding Wrapping Material: Interrupt Feeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-39
12-8 Precautions when Using Pulse Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-42
12-9 Pulse Output Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-47
12-9-1 Speed Control (Continuous Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-47
12-9-2 Positioning Control (Independent Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-49

12 Pulse Outputs
12-1 Overview
Pulse outputs can be used only with the CP1E N/NA-type CPU Unit with transistor outputs.
12-1-1 Overview
Pulse outputs can be output from the CPU Unit's built-in outputs using instructions to perform position-
ing or speed control with a servomotor or a stepping motor that accepts pulse inputs. It is also possible
to perform origin searches or origin returns.
Trapezoidal control
Frequency (speed)
Travel distance
Built-in output
Pulse output Time
Jogging
Frequency (speed)
Servo Drive (or
stepping driver)
Travel distance
Time
Servomotor (or
stepping motor) Origin search
Frequency (speed)
Travel distance
Time
Positioning is performed with a servomotor or stepping motor in the following configuration.
CP1E
Trapezoidal control with a

PLS2 instruction
PLS2
Jogging with a SPED

Servo Drive (or
instruction
stepping driver)
SPED
Jogging with an ACC Pulse output

instruction
ACC
Pulse output PV in
Auxiliary Area
Origin search with ORG Origin input

Origin proximity input instruction (phase-Z)
(Positioning
CW limit input ORG completed)
CCW limit input Error counter

reset

12 Pulse Outputs
1 PLC Setup
Setting is required for the following situations:
Performing an origin search.
Using the Limit Input Signal as an input to func-
12-1 Overview
tions other than origin searches.
2 Create ladder Cyclic task,

Execute instructions related to pulse control.
Set pulse output 0 or 1, and whether to use terminals
program interrupt task 00 and 02, or 01 and 03 on the CIO 100 terminal
block for pulse outputs.
12
PLC Setup

To perform an origin search or to use a Limit Input Signal as an input to a function other than origin
search, set the parameters on the Pulse Output 0 and Pulse Output 1 Tab Pages in the PLC Setup.
Pulse Output 0 or 1 Tab Page

Item Setting Description
Base Undefined Origin Hold When a Limit Input Signal is input, the pulse output is
Settings stopped and the previous status is held.
Undefined When a Limit Input Signal is input, the pulse output is
stopped and origin becomes undefined.
Limit Input Signal Search Only The CW/CCW Limit Input Signal is used for origin
Operation searches only.
Always The CW/CCW Limit Input Signal is used by functions
other than origin search.
Limit Input Signal NC Select when using NC contacts for the Limit Input Signal.
NO Select when using NO contacts for the Limit Input Signal.
Search/Return Ini- Set the motors starting speed when performing an origin search. Specified in
tial Speed pulses per second (pps).
Note The power supply must be restarted after the PLC Setup is transferred in order to enable the pulse output
settings.
Refer to 12-4 Defining Origin Position for origin search settings in the PLC Setup.

12 Pulse Outputs
Setting the Pulse Output Port Number, Assigning Pulse Output

Terminals, and Wiring
Pulse Output Method
Only the following pulse output plus a direction output can be used as the pulse output method.
Pulses
Direction ON (=CW) OFF (=CCW)
Pulse Output Port Number and Output Terminals

The following terminals are used for pulse outputs according to the pulse output port number.
Output terminal Other functions that cannot be
Pulse output method
block used at the same time
Terminal
Terminal
block Pulse plus direction Normal output PWM output
number
label
CIO 100 00 Pulse output 0, pulse Normal output 0
01 Pulse output 1, pulse Normal output 1 PWM output
02 Pulse output 0, direction Normal output 2
Origin Searches
Use the following input and output terminals for origin searches.
Input Terminals
N20/30/40/60 or NA20 CPU Units
Input terminal block Setting in PLC Setup Other functions that cannot be used at the same time
High-speed
Terminal Quick- counter setting
Terminal Enable origin searches for Normal Interrupt
block response
number pulse outputs 0 and 1 inputs inputs Increment
label inputs
pulse input
CIO 0 06 Pulse 0, Origin input signal Normal Interrupt Quick- High-speed
input 6 input 6 response counter 5
input 6
07 Pulse 1, Origin input signal Normal Interrupt Quick-
input 7 input 7 response
input 7
: :
10 Pulse 0, Origin proximity Normal
input signal input 10
11 Pulse 1, Origin proximity Normal
input signal input 11

12 Pulse Outputs
N14 CPU Units

Input terminal block Setting in PLC Setup Other functions that cannot be used at the same time
High-speed
Terminal
Terminal Enable origin searches Normal Interrupt Quick-response counter setting
block
number for pulse outputs 0 and 1 inputs inputs inputs Increment
label
pulse input

12-1 Overview
CIO 0 03 Pulse 0, Origin proximity Normal Interrupt Quick-response
input signal input 3 input 3 input 3
: :
05 Pulse 1, Origin proximity Normal Interrupt Quick-response High-speed
input signal input 5 input 5 input 5 counter 4
06 Pulse 0, Origin input signal Normal Interrupt Quick-response High-speed
input 6 input 6 input 6 counter 5 12
07 Pulse 1, Origin input signal Normal Interrupt Quick-response
input 7 input 7 input 7

Output Terminals
Other functions that cannot
Output terminal block Setting in PLC Setup
be used at the same time
Terminal Terminal Enable origin searches for pulse
Normal outputs
block label number outputs 0 and 1
CIO 100 04 Pulse 0, Error counter reset output Normal output 4
05 Pulse 1, Error counter reset output Normal output 5
Note When the origin search is in operating mode 0, normal output 4 and 5 can be used at the same time.
Connecting the Servo Drive and External Sensors

Connections for Pulse Output 0
Terminal block Origin search
Terminal Terminal Addresses Signal
block number Operating mode 0 Operating mode 1 Operating mode 2
label
CIO 100 00 CIO 100.00 Stored in A276 Pulse Connect to Servo Drives pulse input (PULS).
and A277.
02 CIO 100.02 Direction Connect to Servo Drives direction input (SIGN).
Normal input The external signal must be CW limit Connect sensor to a normal input terminal.
received as an input and sensor
the input status must be
written to A540.08 in the
ladder program.
Normal input The external signal must be CCW limit Connect sensor to a normal input terminal.
ladder program.
CIO 0 03 CIO 0.03 Origin prox- Connect to sensor for N14 CPU Unit.
imity input
06 CIO 0.06 Origin input Connect to open- Connect to the Connect to the
collector output phase-Z signal from phase-Z signal from
from sensor or the Servo Drive. the Servo Drive.
other device.
10 CIO 0.10 Origin prox- Connect to sensor for N20/30/40/60 or NA20 CPU Unit.
imity input
CIO 100 04 CIO 100.04 Error Not used. Connect to error counter reset (ECRST)
counter of the Servo Drive.
reset output
Normal input The external signal must be Positioning Not used. Connect the Posi-
received as an input and completed tioning Completed
the input status must be input Signal (INP) from the
written to A540.10 in the Servo Drive to a nor-
ladder program. mal input terminal.

12 Pulse Outputs
Connections for Pulse Output 1

Terminal block Origin search
Terminal Addresses Signal
Terminal
block Operating mode 0 Operating mode 1 Operating mode 2
number
label
CIO 100 01 CIO 100.01 Stored in A278 Pulse Connect to Servo Drives pulse input (PULS).
and A279
03 CIO 100.03 Direction Connect to Servo Drives direction input (SIGN).
Normal input The external signal must be CW limit Connect sensor to a normal input terminal.
ladder program.
Normal input The external signal must be CCW limit Connect sensor to a normal input terminal.
ladder program.
CIO 0 05 CIO 0.05 Origin prox- Connect to sensor for N14 CPU Unit.
imity input
07 CIO 0.07 Origin input Connect to open- Connect to the Connect to the
collector output phase-Z signal phase-Z signal
from sensor or from the Servo from the Servo
other device. Drive. Drive.
11 CIO 0.11 Origin prox- Connect to sensor for N20/30/40/60 or NA20 CPU Unit.
imity input
CIO 100 05 CIO 100.05 Error counter Not used. Connect to error counter reset (ECRST)
reset output of the Servo Drive.
Normal input The external signal must be Positioning Not used. Connect the Posi-
received as an input and completed tioning Completed
the input status must be input Signal (INP) from
written to A541.10 in the the Servo Drive to
ladder program. a normal input ter-
minal.
Pulse Output Wiring

24-VDC
CP1E CPU Unit built-in output terminals power
supply
+ - Servo Drive for 24-VDC input
PULS
(+)
PULS
(-)
Pulse output SGN
(+)
SGN
(-)
Direction output
Instruction pulse mode = feed pulse

and forward/reverse signal

12 Pulse Outputs
Connecting to OMRON Servo Drives

Use the following cables to connect to an OMRON Servo Drive.
Cable mode: Indicates the cable length
OMRON Servo Drive
(1m or 2m)
12-1 Overview
SmartStep2 Series (pulse string input) R7A-CPBS
SmartStep Junior (pulse string input) R7A-CPZS
W Series (pulse string input) R88A-CPWS
G Series (pulse string input) R88A-CPGS
Set the Servo Drives command pulse mode to feed pulse and forward/reverse signals because the 12
method of pulse output from a CP1E CPU Unit is pulse + direction.

Connecting to a SmartStep2-series Servo Drive
Operating Mode 1
R7D-BP SmartStep2-series
Output terminal block R7A-CPBS PIN Signal
2k
Pulse output (CIO 100.00) 22 +PULS
Pulse 23 -PULS
2k
output 0 Direction output (CIO 100.02) 24 +SIGN
25 -SIGN
1 +24VIN
Error counter reset output 0 (CIO 100.04) 4 ECRST
COM
Input terminal block 14 GND

Pulse 0 origin input signal (CIO 0.06) 21 Z
COM
24-VDC Servo Drive
RUN input X1
Pulse 0 origin proximity input signal (CIO 0.10) 2 RUN
3 RESET
Servo Drive alarm
reset input
13 0GND
X1 9 /ALM
24-VDC
XB 11 BKIR
26 FG

12 Pulse Outputs
R7A-CPBS Cables for SmartStep2-series Servo Drives

No. Wire color (mark color) Symbol
1 Orange (Red 1) +24VIN
2 Orange (Black 1) RUN
3 Gray (Red 1) RESET
4 Gray (Black 1) ECRST/VSEL2
5 White (Red 1) GSEL/VZERO/TLSEL
6 White (Black 1) GESEL/VSEL1
7 Yellow (Red 1) NOT
8 Yellow (Black 1) POT
9 Pink (Red 1) /ALM
10 Pink (Black 1) INP/TGON
11 Orange (Red 2) BKIR
12 Orange (Black 2) WARN
13 Gray (Red 2) OGND
14 Gray (Black 2) GND
15 White (Red 2) +A
16 White (Black 2) -A
17 Yellow (Black 2) +B
18 Yellow (Red 2) -B
19 Pink (Red 2) +Z
20 Pink (Black 2) -Z
21 Orange (Red 3) Z
22 Gray (Red 3) +CW/+PULS/+FA
23 Gray (Black 3) -CW/-PULS/-FA
24 White (Red 3) +CCW/+SIGN/+FB
25 White (Black 3) -CCW/-SIGN/-FB
26 Orange (Black 3) FG
10126-3000PE Connector Plug (3M)

10326-52AD-008 Connector Plug (3M)
AWG24 13P UL20276 Cable
Each twisted pair has wires of the same color and number of marks.
R7A-CPZS Cables for SmartStep Junior Servo Drives

No. Wire / mark colors Symbol
1 Orange/Red (-) +CW/PULS
2 Orange/Black (-) -CW/PULS
3 Light gray/Red (-) +CCW/SIGN
4 Light gray/Black (-) -CCW/SIGN
5 White/Red (-) +24VIN
6 Yellow/Black (-) RUN
7 White/Black (-) OGND
8 Pink/Red (-) +ECRST
9 Pink/Black (-) -ECRST
10 Orange/Red (--) Z
11 Orange/Black (--) ZCOM
12 Light gray/Red (--) /ALM
13 Light gray/Black (--) BKIR
14 Yellow/Red (-) INP

12 Pulse Outputs
Executing Pulse Control Instructions in a Ladder Program

The pulse outputs are used by executing pulse control instructions in the ladder program.
Applicable Instructions
12-1 Overview
The following instructions are used.
Purpose Overview Instruction Reference
Performing trapezoidal control Performs trapezoidal pulse output PLS2: PULSE Refer to 12-2
control with independent accelera- OUTPUT
tion and deceleration rates.
(The number of pulses can be set.) 12
Jogging Without acceleration Performs pulse output control without SPED: SPEED Refer to 12-3
and deceleration acceleration or deceleration. OUTPUT

With acceleration Performs trapezoidal pulse output ACC:
and deceleration control with the same acceleration ACCELERATION
and deceleration rates. CONTROL
Performing origin searches Actually moves the motor with pulse ORG: ORIGIN Refer to 12-4-4
outputs and defines the machine ori- SEARCH
gin based on the Origin Proximity
Input and Origin Input signals.
Performing origin returns Returns to the origin position from ORG: ORIGIN Refer to 12-4-6
any position. SEARCH
Changing or reading the pulse Changes the PV of the pulse output. INI: MODE Refer to 12-4-7
output PV (This operation defines the origin CONTROL
location.)
Reads the PV of the pulse output. PRV: HIGH-SPEED Refer to 12-5
COUNTER PV READ
Outputting to the Auxiliary Area Using the OUT Instruction

The OUT instruction in the ladder program is used to write signals received from the CW limit sensor
and CCW limit sensor connected to normal inputs to the Auxiliary Area bits.
Normal input from CW Limit Input Signal
CW limit sensor A540.08 or A541.08
Normal input from CCW Limit Input Signal

CCW limit sensor A540.09 or A541.09
Bits Written in the Auxiliary Area

Auxiliary Area
Name
Word Bit
A540 08 Pulse Output 0 CW Limit Input Signal Signals must be received from exter-
09 Pulse Output 0 CCW Limit Input Signal nal sensors connected to normal
inputs and then written to the Auxil-
A541 08 Pulse Output 1 CW Limit Input Signal iary Area by the user program.
09 Pulse Output 1 CCW Limit Input Signal

12 Pulse Outputs
Item Specifications
Output mode Continuous mode (for speed control) or independent mode (for position con-
trol)
Positioning (independent mode) instruc- PULS and SPED, PULS and ACC, or PLS2
tions
Speed control (continuous mode) SPED or ACC
instructions
Origin (origin search and origin return) ORG
instructions
Output frequency 1 Hz to 100 kHz (1 Hz units), two pulse outputs
Frequency acceleration and decelera- Set in increments of 1 Hz for acceleration/deceleration rates from 1 to 65,535 Hz
tion rates (every 4 ms).
The acceleration and deceleration rates can be set independently only with
the PLS2 instruction.
Changing SVs during instruction execu- The target frequency, acceleration/deceleration rate, and target position can
tion be changed.
Duty factor Fixed at 50%
Pulse output method Pulse + direction outputs (CW/CCW outputs cannot be used.)
Number of output pulses Relative coordinates: 0000 0000 to 7FFF FFFF hex(Accelerating or decelerat-
ing in either direction: 2,147,483,647)
Absolute coordinates: 8000 0000 to 7FFF FFFF hex(-2,147,483,648 to
2,147,483,647)
Pulse output PVs relative/absolute Absolute coordinates are specified automatically when the origin location has
coordinate specifications been defined by setting the pulse output PV with the INI instruction or perform-
ing an origin search with the ORG instruction. Relative coordinates are used
when the origin location is undefined.
Relative pulse/absolute pulse specifica- The pulse type can be specified with an operand in the PULS or PLS2 instruc-
tions tion.
Note The absolute pulse specification can be used when absolute coordi-
nates are specified for the pulse output PV, i.e. the origin location has
been defined.The absolute pulse specification cannot be used when rel-
ative coordinates are specified, i.e. the origin location is undefined. An
instruction error will occur.
Pulse output PVs storage location The following Auxiliary Area words contain the pulse output PVs
Pulse output 0: A277 (leftmost 4 digits) and A276 (rightmost 4 digits)
Pulse output 1: A279 (leftmost 4 digits) and A278 (rightmost 4 digits)
The PVs are refreshed during regular I/O refreshing.

12 Pulse Outputs
12-2 Positioning Control

This section describes how to use pulse outputs with trapezoidal acceleration and deceleration when
using the PLS2 instruction.
12-2-1 Positioning Control Configuration

If the target frequency, starting frequency, acceleration and deceleration rate, direction are set before-
hand, the following time chart will perform trapezoidal positioning control.
Specify the output waveform in the instruction operands.
12
Target frequency Acceleration
12-2-1 Positioning Control Configuration

Deceleration rate
rate
Specified number of
pulses
Starting frequency
Target frequency 1 Hz to 100 kHz (in increments of 1 Hz)

Starting frequency 0 Hz to 100 kHz (in increments of 1 Hz)
Acceleration rate Set in increments of 1 Hz from 1 to 65,535 Hz (every 4 ms).
Deceleration rate Set in increments of 1 Hz from 1 to 65,535 Hz (every 4 ms).
Direction specification Set to CW or CCW.
Specified number of Relative coordinates: 0000 0000 to 7FFF FFFF hex (Incre-
pulses menting and decrementing in each direction: 2,147,483,647)
Absolute coordinates: 8000 0000 to 7FFF FFFF hex
(-2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647)
12-2-2 Relative Positioning and Absolute Positioning
Selecting Relative or Absolute Coordinates

The pulse output PVs coordinate system (absolute or relative) is selected automatically, as follows:
When the origin is undefined, the system operates in relative coordinates.
When the origin has been defined, the system operates in absolute coordinates.
Origin undefined (Origin search
Origin has been Origin has been defined by
has not been performed and PV
Conditions defined by an origin executing the INI instruc-
has not been changed with the
search tion to change the PV
INI instruction.)
Pulse output Absolute coordinates Relative coordinates
PVs coordinate
system
Refer to 12-4-1 Origin Searches for details.

12 Pulse Outputs
Relationship between the Coordinate System and Pulse Specification

The following table shows the pulse output operation for the four possible combinations of the coor-
dinate systems (absolute or relative) and the pulse output (absolute or relative) specified when the
PULS or PLS2 instruction is executed.
Pulse output Relative coordinate system Absolute coordinate system
specified in PULS Origin undefined: Origin defined:
or PLS2 The No-origin Flag will be ON. The No-origin Flag will be OFF.
Relative pulse Positions the system to another position relative to the present position.
specification Number of movement pulses = Number of pulses setting
The pulse output PV after instruction execution = The pulse output PV after instruction
Number of movement pulses = Number of execution = PV + Number of movement
pulses setting pulses.
The pulse output PV is reset to 0 just before The following example shows the num-
pulses are output. After that, the specified ber of pulses setting = 100 counterclock-
number of pulses is output. wise.
The following example shows the number of Number of pulses setting
pulses setting = 100 counterclockwise.
=
Number of movement
pulses
Number of pulses setting
=
Number of 100
movement pulses Pulse output
0 Target position Present position PV
100 Origin
Target position Present position=0

Pulse output PV Pulse output PV range:
8000 0000 to 7FFF FFFF hex
Pulse output PV range: Number of pulses setting range:
8000 0000 to 7FFF FFFF hex 0000 0000 to 7FFF FFFF hex
Number of pulses setting range:
Absolute pulse The absolute pulse specification cannot be Positions the system to an absolute
specification used when the origin location is undefined, i.e., position relative to the origin.The num-
when the system is operating in the relative ber of movement pulses and movement
coordinate system. An instruction execution direction are calculated automatically
error will occur. from the present position (pulse output
PV) and target position.
The following example shows the num-
ber of pulses setting = +100.
+100
+200
Pulse output
0 Target position= Present position PV
Number of pulses setting
Origin
Number of movement pulses = Number

of pulses setting Pulse output PV
when instruction is executed. The move-
ment direction is determined automati-
cally.
Pulse output PV when instruction is exe-
cuted = Number of pulses setting
Pulse output PV range:
Number of pulses setting range:

12 Pulse Outputs

The absolute pulse cannot be specified with the origin undefined. Please specify them when the
origin is defined by performing the origin searches.
The origin position is undefined in the following case. Please define the origin position by per-
forming the origin searches again.
12
When the pulse output reset flag is turned ON
When the RUN or MONITOR mode is changed to the PROGRAM mode

Specifications and Operation

When the start input (CIO 0.00) goes ON, this example program outputs 600,000 pulses from pulse
output 1 to turn the motor.
Target frequency 50,000 Hz Acceleration

rate
300Hz/4ms Deceleration rate
200Hz/4ms
Number of output
pulses
Starting frequency 100Hz 600,000 pulses
Start input 0.00
PLS2
Preparations
PLC Setup
There are no settings that need to be made in the PLC Setup.

12 Pulse Outputs
DM Area Settings
Settings for PLS2 Instruction (D0 to D7)
Setting Address Data
Acceleration rate: 300 Hz/4 ms D0 #012C
Deceleration rate: 200 Hz/4 ms D1 #00C8
Target frequency: 50,000 Hz D2 #C350
D3 #0000
Number of output pulses: 600,000 D4 #27C0
pulses D5 #0009
Starting frequency: 100 Hz D6 #0064
D7 #0000
Ladder Program
0.00
@PLS2
#0001 Pulse output 1
Start input
#0100 Specifies Pulse + Direction output method, CW, and relative pulses
D0 Acceleration rate, deceleration rate, target frequency, number of pulses setting
D6 Starting frequency
Absolute pulses can be specified when the origin position has been defined.
If a target frequency that cannot be reached has been set, the target frequency will be reduced
automatically, i.e., triangular control will be performed. In some cases where the acceleration
rate is substantially greater than the deceleration rate, the operation will not be true triangular
control. The motor will be operated at a constant speed for a short time between the accelera-
tion and deceleration.

12 Pulse Outputs
12-3 Jogging
Jogging can be performed by using the SPED (SPEED OUTPUT) and ACC (ACCELERATION CON-
TROL) instructions. This section describes the steps for jogging.
12-3 Jogging
12-3-1 High-speed Jogging
Start pulse output with acceleration or deceleration using the ACC instruction. In this case, acceleration
and deceleration rate must be the same. Set the target frequency of the ACC instruction to 0 Hz to stop
the pulse output.
12
Acceleration
Target frequency and
deceleration
12-3-1 High-speed Jogging

rate
Pulse output started Pulse output stopped
Target frequency Starting pulse output: 1 Hz to 100 kHz (in increments of 1 Hz)
Stopping pulse output: 0 Hz
Acceleration and deceleration rate Set in increments of 1 Hz from 1 to 65,535 Hz (every 4 ms).
Mode specification Set to continuous mode.
12-3-2 Low-speed Jogging
Start pulse output without acceleration or deceleration using the SPED instruction. Set the target fre-
quency of the SPED instruction to 0 Hz to stop the pulse output.
Target frequency
Target frequency Starting pulse output: 1 Hz to 100 kHz (in increments of 1 Hz)
Stopping pulse output: 0 Hz
Mode specification Set to continuous mode.

The following example shows jogging without acceleration or deceleration executed using a SPED
instruction. It is used for low-speed jogging.
Clockwise low-speed jogging will be executed from pulse output 1 while CIO 0.00 is ON.
Counterclockwise low-speed jogging will be executed from pulse output 1 while CIO 0.01 is ON.

12 Pulse Outputs
CW Target frequency 1,000Hz
Pulse frequency
CCW
CW low-speed jogging (CIO 0.00)
CCW low-speed jogging (CIO 0.01)
The example shows jogging with acceleration and deceleration executed using an ACC instruction. It is
used for high-speed jogging.
Clockwise high-speed jogging will be executed from pulse output 1 while CIO 0.04 is ON.
Counterclockwise high-speed jogging will be executed from pulse output 1 while CIO 0.05 is ON.
CW Target frequency 1,000Hz
Acceleration/
Pulse frequency deceleration rate
100Hz/4ms
Acceleration/
deceleration rate
100Hz/4ms
CCW
CW high-speed jogging (CIO 0.04)
CCW high-speed jogging (CIO 0.05)
Preparations
PLC Setup
DM Area Settings
Settings to Control Speed while Jogging (D0 to D1 and D10 to D15)
Target frequency (low speed): 1,000 Hz D0 #03E8
D1 #0000
Acceleration rate: 100 Hz/4 ms D10 #0064
Target frequency (high speed): 100,000 Hz D11 #86A0
D12 #0001
Acceleration/deceleration rate: 100 Hz/4 ms D13 #0064
(Not used.)
Target frequency (stop): 0 Hz D14 #0000
D15 #0000

12 Pulse Outputs
Ladder Program
0.00 A281.04
SPED
Pulse output 1
12-3 Jogging
Low-speed Pulse Output #0001
#0100 Specifies Pulse + Direction output method, CW, and continuous mode.
CW Start in Progress D0 Target frequency
SET W0.00
W0.00 0.00
SPED
Low-speed Low-speed #0001
CW output CW Start #0100
#0000
12
in progress
RSET W0.00
0.01 A281.04

SPED
Low-speed Pulse Output #0001 Pulse output 1
CCW Start in Progress #0110 Specifies Pulse + Direction output method, CCW, and continuous mode.
D0 Target frequency
SET W0.01
W0.01 0.01
SPED
Low-speed Low-speed #0001
CCW output CCW Start #0110
#0000
in progress
RSET W0.01
0.04 A281.04
ACC
High-speed Pulse Output #0001 Pulse output 1
CW Start in Progress #0100 Specifies Pulse + Direction output method, CW, and continuous mode.
D10 Acceleration/deceleration rate and target frequency
SET W0.02
W0.02 0.04
ACC
High-speed High-speed #0001
CW output CW Start #0100
D13
in progress
RSET W0.02
0.05 A281.04
ACC
High-speed Pulse Output #0001 Pulse output 1
CCW Start in Progress #0110 Specifies Pulse + Direction output method, CCW, and continuous mode.
D10 Acceleration/deceleration rate and target frequency
SET W0.03
W0.03 0.05
ACC
#0001
High-speed High-speed
#0110
CCW output CCW Start D13
in progress
RSET W0.03
The PLS2 instruction can be used to set a starting frequency or separate acceleration and decel-
eration rates, but there are limitations on the operating range because the end point must be
specified in the PLS2 instruction.

12 Pulse Outputs
12-4 Defining Origin Position

The CP1E CPU Units have two methods that can be used to define the origin position.
Origin Search
The ORG instruction outputs pulses to turn the motor according to the pattern specified in the origin
search parameters. As the motor turns, the origin search function defines the origin from the following
three kinds of position input signals.
Origin input signal
Origin proximity input signal
CW limit input signal and CCW limit input signal
Changing the Pulse Output PV
When setting the current position as the origin, execute INI to reset the pulse output PV to 0.
12-4-1 Origin Searches

When the ORG instruction executes an origin search, it outputs pulses to actually move the motor and
defines the origin position using the input signals that indicate the origin proximity and origin positions.
The input signals that indicate the origin position can be received from the servomotors built-in phase-Z
signal or external sensors such as photoelectric sensors, proximity sensors, or limit switches.
In the following example, the motor is started at a specified speed, accelerated to the origin search high
speed, and run at that speed until the origin proximity position is detected. After the Origin Proximity
Input is detected, the motor is decelerated to the origin search low speed and run at that speed until the
origin position is detected. The motor is stopped at the origin position.
1
Origin Proximity
Input Signal 0
Origin Input 1
Signal
0
Pulse frequency
Origin search high speed Origin search deceleration rate
Origin search
acceleration rate
Deceleration point Origin search proximity speed
Origin search
initial speed
Time
Start Decelerate from high to low speed Stop
Execution of ORG Indicated by the Origin Indicated by the

Proximity Input Signal Origin Input Signal
(Example for reversal mode 1

and method 0 (described later))
The motor can be moved even if the origin position has not been defined, but positioning opera-
tions will be limited as follows:
Origin return: Cannot be used.
Positioning with absolute pulse specification: Cannot be used.
Positioning with relative pulse specification: Outputs the specified number of pulses after set-
ting the present position to 0.

12 Pulse Outputs

1 PLC Setup
Set the origin search parameters in the
Pulse Output 0 and Pulse Output 1 Tab
Pages of the PLC Setup using the CX-Pro-
grammer.
2 Ladder Cyclic task,

Set output pulse 0 or 1, and whether to use
terminals 00 and 01, or 02 and 03 on the
program interrupt task
CIO100 terminal block for pulse outputs.
Output the status of the Limit Signal Inputs
and Positioning Completed Signal to Auxil-
12
iary Area bits.
Execute ORG. Specify an origin search.

12-4-3 Settings in PLC Setup
To perform an origin search or to use a Limit Input Signal as an input to a function other than origin
search, set the parameters on the Pulse Output 0 and Pulse Output 1 Tab Pages in the PLC Setup.

12 Pulse Outputs
Pulse Output 0 or 1 Tab Page

Item Selection Description
Base Undefined Hold When a Limit Input Signal is input, the pulse output is
Settings Origin stopped and the previous status is held.
Undefined When a Limit Input Signal is input, the pulse output is
stopped and origin becomes undefined.
Limit Input Search Only The CW/CCW Limit Input Signal is used for origin searches
Signal Opera- only.
tion Always The CW/CCW Limit Input Signal is used by functions other
than origin search.
Limit Input NC Select when using NC contacts for the Limit Input Signal.
Signal NO Select when using NO contacts for the Limit Input Signal.
Search/ Set the motors starting speed when performing an origin search or origin return.
Return Specified in units of pulses per second (pps).
Initial Speed Setting range: 0 to 100k pps
The origin search will not be performed in these cases:
Origin search high speed Origin search proximity speed.
Origin search proximity speed Origin search initial speed.
Define Use define Select this check box to use origin searches.
Origin origin opera-
Opera- tion
tion Search Direc- Set the direction for detecting the Origin Input Signal. An origin search is performed so
Settings tion that the Origin Input Signals rising edge is detected when moving in the origin search
direction.
CW Performs origin search in the clockwise direction.
CCW Performs origin search in the counterclockwise direction.
Detection Set one of the following three methods to determine the parameters related to the
Method Origin Proximity Input Signal.
Method 0 The direction is reversed at the Origin Proximity Input Signal.
The Origin Input Signal is accepted after the Origin Proximity
Input Signal turns ON and then OFF.
Method 1 The direction is not reversed at the Origin Proximity Input
Signal.
The Origin Input Signal is accepted after the Origin Proximity
Input Signal turns ON.
Method 2 The Origin Proximity Input Signal is not used.
The Origin Input Signal is accepted without using the Origin
Proximity Input Signal.
Only origin search proximity speed can be the origin search
speed.
Search Select one of the following two modes for the origin search operation pattern.
Operation Inverse 1 The direction is reversed when the Limit Input Signal is
received while moving in the origin search direction.
Inverse 2 An error is generated and operation is stopped if the Limit
Input Signal is received while moving in the origin search
direction.
Operation This parameter determines the I/O signals that are used for origin search.
Mode Mode 0 Use when connecting to a stepping motor that does not have
a Positioning Completed Signal.
Mode 1 In this mode, the Positioning Completed Signal from the
Servo Drive is not used. Use this mode when you want to
reduce the processing time.
Mode 2 In this mode, the Positioning Completed Signal from the
Servo Drive is used. Use this mode when you want high
positioning accuracy.
Origin Input Specifies the type of Origin Input Signal (NC or NO).
Signal NC Sets a normally closed Origin Input Signal.
NO Sets a normally open Origin Input Signal.
Proximity Specifies the type of Origin Proximity Input Signal (NC or NO).
Input Signal NC Sets a normally closed Origin Proximity Input Signal.
NO Sets a normally open Origin Proximity Input Signal.

12 Pulse Outputs
Item Selection Description

Define Search High Sets the motors target speed when the origin search is executed. Specify the speed in
Origin Speed the number of pulses per second (pps).
Opera- Setting range: 1 to 100k pps
tion
Settings
Search Prox- Sets the motors speed after the Origin Proximity Input Signal is detected. Specify the
imity Speed speed in the number of pulses per second (pps).
Setting range: 1 to 100k pps
12
12-4-3 Settings in PLC Setup

Search Com- After the origin has been defined, the origin compensation can be set to compensate
pensation for a shift in the Proximity Sensors ON position, motor replacement, or other change.
Value Setting range: -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 pulses
Once the origin has been detected in an origin search, the number of pulses specified
in the origin compensation is output, the present position is reset to 0, and the pulse
outputs No-origin Flag is turned OFF.
Search Sets the motors acceleration rate when the origin Setting range: 1 to 65,535 Hz/
Acceleration search is executed. Specify the amount to increase 4 ms
Ratio the speed (Hz) per 4-ms interval.
Search Sets the motors deceleration rate when the origin Setting range: 1 to 65,535 Hz/
Deceleration search function is decelerating. Specify the amount to 4 ms
Ratio decrease the speed (Hz) per 4-ms interval.
Positioning When the operating mode is set to mode 2, this setting Setting range: 0 to 9,999 ms*
Monitor Time specifies how long to wait (in ms) for the Positioning
Completed Signal after the positioning operation has
been completed, i.e., the pulse output has been com-
pleted. A Positioning Timeout Error (error code 0300)
will be generated if the motor drivers Positioning Com-
pleted Signal does not come ON within the specified
time.
Origin Speed Sets the motors target speed when the origin return is Setting range: 1 to 100k pps
Return executed. Specify the speed in the number of pulses
per second (pps).
Acceleration Sets the motors acceleration rate when the origin Setting range: 1 to 65,535 Hz/
Ratio return operation starts. Specify the amount to increase 4 ms
the speed (Hz) per 4-ms interval.
Deceleration Sets the motors deceleration rate when the origin Setting range: 1 to 65,535 Hz/
Ratio return function is decelerating. Specify the amount to 4 ms
decrease the speed (Hz) per 4-ms interval.
* The actual monitoring time will be the Positioning Monitor Time rounded up to the nearest 10-ms unit + 10 ms
max. If the Positioning Monitor Time is set to 0, the function will be disabled and the Unit will continue waiting for
the Positioning Completed Signal to come ON. (A Positioning Timeout Error will not be generated.)
Note The power supply must be restarted after the PLC Setup is transferred in order to enable the
settings for using the origin search.

12 Pulse Outputs
12-4-4 Origin Search Instructions
Origin Search Instruction: ORG

Execute the ORG instruction in the ladder program to perform an origin search with the specified
parameters.
ORG C1:Port specifier

Pulse output 0: #0000
C1
C2
C2:Control data
Origin search and pulse + direction output method: #0100
Limit Sensor Application

Create a program that can identify the limit sensor when using the origin search.
The OUT instruction is used in the ladder program to write signals received from the CW limit
sensor and CCW limit sensor connected to normal inputs to the Auxiliary Area bits.
Normal input from CW CW Limit Input Signal

limit sensor A540.08 or A541.08
Normal input from CCW CCW Limit Input Signal

limit sensor A540.09 or A541.09
Bits Written in the Auxiliary Area

Auxiliary Area
Name
Word Bit
A540 08 Pulse Output 0 CW Limit Input Signal Signals received from external sen-
09 Pulse Output 0 CCW Limit Input Signal sors connected to normal inputs
must be written to the Auxiliary Area
A541 08 Pulse Output 1 CW Limit Input Signal bits in the user program.
09 Pulse Output 1 CCW Limit Input Signal

12 Pulse Outputs

12-4-5 Origin Search Operations
Operating Mode
The operating mode parameter specifies the kind of I/O signals that are used in the origin search.
I/O signal Mode 0 Mode 1 Mode 2
Driver Stepping motor* Servomotor
Operation Origin Input Inputs signals are arranged Even if an Origin Input Signal is received during
Signal so deceleration starts when deceleration, it is ignored. After the motor has
the Origin Proximity Input reached the origin search proximity speed and the 12
Signal is received and then Origin Input Signal is received, the motor stops, com-
the Origin Input Signal is pleting the origin search process.
received while the motor is

decelerating to the origin
search proximity speed. If an
Origin Input Signal is
detected during this deceler-
ation, an Origin Input Signal
error will occur and the
motor will decelerate to a
stop.
Positioning The Positioning Completed The Positioning Com- After detecting the origin,
Completed Signal from the driver is not pleted Signal from the the origin search pro-
Signal connected. * driver is not connected. cess is not completed
Use this mode when you until the Positioning
want to reduce the pro- Completed Signal is
cessing time, even at the received.
expense of positioning Use this mode when you
accuracy. want high positioning
accuracy.
* There are stepping motor drivers that are equipped with a Positioning Completed Signal like a servomotor. Oper-
ating modes 1 and 2 can be used with these stepping motor drivers.
The use of an error counter reset output and positioning completed input depends on the mode as
described in the following table.
I/O signal Mode 0 Mode 1 Mode 2
Origin Input Connected to the open- Connected to the phase-Z Connected to the phase-Z
Signal collector output from a sen- signal from the Servo Drive. signal from the Servo Drive.
sor or other device.
Error counter Not used. Connected to the error Connected to the error
reset output (The origin search operation counter reset of the Servo counter reset of the Servo
is completed when the origin Drive. Drive.
is detected.)
Positioning Not used. Not used. Connected to the Position-
completed input ing Completed Signal from
the Servo Drive.

12 Pulse Outputs
Operations Detecting the Origin during Deceleration from High

Speed
Operating Mode 0 (without Error Counter Reset Output, without Positioning

Completed Input)
Connect the sensors open-collector output signal to the Origin Input Signal. The Origin Input Sig-
nals response time is 0.1 ms when set as NO contacts.
When the Origin Proximity Input Signal is received, the motor will begin decelerating from the origin
search high speed to the origin search proximity speed. In this operating mode, the Origin Input Sig-
nal will be detected if it is received during this deceleration and an Origin Input Signal Error (error
code 0202) will be generated. In this case, the motor will decelerate to a stop.
Origin input turns ON during

deceleration
Origin Proximity 1
Input Signal 0
Origin Input 1
Signal 0
Original pulse output pattern
Pulse output
CCW CW
Starts when ORG is executed Origin Input Signal Error (error code 0202)

12 Pulse Outputs
Operating Mode 1 (with Error Counter Reset Output, without Positioning

Completed Input)

Connect the phase-Z signal from the Servo Drive to the Origin Input Signal.
When the Origin Input Signal is received, the pulse output will be stopped and the Error Counter
Reset Signal will be output for about 20 to 30 ms.
1
Origin Input Signal
(phase-Z signal) 0
1
Pulse output
0
12
Error Counter
Reset Signal

Approx. 20 to 30 ms
Though the Origin Proximity Input Signal is received, the signal will be ignored and the motor will
begin decelerating from the origin search high speed to the origin search proximity speed. In this
operating mode, the motor will stop at the Origin Input Signal after deceleration is completed.
Operating Mode 1 with Origin Proximity Input Signal Reverse (Origin

Detection Method Setting = 0)
The Origin Input Signal can be detected immediately after the Origin Proximity Input Signal turns
OFF if the deceleration time is short, e.g., when starting from within the Origin Proximity Input Sig-
nal. Set an Origin Proximity Input Signal dog setting that is long enough (longer than the decelera-
tion time.)
Verify that the Origin Proximity Input Signals dog setting

1 is long enough (longer than the deceleration time.)
Origin Proximity
Input Signal 0
Origin Input Signal 1

(phase-Z signal) 0
Origin Input
Signal is
ignored during Motor stopped by an Origin Input
Pulse output deceleration Signal received after deceleration
CCW CW
(The deceleration time is
relatively long in this case.) Starts Stop
when ORG is executed Ideal time for the Origin Proximity
Input Signal to go OFF
(Settings when the deceleration time is short)
CCW CW
(The deceleration time is Stop*
relatively short in this case.)
* The Origin Input Signal can be detected
Starts
when ORG is executed immediately after the Origin Proximity
Input Signal turns OFF if the deceleration
time is short, e.g., when starting from
within the Origin Proximity Input Signal.

12 Pulse Outputs
Operating Mode 1 without Origin Proximity Input Signal Reverse (Origin

Detection Method Setting = 1)
Depending on the length of the deceleration time, the stopping position may change when the Origin
Input Signal is detected during deceleration.
1
Origin Proximity
Input Signal 0
Origin Input Signal 1

(phase-Z signal) 0 Origin Input
Signal is
ignored Motor stopped by an
during
Pulse output deceleration Origin Input Signal
CCW CW
relatively long in this case.) Starts Stop
when ORG
is executed Motor stopped by an Origin Input
Signal received after deceleration
CCW CW
relatively short in this case.) Starts Stop
when ORG is executed
Operating Mode 2 (with Error Counter Reset Output, with Positioning

Completed Input)
This operating mode is the same as mode 1, except the Positioning Completed Signal (INP) from
the Servo Drive is used. Connect the Positioning Completed Signal from the Servo Drive to a normal
input.
If origin compensation is not being applied, the Positioning Completed Signal is checked after the
Error Counter Reset Output. If origin compensation is being applied, the Positioning Completed Sig-
nal is checked after the compensation operation is completed.
Pulse output
Time
Stop
1
Error Counter
Reset Output 0
Positioning 1
Completed Signal 0

12 Pulse Outputs
Origin Detection Method Setting

Origin Detection Method 0: Origin Proximity Input Signal Reversal Required
(Recommended Method)
Deceleration starts when Origin
Proximity Input Signal turns ON.
1
Origin Proximity
Input Signal 0
After the Origin Proximity Input Signal turns
ON and then OFF, the motor is stopped
when the Origin Input Signal turns ON.
1
Origin Input Signal
0 12

High speed for origin search
Pulse output
Deceleration
Acceleration
Proximity speed for origin search
Initial speed
CCW CW
Start when ORG is executed Stop
Origin Detection Method 1: Origin Proximity Input Signal Reversal Not

Required
Deceleration starts when Origin
Proximity Input Signal turns ON.
Origin Proximity 1
Input Signal 0
After the Origin Proximity Input Signal turns
ON, the motor is stopped when the Origin
Input Signal turns ON.
1
Origin Input Signal
0

Pulse output
Acceleration Deceleration
Initial speed
CCW CW
Origin Detection Method 2: Origin Proximity Input Signal Not Used

The motor is stopped when the
Origin Input Signal turns ON.
1
Origin Input Signal
0
Proximity speed
Pulse output for origin search
Acceleration
Initial speed

12 Pulse Outputs
Operation Patterns for Origin Search Operating Mode and Origin

Detection Method Settings
The following examples show how the operation patterns are affected by the origin detection method
and origin search operating mode.
These examples have a CW origin search direction. (The search direction and Limit Input Signal direc-
tion would be different for an origin search in the CCW direction.)
Method 0 is the recommended method for reversal mode 1 (Inverse 1).
Using Reversal Mode 1 (Inverse 1)
Origin search operation
Reversal mode 1 (Inverse 1)
Origin detection method
0: Origin Proximity Input Signal Origin Proximity 1
reversal required. Input Signal 0
1
(Recommended method) Origin Input Signal
0
Pulse output Proximity speed for origin search
CCW CW
Start Stop
CCW CW
Stop
CW Limit Input Signal (See note.)
Start
CCW CW
Stop Start
Note When the Limit Input Signal is received, the motor stops without
deceleration, reverses direction, and accelerates.
1: Origin Proximity Input Signal 1
Origin Proximity
reversal not required. Input Signal 0
1
Origin Input Signal
0
Pulse output
CCW CW
Start Stop
CCW CW
Stop
Start
CCW CW
Stop Start
2: Origin Proximity Input Signal not 1

Origin Input Signal
used. 0

Pulse output
CCW CW
Start Stop
CCW CW
Stop Start CW Limit Input Signal (See note.)
CCW CW
Stop Start

12 Pulse Outputs
Using Reversal Mode 2 (Inverse 2)

Origin search operation
Reversal mode 2 (Inverse 2)
Origin detection method
Origin Proximity
reversal required. Input Signal 0
1
Origin Input Signal
0
Pulse output
CCW CW
Start Stop
12
CCW CW

Stop
Start
CCW CW
Start Limit stop

(error code:0200)
Note When the Limit Input Signal is received, the motor stops
without deceleration.

Origin Proximity
reversal not required. Input Signal 0
1
Origin Input Signal
0
Pulse output
CCW CW
Start Stop
CCW CW
Stop CW Limit Input Signal (See note.)

Start
CCW CW
Start Limit stop
(error code:0200)
2: Origin Proximity Input Signal not

1
used. Origin Input Signal
0

Pulse output
CCW CW
Start Stop
CCW CW
Stop Start CW Limit Input Signal (See note.)
CCW CW
Start Limit stop

(error code:0201)

12 Pulse Outputs
12-4-6 Origin Return

It is the function to move the origin to the defined position by origin searches or changing PVs.
An origin return operation moves the motor to the origin position from any other position. The origin
return operation is controlled by ORG.
The origin return operation returns the motor to the origin by starting at the specified speed, accelerat-
ing to the target speed, moving at the target speed, and then decelerating to a stop at the origin posi-
tion.
Pulse frequency Origin return target speed Origin return

deceleration rate
Origin return
acceleration rate
Origin return
initial speed
Time
Start Stop
Started by executing ORG
PLC Setup
The various origin return parameters are set on the Pulse Output 0 Tab Page in the PLC Setup.
Origin Return Parameters

Name Setting Setting range
Base Search/Return Sets the motors starting speed when the 0 to 100k pps
Settings Initial Speed origin return is executed. Specify the speed
in the number of pulses per second (pps).
Origin Speed Sets the motors target speed when the 1 to 100k pps
Return origin return is executed. Specify the speed
in the number of pulses per second (pps).
Acceleration Ratio Sets the motors acceleration rate when the 1 to 65,535
(Rate) origin return function is accelerating. Specify (Hz/4ms)
the amount to increase the speed (Hz) per
4-ms interval.
Deceleration Ratio Sets the motors deceleration rate when the 1 to 65,535
(Rate) origin return function is decelerating. Specify (Hz/4ms)
the amount to decrease the speed (Hz) per
4-ms interval.
Origin Return Instruction
ORG C1:Port specifier

C1
C2
C2:Control data
Origin search and pulse + direction output method: #0100
Note An instruction execution error will occur if the origin is not defined (relative coordinate system)
when the ORG instruction is executed to perform an origin return operation.

12 Pulse Outputs

12-4-7 Changing the Present Value of the Pulse Output
The present value of the pulse output can be changed by using the INI instruction. To define the present
value as the origin, set the pulse output PV to 0 using the INI instruction.
INI instruction executed
New origin Present origin

Pulse output
PV
12
Example: Setting the Present Position as the Origin
12-4-7 Changing the Present Value of the Pulse Output

Execution condition
@INI
#0000 C1: Port specifier (example for pulse output 0)
#0002 C2: Control data (example for changing PV)
D100 S:First word with new PV
15 0
D100 #0 0 0 0
D101 #0 0 0 0
Operands Settings
C1 Port specifier #0000 Pulse output 0
#0001 Pulse output 1
C2 Control data #0002 Changes PV
S First word with new PV Store the new PV in S and S+1 (32 bits).

12 Pulse Outputs
12-5 Reading the Pulse Output Present

Value
The present value of a pulse output can be read in the following two ways.
Value refreshed at the I/O refresh timing Read PV from Auxiliary Area.
Value updated when a program is executed Read PV by executing a PRV instruction.
Reading the PV Refreshed at the I/O Refresh Timing

The PV that is stored in the following words can be read using the MOVL instruction or other instruc-
tions.
Read PV Auxiliary Area words
Pulse output 0 A277 (upper digits) and A276 (lower digits)
Pulse output 1 A279 (upper digits) and A278 (lower digits)
Reading the Value When a Program is Executed
Reading the Pulse Output PV with a PRV Instruction
Execution condition
@PRV
#0000 C2: Control data (example for reading PV)
D100 D: First destination word
15 0
D100 Present value data lower bytes
Pulse output PV that was read
D101 Present value data upper bytes

12 Pulse Outputs
12-6 Related Auxiliary Area Flags
12-6 Related Auxiliary Area Flags

Auxiliary Area Allocations
Pulse output Pulse output
Name Description Values
0 1
Pulse Output PV PV range: 8000 0000 to 7FFF FFFF hex Leftmost 4 digits A277 A279
Storage Words (-2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647)
Rightmost 4 digits A276 A278
Pulse Output The pulse output PV will be cleared when 0: Not cleared. A540.00 A541.00
Reset Bit this bit is turned ON. 1: Clear PV.
12
CW Limit Input This flag shows the status of the CW Limit ON when turned ON A540.08 A541.08
Signal Flag Input Signal, which is used in the origin from an external input.
search.
The status of the signal from the CW limit
input sensor connected to a normal input
must be written to A540.08 or A541.08.
CCW Limit Input This flag shows the status of the CCW ON when turned ON A540.09 A541.09
Signal Flag Limit Input Signal, which is used in the ori- from an external input.
gin search.
The status of the signal from the CCW
limit input sensor connected to a normal
input must be written to A540.09 or
A541.09.
Positioning com- This flag shows the status of the position- ON when turned ON A540.10 A541.10
pleted input signal ing completed input signal, which is used from an external input.
in the origin search.
The status of the Positioning Completed
Signal from the Servo Drive connected to
a normal input must be written to A540.10
or A541.10.
Accel/Decel Flag ON when pulses are being output accord- 0: Constant speed A280.00 A281.00
ing to an ORG, ACC or PLS2 instruction 1: Accelerating or decel-
and the output frequency is being erating
changed in steps (accelerating or deceler-
ating).
Overflow/Underflow ON when an overflow or underflow has 0: Normal A280.01 A281.01
Flag occurred in the pulse output PV. 1: Overflow or underflow
Output Amount ON when the number of output pulses has 0: No setting A280.02 A281.02
Set Flag been set with the PULS instruction. 1: Setting made
Output Completed ON when the number of output pulses set 0: Output not completed. A280.03 A281.03
Flag with the PULS/PLS2 instruction has been 1: Output completed.
output.
Output In-progress ON when pulses are being output from 0: Stopped A280.04 A281.04
Flag the pulse output. 1: Outputting pulses.
No-origin Flag ON when the origin has not been defined 0: Origin defined. A280.05 A281.05
for the pulse output. 1: Origin undefined.
At-origin Flag ON when the pulse output PV matches 0: Not stopped at origin. A280.06 A281.06
the origin (0). 1: Stopped at origin.
Output Stopped ON when an error occurred while output- 0: No error A280.07 A281.07
Error Flag ting pulses in the origin search function. 1: Stop error occurred.
Stop Error Code When a Pulse Output Stop Error occurs, A444 A445
the error code is stored in that pulse out-
puts corresponding Stop Error Code
word.

12 Pulse Outputs
12-7 Application Examples
12-7-1 Vertically Conveying PCBs (Multiple Progressive Positioning)

Outline
PCBs with components mounted are stored in a stocker.
When a stocker becomes full, it is moved to the conveyance point.
Positioning Operation for Vertical Conveyor

Stocker conveyance
position

From mounter
Operation Pattern
An origin search is performed.
Fixed-distance positioning is repeated.
The system is returned to the original position.
CCW Origin (servo Origin CW

limit phase Z) proximity limit
Origin search
CCW Fixed-distance CW
positioning repeated
50,000 Hz
(C350 Hex)
10,000
(2710 Hex)
CCW CW
Acceleration/deceleration:
Return to start 1,000 Hz/4 ms (03E8 hex)
PCB storage PCB storage Stocker Stocker movement

enabled completed moved completed

12 Pulse Outputs
Wiring Example Using SmartStep A-series Servo Drive

Origin Search Start Switch (CIO 0.00)

Emergency Stop Switch (CIO 0.01)
Stocker Moved (CIO 100.01) PCB Storage Completed (CIO 0.03)

Stocker Movement Completed PCB Storage Enabled (CIO 100.03)
(CIO 0.04)
SmartStep A-series
Servo Drive
R88A-CPU00S
and resistor 12

CP1E N/NA-type CPU Unit (CP1E-N/NADT-) SmartStep A-series Servo Drive (R7D-AP)
Power supply terminal R88A-CPU00S

DC24V power supply (+)
DC24V power supply (-)
Output terminal block
1.6k
Pulse output (CIO 100.00) 1 +PULS * Instruction pulse mode =
Pulse 1.6k 2 -PULS feed pulse and
output 0 Direction output (CIO 100.02) 3 +SIGN forward/reverse signal
4 -SIGN
1.6k 5 +ECRST
Error counter reset output 0 (CIO 100.04) 6 -ECRST
COM (CIO 100)

Move stocker (CIO 100.01)
PCB storage enabled (CIO 100.03) 8 INP
Input terminal block 33 ZCOM
Pulse 0 origin input signal (CIO 0.06) 32 Z
COM 13 +24VIN
24-VDC Servo Drive
RUN input X1
Pulse 0 origin proximity input signal (CIO 0.10) 14 RUN
18 RESET
Servo Drive alarm reset input
Origin search start switch (CIO 0.00) 10 OGND
Emergency stop switch (CIO 0.01) 35 ALMCOM
PCB storage completed (CIO 0.03) X1 34 ALM
Stocker movement completed (CIO 0.04) 24-VDC
XB 7 BKIR
Hood FG
Operation
1 An origin search is performed using the Origin Search Start Switch (CIO 0.00).
2 When the origin search is finished, the PCB Storage Enabled Output (CIO 100.03) is turned ON.
3 When a PCB has been stored, the stocker is raised (relative positioning) using the PCB Storage
Completed Input (CIO 0.03).
4 Storing PCBs is repeated until the stocker is full.
5 The number of PCBs in the stocker is counted with counter C0 by counting the number of times
the stocker is raised.
6 When the stocker is full, it is moved (CIO 100.01) and only the conveyor is lowered (absolute
positioning) when stoker movement is completed (CIO 0.04).
7 An emergency stop is executed to stop pulse output with the Emergency Stop Switch Input (CIO 0.01).

12 Pulse Outputs
Preparations
PLC Setup
Setting
Use define origin operation for pulse output 0.
Note The Use define origin operation setting is read from the PLC Setup when the power supply is turned ON.
DM Area Settings
Settings for PLS2 for Fixed-distance Positioning (D0 to D7)
Setting details Address Data
Acceleration rate: 1,000 Hz/4 ms D0 #03E8
Deceleration rate: 1,000 Hz/4 ms D1 #03E8
D3 #0000
Number of output pulses: 10,000 pulses D4 #2710
D5 #0000
D7 #0000
Settings for PLS2 to Return to Start (D10 to D17)
Acceleration rate: 300 Hz/4 ms D10 #012C
Deceleration rate: 200 Hz/4 ms D11 #00C8
D13 #0000
Number of output pulses: 0 pulse D14 #0000
D15 #0000
D17 #0000
Number of Repeats of Fixed-distance Positioning Operation (D20)
Number of repeats of fixed-distance positioning D20 #000F
operation (number of PCBs in stocker)

12 Pulse Outputs
Ladder Program

Jog Operation
0.00 W0.01 W0.00

Origin search in progress
Origin search Origin search
start switch completed
@ORG
W0.00
#0000
#0100
Origin search
in progress A280.05 W0.01
Origin search completed
12
No-origin Flag

100.03
W0.01 W0.02
PCB storage enabled
Origin search Lift positioning
completed start
W0.05 0.03 W0.02
Lift positioning start
PCB stored PCB storage completed
100.03
PCB storage enabled
Positioning
Lift 10,000 pulses (relative) at a time
W0.02 W0.04 W0.03
Lift positioning in progress
Lift positioning Lift positioning
start completed
@PLS2
W0.03
#0000
Lift positioning #0100
in progress D0
D6
A280.03 W0.04
Lift positioning completed
Pulse Output Completed Flag
Counter for number of lifts (number of PCBs stored)
W0.04
CNTX
Lift positioning completed 0000
W0.09 D20
Lower positioning
completed
P_First_Cycle
First Cycle Flag

12 Pulse Outputs
When the stocker is not full (C0 = OFF), store PCB,

and repeat lift positioning after PCB storage is completed.
W0.05
W0.04 C000
PCB stored
Lift positioning Stocker full
completed
When the stocker is full (C0 = ON), move the stocker,

and start lower positioning after stocker movement is completed.
W0.04 C000 W0.06
Stocker moved
Lift positioning Stocker full
completed
W0.06 W0.07 100.01
Stocker moving output
Stocker Lower
moved positioning
100.01 0.04 W0.07
Lower positioning
Stocker moving Stocker movement completed
output
Positioning
Lower to "0" position (absolute pulses)
W0.08
W0.07 W0.09
Lower positioning in progress
Lower positioning Lower positioning
start completed @PLS2
W0.08
#0000
Lower positioning #0101
in progress D10
D16
A280.03 W0.09
Lower positioning completed
Pulse Output Completed Flag
Emergency stop (Pulse output stopped)

0.01
@INI
Emergency stop switch #0000
#0003
0
Repeat limit input settings
Limit inputs are allocated to external sensors using the following programming.
A540.08
0.05
CW Limit Input Signal Flag
Built-in input
0.07 A540.09
CCW Limit Input Signal Flag
Built-in input

12 Pulse Outputs
12-7-2 Feeding Wrapping Material: Interrupt Feeding

Feeding Wrapping Material in a Vertical Pillow Wrapper
Start switch (CIO 0.00)
Emergency stop switch (CIO 0.01)
12
Marker sensor Speed

(input 0.04) control
Position
control
Pulse output
Operation Pattern
Speed control is used to feed wrapping material to the initial position. When the marker sensor input
is received, fixed-distance positioning is performed before stopping.
10,000 Hz
500 Hz/4ms (2710 Hex)
(01F4 Hex)
Position control
Speed control 5,000 (1388 hex)
pulses output before stopping.
PLS2 is executed in
input interrupt task.
Marker sensor input

(0.04)
Operation
1 Speed control is used to feed wrapping material to the initial position when the Start Switch (CIO
0.00) is activated.
2 When the Marker Sensor Input (CIO 0.04) is received, the PLS2 instruction is executed in inter-
rupt task 4.
3 Fixed-distance positioning is executed with the PLS2 instruction before stopping.
4 An emergency stop is executed to stop pulse output with the Emergency Stop Switch input (CIO
0.01).

12 Pulse Outputs
Preparations
PLC Setup
Setting
Enable using built-in input IN4 as an interrupt input.
Note The interrupt input setting is read from the PLC Setup when the power supply is turned ON.
DM Area Settings
Speed Control Settings to Feed Wrapping Material to Initial Position
Acceleration/deceleration rate: D0 #01F4
500 Hz/4 ms
Target frequency: 10,000 Hz D1 #2710
D2 #0000
Positioning Control Settings for Wrapping Material

Acceleration rate: 500 Hz/4 ms D10 #01F4
Deceleration rate: 500 Hz/4 ms D11 #01F4
Target frequency: 10,000 Hz D12 #2710
D13 #0000
Number of output pulses: 5,000 D14 #1388
pulses D15 #0000
D17 #0000

12 Pulse Outputs
Ladder Program

Cyclic Task Program (Executed at Startup)
Enabling Input Interrupt 4 (IN4)

P_First Cycle
MSKS
First Cycle Flag 104
#0
12
Feeding Material with Speed Control
W0.00

0.00 W0.01
Material being fed
Material Material
feed start positioning
completed @ACC
W0.00
#0000
Material #0100
being fed D0
A280.03 W0.01
Material positioning completed
Pulse Output
Completed Flag
Emergency Stop
0.01
@INI
Emergency stop switch #0000
#0003
0
Program for Interrupt Task 4

Interrupt Task for Marker Sensor Input IN4
Starting interrupt feed
P_ON
PLS2
Always ON Flag #0000
#0100
D10
D16

12 Pulse Outputs
12-8 Precautions when Using Pulse Outputs
Movement Direction when Specifying Absolute Pulses
When operating with the absolute pulse specification, the movement direction (CW/CCW) is selected
automatically based on the relationship between the pulse output PV when the instruction is executed
and the specified target position. The direction (CW/CCW) specified in an ACC, SPED or PLS2 instruc-
tion is not effective.
Using CW/CCW Limit Inputs for Pulse Output Functions other than
Origin Searches
Pulse outputs will stop according to the PLC Setup when either the CW or CCW Limit Input Signals
turns ON. It is also possible to select whether or not the defined origin will be cleared when a CW or
CCW Limit Input Signal turns ON for a pulse output function.
Difference between Set Frequencies and Actual Frequencies

The CP1E CPU Units pulse output frequency is determined by dividing the source clock frequency
(32 MHz) by an integer ratio. Consequently, there may be a slight difference between the set frequency
and the actual frequency, and that difference increases as the frequency increases. The actual fre-
quency can be calculated from the following equations.
Pulse Output System

Integer dividing ratio calculated
from users set frequency
Output pulses (actual frequency)

Source clock Frequency divider
32MHz
Equations
Source clock frequency

Actual frequency (Hz)=
Dividing ratio
Source clock frequency 2 + Set frequency

Dividing ratio=INT
Set frequency (Hz) 2
The INT function extracts an integer from the fraction. The non-integer remainder is rounded.

12 Pulse Outputs

Differences between Set Frequencies and Actual Frequencies
Source clock frequency: 32 MHz
Set frequency (kHz) Actual frequency (kHz)
99.844 to 100.000 100.000
99.534 to 99.843 99.688
: :
50.040 to 50.117 50.078
49.961 to 50.039 50.000
49.884 to 49.960 49.921
: :
10.002 to 10.004 10.003
9.999 to 10.001 10.000 12
9.996 to 9.998 9.996
Combinations of Pulse Control Instructions

The following tables show when a second pulse control instruction can be started if a pulse control
operation is already being executed.
A second independent-mode positioning instruction can be started if an independent-mode positioning
instruction is being executed, and a second continuous-mode speed control instruction can be started if
a continuous-mode speed control instruction is being executed. Operation cannot be switched between
the independent and continuous modes, although a PLS2 instruction can be executed while a ACC
instruction (continuous mode) is being executed.
It is possible to start another operation during acceleration/deceleration and start another positioning
instruction during positioning
:Can be executed. :Error occurs.
Instruction being started
Instruction being executed SPED SPED ACC ACC

INI (Indepen- (Contin- (Inde- (Contin- PLS2 ORG
dent) uous) pendent) uous)
SPED (Independent)
(*1) (*3)
SPED (Continuous)
(*2) (*5)
ACC Steady speed
(Indepen- (*4) (*6)
dent) Accelerating or
decelerating (*4) (*6)
ACC Steady speed
(Continuous) (*5) (*7)
Accelerating or
PLS2 Steady speed
(*4) (*8)
Accelerating or
ORG Steady speed
Accelerating or
decelerating
*1 SPED (Independent) to SPED (Independent)

The number of output pulses cannot be changed.
The frequency can be changed.

12 Pulse Outputs
*2 SPED (Continuous) to SPED (Continuous)

*3 SPED (Independent) to ACC (Independent)
The acceleration/deceleration rate can be changed.
*4 ACC (Independent) to ACC (Independent) or PLS2 to ACC (Independent)
The acceleration/deceleration rate can be changed. (The rate can even be changed during acceleration or
deceleration.)
*5 SPED (Continuous) to ACC (Continuous) or ACC (Continuous) to ACC (Continuous)
The frequency can be changed. (The target frequency can even be changed during acceleration or decel-
eration.)
deceleration.)
*6 ACC (Independent) to PLS2
The number of output pulses can be changed. (The setting can even be changed during acceleration or
deceleration.)
eration.)
deceleration.)
*7 ACC (Continuous) to PLS2
eration.)
deceleration.)
*8 PLS2 to PLS2
The number of output pulses can be changed. (The setting can even be changed during acceleration or
deceleration.)
eration.)
deceleration.)
Origin Search Error Processing

The CP1E CPU Units pulse output function performs a basic error check before starting to output
pulses (when the instruction is executed) and will not output pulses if the settings are incorrect.
There are other errors that can occur with the origin search function during pulse output, which may
stop the pulse output.
If an error occurs that stops pulse output, the pulse outputs Output Stopped Error Flag will be turned
ON and the Pulse Output Stop Error Code will be written to Error Code word. Use these flags and error
codes to identify the cause of the error.
The Pulse Output Stop Errors will not affect the CPU Units operating status. (The Pulse Output Stop
Errors do not cause a fatal or non-fatal error in the CPU Unit.)

12 Pulse Outputs

Related Auxiliary Area Flags
Pulse Pulse
Function Settings
output 0 output 1
Output Stopped Error Flags 0: No error A280.07 A281.07
ON when an error occurred while outputting pulses in the 1: Stop error occurred.
origin search function.
Stop Error Codes A444 A445
When a Pulse Output Stop Error occurs, the error code is stored in that pulse outputs
corresponding Stop Error Code word.
Pulse Output Stop Error Codes

Error Operation after
Error name
code
Likely cause Corrective action
error
12
CW Limit Stop 0100 Stopped due to a CW limit sig- Move in the CCW direction. Immediate stop
Input Signal nal input. No effect on other
CCW Limit 0101 Stopped due to a CCW limit sig- Move in the CW direction. port
Stop Input Sig- nal input.
nal
No Origin Prox- 0200 The parameters indicate that the Check the wiring of the Origin Proximity Input No effect on other
imity Input Sig- Origin Proximity Input Signal is Signal as well as the PLC Setups Origin port
nal being used, but a Origin Proxim- Proximity Input Signal Type setting (NC or
ity Input Signal was not received NO) and execute the origin search again.
during the origin search.
No Origin Input 0201 The Origin Input Signal was not Check the wiring of the Origin Input Signal as
Signal received during the origin well as the PLC Setups Origin Input Signal
search. Type setting (NC or NO) and execute the ori-
gin search again.
Origin Input 0202 During an origin search in oper- Take one or both of the following steps so Decelerates to a
Signal Error ating mode 0, the Origin Input that the Origin Input Signal is received after stop.
Signal was received during the deceleration is completed. No effect on other
deceleration started after the Increase the distance between the Origin port
Origin Proximity Input Signal Proximity Input Signal sensor and Origin
was received. Input Signal sensor.
Decrease the origin search high speed.
Limit Inputs in 0203 The origin search cannot be Check the wiring of the limit signals in both Operation will not
Both Directions performed because the limit sig- directions as well as the PLC Setups Limit start.
nals for both directions are Signal Type setting (NC or NO) and execute No effect on other
being input simultaneously. the origin search again. port
Simultaneous 0204 The Origin Proximity Input Sig- Check the wiring of the Origin Proximity Input Immediate stop
Origin Proximity nal and the Limit Input Signal in Signal and the Limit Input Signal. Also check No effect on other
and Limit Inputs the search direction are being the PLC Setups Origin Proximity Input Signal port
input simultaneously during an Type and Limit Signal Type settings (NC or
origin search. NO) and then execute the origin search
again.
Limit Input Sig- 0205 When an origin search in one Check the wiring of the Limit Input Signal and Immediate stop
nal Already direction is being performed, the PLC Setups I/O settings. Also check the No effect on other
Being Input the Limit Input Signal is PLC Setups Limit Signal Type setting (NC or port
already being input in the ori- NO) and then execute the origin search
gin search direction. again.
When a non-regional origin
search is being performed, the
Origin Input Signal and the
Limit Input Signal in the oppo-
site direction (from the search
direction) are being input
simultaneously.

12 Pulse Outputs
Error Operation after

Error name Likely cause Corrective action
code error
Origin Proximity 0206 When an origin search with Check the installation positions of the Origin Immediate stop
Input Signal reversal at the limit is being Proximity Input Signal, Origin Input Signal, No effect on other
Origin Reverse performed, the Limit Input Sig- and Limit Input Signal as well as the PLC port
Error nal in the search direction was Setups I/O settings. Also check the PLC
input while the Origin Proxim- Setups Signal Type settings (NC or NO) for
ity Input Signal was reversing. each input signal and then execute the origin
When an origin search with search again.
reversal at the limit is being
performed and the Origin
Proximity Input Signal is not
being used, the Limit Input
Signal in the search direction
was input while the Origin
Input Signal was reversing.
Positioning 0300 The Servo Drives Positioning Adjust the Positioning Monitor Time setting No effect on other
Timeout Error Completed Signal does not or Servo system gain setting. Check the port
come ON within the Positioning Positioning Completed Signal wiring, correct
Monitor Time specified in the it if necessary, and then execute the origin
PLC Setup. search again.

12 Pulse Outputs
12-9 Pulse Output Pattern

The CP1E CPU Units pulse output function enables operation in Continuous Mode, for which the num-
ber of output pluses is not specified, or in Independent Mode, for which the number of output pulses is
specified. Continuous Mode is used for speed control and Independent Mode is used for positioning.
12-9-1 Speed Control (Continuous Mode)

The following operations can be performed in Continuous Mode by combining instructions.
Starting a Pulse Output 12

Example Procedure
Operation Frequency changes Description
12-9-1 Speed Control (Continuous Mode)

application Instruction Settings
Output with Changing the Pulse frequency Outputs SPED Port
specified speed (fre- pulses at a (Continuous) Pulse + direction
Target frequency
speed quency) in one specified Continuous
step frequency.
Target frequency
Time
Execution of SPED
Output with Accelerating the Pulse frequency Outputs ACC Port

specified speed pulses and (Continuous) Pulse + direction
Target frequency
acceleration (frequency) at a Acceleration/ changes the Continuous
deceleration
and speed fixed rate rate
frequency at a
Acceleration/
fixed rate.
Time deceleration rate
Execution of ACC Target frequency
Changing Settings
Example Procedure
Change Changing the Pulse frequency Changes the SPED Port
speed in one speed during frequency (Continuous) Continuous
Target frequency
step operation (higher or Target frequency
lower) of the
Present frequency SPED
pulse output
Time (Continuous)
in one step.
Execution of SPED
Change Changing the Pulse frequency Changes the ACC or Port

speed speed smoothly frequency SPED Continuous
Target frequency
smoothly during operation Acceleration/ from the (Continuous) Target frequency
deceleration
rate
present fre-
Present frequency Acceleration/
quency at a
Time ACC deceleration rate
fixed rate. The
Execution of ACC (Continuous)
frequency can
be acceler-
ated or decel-
erated.

12 Pulse Outputs
Example Procedure
Changing the Pulse frequency Acceleration/ Changes the ACC Port
deceleration rate n
speed in a Acceleration/
acceleration or (Continuous) Continuous
Target frequency deceleration rate 2
polyline curve Acceleration/
deceleration Target frequency
during operation deceleration
rate 1
rate during
Present frequency ACC Acceleration/
acceleration or
Time (Continuous) deceleration rate
deceleration.
Execution of ACC
Execution of ACC
Execution of ACC
Change Not supported.

direction
Stopping a Pulse Output

Example Procedure
Stop pulse Immediate stop Pulse frequency Stops the SPED or Port
output pulse output ACC Stop pulse
Present
frequency immediately. (Continuous) output

Time INI
Execution of INI
Stop pulse Immediate stop Pulse frequency Stops the SPED Port
output pulse output Continuous
Present
frequency
immediately. SPED Target
(Continuous) frequency=0
Time
Execution of SPED
Stop pulse Decelerate to a Pulse frequency Decelerates SPED or Port

Acceleration/deceleration
output stop Present rate (Rate set at the start the pulse out- ACC Continuous
smoothly frequency of the operation.) put to a stop.* (Continuous) Target
frequency=0
Target
frequency=0 Time ACC
Execution of ACC (Continuous)
* If an ACC instruction started the operation, the original acceleration/deceleration rate will remain in effect.
If a SPED instruction started the operation, the acceleration/deceleration rate will be invalid and the pulse output will stop
immediately.

12 Pulse Outputs
12-9-2 Positioning Control (Independent Mode)

The following operations can be performed in Independent Mode by combining instructions.
Starting a Pulse Output

Procedure
Example
Operation Frequency changes Description Instruc-
application Settings
tion
Output with Positioning Pulse frequency Starts outputting PULS Number of
specified without accel- Specified number of pulses pulses at the speci- pulses

speed eration or Target
(Specified with PULS)
fied frequency and Relative or
12
frequency SPED
deceleration stops immediately absolute
(Indepen-
when the specified pulse speci-
dent)

Time
number of pulses fication
Execution of SPED Outputs the specified number
of pulses and then stops.
has been output. Port
The target position Pulse +
(specified number of Direction
pulses) cannot be
Independent
changed during
positioning. Target fre-
quency
Simple trape- Positioning Pulse frequency
Accelerates and PULS Number of
zoidal control with trapezoi- Specified number of pulses decelerates at the pulses
(Specified with PULS)
dal accelera- Target same fixed rate and Relative or
Acceleration/ ACC
tion and frequency deceleration rate stops immediately absolute
(Indepen-
deceleration when the specified pulse speci-
Time dent)
(Same rate number of pulses fication
used for accel- Execution of ACC Outputs the specified has been output.* Port
number of pulses and
eration and then stops.
Pulse +
deceleration;
Direction
no starting
speed). Independent
The number of Accelera-
pulses cannot tion and
be changed decelera-
during position rate
tioning. Target fre-
quency
Complex Positioning Pulse
Accelerates and PLS2 Number of
Specified number of pulses
frequency
trapezoidal with trapezoi- decelerates at a pulses
Target
control dal accelera- frequency Acceleration
Deceleration rate
fixed rates. The Relative or
rate
tion and pulse output is absolute
Starting
deceleration frequency
Stop frequency
stopped when the pulse speci-
(Separate Time specified number of fication
rates used for Execution Output stops pulses has been Port
of PLS2 Deceleration point
Target
acceleration frequency reached
output.*
Pulse +
and decelera- The target position Direction
tion; starting (specified number of
speed) Accelera-
pulses) can be
tion rate
The number of changed during
pulses can be positioning. Decelera-
changed dur- tion rate
ing position- Target fre-
ing. quency
Starting fre-
quency

12 Pulse Outputs
* Triangular Control
If the specified number of pulses is less than the number required just to reach the target frequency and
return to zero, the function will automatically reduce the acceleration/deceleration time and perform triangu-
lar control (acceleration and deceleration only.) An error will not occur.
Pulse frequency Specified number of pulses Pulse frequency

(Specified with PULS) Specified number of pulses
(Specified with PLS2)
Target
frequency
Target
frequency
Time Time
Execution of ACC Execution of PLS2
Changing Settings
Example Procedure
Change Changing Number of pulses SPED can be exe- PULS Number of
Specified number of specified with PULS
speed in the speed in Pulse frequency
pulses (Specified with does not change.
cuted during posi- pulses
one step one step New target frequency PULS.) tioning to change Relative or
SPED
during oper- Target frequency (raise or lower) the absolute
(Independent)
ation pulse output fre- pulse speci-
quency in one step. fication
Time
The target position SPED Port
Execution of SPED
(independent mode) (specified number (Independent)
SPED (independent mode) Pulse +
executed again to change the of pulses) is not
target frequency. (The target Direction
position is not changed.)
changed.
Indepen-
dent
Target fre-
quency
Change Changing Number of pulses ACC can be exe- PULS Number of
specified with PULS
speed the target Pulse frequency
Specified number of
pulses (Specified does not change. cuted during posi- pulses
smoothly speed (fre- with PULS.) tioning to change Relative or
New target frequency ACC
(with quency) the acceleration/ absolute
Target frequency
Acceleration/ (Independent)
accelera- during posi- deceleration rate deceleration rate pulse speci-
tion rate = tioning and target fre- fication
Time
decelera- (accelera- quency. ACC Port
Execution of ACC
tion rate) tion rate = (independent mode) The target position (Independent)
Pulse +
decelera- ACC (independent mode) executed
(specified number
again to change the target frequency. PLS2 Direction
tion rate) (The target position is not changed,
of pulses) is not
but the acceleration/deceleration rate
Indepen-
is changed.)
changed.
ACC dent
(Independent) Accelera-
tion/decel-
eration rate
Target fre-
quency

12 Pulse Outputs
Example Procedure

Change Changing Pulse frequency Specified number of pulses PLS2 can be exe- PULS Number of
(Specified with PULS.)
speed the target New target frequency cuted during posi- pulses
smoothly speed (fre- Target frequency tioning to change Relative or
Acceleration/ ACC
(with quency) deceleration the acceleration absolute
rate (Independent)
unequal during posi- rate, deceleration pulse speci-
accelera- tioning
Time
rate, and target fre- fication
Execution of ACC
tion and (different (independent mode) quency. PLS2 Port
PLS2 executed to change the target
decelera- accelera- To prevent the tar-
frequency and acceleration/deceleration
PLS2 Pulse +
tion rates) tion and rates.(The target position is not
get position from
Direction
changed. The original target position is
decelera- specified again.)
being changed
tion rates) PLS2 Accelera-
intentionally, the
original target posi-
tion rate 12
tion must be speci- Decelera-
fied in absolute tion rate

coordinates. Target fre-
quency
Starting fre-
quency
Change Change the Pulse frequency Number of pulses
PLS2 can be exe- PULS Number of
target target posi- Secified number
changed with PLS2. cuted during posi- pulses
position tion during of pulses
tioning to change Relative or
Target frequency Acceleration/ ACC
positioning deceleration the target position absolute
rate (Independent)
(multiple (number of pulses). pulse speci-
Time
fication
start Execution of PLS2
When the target
function) position cannot be PLS2 Port
PLS2 executed to change the target
position.(The target frequency and
acceleration/deceleration rates are
changed without PLS2 Pulse +
not changed.) maintaining the
Direction
same speed range,
PLS2 Accelera-
an error will occur
tion rate
and the original
operation will con- Decelera-
tinue to the original tion rate
target position. Target fre-
quency
Starting fre-
quency

12 Pulse Outputs
Example Procedure
Operation applica- Frequency changes Description Instruc-
tion Settings
tion
Change Change PLS2 can be executed PULS Number of
Number of pulses
target posi- the target Pulse frequency Specified number changed with PLS2. during positioning to pulses
of pulses
tion and position New target frequency change the target position Relative or
ACC
speed and target Target frequency (number of pulses), absolute
Acceleration/ (Indepen-
smoothly speed (fre- deceleration acceleration rate, decel- pulse spec-
rate dent)
quency) eration rate, and target ification
during
Time
frequency.
Execution of ACC Port
positioning (Independent mode)
When the settings cannot PLS2
PLS2 executed to change the target Pulse +
(multiple position, target frequency, and be changed without main- Direction
start func- acceleration/deceleration rates
taining the same speed
tion) Accelera-
range, an error will occur
tion rate
and the original opera-
tion will continue to the Decelera-
original target position. tion rate
Target fre-
quency
Starting
frequency
Change Pulse frequency Number of pulses specified
PLS2 can be executed PLS2 Number of
by PLS2.
the accel- Acceleration/
deceleration rate n during positioning (accel- pulses
eration and New target frequency Acceleration/ eration or deceleration) to Accelera-
deceleration rate 3
Target frequency Acceleration/ PLS2
decelera- deceleration rate 2 change the acceleration tion rate
Acceleration/
tion rates deceleration
rate 1
rate or deceleration rate. Decelera-
during Time
tion rate
positioning Execution of PLS2 Execution of PLS2
Execution of PLS2
(multiple Execution of PLS2
start func-
tion)
Change Change Pulse frequency
PLS2 can be executed PULS Number of
direction the direc- Secified number Change of direction at the
during positioning with pulses
tion during of pulses specified deceleration rate absolute pulse specifica- Absolute
Target ACC
positioning frequency
Number of pulses (position) tion to change to absolute pulse spec-
changed by PLS2 (Indepen-
pulses and reverse direc- ification
Time dent)
tion. Port
Execution
of PLS2

Execution of PLS2 Pulse +
PLS2
Direction
PLS2 Accelera-
tion rate
PLS2 Decelera-
tion rate
Target fre-
quency
Starting
frequency

12 Pulse Outputs
Stopping a Pulse Output

Example Procedure
Stop pulse Immediate Pulse frequency
Stops the pulse output immedi- PULS Stop pulse
output stop ately and clears the number of output
(Number of Present output pulses setting.
frequency ACC or SPED
pulses set-
(Independent)
ting is not
preserved.) Time

Execution Execution INI
of SPED of INI
PLS2
12


INI
Stop pulse Immediate Pulse frequency
Stops the pulse output immedi- PULS Port
output stop ately and clears the number of Indepen-
(Number of Present output pulses setting. dent
frequency SPED
pulses set- Target fre-
(Independent)
ting is not quency = 0
preserved.) Time

Execution Execution SPED
of SPED of SPED
(Independent)
Stop sloped Decelerate Pulse frequency Decelerates the pulse output PULS Port
pulse out- to a stop Present
to a stop. Indepen-
Original acceleration/
put frequency deceleration rate
If ACC started the operation, dent
ACC or SPED
smoothly. the original acceleration/decel- Target fre-
(Independent)
(Number of eration rate will remain in quency = 0
pulses set-
Target
frequency=0
Time

Execution of ACC
effect.
ting is not If SPED started the operation, ACC
preserved.) the acceleration/deceleration (Independent)
rate will be invalid and the PLS2
pulse output will stop immedi-

ately.
ACC
(Independent)

12 Pulse Outputs
Switching from Speed Control (Continuous Mode) to Positioning

(Independent Mode)
Example Procedure
Frequency changes Description
Change Outputs the number of pulses
PLS2 can be executed ACC Port
from speed specified in PLS2 (Both relative and during a speed control (Continuous) Acceleration
absolute pulse specification can be
control to used.) operation started with rate
Pulse frequency
fixed dis- ACC to change to position- Deceleration
PLS2
tance posi- Target ing operation. rate
frequency
tioning An error will occur if a con- Target fre-
during stant speed cannot be quency*
operation Time
achieved after switching
Execution of ACC
Number of
the mode. If this happens,
(continuous) pulses
Execution of PLS2 the instruction execution
will be ignored and the
Fixed dis- previous operation will be
Pulse frequency
tance feed continued.
interrupt Present
frequency
Time
Execution of ACC
(continuous)
Execution of PLS2 with the following settings
Number of pulses = number of pulses until stop
Relative pulse specification
Target frequency = present frequency
Acceleration rate = Not 0
Deceleration rate = target deceleration rate
* The starting frequency is ignored.

13
PWM Outputs
13
This section describes the PWM Outputs (variable-duty-factor pulse outputs).
13-1 PWM Outputs (Variable-duty-factor Pulse Outputs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2

13-1-1 Flow of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
13-1-2 Ladder Program Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3

13 PWM Outputs
13-1 PWM Outputs (Variable-duty-factor

Pulse Outputs)
PWM outputs can be used only with the CP1E N/NA-type CPU Unit with transistor outputs.
A PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) pulse can be output with a specified duty factor. The duty factor is the
ratio of the pulses ON time and OFF time in one pulse cycle. Use the PWM instruction to generate
PWM pulses from a built-in output. The duty factor can be changed during pulse output.
Application example
Controlling temperature on a time-proportional basis using the PWM output.
Controlling the brightness of lighting.
Built-in output
PWM output
100% Period is determined

by frequency
15%
Duty factor:15%
50%
Duty factor:50%
75%
Duty factor:75%
Specifications
Item Specification
Duty factor 0.0% to 100.0% in 0.1% increments
(Duty factor accuracy is +1%/-0% at 10 kHz, +5%/-0% at 10 to 32 kHz .)
Frequency 2.0 Hz to 6,553.5 Hz (Set in 0.1-Hz increments.)*
2 Hz to 32,000 Hz (Set in 1-Hz increments.)*
Output mode Continuous mode
Instruction PWM
* The duty factor accuracy declines significantly at high frequencies because of limitations in the output circuit at
high frequencies.
For N30/40/60 or NA20 CPU Units, the output indicator of terminal 01 on terminal block CIO100
is always lit during PWM output.

13 PWM Outputs
13-1 PWM Outputs (Variable-duty-factor Pulse Outputs)

1 Setting pulse output port number,

assigning pulse output terminals,
Terminal 01 on terminal block CIO100 is used for PWM
output 0.
and wiring.
The PWM instruction is used to control PWM outputs.

2 Greate ladder Cyclic task, PWM outputs are stopped with the INI instruction.
program interrupt task.
Pulse Output Port Number and Pulse Output Terminals

The following terminals can be used for pulse outputs according to the pulse output method.
Output terminal block Other functions that cannot be used at the same time
13
Specifications made
Terminal Terminal Pulse output method
with PWM instruction

Normal output
block label number Pulse + direction
CIO 100 00 Pulse output 0, pulse Normal output 0
01 PWM output 0 Pulse output 1, pulse Normal output 1
13-1-2 Ladder Program Example

When the start input (CIO 0.00) turns ON in this example, pulses with a duty factor of 40% at a fre-
quency of 2,000 Hz are output from PWM output 0. When the stop input (CIO 0.01) turns ON, PWM
output 0 is stopped.
Frequency: Duty factor:

2,000 Hz, 500 s 40%, 200 s
Start input (CIO 0.00)
Stop input (CIO 0.01)
PWM
INI

13 PWM Outputs
Preparations
PLC Setup
DM Area Settings
PWM Operand Settings (D0 and D1)
Setting Operand Data
Frequency: 2,000.0 Hz D0 #4E20
Duty factor: 40.0% D1 #0190
Ladder Diagram
0.00
@PWM
Start input #1000 PWM output 0 (Duty factor in increments of 0.1%, Frequency in increments of 0.1 Hz)
D0 Frequency setting
D1 Duty factor setting
0.01
@INI
Stop input #1000 PWM output 0
#0003 Stops pulse output
D10 Not used.

14
Serial Communications
This section describes communications with Programmable Terminals (PTs) without
using communications programming, no-protocol communications with general compo-
nents, and connections with a Modbus-RTU Easy Master, Serial PLC Link, and host 14
computer.
14-1 Serial Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2

14-1-1 Types of CPU Units and Serial Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
14-1-2 Overview of Serial Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
14-2 Program-free Communications with Programmable Terminals . . . . . . . 14-5
14-2-1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
14-2-2 Flow of Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
14-2-3 PLC Setup and PT System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
14-3 No-protocol Communications with General Components . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8
14-3-1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8
14-3-3 PLC Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9
14-3-4 Related Auxiliary Area Bits and Words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10
14-4 Modbus-RTU Easy Master Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11
14-4-1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11
14-4-3 Setting and Word Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12
14-4-4 Programming Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-14
14-5 Serial PLC Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-20
14-5-1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-20
14-5-3 PLC Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-21
14-5-4 Operating Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-23
14-5-5 Example Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-28
14-6 Connecting the Host Computer (Not Including Support Software) . . . . 14-30
14-6-1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-30
14-6-3 Command/response Format and List of Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-31

14 Serial Communications
14-1 Serial Communications

Serial communications can be used only with the CP1E N/NA-type CPU Unit.
14-1-1 Types of CPU Units and Serial Ports
N/NA-type CPU Unit

N14/20 CPU Units have one built-in RS-232C port. There are no option slots.
N30/40/60 or NA20 CPU Units have one built-in RS-232C port and one option slot. An RS-232C
or RS-422A/485 Option Board can be mounted for serial communications.
E-type CPU Unit

There is no serial port.
Standard built-in RS-232C port
Connected devices Connected devices
NS-series PT or NP-series PT NS-series PT or NP-series PT
1:N NT Link
1:N NT Link
N14/20 CPU Unit

General component
General component CP1E N/NA-type
CPU Unit
One Option Board for serial communications (CP1W- No-protocol

No-protocol communications
CIF01 RS-232C Option Board, CP1W-CIF11 RS-
communications
422A/485 Option Board, or CP1W-CIF12 RS-
422A/485 Option Board) can be mounted in the
option slot. Inverter
Inverter
Standard built-in RS-232C port
Modbus-RTU Easy Modbus-RTU Easy
Master communications Master communications
CP-series PLC
or CJ1M PLC CP-series PLC or CJ1M PLC
Serial PLC Links* N30/40/60 or NA20 CPU Unit

Serial PLC Links*
CP1E N/NA-type
CPU Unit
Host computer Host computer (A Programming

(A Programming Device cannot be connected.) Device cannot be connected.)
Host Link Host Link
* Serial PLC Links cannot be used

on two ports at the same time.

14-1-2 Overview of Serial Communications

The CP1E CPU Units support the following types of serial communications.
Communications Built-in Optional
Connected devices Description
protocol RS-232C serial port
Programmable Terminal Data can be exchanged with 1:N NT Links OK OK
PTs without using a communi- (Host Link is also
14-1 Serial Communications

NS/NP-series PT
cations program in the CPU supported.)
Unit.
Note Only one PT can be con-

RS-232C nected when using a 1:N
NT Link
NT Link. It is not possible
CP1E to connect two PTs.
General component Communicates with general No-protocol OK OK

devices, such as barcode communications
readers, with an RS-232C or
CP1E
RS-422A/485 port without a
14
command-response format.
The TXD and RXD instructions
14-1-2 Overview of Serial Communications

RS-232C or RS-422A/485
are executed in the ladder pro-
gram in the CPU Unit to trans-
mit data from the transmission
General device with
port or read data in the recep-
serial communications tion port.
Modbus-RTU slave devices, such as invert- Data can be easily exchanged Modbus-RTU Easy OK OK
ers (Modbus-RTU Easy Master) with general devices that sup- Master Function
port Modbus-RTU slave func-
tionality (such as inverters)
CP1E
and are equipped with an RS-
RS-422A/485 Option Board
232C port or RS-422A/485
RS-232C or RS-422A/485 port.
Inverter
Data links between CPU Units Data links can be created for Serial PLC Links OK OK
up to nine CP-series or CJ1M
CPU Units, including one Poll-
CP1E CPU Unit Polling Unit
ing Unit and up to eight Polled
RS-422A/485
Units. Up to 10 words can be
Shared data shared per Unit.*1
CP1E CPU Unit Polled Unit CP1L CPU Unit Polled Unit

Communications Built-in Optional

Connected devices Description
protocol RS-232C serial port
Host computers PLC data can be read by the Host Link OK OK
host computer or written to the
PLC from the computer. The
Computer host computer sends a Host
(Not including the CX-Programmer and other
Support Software.)
Link command (C Mode) or a
FINS command to the CPU
RS-232C Unit to read/write I/O memory,
Host Link
change the operating mode, or
to force-set/reset bits in the
CPU Unit.*2
*1 A PT cannot be included in the Serial PLC Links.

*2 Connecting to the CX-Programmer is not possible with this protocol. Use the USB port.
Refer to A-3 Wiring for Serial Communications in the CP1E CPU Unit Hardware Users Manual
(Cat.No.W479) for Serial communication wiring.

14-2 Program-free Communications with Programmable Terminals

14-2 Program-free Communications with
Programmable Terminals
Programmable Terminal communications can be used only with the CP1E N/NA-type CPU Unit.
14-2-1 Overview
Communications without special communications programming is possible between a CP1E CPU Unit
and a Programmable Terminal (PT) by using the 1:N NT Link protocol.
Connect the serial port of the CP1E CPU Unit and PT with NT Link (1:N) communication mode, and
connect the CP1E CPU Unit and PT 1:1 as shown below.
PT: NS, NP, or NT31/631 V3
RS-232C
14
1:N NT Link
14-2-1 Overview
Connectable Programmable Terminals (PTs)

High-speed NT Links (115,200 bps) can be used with NS-series, NP-series, or NT-series PTs.

Communications are not possible for CP1E CPU Units using the 1:1 NT Link protocol. Do not
connect more than one PT to a CP1E CPU Unit even if the 1:N NT Link protocol is used.
SAP (Smart Active Parts) on NS-series PTs cannot be used for CP1E CPU Units.
The main unit of NT31/31C/631/631C cannot be connected with NT Link for the system pro-
grams preinstalled prior to Ver.1 and system programs in Chinese (Simplified and Traditional)
version and Korean version. Connect with Host Link.

14-2-2 Flow of Connection
CP1E CPU Unit PT (e.g. NS-series)
1 Select Built-in RS232C Port or Serial Create a project using the CX-
Option Port in the PLC Setup of the CP1E Designer and select Serial Port A or
CPU Unit using the CX-Programmer. Set CX-Designer
PLC Setup Serial Port B in the communications
the serial communications mode to NT settings.
Link (1:N), set the baud rate, and set the
highest unit number to at least 1.
Transfer screen data created

2 Transfer the PLC Setup. Transfer screen using the CX-Designer to the NS-
series PT.
3 Check the communications settings

NS-series PT in the NS-series PT on the Comm
System Menu Settings Tab Page in the system
menu.
4 Set the same communications settings in the CP1E CPU Units PLC Setup and in the NS-series PT.
5 Connect the CP1E CPU Unit and external devices using the RS-232C or RS-422A/485 ports.
14-2-3 PLC Setup and PT System Settings

Set the parameters in the PLC Setup and the PTs System Menu.
PLC Setup
Click the Built-in RS232C Port or Serial Option Port Tab in the PLC Settings Dialog Box.

14-2 Program-free Communications with Programmable Terminals

Built-in RS232C Port or Serial Option Port Tab Page
Parameter Setting
Communica- Select the Custom Option and set the baud rate to 115,200 (same as the 1:N
tions Settings NT Link High-speed Mode). It is not necessary to change the format setting.
Mode Select NT Link (1:N).
NT/PC Link If only one NS-series PT (unit number 0) is connected, set this parameter to 1.
Max. In any other case of NS-series PTs, select the unit number (1 to 7) of the con-
nected NS-series PT. In case of NP and NT-series PTs, select the unit number
(0 to 7) of the connected NP and NT-series PT.
PT System Menu
Set the PT as follows:
Example: NS-series PT
1 Select NT Links (1:N) from Serial Port A or Serial Port B on the Memory Switch Menu under the
System Menu on the PT.
14
2 Press the SET Touch Switch to set the baud rate to high speed. (A baud rate of 115,200 bps in
the PLC Setup is the same as setting high speed for the PT.)
14-2-3 PLC Setup and PT System Settings

Connection with Other Companys Display Devices
Select Host Link in the serial communications mode settings of the CP1E N/NA-type CPU Unit and set
all other communications parameters to the same values as the other companys display device.

14-3 No-protocol Communications with

General Components
No-protocol communications can be used only with the CP1E N/NA-type CPU Unit.
14-3-1 Overview
CP1E CPU Units and general devices with serial communications ports can be used for no-protocol
communications.
No-protocol communications enable sending and receiving data using the TRANSMIT (TXD) and
RECEIVE (RXD) instructions without using a protocol and without data conversion (e.g., no retry pro-
cessing, data type conversion, or process branching based on received data).
The serial communications mode is set to RS-232C.
TXD or RXD
Sending/ RS-232C or RS422A/485

receiving data
General component
(e.g., barcode reader)
No-protocol communications are used to send data in one direction to or from general external devices
that have an RS-232C or RS-422A/485 port using TXD or RXD.
For example, simple (no-protocol) communications can be used to input data from a barcode reader or
output data to a printer.
The following table lists the no-protocol communication functions supported by CP1E PLCs.
Max. Frame format
Communica- Transfer
Method amount of Other functions
tions direction Start code End code
data
Data PLC Execution 256 bytes Yes: 00 to FF Yes: 00 to FF Send delay time (delay
transmission External of TXD in hex hex or CR+LF between TXD execution and
device the ladder No: None No: None (The sending data from specified
program amount of data port): 0 to 99,990 ms at the
to receive is minimum(unit: 10 ms)
specified Controlling RS and ER signals
between 1 and
Data External Execution 256 bytes Monitoring CS and DR signals
256 bytes when
reception device of RXD in
no end code is
PLC the ladder
specified.)
program

14-3 No-protocol Communications with General Components

1 Wiring communications
Connect the CP1E CPU Unit and external device using
RS-232C or RS-422A/485 ports.
2 PLC Setup
Select Built-in RS232C Port or Serial Option Port in the
PLC Setup and transfer the PLC Setup from the CX-
Programmer to the CP1E CPU Unit.
(Set the serial communications mode to RS-232C, and
set the communications conditions.)
3 Create
ladder
Cyclic tasks
PLC to External device: Execute the TXD instruction.
External device to PLC: Execute the RXD instruction.
Program Interrupt tasks
14-3-3 PLC Setup 14

Click the Built-in RS232C Port or Serial Option Port Tab in the PLC Settings Dialog Box.

Parameter Setting
Communications Set the communications settings to the same values as the connected device.
Settings If the connected device is set to 9,600 bps, two stop bits, and even parity, select the
Custom Option, set the baud rate to 9,600 and format to 7,2,E.
Mode Select RS-232C.
End Code To specify the number of bytes of received data, select Received bytes and set the
number of bytes from 1 to 256.
To use CR+LF as the end code, set CR+LF.
To set the end code to any value between 00 to FF hex, set a value between
0x0000 and 0x00FF.

14-3-4 Related Auxiliary Area Bits and Words

Address Name Details
A392.04 Built-in RS-232C Port Turns ON when a communications error occurs at the built-in RS-232C
Communications Error Flag port. The port must be restarted when this flag turns ON.
Turns ON when a timeout error, overrun error, framing error, parity error,
or BCC error occurs in Modbus-RTU Easy Master Mode.
A392.05 Built-in RS-232C Port Send ON when the built-in RS-232C port is able to send data in no-protocol
Ready Flag mode.
(No-protocol mode)
A392.06 Built-in RS-232C Port ON when the built-in RS-232C port has completed the reception in no-pro-
Reception Completed Flag tocol mode.
(No-protocol mode) When the number of bytes was specified: ON when the specified
number of bytes is received.
When the end code was specified: ON when the end code is received or
256 bytes are received.
A392.07 Built-in RS-232C Port ON when a data overflow occurred during reception through the built-in
Reception Overflow Flag RS-232C port in no-protocol mode.
(No-protocol mode) When the number of bytes was specified:
ON when more data is received after the reception was completed but
before RXD was executed.
When the end code was specified:
ON when more data is received after the end code was received but
before RXD is executed.
ON when 257 bytes are received before the end code.
If a start code is specified, ON when the end code is received after the
start code is received.
A392.12 Serial Option Port ON when a communications error has occurred at the serial option port.
Communications Error Flag The port must be restarted when this flag turns ON.
ON when a timeout error, overrun error, framing error, parity error, or
BCC error occurs in Modbus-RTU Easy Master mode.
A392.13 Serial Option Port Send ON when the serial option port is able to send data in no-protocol mode.
Ready Flag
(No-protocol Mode)
A392.14 Serial Option Port ON when the serial option port has completed the reception in
Reception Completed no-protocol mode.
Flag (No-protocol Mode) When the number of bytes was specified: ON when the specified
number of bytes is received.
When the end code was specified: ON when the end code is received or
A392.15 Serial Option Port ON when a data overflow occurred during reception through the serial
Reception Overflow Flag option port in no-protocol mode.
(No-protocol Mode)
A393.00 to Built-in RS-232C Port Indicates (in binary) the number of bytes of data received when the
A393.15 Reception Counter built-in RS-232C port is in no-protocol mode.
(No-protocol Mode) The start code and end code are not included.
A394.00 to Serial Option Port Indicates (in binary) the number of bytes of data received when the
A394.15 Reception Counter serial option port is in no-protocol mode.
(No-protocol Mode) The start code and end code are not included.

14-4 Modbus-RTU Easy Master Function

The Modbus-RTU Easy Master Function can be used only with the CP1E N/NA-type CPU Unit.

14-4-1 Overview
Using the Modbus-RTU Easy Master enables easy control of Modbus-compatible slaves, such as
inverters, using serial communications. The serial communications mode is set to Modbus-RTU Easy
Master.
15 08 07 00
D1200 - - Slave address
D1201 - - Function code
D1202 Number of communications data bytes
Communications are easily achieved D1203
by simply turning ON A640.00 after Communications data
~
setting the Modbus-RTU command in
the DM fixed allocation words.
Slave address Function code Communications data

14
Slave address Function code Communications data
Modbus-RTU
Modbus-RTU Master Execution
14-4-1 Overview
Bit for Port 1 A640.00
OMRON Inverters
3G3JX, 3G3MX, 3G3RX,
3G3JV, 3G3MV, or 3G3RV
Modbus-RTU commands can be sent simply by turning ON a software switch after setting the Modbus
slave address, function, and data in the DM fixed allocation words for the Modbus-RTU Easy Master.
The response when received is automatically stored in the DM fixed allocation words for the Modbus-
RTU Easy Master.
Connect the CP1E CPU Unit and Modbus-RTU Slave
using RS-422A/485 ports.
2 PLC Setup
Select Built-in RS232C Port or Serial Option Port in the
PLC Setup and transfer the PLC Setup from the CX-Pro-
grammer to the CP1E CPU Unit. (Set the serial communi-
cations mode to Modbus Easy Master, and set the
communications conditions.)
3 Create Cyclic tasks

Set the Modbus-RTU frame in the DM Fixed Allocation
Words.
ladder
Program Interrupt tasks Turn ON the Modbus-RTU Master Execution Bit
(A640.00 or A641.00).

14-4-3 Setting and Word Allocation

DM fixed allocation words and Auxiliary Area words are allocated for the Modbus-RTU Easy Master
according to the CPU Unit type and connected port as shown below.
CP1E CPU Unit serial port DM fixed allocation words Auxiliary Area bits
CP1E N14/20 CPU Built-in RS-232C port D1200 to D1299 A640.00 to A640.02
Unit
CP1E N30/40/60 or Built-in RS-232C port D1200 to D1299 A640.00 to A640.02
NA20 CPU Unit Serial option port D1300 to D1399 A641.00 to A641.02
DM Fixed Allocation Words

Word
Built-in RS-232C
Serial option port
port of CP1E Bits Contents
of CP1E
N14/20/30/40/60
N30/40/60 or
or NA20 CPU
NA20 CPU Unit
Unit
D1200 D1300 00 to 07 Command Slave address (00 to F7 hex)
08 to 15 Reserved (Always 00 hex.)
D1201 D1301 00 to 07 Function code
D1202 D1302 00 to 15 Number of communications data bytes (0000 to
005E hex)
D1203 to D1249 D1303 to D1349 00 to 15 Communications data (94 bytes maximum)
D1250 D1350 00 to 07 Response Slave address (01 to F7 hex)
D1251 D1351 00 to 07 Function code
08 to 15 Reserved
D1252 D1352 00 to 07 Error code
(See error codes in the following table. )
D1253 D1353 00 to 15 Number of response bytes (0000 to 03EA hex)
D1254 to D1299 D1354 to D1399 00 to 15 Response data (92 bytes maximum)

Error Codes
Code Description Description
00 hex Normal end
01 hex Illegal address The slave address specified in the parameter is illegal (248 or higher).

02 hex Illegal function code The function code specified in the parameter is illegal.
03 hex Data length overflow There are more than 94 data bytes.
04 hex Serial communications mode The Modbus-RTU Easy Master function was executed when the
error serial communications mode was not the Modbus-RTU Easy Mas-
ter Mode or when the option board is not equipped.
80 hex Response timeout A response was not received from the slave.
81 hex Parity error A parity error occurred.
82 hex Framing error A framing error occurred.
83 hex Overrun error An overrun error occurred.
84 hex CRC error A CRC error occurred.
85 hex Incorrect confirmation address The slave address in the response is different from the one in the
request.
86 hex Incorrect confirmation function The function code in the response is different from the one in the
code request. 14
87 hex Response size overflow The response frame is larger than the storage area (92 bytes).
14-4-3 Setting and Word Allocation

88 hex Exception response An exception response was received from the slave.
89 hex Service being executed A service is already being executed (reception traffic congestion).
8A hex Execution canceled Executing the service has been canceled.
8F hex Other error Other FINS response code was received.
Related Auxiliary Area Words and Bits

The Modbus-RTU command set in the DM fixed allocation words for the Modbus-RTU Easy Master
is automatically sent when the Modbus-RTU Master Execution Bit is turned ON. The results (normal
or error) will be given in corresponding flags.
Word Bit Port Contents
A640 02 Built-in RS-232C port of Modbus-RTU Master Execution Error Flag
CP1E N14/20/30/40/60 or ON: Execution error.
NA20 CPU Unit
OFF: Execution normal or still in progress.
01 Modbus-RTU Master Execution Normal Flag
ON: Execution normal.
OFF: Execution error or still in progress.
00 Modbus-RTU Master Execution Bit
Turned ON: Execution started
ON: Execution in progress.
OFF: Not executed or execution completed.
A641 02 Serial option port of CP1E Modbus-RTU Master Execution Error Flag
N30/40/60 or NA20 CPU ON: Execution error.
Unit
OFF: Execution normal or still in progress
01 Modbus-RTU Master Execution Normal Flag
ON: Execution normal.
OFF: Execution error or still in progress.
00 Modbus-RTU Master Execution Bit
Turned ON: Execution started
ON: Execution in progress.
OFF: Not executed or execution completed.

14-4-4 Programming Examples

A bobbin winder on a spinning machine will be used in the following example.
The speed of the bobbin winder must be controlled as the thread is wound because the speed of the
thread is constant.
Constant thread speed
Fast rotation Slow rotation
Speed
Stopped
Contact A Contact B Contact C Contact Z
The target speed is changed according to inputs from multiple contacts. Acceleration and deceleration
are controlled using the acceleration and deceleration of an inverter.
Wiring Examples
The CP1E and OMRON 3G3MV Inverter are connected using RS-485 for frequency and start/stop con-
trol.
CP1E N-type CPU Unit CP1W-CIF11/12

with 30 I/O Points RS-422A/485 Option Board
Symbol
Control circuit
terminal block
50 m max. (communications
terminals)
CP1W-CIF11/12

CP1W-CIF11/12 Settings
Set the DIP switch as shown in the following table
(Back)
CPU Unit connector

DIP switch for operation settings
No. Setting ON / OFF Description

1 Terminating resistance selection ON Connects terminating resistance
2 2/4-wire selection ON 2-wire connections
3 2/4-wire selection ON 2-wire connections
4 OFF Always OFF
5 RS control for RD ON Enabled
6 RS control for SD ON Enabled
3G3MV Settings 14
Set the DIP switch as follows:

SW2, pin 1 : ON (terminating resistance connected) Terminating resistance for RS422/485
communications
Set the following parameters.
No. Name Setting Description
n003 RUN command selection 2 RS-422/485 communications is enabled.
n004 Frequency reference selection 6 Frequency reference through RS-422/RS-485
n019 Acceleration time 1 5.0 Acceleration time in seconds
n020 Deceleration time 1 5.0 Deceleration time in seconds
n151 RS-422/485 communications 1 Detect timeouts, detect fatal errors, and the Inverter
timeover detection selection decelerates to a stop using deceleration time 1 (default).
n152 RS-422/485 communications 1 Select the unit for communications of frequency
frequency reference/display references and frequency monitoring data. Unit: 0.01Hz
unit selection (default).
n153 RS-422/485 communications 1 Slave address (unit number), unit number 1
Slave address
n154 RS-422/485 communications 2 Communications baud rate: 9,600 bps (default)
baud rate selection
n155 RS-422/485 communications 0 Even parity
parity selection
n156 RS-422/485 communications 10 Sets the response wait time for request messages
send wait time received from the master. 10 ms (default).
n157 RS-422/485 communications 0 RTS control enabled (default)
RTS control selection

PLC Setup
Click the Serial Option Port Tab in the PLC Settings Dialog Box.
Serial Option Port Tab Page

Parameter Settings
Communications Set the Modbus communications settings to match those of the
Settings Inverter.
If the Inverter is set to 9,600 bps, one stop bit, and even parity, select
the Custom Option and set the baud rate to 9,600.
Set the format to 8,1,E.
Mode Select Modbus Easy Master.
Response Timeout Set the default value of 0100 ms.

Programming Example

D1306 Stop operation when communications start.
RUN command (0: Stop)
Frequency reference:00.00Hz
D1307
A641
Contact A
D1306 RUN command (1: Start)
Frequency reference: 60.00Hz(1770 Hex)
D1307
14

Contact B
D1306 RUN command (1: Start)
Frequency reference: 55.00Hz(157C Hex)
D1307
Contact C
D1306
RUN command (1: Start)
Frequency reference: 50.00Hz(1388 Hex)
D1307
Contact Z
D1306 RUN command (0: Stop)
Frequency reference: 00.00Hz
D1307
Start and continue Modbus communications from
1 second after turning ON the power supply.
SET
A641.00
Modbus-RTU Master Execution Bit

A641.01

Flags for Modbus-RTU Easy Master for Serial Option Port
A641.00 Execution Bit
A641.01 Execution Normal Flag
A641.02 Execution Error Flag
(1) (2) (3)
(1)Turn ON A641.00 (Execution Bit) to send command data stored starting at D1300. For details, refer
to DM Area Data on page 14-19.
Words
Bits Setting
Serial Option Port
D1300 00 to 07 Command Slave address (00 to F7 hex)
D1301 00 to 07 Function code
D1302 00 to 15 Number of communications data bytes (0000 to
005E hex)
D1303 to D1349 00 to 15 Communications data (94 bytes max.)
The Execution Bit will automatically turn OFF. Do not turn OFF the bit through the ladder.
(2)When a command has been sent successfully, A641.01 (Execution Normal Flag) will turn ON, and
the response data will be stored starting from D1350.
Words
Bits Setting
Serial Option Port
D1350 00 to 07 Response Slave address (01 to F7 hex)
D1351 00 to 07 Function code
08 to 15 Reserved
D1352 00 to 07 Error code
D1353 00 to 15 Number of response bytes (0000 to 03EA hex)
D1354 to D1399 00 to 15 Response data (92 bytes max.)
(3)If a communications error occurs, A641.02 (Execution Error Flag) will turn ON, and the error code
will be stored in D1352.

DM Area Data
DM Fixed Allocation Words for Modbus-RTU Easy Master

DM Area data in words D1301 to D1305 are set before the execution of the ladder program.
D1306 and D1307 do not need to be set. They are modified by MOV instructions, and are used to

change, start, and stop frequency references.
Serial Option Port: Command
Slave Function Communications Communications data: D1303 to D1349 (maximum)

Setting
address code data bytes 94 bytes (47 words) max.
Address
Value
Data for next reigister

(e.g. set 60.0 Hz (0258
Inverter slave
hex) for register 0002 14
address: 1 hex
(frequency reference))
Data for starting register

Inverter data write:
10 hex (e.g. set 0001 hex for register 0001
(RUN command, see below))
Use the 9 bytes from the upper byte
of D1303 to the upper byte of D1307
Attached data size in bytes:
4 (4 bytes from lower byte of D1305
to upper byte of D1307)
Number of registers written:
2 (data for registers 0001 and 0002)
Register number for starting data write:
0001 (Specifies to start writing data to
Inverter starting at register 0001.)
RUN Command (Register 0001) Allocation and Details for Inverter 3G3MV
Bit No. Setting
0 RUN command (1: Start)
1 Normal/reverse rotation (1: Reversed)
2 External error (1: EF0)
3 Error reset (1: Error reset)
4 Multifunction input 1 (1: ON)
11 to 15 (Not used.)
For this example, only the RUN command (bit 00) will be used.
With the Modbus-RTU Easy Master, a CRC-16 checksum does not need to be set in the DM Area,
because it is calculated automatically.

14-5 Serial PLC Links

Serial PLC Links can be used only with the CP1E N/NA-type CPU Unit.
14-5-1 Overview
Serial PLC Links enable exchanging data between CP1E N/NA-type CPU Units, CP1L/CP1H CPU
Units, or CJ1M CPU Units without using special programming. The serial communications mode is set
to Serial PLC Links. Up to 9 PLCs can be linked.
Configuration
Connecting CP1E, CP1L, CP1H, or CJ1M CPU Units 1:N (8 Nodes Maximum)
CP1E N/NA-type CPU Unit (Polling Unit)

RS-422A/485
Shared data
CJ1M CPU Unit
(Polled Unit)
CP1E N/NA-type CP1L

CPU Unit CPU Unit
(Polled Unit) (Polled Unit)
8 nodes maximum
Connecting CP1E, CP1L, CP1H, or CJ1M CPU Units 1:1
CP1E N/NA-type
CPU Unit
(Polling Unit)
RS-232C or RS422A/485
Shared data
CP1E or
CP1L CPU
Unit (Polled
Unit)

With the CP1E CPU Units, a Programmable Terminal (PT) cannot be included in a Serial PLC
Link.

Connect the CP1E CPU Unit and the CP1E or other
CPU Units using RS-232C or RS-422A/485 ports.
2 PLC Setup
Set Built-in RS232C Port or Serial Option Port in the
PLC Setup and transfer the PLC Setup from the CX-
Programmer to the CP1E CPU Unit. (Set the serial com-
munications mode to Serial PC Link (Master) or Serial

PC Link (Slave) and set the communications conditions,
link words, and PLC Link method.)
3 Start communications

Both serial ports cannot be used for PLC Links at the same time.
14
If both serial ports are set for PLC Links (either as polling or polled nodes), a PLC Setup setting
error (nonfatal error) will occur and the PLC Setup Setting Error Flag (A402.10) will turn ON.

14-5-3 PLC Setup
Settings at the Polling Unit


Parameter Setting
Communications Settings Set the communications settings to the same values as the connected
PLCs.
If the connected PLCs are set to 115,200 bps, select the Custom Option,
set the baud rate to 115200. The format can be set to any value.
Mode Select PC Link (Master).
Link Words Set to 10 (default) for the Master only. 10 words (default)
PC Link Mode Select All or Master.
NT/PC Link Max. Set the highest unit number of the connected slaves.
Settings at the Polled Unit

Parameter Setting
Communications Settings Set the communications settings to the same values as the connected
PLCs.
If the connected PLCs are set to 115,200 bps, select the Custom Option,
set the baud rate to 115200. The format can be set to any value.
Mode Select PC Link (Slave).
PC Link Unit No. Set the unit number (0 to 7).

14-5-4 Operating Specifications

Serial PLC Links can be used for both built-in RS-232C ports and serial option ports for N30/40/60 or
NA20 CPU Units. However, two serial ports cannot be used simultaneously for Serial PLC Links.
Item Specifications
Applicable PLCs CP1E, CP1H, CP1L, CJ1M
Baud rate 38,400 bps, 115,200 bps
Applicable serial ports Built-in RS-232C ports and serial option ports
Both ports cannot be used for Serial PLC Links at the same time. If both

ports are set for Serial PLC Links (either as polling node or polled node), a
PLC Setup setting error (nonfatal error) will occur and the PLC Setup Setting
Error Flag (A402.10) will turn ON.
Connection method RS-422A/485 or RS-232C connection via RS-422A/485 Option Board or
RS232C port.
Words allocated in CIO Area Serial PLC Link Words: CIO 200 to CIO 289 (Up to 10 words can be
allocated for each CPU Unit.)
Maximum number of Units 9 Units max., comprising 1 Polling Unit and 8 Polled Units.
14
Link methods (data refresh Complete link method or Polling Unit link method
methods)

Data Refresh Methods
The following two methods can be used to refresh data.
Complete link method
Polling Unit link method

Complete Link
The data from all nodes in the Serial PLC Links are reflected in both the Polling Unit and the Polled
Units.
The only exceptions are the addresses of Polled Units that are not present in the network. These
data areas are undefined in all nodes.
Example: Complete Link Method, Highest Unit Number: 3

In the following diagram, Polled Unit No. 2 is a Unit not present in the network, so the area allocated
for Polled Unit No. 2 is undefined in all nodes.
Po l l i n g U n i t Po l l e d U n i t N o. 0 Pol l ed Uni t No. 1 Pol l ed Uni t No. 3
Local area Polling Unit Polling Unit Polling Unit
Polled Unit No. 0 Local area Polled Unit No. 0 Polled Unit No. 0
Polled Unit No. 1 Polled Unit No. 1 Local area Polled Unit No. 1
Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined
Polled Unit No. 3 Polled Unit No. 3 Polled Unit No. 3 Local area
(Not used) (Not used) (Not used) (Not used)
Example for Ten Link Words (Maximum Number of Words)

Each CPU Unit (either CP1E, CP1L, CP1H, or CJ1M) sends data to the same words in all other
CPU Units for the Polling Unit and all Polled Units. Data is sent between the words that are allocated
to the Polling Unit and Polled Units according to unit numbers.
CP1E N/NA-type CPU Unit CP1E N/NA-type CPU Unit CP1L CPU Unit Example: CJ1M CPU Unit
(Polling Unit) (Polled Unit No. 0) (Polled Unit No. 1) (Polled Unit No. 2)
Serial PLC Link Words Serial PLC Link Words Serial PLC Link Words Serial PLC Link Words
CIO 200 to 209 CIO 200 to 209 CIO 3100 to 3109 CIO 3100 to 3109
No.0 CIO 210 to 219 No.0 CIO 210 to 219 No.0 CIO 3110 to 3119 No.0 CIO 3110 to 3119

Polling Unit Link Method

The data for all the Polled Units in the Serial PLC Links are reflected in the Polling Unit only, and
each Polled Unit reflects the data of the Polling Unit only.
The advantage of the Polling Unit link method is that the addresses allocated for the local Polled Unit
data are the same in each Polled Unit, allowing data to be accessed using common ladder program-
ming.
The areas allocated for Polled Units not present in the network are undefined in the Polling Unit only.
Example: Polling Unit Link Method, Highest Unit Number: 3
In the following diagram, Polled Unit No. 2 is a Unit not participating in the network, so the corre-
sponding area in the Polling Unit is undefined.

Polling Unit Polled Unit No. 0 Polled Unit No. 1 Polled Unit No. 3
Local area Polling Unit Polling Unit Polling Unit
Polled Unit No. 0 Local area Local area Local area
Polled Unit No. 1 (Not used) (Not used) (Not used)
Undefined (Not used) (Not used) (Not used)
Polled Unit No. 3 (Not used) (Not used) (Not used)

14

Example for Ten Link Words (Maximum Number of Words)

The CPU Unit that is the Polling Unit (either CP1E, CP1H, CP1L, or CJ1M) sends its data (CIO 200
to CIO 209) to the same words (CIO 200 to CIO 209) in all other CPU Units.
The Polled Units (either CP1E, CP1H, CP1L, or CJ1M) send their data (CIO 210 to CIO 219) to con-
secutive sets of 10 words (CIO 210 to CIO 289) in the Polling Unit.
CP1E N/NA-type CPU Unit CP1E N/NA-type CPU Unit CP1L CPU Unit Example: CJ1M CPU Unit
(Polling Unit) (Polled Unit No. 0) (Polled Unit No. 1) (Polled Unit No. 2)
Serial PLC Link Words Serial PLC Link Words Serial PLC Link Words Serial PLC Link Words
CIO 200 to 209 CIO 200 to 209 CIO 3100 to 3109 CIO 3100 to 3109
No.0 CIO 210 to 219 CIO 210 to 219 CIO 3110 to 3119 CIO 3110 to 3119
No.1 CIO 220 to 229
No.2 CIO 230 to 239
No.3 CIO 240 to 249
No.4 CIO 250 to 259
No.5 CIO 260 to 269
No.6 CIO 270 to 279
No.7 CIO 280 to 289

Allocated Words
Complete Link Method

Address Link words 1 word 2 words 3 words to 10 words
CIO 200 Polling Unit CIO 200 CIO 200 to CIO 200 to CIO 200 to
201 202 209
Polled Unit CIO 201 CIO 202 to CIO 203 to CIO 210 to
No. 0 203 205 219
No. 1 205 208 229
No. 2 207 211 239
Serial PLC No. 3 209 214 249
Link Area Polled Unit CIO 205 CIO 210 to CIO 215 to CIO 250 to
No. 4 211 217 259
No. 5 213 220 269
No. 6 215 223 279
No. 7 217 226 289
CIO 289 Not used. CIO 209 to CIO 218 to CIO 227 to ---
289 289 289
Polling Unit Link Method

Address Link words 1 word 2 words 3 words to 10 words
CIO 200 Polling Unit CIO 200 CIO 200 to CIO 200 to CIO 200 to
201 202 209
No. 0 203 205 219
No. 1 203 205 219
No. 2 203 205 219
Serial PLC No. 3 203 205 219
Link Words Polled Unit CIO 201 CIO 202 to CIO 203 to CIO 210 to
No. 4 203 205 219
No. 5 203 205 219
No. 6 203 205 219
No. 7 203 205 219
CIO 289 Not used. CIO 202 to CIO 204 to CIO 206 to ---
289 289 289

Related Auxiliary Area Bits and Words
Built-in RS-232C Port

Name Address Details Read/write Refresh timing
Built-in RS-232C Port A393.00 to When built-in RS-232C port is Read Cleared when power is turned ON.
Communicating with A393.07 being used in NT link mode, the bit Turns ON the bit corresponding to the unit number
Polled Unit Flags* corresponding to the Unit perform- of the Polled Unit that is communicating via built-in
ing communications will be ON. Bits RS-232C port in NT link mode or Serial PLC Link
00 to 07 correspond to unit num- mode.
bers 0 to 7, respectively.
Bits 00 to 07 correspond to unit numbers 0 to 7,
ON: Communicating
respectively.
OFF: Not communicating
Built-in RS-232C Port A526.00 Turn ON this bit to restart built-in Read/write Cleared when power is turned ON.

Restart Bit RS-232C port. Turn ON to restart built-in RS-232C port.
Note The bit is automatically turned OFF by the

system when restart processing has been
completed.
Built-in RS-232C Port A528.00 to When an error occurs at built-in RS- Read/write Cleared when power is turned ON.
Error Flags A528.07 232C port, the corresponding error When an error occurs at built-in RS-232C port, the
bit is turned ON. corresponding error bit is turned ON.
Bit 0: Not used.
The flag is automatically turned OFF by the system
Bit 1: Not used.
when built-in RS-232C port is restarted.
Bit 2: Parity error
In NT link mode, only bit 05 (timeout error) is
Bit 3: Framing error
Bit 4: Overrun error enabled.
14
Bit 5: Timeout error In Serial PLC Link mode, only the following bits are
Bit 6: Not used. enabled.

Bit 7: Not used. Errors at the Polling Unit:
Bit 05: Timeout error
Errors at Polled Units:
Bit 04: Overrun error
Serial Option Port

Name Address Details Read/write Refresh timing
Serial Option Port A394.00 to When serial option port is being Read Cleared when power is turned ON.
Communicating A394.07 used in NT link mode, the bit corre- Turns ON the bit corresponding to the unit number
with Polled Unit sponding to the Unit performing of the Polled Unit that is communicating via serial
Flags* communications will be ON. Bits 00 option port in NT link mode or Serial PLC Link
to 07 correspond to unit numbers 0 mode.
to 7, respectively.
Bits 00 to 07 correspond to unit numbers 0 to 7,
ON: Communicating
respectively.
OFF: Not communicating
Serial Option Port A526.01 Turn ON this bit to restart serial Read/write Cleared when power is turned ON.
Restart Flags option port. Turn ON to restart serial option port.
Note The bit is automatically turned OFF by the

system when restart processing has been
completed.
Serial Option Port A528.08 to When an error occurs at serial Read/Write Cleared when power is turned ON.
Error Flags A528.15 option port, the corresponding When an error occurs at serial option port, the cor-
error bit is turned ON. responding error bit is turned ON.
Bit 8: Not used.
The flag is automatically turned OFF by the system
Bit 9: Not used.
when serial option port is restarted.
Bit 10: Parity error
Bit 11: Framing error In NT link mode, only bit 13 (timeout error) is
Bit 12: Overrun error enabled.
Bit 13: Timeout error In Serial PLC Link mode, only the following bits are
Bit 14: Not used. enabled.
Bit 15: Not used. Errors at the Polling Unit:
Errors at Polled Units:
Bit 12: Overrun error
* In the same way as for the existing 1:N NT Link, the status (communicating/not communicating) of the Polled Unit
in Serial PLC Links can be checked from the Polling Unit (CPU Unit) by reading the Built-in RS-232C Port Com-
municating with Polled Unit Flag (A393.00 to A393.07 for unit numbers 0 to 7) or the Serial Option Port Commu-
nicating with Polled Unit Flag (A394.00 to A394.07 for unit numbers 0 to 7).

14-5-5 Example Application
Operation
The present temperature information is exchanged between the boilers. This information is used to
adjust the temperature control of one boiler depending on the status of the other boilers and for moni-
toring individual boilers.
Boiler A Boiler B Boiler C
Wiring Example (CP1E N30/40 CPU Units)

Boiler A: CP1E (Polling Unit) Boiler B: CP1E (Polled Unit No. 0) Boiler C: CP1E (Polled Unit No. 1)
CP1W-TS101 CP1W-TS101 CP1W-TS101
CP1E N-type Temperature CP1E N-type Temperature CP1E N-type Temperature
CPU Unit Sensor Unit CPU Unit Sensor Unit CPU Unit Sensor Unit
CIO 2, CIO 3 CIO 2, CIO 3 CIO 2, CIO 3
Two Pt100 Sensor Inputs Two Pt100 Sensor Inputs Two Pt100 Sensor Inputs
CP1W-CIF11 CP1W-CIF11 CP1W-CIF11
RS-422A/485 RS-422A/485 RS-422A/485
Option Board Option Board Option Board
CP1W-CIF11 RS422/485 Option Board DIP Switch Settings

(Back)
CPU Unit connector

DIP switch for operation
settings
Polling Polled Polled

No. Settings Description
Unit Unit No. 0 Unit No. 1
1 Terminating resistance selection ON OFF ON PLCs at both ends must have ter-
minating resistance connected.
2 2-wire or 4-wire selection ON ON ON 2-wire
3 2-wire or 4-wire selection ON ON ON 2-wire
4 OFF OFF OFF Always OFF
5 RS control selection for RD OFF OFF OFF Control disabled
6 RS control selection for SD ON ON ON Control enabled

PLC Setup
Item Boiler A (Polling Unit) Boiler B (Polled Unit No. 0) Boiler C (Polled Unit No. 1)
Communications Settings Custom
Baud Rate 115200bps
Parameters 7.2.E (default)
Mode PC Link (Master) PC link (Slave)
Link words 10 (default)
PC Link Mode ALL
NT/PC Link Max. 1

PC Link Unit No. 0 1
Programming Example
Data in the Serial PLC Link Areas are transferred using data links by the Serial PLC Link and without
using any special programming. The ladder program is used to transfer the data that needs to be
linked to the data link area.
CP1E (Polling Unit) CP1E (Polled Unit No.1) CP1E (Polled Unit No. 0)
14
CIO 0
Input Bits Input Bits Input Bits
CIO 1
CIO 2 A_Temperature data 0 B_Temperature data 0 C_Temperature data 0
14-5-5 Example Application

CIO 3 A_Temperature data 1 B_Temperature data 1 C_Temperature data 1
CIO 100 Output Bits Output Bits Output Bits
CIO 200 A_Temperature data 0 A_Temperature data 0 A_Temperature data 0

CIO 201 A_Temperature data 1 A_Temperature data 1 A_Temperature data 1
CIO 209
CIO 210 B_Temperature data 0 B_Temperature data 0 B_Temperature data 0
CIO 211 B_Temperature data 1 B_Temperature data 1 B_Temperature data 1
Serial PLC
Link Areas
CIO 219
CIO 220 C_Temperature data 0 C_Temperature data 0 C_Temperature data 0
CIO 221 C_Temperature data 1 C_Temperature data 1 C_Temperature data 1
CIO 229
CIO 289
Ladder Diagram
CP1E N-type CPU Unit CP1E N-type CPU Unit CP1E N-type CPU Unit
(Polling Unit) (Polled Unit No. 0) (Polled Unit No. 1)
#2 #2 #2
2 2 2
200 210 220
Transfer CIO 2 and CIO 3 to Transfer CIO 2 and CIO 3 to Transfer CIO 2 and CIO 3 to
CIO 200 and CIO 201 using a CIO 210 and CIO 211 using a CIO 220 and CIO 221 using a
BLOCK TRANSFER instruction. BLOCK TRANSFER instruction. BLOCK TRANSFER instruction

14-6 Connecting the Host Computer

(Not Including Support Software)
Host computers can be connected using this method only with the CP1E N/NA-type CPU Unit.
14-6-1 Overview
Commands are sent from a host computer (not including Support Software) to the CP1E CPU Unit to
read and write data. The serial communications mode is set to Host Link.

Support Software such as the CX-Programmer cannot use the Host Link protocol. Use Periph-
eral USB port instead.
Communica-
Command flow Command type Configuration Application Remarks
tions method
Host computer Host link Create frame Directly connect the host com- Use this
PLC command in the host puter in a 1:1 or 1:N system. method when
(C Mode) computer communicating
and send the primarily from
Host link command command to OR the host com-
the PLC. Command
puter to the
Receive the PLC.
response.
FINS command Directly connect the host com- Use these The FINS com-
(with Host Link puter in a 1:1 system or 1:N methods when mand must be
header and system. communicating placed between
terminator) sent. primarily from a Host Link
FINS the host com- header and ter-
Host Link
header
Host Link
terminator
OR puter to PLCs minator and
Command
in the network. then sent by the
host computer.
1 Communications wiring
Connect the computer and CP1E CPU Unit using
RS-232C ports.
Set the PLC Setup (select Host Link for the serial
2 PLC Setup communications mode and set the communications
conditions) and transfer the PLC Setup from the
CX-Programmer to the CP1E CPU Unit.
Send the following commands from the host computer.

3 Program from host
C-mode commands
FINS commands

14-6 Connecting the Host Computer (Not Including Support

14-6-3 Command/response Format and List of Commands
The outline of command/response format and each command are listed below.
For the details of the host link commands and FINS commands, refer to Communication Instructions
Reference Manual (Cat.No.W342).
List of C Mode Commands

C mode commands (host link commands) are shown below.
Type Header code Name Function
I/O memory RR CIO area read Read the specified words from the specified words
read of CIO area
RH Holding area read Read the specified words from the specified words
Software)
of Holding area (H)
RC Timer and Counter PV area read Read the specified present values of timer and
counter from the specified words
RG Timer and Counter Completion Flag Read the specified Completion Flag of timer and
read counter from the specified words 14
RD DM area read Read the specified words from the specified words
of DM area (D)
14-6-3 Command/response Format and List of Commands

RJ Auxiliary area read Read the specified words from the specified words
of Auxiliary area (A)
I/O memory WR CIO area write Write the specified source words from the specified
write words of CIO area in the unit of word
WH Holding area write Write the specified source words from the specified
words of Holding area (H) in the unit of word
I/O memory WC Timer and Counter PV area write Write the specified source words from the specified
write words of Timer and Counter present value area in
the unit of word
WD DM area write Write the specified source words from the specified
words of DM area (D) in the unit of word
WJ Auxiliary area write Write the specified source words from the specified
words of Auxiliary area (A) in the unit of word
CPU Unit MS CPU Unit status read Read the CPU Unit operating conditions (operating
status mode, forced set/reset, fatal error)
related SC Status change Change the operating mode of CPU Unit
MF Error information read Read the occurring error information of CPU Unit
(fatal error, non-fatal error)
Test TS Test Directly return 1 block sent from the host computer
I/O memory QQMR I/O memory area mixed read registra- Register the I/O memory words or bits that need to
area mixed tion read into the table
read QQIR I/O memory area mixed registration Read all of the I/O memory area words and bits
that were registered
Host link XZ Abort (command only) Interrupt the operation that being processed using
communica- the host link command, and return to the initial sta-
tion process- tus after abortion
ing ** Initial (command only) Initialize the transmission control sequence for all
the host link unit numbers
IC Command undefined error (response Response when the command's header code can-
only) not be broken

List of FINS commands

FINS commands are shown below.
Command
Type Name Function
code
I/O memory 01 01 I/O memory area read Read the contents of continuous I/O memory area
area access 01 02 I/O memory area write Write the contents of continuous I/O memory area
01 03 I/O memory area write all at once Replenish the specified ranges of I/O memory area
with the same data
01 04 I/O memory area mixed read Read the contents of discontinuous I/O memory
area
Parameter 02 01 Parameter area read Read the contents of continuous parameter area
area access 02 02 Parameter area write Write the contents of continuous parameter area
(unable to execute in MONITOR or RUN mode)
02 03 Parameter area write (clear) all at Replenish the specified ranges of parameter area
once with the same data
Operating 04 01 Operating mode change (Operation Change the operating mode of CPU Unit to RUN or
mode start) MONITOR mode
change 04 02 Operating mode change (Operation Change the operating mode of CPU Unit to PRO-
stop) GRAM mode
System con- 05 01 CPU Unit information read Read CPU Unit information
figuration
read
Status read 06 01 CPU Unit status read Read the status information of CPU Unit
06 20 Cycle time read Read cycle time (MAX, MIN, AVERAGE)
Time infor- 07 01 Time information read Read present year, month, day of the month, hour,
mation minute, second, day of the week
access 07 02 Time information write Change present year, month, day of the month,
hour, minute, second, day of the week
Message 09 20 Message read/cancel Read FAL and FALS
display
related
Debugging 21 03 Error log pointer clearance Clear all the pointer of error log to zero
related 23 01 Force-set/reset Force-set, force-reset and release (unable to spec-
ify multi-bit)
23 02 All bits release Release the forced status of all bits

-
15
Analog I/O Function
15
This section describes the built-in analog function for NA-type CPU Units.
15-1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2

15-1-2 Analog I/O Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6
15-2 Analog Input and Output Signal Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7
15-2-1 Analog Input Signal Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7
15-2-2 Analog Output Signal Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-9
15-2-3 Special functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-11
15-3 I/O Allocation and Related Auxiliary Area Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-12
15-3-1 I/O Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-12
15-3-2 Related Auxiliary Area Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-12

15 Analog I/O Function
15-1 Overview
1 PLC Setup
Set whether each input or output will be used.
(Each I/O point is set independently.)
Set the I/O resolution.
(The same setting is used for all I/O points.)
Set the analog input range:
0 to 5 V, 1 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, -10 to 10 V, 0 to 20mA or
4 to 20mA
(Each input is set independently.)
Set the analog output range:
0 to 5 V, 1 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, -10 to 10 V, 0 to 20mA or
4 to 20mA
(Each output is set independently.)
2 Wiring analog I/O
Wire the I/O devices.
Select correct wire method according to the voltage
or current input.
3 Write the ladder program

Analog inputs: Read the conversion value.
Analog outputs: Write the conversion value.
PLC Setup
Use the CX-Programmer to set the various PLC Setup including whether the I/O point is being used,
the input range, output range and averaging function usage. The I/O point usage, input range, output
range, and averaging function usage can be set independently for each I/O point.
The input range can be set to -10 to 10 V, 0 to 10 V, 1 to 5 V, 0 to 5 V, 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA.

The output range can be set to -10 to 10 V, 0 to 10 V, 1 to 5 V, 0 to 5 V, 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA.
Once the range has been set, it cannot be changed as long as the CP1E CPU Units power is ON. To
change the input range or output range, change the setting in the PLC Setup, turn the CPU Unit OFF,
and then turn the CPU Unit ON again.

Wiring Analog I/O
Wiring Analog Inputs
Analog + V IN Analog + V IN
Analog Analog
output output I IN
Input Input
device device
COM Terminal Terminal
(voltage
Block
(current COM
Block
output) output)
15-1 Overview
Voltage Input Current Input
CP1E-NA20DR-A
VIN0 Analog input 0 voltage input
CIO 0 CIO 90 CIO 91
IIN0 Analog input 0 current input
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 I IN0 AG I IN1
00 02 04 06 08 10 VIN0 COM0 VIN1 COM1

COM0 Analog input 0 common
AG Analog 0V 15
CP1E-NA20D-D VIN1 Analog input 1 voltage input
+ - COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 I IN0 AG I IN1 IIN1 Analog input 1 current input

NC 00 02 04 06 08 10 VIN0 COM0 VIN1 COM1 COM1 Analog input 1 common
CIO 0 CIO 90 CIO 91
Wiring Analog Outputs
V OUT + Analog + Analog

Analog Analog V OUT
input input
output I OUT output I OUT
device device
Terminal Terminal COM
COM (voltage (current
Block Block
input) input)
Voltage Output Current Output
CP1E-NA20DR-A
VOUT0 Analog output 0 voltage output
+ 00 01 02 04 05 07 NC IOUT0 IOUT0 Analog output 0 current output
- COM COM COM 03 COM 06 NC VOUT0 COM0 COM0 Analog output 0 common
CIO 100 CIO 190
CP1E-NA20D-D
NC 00 01 02 04 05 07 NC IOUT0
NC COM COM COM 03 COM 06 NC VOUT0 COM0

CIO 100 CIO 190
Note 1 Use 2-conductor shielded twisted-pair cable for the I/O wiring, and do not connect the shield AG terminal.
2 If an input is not being used, connect (short) the inputs + and - terminals.
3 Wire I/O lines apart from power lines (AC power supply lines, three-phase power lines, etc.).
4 If noise is received from power supply lines, insert a noise filter in the power supply input section.

5 Refer to the following diagram regarding wiring disconnections when voltage input is being used.
A
Analog
input
device 1
B C
Analog
input
device 2
24 VDC
Example: If analog input device 2 is outputting 5 V and the same power supply is being used for both
devices as shown above, approximately 1/3, or 1.6 V, will be applied to the input for input device 1.
If a wiring disconnection occurs when voltage input is being used, the situation described below will
result. Either separate the power supplies for the connected devices, or use an isolator for each input.
If the same power supply is being used by the connected devices and a disconnection occurs at points
A or B in the above diagram, an unwanted circuit path will occur as shown along the dotted line in the
diagram. If that occurs, a voltage of approximately 1/3 to 1/2 of the output voltage of the other con-
nected device will be generated. If that voltage is generated while the setting is for 1 to 5 V, open-circuit
detection may not be possible. Also, if a disconnection occurs at point C in the diagram, the negative (-)
side will be used in for both devices and open-circuit detection will not be possible.
This problem will not occur for current inputs even if the same power supply is used.
Note When external power is supplied (when setting the range code), or when there is a power interruption, pulse-
form analog output may be generated. If this causes problems with operation, take countermeasures such
as those suggested below.
(1) Countermeasure 1
Turn ON the power supply for the CP1E CPU Unit first, and then turn ON the power supply for the load
after confirming correct operation.
Turn OFF the power supply for the load before turning OFF the power supply for the CP1E CPU Unit.
(2) Countermeasure 2
Control the machine not only by analog output but also by other signals (additional start/stop control sig-
nal for machine).

Reading A/D Conversion Values

CP1E NA-type CPU Unit
Ladder program
Analog input device

Temperature sensor MOV instruction
15-1 Overview
MOV
Pressure sensor Analog input 0 conversion value
Speed sensor CIO 90
Flow sensor
Other device Analog input 1 conversion value CIO 91
Read conversion
value.
15
Writing D/A Conversion Values

CP1E NA-type CPU Unit
Ladder program
MOV MOV instruction

Analog output device
Adjustment equipment
Servo Controller
Analog output 1 SV CIO 190 Inverter
Recorder
Write conversion Other device
value (SV).
Handling Unit Errors

When an error occurs in the built-in analog I/O system, analog input data will be set to 0000 and the
analog output will be set to 0 V or 0 mA.
If a CPU error occurs, the analog output will be set to is set to 0 V or 0 mA even if the output range is
1 to 5 V or 4 to 20 mA. For any other fatal errors in the CPU Unit, 1 V or 4 mA will be output if the
output range is 1 to 5 V or 4 to 20 mA.

15-1-2 Analog I/O Specifications

The NA-type CPU Units of the CP1E CPU Units are equipped with 2 built-in analog inputs and 1
built-in analog output.
Analog Input Specifications

Item Voltage input Current input
Number of inputs 2 inputs (Allocated 2 words: CIO 90 to CIO 91.)
Input signal range 0 to 5 V, 1 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, or -10 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA
to 10 V
Max. rated input 15 V 30 mA
External input impedance 1 M min. Approx. 250
Resolution 1/6000
Overall accuracy At 25C 0.3% full scale 0.4% full scale
0 to 55C 0.6% full scale 0.8% full scale
A/D conversion data -10 to 10 V F448 to 0BB8 hex FS
Other ranges 0000 to 1770 hex FS
Averaging function Supported (Set for individual inputs in the PLC Setup.)
Open-circuit detection function Supported (Value when disconnected: 8000 hex)
Analog Output Specifications

Item Voltage output Current output
Number of outputs 1 output (Allocated 1 word: CIO 190.)
Output signal range 0 to 5 V, 1 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, or -10 0 to 20 mA* or 4 to 20 mA
to 10 V
Allowable external output load resistance 1 k min. 600 max.
External input impedance 0.5max. ---
Resolution 1/6000
Overall accuracy At 25C 0.4% full scale
0 to 55C 0.8% full scale
D/A conversion data -10 to 10 V F448 to 0BB8 hex FS
Other ranges 0000 to 1770 hex FS
* When the analog current output is 0 to 20 mA, the accuracy cannot be ensured at 0.2 mA or less.
Shared I/O Specifications

Item Specification
Conversion time 2 ms/point (6 ms total for 2 analog inputs and 1 analog output.)
Isolation method Photocoupler isolation between analog I/O terminals and internal circuits. No isola-
tion between analog I/O signals.

15-2 Analog Input and Output Signal Ranges

Analog I/O data is digitally converted according to the analog I/O signal range as shown below.
Note When the input exceeds the specified range, the AD converted data will be fixed at either the lower limit or
upper limit.
15-2-1 Analog Input Signal Ranges
-10 to 10 V Input
When the resolution is set to 1/6,000, the -10 to 10-V range corresponds to hexadecimal values
F448 to 0BB8 (-3,000 to 3,000). The entire data range is F31C to 0CE4 (-3,300 to 3,300).
A negative voltage is expressed as a twos complement. 15
Converted Data
Hexadecimal (Decimal)
15-2-1 Analog Input Signal Ranges

0CE4 (3300)
0BB8 (3000)
11 V 10 V 0000 (0)
0V 10 V 11 V
F448 (3000)
F31C (3300)
0 to 10 V Input
When the resolution is set to 1/6,000, the 0 to 10-V range corresponds to hexadecimal values 0000
to 1770 (0 to 6,000). The entire data range is FED4 to 189C (-300 to 6,300).
A negative voltage is expressed as a twos complement.
Converted Data
189C (6300)
1770 (6000)
0.5 V 0000 (0)

0V 10 V 10.5 V
FED4 (300)

0 to 5 V Input
When the resolution is set to 1/6,000, the 0 to 5-V range corresponds to hexadecimal values 0000 to
1770 (0 to 6,000). The entire data range is FED4 to 189C (-300 to 6,300).
Converted Data
189C (6300)
1770 (6000)
0.25 V 0000 (0)

0V 5 V 5.25 V
FED4 (300)
1 to 5 V Input
When the resolution is set to 1/6,000, the 1 to 5-V range corresponds to hexadecimal values 0000 to
1770 (0 to 6,000). The entire data range is FED4 to 189C (-300 to 6,300).
Inputs between 0.8 and 1 V are expressed as twos complements. If the input falls below 0.8 V,
open-circuit detection will activate and converted data will be 8000.
Converted Data
189C (6300)
1770 (6000)
0000 (0) 0.8 V

1V 5 V 5.2 V
FED4 (300)
0 to 20 mA Inputs
When the resolution is set to 1/6,000, the 0 to 20-mA range corresponds to hexadecimal values
0000 to 1770 (0 to 6,000). The entire data range is FED4 to 189C (300 to 6,300).
Converted Data
189C (6300)
1770 (6000)
1 mA 0000 (0)
0 mA 20 mA 21 mA
FED4 (300)

4 to 20 mA

When the resolution is set to 1/6,000, the 4- to 20-mA range corresponds to hexadecimal values
0000 to 1770 (0 to 6,000). The entire data range is FED4 to 189C (-300 to 6,300).
Inputs between 3.2 and 4 mA are expressed as twos complements. If the input falls below 3.2 mA,
open-circuit detection will activate and converted data will be 8000.
Converted Data
189C (6300)
1770 (6000)
0000 (0) 3.2 mA

0 mA 4 mA 20 mA 20.8 mA
FED4 (300) 15
15-2-2 Analog Output Signal Ranges

15-2-2 Analog Output Signal Ranges
-10 to 10 V Outputs
When the resolution is set to 1/6,000, the hexadecimal values F448 to 0BB8 (-3,000 to 3,000) corre-
spond to an analog voltage range of -10 to 10 V.
Specify a negative voltage as a twos complement.
11 V
10 V
F31C F448
8000 (3300) (3000) 0000 (0)
Conversion Data
0V 0BB8 0CE4 7FFF Hexadecimal (Decimal)
(3000) (3300)
10 V
11 V
0 to 10 V Outputs
When the resolution is set to 1/6,000, the hexadecimal values 0000 to 1770 (0 to 6,000) correspond
to an analog voltage range of 0 to 10 V.
10.5 V
10 V
FED4
8000 (300) 0000 (0)
Conversion Data
0V 1770 189C 7FFF Hexadecimal (Decimal)
(6000) (6300)
0.5 V

0 to 5 V Outputs
5.25 V
5V
FED4
8000 (300) 0000 (0)
0V 1770 189C 7FFF Conversion Data
(6000) (6300) Hexadecimal (Decimal)
0.25 V
1 to 5 V Outputs
5.2 V
5V
1V
0.8 V
Conversion Data
8000 FED4 0 V 1770 189C 7FFF Hexadecimal (Decimal)
(300) (6000) (6300)
0 to 20 mA Outputs
to an analog current range of 0 to 20 mA.
21 mA
20 mA
8000 0000 (0)

1770 189C Conversion Data
0 mA 7FFF
(6000) (6300) Hexadecimal (Decimal)
4 to 20 mA Outputs
to an analog current range of 4 to 20 mA.
20.8 mA
20 mA
4 mA
3.2 mA
1770 189C 7FFF Conversion Data
8000 FED4 0 mA
(300) (6000) (6300) Hexadecimal (Decimal)


15-2-3 Special functions
Averaging Function for Analog Inputs

The averaging function stores the average (a moving average) of the last eight input values as the
converted value. Use this function to smooth inputs that vary at a short interval.
Use the CX-Programmer to set the averaging function in the PLC Setup. The averaging function can
be set independently for each input.
Open-circuit Detection Function for Analog Inputs

The open-circuit detection function is activated when the input range is set to 1 to 5 V and the volt-
age drops below 0.8 V, or when the input range is set to 4 to 20 mA and the current drops below 3.2
mA. When the open-circuit detection function is activated, the converted data will be set to 8,000.
The time for enabling or clearing the open-circuit detection function is the same as the time for con- 15
verting the data. If the input returns to the convertible range, the open-circuit detection is cleared
automatically and the output returns to the normal range.
15-2-3 Special functions

Auxiliary Area bits A434.00 to A434.01 are allocated as open-circuit detection flags.

15-3 I/O Allocation and Related Auxiliary

Area Flags
15-3-1 I/O Allocation

Word I/O Points Description Values
CIO 90 AD0 CIO words that I/O conversion data for AD0 is -10V to 10V range: F448 to
stored in. 0BB8 hex
CIO 91 AD1 CIO words that I/O conversion data for AD1 is Other ranges: 0000 to 1770 hex
stored in.
CIO 190 DA0 CIO words that I/O conversion data for DA0 is
stored in.
15-3-2 Related Auxiliary Area Flags

Bit Name Description Values
A434.00 Open-circuit When analog Input 0 (AD0) open-circuit Error 0: No error
Detection Flags is detected, this bit will be changed to 1. 1: Open-circuit error detected
A434.01 Open-circuit When analog Input 1 (AD1) open-circuit Error
Detection Flags is detected, this bit will be changed to 1.
A434.04 Analog Initial- The Analog Initialization Completed Flag will 0: Initializing
ization Com- be changed to 1 ON when initial processing 1: Initialization completed
pleted Flag is completed.
If the system starts operating, use this flag in
the program to delay reading converted data
from analog inputs until the data is valid.
A315.14 Built-in Analog When the built-in analog do not work normally, 0: No error
Error this bit will be changed to 1. 1: Built-in analog error

16
Other Functions
This section describes PID temperature control, clock functions, DM backup functions,
security functions.
16-1 PID Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2

16-1-1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
16-2 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-7
16
16-3 DM Backup Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-8
16-3-1 Backing Up and Restoring DM Area Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-8
16-3-2 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-10
16-4 Security Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-12
16-4-1 Ladder Program Read Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-12

16 Other Functions
16-1 PID Temperature Control

PID temperature control can be used with any model of CP1E CPU Unit.
16-1-1 Overview
The CP1E CPU Unit supports PID instructions with the autotuning function. Ladder programs can be
written to perform PID temperature control.
Temperature Input from Temperature Sensor Unit to words in the Input Area.
input:
PID control: Execute using the PIDAT instruction in ladder program.
The PIDAT instruction is used in combination with the TPO instruction
(TIME-PROPORTIONAL OUTPUT) to perform time-proportional control.
Control output: To connect an SSR, connect a 24-V power supply to the transistor output and
output voltage pulses.
Ladder program
PIDAT
S S: Input word
C C: First parameter word
D D: Output word
TPO
S S: Input word
C C: First parameter word
R R: Pulse output bit
Temperature Sensor Unit

Model with Thermocouple: CP1W-TS001/002
Model with Platinum Resistance Thermometer: CP1W-TS101/102
CP1E
PID
Time-proportional
transistor output
Temperature Sensor
SSR
The sampling cycle set for a PIDAT instruction is between 10 ms to 99.99 s in increments of
10 ms. The actual calculation cycle is determined by the relationship with cycle time. Refer to the
CP1E CPU Unit Instructions Reference Manual (Cat. No. W483) for the PIDAT instruction.

16 Other Functions
1 Setting the Temperature

Sensor Unit
Set the temperature range with the rotary switch on
the front panel.
2 Wiring I/O
Connect the temperature sensor to the Tempera-
ture Sensor Unit.
Connect the SSR to the transistor output.
3 Setting PIDAT and TPO

instructions parameters
Set parameters with the MOV instruction or other
instructions.
4 Executing the PIDAT instruction

Execute the PIDAT instruction.

5 Autotuning
Execute autotuning for the PID constants.
6 Starting PID control

Start PID control.
Inputting the Temperature Sensors PV to PIDAT Instructions 16

Temperature Sensor Unit

Setting the Temperature Range
Set the temperature range with the rotary switch on the front panel of the Temperature Sensor
Unit. If the rotary switch is set to 1 for a CP1W-TS001 Temperature Sensor Unit, the temperature
range is 0.0 to 500.0C.
Temperature Data Storage Format
Temperature data is automatically stored in words in the Input Area allocated to the Temperature
Sensor Unit as an Expansion Unit using four-digit hexadecimal.
Example: 100C is stored as 0064 hex.
When the range code is a decimal number to one decimal point, the value is multiplied by a
factor of 10 and converted to a hexadecimal number without a sign, then stored as binary
data.
Example: 500.0C multiplied by 10 is 5000 decimal. This is converted to 1388 in hexadecimal
and stored.
If the temperature is negative, it is stored as signed hexadecimal.
Example: -200C is stored as FF38 hex.
PIDAT Instruction
The PIDAT instruction treats the PV as unsigned hexadecimal data (0000 to FFFF hex). Signed data
cannot be used, so if the temperature range includes negative values, apply scaling with the APR
instruction.

16 Other Functions
Autotuning Procedure
Automatically Executing Autotuning When PIDAT Is Executed

To automatically autotune the PID constants, turn ON the AT Command Bit when the PIDAT instruc-
tion is executed.
1 Set the PID parameter in words C to C+10. Word C is specified by the second operand.
Example: Place the set value (SV) in C and place the input range in bits 08 to 11 of C+6. Turn
ON bit 15 of C+9 (AT Command Bit).
2 Turn ON the PIDAT instructions input condition.

The PIDAT instruction will execute autotuning. When it has finished, the AT Command Bit (bit 15
in C+9) will turn OFF. At the same time the proportional band (C+1), integral constant (C+2),
and derivative constant (C+3) calculated by autotuning will be stored and PID control will be
started.
Executing Autotuning for Other Conditions When PIDAT Is Executed

Here, the AT Command Bit is left OFF when the PIDAT instruction is being executed. Later it is
turned ON by some other condition to start autotuning.
1 Set the PID parameter in words C to C+10. Word C is specified by the second operand.
Example: Place the set value (SV) in C, the proportional band in C+1, the integral constant in
C+2, the derivative constant in C+3, and the input range in bits 08 to 11 of C+6. Turn OFF bit 15
of C+9 (AT Command Bit).
2 Turn ON the PIDAT instructions input condition. PID control will be started with the specified
PID constants.
3 Turn ON bit 15 in C+9 (the AT Command Bit) while the input condition for the PID instruction is
ON. Autotuning will be performed. When it has finished, the AT Command Bit (bit 15 in C+9) will
turn OFF. The proportional band (C+1), integral constant (C+2), and derivative constant (C+3)
calculated by autotuning will be stored and PID control will be started with those PID constants.
System Configuration
K thermocouple
Controlled device
Inputs connected to terminal Inputs connected to
blocks CIO 0 and CIO 1 terminal block CIO 2
CP1E CPU Unit with 30 I/O CP1W-TS001 Control

Points Temperature Sensor Unit device
(SSR) Heater
100.00 COM + -
Temperature Stored in CIO 2 in

input the Input Area
Transistor output terminals
A K thermocouple is used for the temperature input. Use a CP1W-TS001 Temperature Sensor Unit
(thermocouple input).

16 Other Functions
The Temperature Sensor Units temperature input PV is stored in CIO 2.

The control output is the transistor output used to control the heater through the SSR using time-pro-
portional control.
The PIDAT sampling cycle is 1 second.
Control cycle: 20 s
When W0.00 turns ON, autotuning is immediately executed and PID control is started with the PID
constants calculated by autotuning.
Ladder Programming Example for an Input Range of -200 to 1300C for a K

Thermocouple
The CP1W-TS001 Temperature Sensor Unit is used with an input type of K -200 to 1300C (set the
rotary switch to 0). The decimal values -200 to 1300C are converted to signed hexadecimal data (FF38
to 0514 hex) and stored in CIO 2 in the Input Area.

However, the PIDAT instruction can only handle unsigned hexadecimal data as the PV. The value is
thus converted from the range FF38 to 0514 to the PIDAT instruction input range of 0000 to 1FFF hex
(0 to 8191) using the APR instruction.
Specify 16-bit signed data (bit 11: ON, bit 10: OFF)/Number
of coordinates in data table: 1 (bits 0 to 7: #00 hex)
C:D500 #0800
C+1:D501 -200 Minimum manipulated variable input: -200 decimal
W0.00 (#FF38 hex)
C+2:D502 #0000 Minimum value in PID input range: #0000 hex
APR
C+3:D503 +1300 Maximum manipulated variable input: 1300 decimal
C D500 (#0514 hex)
C+4:D504 #1FFF Maximum value in PID input range: #1FFF hex
S 2
PV
D D600 Scale PV to
within #0000 to
C:D100 &1966 Set value: 160C (set as calculated value: 1966) 16
#1FFF hex C+1:D101 &1 Proportional band: 0.1%
PIDAT C+2:D102 &1 Integral time: 0.1 s

C+3:D103 &1 Derivative time: 0.1 s
S D600
C+4:D104 &100 Sampling period: 1 s
C D100
C+5:D105 #0002 Reverse operation (bit 00: OFF)/PID constants updated each
D D200 MV time a sample is taken while the input condition is ON (bit 01:
C+6:D106 #0595 ON)/2-PID parameter = 0.65 (bits 04 to 15: #000 hex)
C+7:D107 #0000 Input/Output: 13 bits (bits 00 to 03, 08 to 11: #5 hex)/Integral
C+8:D108 and derivative constants: Time designation (bits 04 to 07: #9
TPO #0000
hex)/Manipulated variable limit control: No (bit 12: OFF)
C+9:D109 #8000
S D200 MV AT execution (bit 15: ON)/AT Calculation Gain = 1.00
C+10:D110 #0005 (bits 0 to 11: #000 hex)
C D300
C+11:D111
D 100.00 Pulse output Work Area Limit-cycle Hysteresis = 0.05% (approximately 0.8C)
~
C+40:D140
W1.00
When autotuning is completed, the content of D109 is automatically overwritten
by #0000 hex and the calculated PID constants are input to D101 to 103.
W1.00
Manipulated variable range: 13 bits (bits 0 to 3: #5 hex)/
RSET Input type: Manipulated variable (bits 4 to 7: #1 hex),
always read input (bits 8 to 11: #3 hex)/Output limit
100.00 disabled (bits 12 to 15: #0 hex)
C:D300 #0315
C+1:D301 &2000 Control cycle: 20.00 s
C+2:D302 &0 No upper output limit
C+3:D303 &0 No lower output limit
C+4:D304
~
Work Area
C+6:D306

16 Other Functions
Description
When W0.00 turns ON, the work area in D111 to D140 is initialized (cleared) according to the
parameters set in D100 to D110. After the work area has been initialized, autotuning is started
and the PID constants are calculated from the results from changing the manipulated variable.
After autotuning has been completed, PID control is executed according to the calculated PID
constants set in D101 to D103. The manipulated variable is output to D200. The manipulated vari-
able in D200 is divided by the manipulated variable range using the TPO instruction. This value is
treated as the duty factor which is converted to a time-proportional output and output to
CIO100.00 as a pulse output.
When W0.00 turns OFF, PID is stopped and CIO100.00 turns OFF.
When W0.00 is ON, the Thermocouples PV (-200 to 1300) is scaled to the PIDAT instruction input
range (#0 to #1FFF hex). The set values must be input according to the scaled PV. For example, if
the PV is 160C, it is set as [8191/(1300+200)] (160+200) = 1966].

16 Other Functions
16-2 Clock
The clock can be used only with the CP1E N/NA-type CPU Unit.
The current data is stored in the following words in the Auxiliary Area.
Name Address Function
Clock data A351 to A354 The seconds, minutes, hour, day of month, month, year, and day of
week are stored each cycle.
A351.00 to A351.07 Seconds: 00 to 59 (BCD)
A351.08 to A351.15 Minutes: 00 to 59 (BCD)
A352.00 to A352.07 Hour: 00 to 23 (BCD)
A352.08 to A352.15 Day of the month: 01 to 31 (BCD)
A353.00 to A353.07 Month: 01 to 12 (BCD)
A353.08 to A353.15 Year: 00 to 99 (BCD)
A354.00 to A354.07 Day of the week:
00: Sunday, 01: Monday, 02: Tuesday, 03: Wednesday,
04: Thursday, 05: Friday, 06: Saturday
16-2 Clock
The clock cannot be used if a battery is not installed or the battery voltage is low.
Related Auxiliary Area Bits and Words 16

Name Address Contents
Start-up Time A510 and A511 The time at which the power was turned ON
(day of month, hour, minutes, and seconds).
Power Interruption Time A512 and A513 The time at which the power was last interrupted
(day of month, hour, minutes, and seconds).
Power ON Clock Data 1 A720 to A722 Consecutive times at which the power was turned
Power ON Clock Data 2 A723 to A725 ON (year, month, day of month, hour, minutes, and
seconds). The times are progressively older from
Power ON Clock Data 3 A726 to A728 number 1 to number 10.
Power ON Clock Data 4 A729 to A731
Operation Start Time A515 to A517 The time that operation started (year, month, day
of month, hour, minutes, and seconds).
Operation End Time A518 to A520 The time that operation stopped (year, month, day
of month, hour, minutes, and seconds).
Time-related Instructions
Name Mnemonic Function
CALENDAR ADD CADD Adds time to the calendar data in the specified words.
CALENDAR SUBTRACT CSUB Subtracts time from the calendar data in the specified words.
CLOCK ADJUSTMENT DATE Changes the internal clock setting to the setting in the speci-
fied source words.

16 Other Functions
16-3 DM Backup Function

This section describes the function that saves specified words from the DM Area in the built-in
16-3-1 Backing Up and Restoring DM Area Data
Overview
The contents of the DM Area (D) will become unstable if the power supply is interrupted for longer than
the backup time of the built-in capacitor (50 hours for an E-type CPU Unit, 40 hours for an N/NA-type
CPU Unit without a Battery). The contents of the specified words in the DM Area data can be backed up
from RAM to the built-in EEPROM backup memory during operation by turning ON a bit in the Auxiliary
Area. The number of DM Area words to back up is specified in the Number of CH of DM for backup Box
in the PLC Setup. If the Restore D0- from backup memory Check Box is selected in the PLC Setup, the
backup data will automatically be restored to RAM when the power is turned back ON so that data is
not lost even if power is interrupted.
CP1E CPU Unit

A751.15 (DM Backup Save Start Bit) turned ON.
Built-in RAM Built-in EEPROM Backup

Memory
Data
DM Area (D) DM backup data
backed up.
D0
~
Specified number
of words Data
D (n-1)
restored.
Specify the number of words

starting from D0 in the DM backup data is restored to the RAM when power supply is turned ON
Number of CH of DM for again if the Restore D0- from backup memory Check Box is selected in the
backup Box in the Startup Startup Data Read Area in the PLC Setup.
Data Read Area in PLC
Setup.
Conditions for Executing Backup

Specified words starting from D0 in the built-in RAM can be saved to the built-in EEPROM backup
memory by turning ON A751.15. (These words are called the DM backup words and the data is
called the DM backup data.) A751.15 (DM Backup Save Start Bit) can be used in any operating
mode (RUN, MONITOR, or PROGRAM mode).
Words that can be Backed Up

E-type CPU Units: D0 to D1499
N/NA-type CPU Units: D0 to D6999

16 Other Functions
Number of Words to Back Up

The number of words to back up starting from D0 is set in the Number of CH of DM for backup Box
in the Startup Data Read Area in the PLC Setup.
Restoring DM Backup Data to the Built-in RAM When Power is Turned ON

The DM backup data can be restored to the built-in RAM when power is turned ON by selecting the
Restore D0- from backup memory Check Box in the Startup Data Read Area in the PLC Setup.
The DM backup data will be read from the backup memory even if the Clear retained memory area
(HR/DM/CNT) Check Box is selected in the PLC Setup.
Related Auxiliary Area Bits

Name Address Description
DM Backup Save A751.15 The number of words in the DM Area specified in the Number of CH of
Start Bit DM for backup Box in the Startup Data Read Area in the PLC Setup
are saved from the built-in RAM to the built-in EEPROM backup mem-

ory when this bit is turned ON.
This bit will not automatically turn OFF again if the bit turns ON. Design
the ladder program so that this bit is turned ON and OFF again using
upwardly differentiated bits.
If this bit is turned ON and OFF while the DM Backup Save Flag
(A751.14) is ON, it will be ignored and the data will not be backed up
again. To backup the data again, make sure that A751.14 is OFF and
then turn ON A751.15. A751.15 is turned OFF when the power supply
is turned ON.
DM Backup Save A751.14 This flag turns ON when A751.15 is turned ON to start the saving
Flag operation. This flag stays ON while data is being saved and turns OFF 16
when finished.
Use this flag to confirm when the DM backup operation has been com-
16-3-1 Backing Up and Restoring DM Area Data

pleted.
The flag is turned OFF when the power supply is turned ON.
DM Backup A751.11 This flag turns ON if the DM backup data could not be restored cor-
Restore Failed rectly. If this flag turns ON, data will not be read from the built-in
Flag EEPROM backup memory to the RAM.
For example, if power was interrupted while data was being backed up,
the DM Area data would not be backed up properly and the next time
power is turned ON, the DM backup data will not be restored. If this
happens, this flag will be turned ON.
If the number of the backed up DM area words is different from the
Number of CH of DM for backup in the PLC Setup, this flag will be
turned ON.
This flag turns OFF in the following cases:
Data is successfully restored from the built-in EEPROM backup
memory to the RAM when the power supply is turned ON.
All memory is cleared.

16 Other Functions
16-3-2 Procedure
Perform the following procedure to save the DM data to the built-in EEPROM backup memory during
operation or while stopped.
1 Check the Restore D0- from backup memory Check Box in the Startup Data Read Area of the
PLC Setup from the CX-Programmer.
Also, set the number of words to be backed up starting from D0 in the Number of CH of DM for
backup Box. Transfer the PLC Setup to the CPU Unit and turn ON the power supply.
2 Turn ON A751.15 (DM Backup Save Start Bit) from the CX-Programmer, a Programmable Ter-
minal (PT), or a ladder program.
The specified number of words in the DM Area starting from D0 will be backed up to the built-in
Using a Ladder Program
Execution condition A751.15

Execution Bit is turned ON to start backup.
DM Backup Save
Start Bit
One cycle
DM Backup Save ON
Start Bit
(A715.15)
OFF
DM Backup Save ON
Flag
(A751.14)
OFF
Backup started Backup finished
When the saving operation has been completed, A751.14 (DM Backup Save Flag) will turn OFF.

16 Other Functions

Power Interruptions during Backup
The BKUP indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will be lit when DM Area data is being saved to
the built-in EEPROM backup memory.
Do not turn OFF the power supply to the PLC while the indicator is lit. If the power supply to the
PLC is turned OFF while the BKUP indicator is lit, data will not be backed up. In this case, the
DM Backup Restore Failed Flag (A751.11) will turn ON when the power supply is turned ON
again. Therefore, the backup data will not be restored to the DM Area. Transfer the data from the
CX-Programmer to the DM Area again.

To prevent operation from starting if the DM backup data is not restored correctly when the
power supply is turned ON, insert the following instructions into the ladder program to gener-
ate a fatal error.

A751.11
Generates a user-defined
FALS
fatal error
10
DM Backup Restore Failed Flag
#0000
To ensure concurrency between DM backup data and the contents of the DM Area in the
RAM, use exclusive processing in the ladder program so that contents of the DM Area words
in the RAM that are set to be backed up are not changed during a backup operation.
DM Backup Save Flag

16
A751.14 Programming to change the DM Area words that are set to be backed up will
contents of DM Area words not be changed during a backup operation to
16-3-2 Procedure
that are set to be backed up ensure concurrency between DM backup data
and words in the DM Area in the RAM.
Data can be written up to 100,000 times to the built-in EEPROM backup memory. Data cannot
be written once this limit is exceeded. If writing fails, A315.15 (Backup Memory Error Flag) will
turn ON.
Confirming Completion of DM Area Backup

If user programs or the parameter area is being saved to the backup memory using operations
from the CX-Programmer, the backup operation will not be executed immediately even if
A751.15 (DM Backup Save Start Bit) is turned ON. A751.14 (DM Backup Save Flag) will remain
ON during this time and turn OFF when the DM backup operation has been completed. You can
confirm the completion of DM backup by checking to see if the DM Backup Save Flag (A751.14)
has been turned OFF.

16 Other Functions
16-4 Security Functions

The Security function can be used with any model of CP1E CPU Unit.
16-4-1 Ladder Program Read Protection
Read Protection
With the CX-Programmer, it is possible to set read protection using a password for the whole ladder
program.
When the program is read-protected using a password, it is not possible to display or edit any of the lad-
der programs using the CX-Programmer unless the password is entered in the Disable Password Dia-
log Box from the CX-Programmer.
This enables improved security for PLC data in equipment.
Setting Protection
1 Right-click the PLC in the project tree to open the Protection Tab Page of the PLC Proper-
ties.
Properties
2 Set any password.
3 Select Protection-Setting from the PLC Menu.
4 Confirm that the setting item is checked, then click the OK button.

16 Other Functions
Protection Release Procedure
1 Go online and select Protection -

Release Password from the PLC
menu.
The Release Read Protection Dia-
log Box will be displayed.
2 Enter the registered password.
16-4 Security Functions

If the password is incorrect, the
message shown on the right will be
displayed, and protection will not be
released.
Auxiliary Area Bits Related to Password Protection

Status after Startup
Name
Bit
Description mode hold 16
address
change settings
UM Read Protection A99.00 Indicates whether or not the whole ladder pro- Hold Hold
16-4-1 Ladder Program Read Protection

Status grams are read-protected.
OFF: UM read protection is not set.
ON: UM read protection is set.

16 Other Functions

17
Ethernet Option Board
This section gives an overview of the Ethernet Option Board, describes its setting
methods, I/O memory allocations, troubleshooting, how to connect the CX-Program-
mer, and how to install an Ethernet network.
17-1 Features and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2

17-1-1 Ethernet Option Board Function Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2
17-1-2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-3
17-1-3 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-5
17-1-4 Software Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-5
17-1-5 FINS Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-6
17-1-6 Differences in version of the Ethernet Option Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-8 17
17-2 Startup Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-9
17-2-1 Startup Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-9
17-3 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-11
17-3-1 Ethernet Option Board Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-11
17-3-2 Transferring Data from the CPU Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-12
17-3-3 Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-13
17-3-4 Web Browser Setting Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-15
17-4 Memory Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-25
17-4-1 DM Area Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-25
17-4-2 CIO Area Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-30
17-5 Trouble Shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-32
17-5-1 Error Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-32
17-5-2 Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-33
17-5-3 Error Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-35
17-6 Connection Method with the CX-Programmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-36
17-7 Network Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-39
17-7-1 Devices Required for Constructing a Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-39
17-7-2 Network Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-39
17-8 Comparison with Previous Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-41

17 Ethernet Option Board
17-1 Features and Specifications
17-1-1 Ethernet Option Board Function Guide
Overall system configuration example

Ethernet Option Board provides receiving commands by OMRON standard protocol FINS for CP1E
programmable controllers. The Ethernet Network Interface allows you to easily connect CP1E Program-
mable Controllers onto new or existing Ethernet network and upload/download programs, communicate
between controllers (do not support real-time scanning I/O on Ethernet Option Board).
Connecting from a computer with a
dynamic private IP address: Use Connecting within the same
FINS/TCP or FINS/UDP. segment: Use FINS/UDP.
CX-Programmer
CX-Programmer
FINS FINS
Ethernet
PLC PLC
Ethernet Option Board Ethernet Option Board
Note 1 Please use CX-Programmer version 9.12 or higher (CX-ONE version 4.1 or higher).
2 Use the Web browser to set the CP1W-CIF41.
3 NS-series HMI cannot use CP1W-CIF41 through Ethernet.
Connecting the CX-Programmer to PLCs Online via Ethernet
Connecting within the Same Segment

Use the UDP/IP version of the FINS communications service (i.e., FINS/UDP). FINS/UDP is supported
by many OMRON products and is compatible with earlier Ethernet Units (CS1W-ETN01/ETN11/ETN21
and CJ1W-ETN11/ETN21). The CX-Programmer can be connected and used with FINS/UDP.
Connecting through Multiple Segments

Use the TCP/IP version of the FINS communications service (i.e., FINS/TCP). It provides automatic
recovery at the TCP/IP layer from communications errors (such as packet loss) that occur during
multilevel routing. For CX-Programmer, FINS/TCP can be used to directly connect to the PLC online.
Using Media with Unreliable Connections, Such as a Wireless LAN

Use the TCP/IP version of the FINS communications service (i.e., FINS/TCP). It provides automatic
recovery at the TCP/IP layer from communications errors (such as packet loss) resulting from unreli-
able connections. For CX-Programmer, FINS/TCP can be used to directly connect to the PLC online.

Connecting from a Personal Computer with a Dynamic Private IP Address

Depending on whether or not the connection will be within the same segment, either use an IP
address conversion method for dynamic IP addresses in the UDP/IP version of the FINS communi-
cations service or use the TCP/IP version of the FINS communications service.
It is possible to connect online to a PLC using the CX-Programmer from a computer serving as a
temporarily connected node or a permanent DHCP client.
For CX-Programmer, FINS/TCP can be used to directly connect to the PLC online.
Receiving Data from OMRON PLCs using Ethernet

The CP1W-CIF41 Ethernet Option Board can only support receiving FINS commands from OMRON
PLCs using Ethernet.
Note The SEND(090), RECV(098) and CMND(490) instructions cannot be used in the CP1E CPU Unit .
Connecting within the Same Segment

Use the UDP/IP version of the FINS communications service (i.e., FINS/UDP), and construct appli-

cations using the SEND(090), RECV(098), and CMND(490) instructions in the ladder program.
FINS/UDP is supported by many OMRON products, and is compatible with earlier Ethernet Units
(CS1W-ETN01/ETN11/ETN21 and CJ1W-ETN11/ETN21). The protocol processing for FINS/UDP is
simpler than for FINS/TCP, giving FINS/UDP certain advantages in terms of performance. Another
feature of FINS/UDP is that it can be used for broadcasting.
On the other hand, with FINS/UDP it is necessary to provide measures, such as retries, for handling
communications errors.
Connecting through Multiple Segments

Use the TCP/IP version of the FINS communications service (i.e., FINS/TCP), and construct appli-
cations using the SEND(090), RECV(098), and CMND(490) instructions in the ladder program.
FINS/TCP is the initial function supported by this Ethernet Option Board (CP1W-CIF41). It provides 17
automatic recovery at the TCP/IP layer from communications errors (such as packet loss) that occur
during multilevel routing.
17-1-2 Features
17-1-2 Features
Compatibility and Speed

The transmission medium of Ethernet side has been upgraded to 100Base-TX, while compatibility with
some functions and application interfaces of the existing Ethernet Unit models for CS/CJ series has
been maintained.
Limited by the Host Link protocol used on the serial side, the processing speed is only 115.2kbps,
slower than the existing Ethernet Unit. The FINS frame length is less than 540 bytes, so the system
response performance for the same FINS message applications is longer than the existing Ethernet
Unit.

Various Protocols Available on Ethernet

A variety of protocols make a wide range of applications for use on an Ethernet network. The protocols
that can be selected include receiving commands by OMRONs standard protocol FINS and reading
Ethernet Option Board settings and status by HTTP.
A communications service can be selected according to need, allowing the PLC to be flexibly integrated
with the Ethernet information network.
Improved FINS Message Communications

The following functions have been maintained according to the existing Ethernet Unit models for CS/CJ
series.
The maximum number of nodes is 254.
Communications are enabled even if the host computers IP address is dynamic.
An automatic client FINS node address allocation function makes it possible to connect online to the
PLC even if no FINS node address has been set for the host computer.
FINS message communications is enabled in both UDP/IP and TCP/IP, but it is only enabled in
TCP/IP with up to 2 simultaneous connections .
Previously it is enabled in TCP/IP with up to 16 simultaneous connections and all can be set to cli-
ent.
Multiple FINS applications, such as the CX-Programmer, on the same computer can be connected
online to the PLC via Ethernet.
Use Web Function to Read Ethernet Option Board Settings and

Status
A Web function is provided in Ethernet Option Board.
This enables use of a Web browser to read the Ethernet Option Boards system settings and statuses.
Full Range of Functions for Handling Troubles

A full range of functions is provided for promptly handling any troubles.
Self-diagnostic function when power is turned ON.
Error log for recording error information when an error occurs.

Item Specifications
Name CP-series Etherent Option Board
Model number CP1W-CIF41
Type 100Base-TX (Can be used as 10 Base-T )
Applicable Programming Device CX-Programmer version 9.12 or higher
Unit classification CP-series Option Board
Mounting location One slot for a CP-series Option Board
Size of Buffers 8K bytes
Transfer Media access method CSMA/CD
Modulation method Baseband
Transmission paths Star form
Baud rate 100 Mbit/s (100Base-TX) 10 Mbit/s (10Base-T)

However, the internal baud rate between the CPU Unit and the Ethernet
Option Board is 115.2 kbps.
Transmission media Unshielded twisted-pair (UDP) Unshielded twisted-pair (UDP)
cable cable
Categories: 5, 5e Categories: 3, 4, 5, 5e
Shielded twisted-pair (STP) cable Shielded twisted-pair (STP) cable
Categories: 100 at 5, 5e Categories: 100 at 3, 4, 5, 5e
Transmission Dis- 100 m (distance between hub and node)
tance
Number of cascade No restrictions if switching hubs are used.
connections
Weight 23 g max.
Dimensions 36.436.428.2 mm (WHD)
17
17-1-4 Software Configuration
The software supported by the Ethernet Option Board runs in the layers shown in the following diagram.
It is necessary to set the communications settings before connecting the Ethernet Option Board to the
CP1E CPU Unit by the Host Link protocol. Refer to Serial Communications Settings of the Option Board
in section 17-2-1.
CP-series CPU Unit
Host Link CP1E CPU Unit

FINS Communication service
FINS
FINS/UDP FINS/TCP
UDP TCP Ethernet Option Board
IP ICMP APR
Ethernet (Ver.2.0)

17-1-5 FINS Communications
Overview of FINS Communication Service
Basic Functions
FINS commands can be received from other PLCs or computers on the same Ethernet network by
executing SEND(090), RECV(098), or CMND (490) instructions in the ladder diagram program. This
enables various control operations such as the reading and writing of I/O memory between PLCs,
mode changes, and file memory operations.
Ethernet
IP UDP or TCP FINS
CP1E N/NA-type
CPU Unit
Ethernet Option Board Ethernet Option Board Ethernet Option Board
Executing, from the host computer, FINS commands with UDP/IP or TCP/IP headers enables vari-
ous control operations, such as the reading and writing of I/O memory between PLCs, mode
changes, and file memory operations.
For example, it is possible to connect online via Ethernet from FINS communications applications
such as the CX-Programmer, and to perform remote programming and monitoring.
Upgraded Functions
With the CP1W-CIF41, the following functions have been upgraded.
The FINS communications service can be executed not only with UDP/IP but also with TCP/IP,
and it is even possible to use FINS communications with both UDP/IP and TCP/IP together on the
same network. Using TCP/IP makes FINS communications highly reliable.
Even if the IP address and UDP port number of the host computer (a DHCP client computer) are
changed, it is still possible for the host computer to send FINS commands to PLCs on the Ether-
net network and to receive responses. When UDP is used, either the automatic generation
(dynamic) method or the IP address table method must be selected for IP address conversion.
When TCP is used, changes in IP address and TCP port numbers are handled automatically.
Multiple FINS applications (CX-Programmer and user-created application programs) at the same
computer can be connected online to a PLC via Ethernet (using either TCP/IP or UDP/IP).
Note The message service does not guarantee that a message will reach the destination node. A message may
be lost during transmission due to factors such as noise. To prevent this from occurring when using message
services, it is common to set up retry processing at the node from which instructions are issued. With the
SEND(090), RECV(098), and CMND(490) instructions, retry processing is executed automatically by speci-
fying the number of retries, so specify a number other than 0.

FINS Communications Service Specifications

Item Specification
Number of nodes 254
Message length 552 bytes max.
Date length 540 bytes max. (FINS header 10 bytes and command code 2 bytes is not included)
Number of buffer 8K bytes
Protocol name FINS/UDP methed FINS/TCP method
Protocol used UDP/IP TCP/IP
The selection of UDP/IP or TCP/IP is made from the FINS/TCP Tab by the Web
browser function.
Server/Client Only server (Cannot be used as a client)
Number of connections --- 2
Port number 9600 (default) 9600 (default)
Can be changed. Can be changed.

Protection No Yes (Specification of client IP addresses when unit
is used as a server)
Default local FINS node 1
address
Default local IP address 192.168.250.1
Other Items set for each UDP port Items set for each connection
Broadcast Server specification
Address conversion method Remote IP address spec.
Server: specify IP addresses of clients permitted
to connect.
Automatic FINS node address allocation
Specify automatic allocation of client FINS node 17
addresses
Internal table This is a table of correspondences for remote FINS node addresses, remote IP
17-1-5 FINS Communications

addresses, TCP/UDP, and remote port numbers. It is created automatically when
power is turned ON to the PLC or when the unit is restarted, and it is automatically
changed when a connection is established by means of the FINS/TCP method or
when a FINS command received.
The following functions are enabled by using this table.
IP address conversion using the FINS/UDP method
Automatic FINS node address conversion after a connection is established using
the FINS/TCP method
Automatic client FINS node address allocation using the FINS/TCP method
Simultaneous connection of multiple FINS applications

The differences between the Ethernet Option Board and the CS/CJ series Ethernet Unit are as follows.
Connect with the CPU Unit by the Host Link (serial communications) whose internal baud rate is 115.2
kbps.
The size of communications buffers is 8K bytes, one fifty of that of the CS/CJ series Ethernet Unit.
Therefore, the communication performance is slower than the CS/CJ series Ethernet Unit.
Refer to the following processing time (Netwok delay is not included), when accessing to the CP-series CPU
Unit through the Ethernet Option Board.
When accessing to the CP1E CPU Unit and reading 269 words from the DM area, if the cycle time of the
CPU Unit is 10 ms, the processing time will be more than 225 ms and less than 356 ms.
For the CS/CJ series CPU Unit who installs the Ethernet Unit, when executing the same task, the process-
ing time will be approximately 20 ms, up to 17 times faster.
17-1-6 Differences in version of the Ethernet Option Board

CP1W-CIF41 Ethernet Option Board has two versions: version 1 and version 2. Only version 2 can be
used on the CP1E CPU Unit.
Comparison with CP1W-CIF41 Version 1.0

Item CP1W-CIF41 version 1.0 CP1W-CIF41 version 2.0
Communications mode Toolbus (CP1L/CP1H) Toolbus (CP1L/CP1H)
Host Link (CP1E)
Reset system settings function Not supported Turn ON the Reset Flag A525.01 in
the Auxiliary Area.
Restart function Click the Restart Button from the Click the Restart Button from the
Web browser. Web browser.
Turn ON the Restart Flag A525.09
in the Auxiliary Area.
Max. number of units that can be Cannot be used 1 set
mounted
The CP1E CPU Unit does not support the Toolbus protocol, so the Ethernet Option Board version 1.0
cannot be used.

17-2 Startup Procedure
17-2-1 Startup Procedure
Install the Ethernet Option Board
Turn ON the power of the CPU Unit
Set the serial communications

settings of the option port with the
CX-Programmer
Set by USB port Set by Ethernet port

Set the baud rate to 115200bps, Set the baud rate to 115200bps,
mode to Host Link and unit number mode to Host Link and unit number
to 0. to 0.
17-2 Startup Procedure

Turn the power of the CPU Unit
OFF and then ON again
Use the Ethernet Option Board Set only the IP address Set system settings freely
without making any settings
Access from the Web browser

using the default IP address
Access from the Web browser
using the default IP address
17
http://192.168.250.1/E00.htm http://192.168.250.1/E00.htm
17-2-1 Startup Procedure

Use the default IP address Set the local IP address to 0.0.0.0 Set any value from the Web
192.168.250.1 from the Web browser browser
Set in the allocated words in the DM area

(set by the ladder programmer
or
transfer the PLC memory with the
CX-Programmer to make settings)
Start communication

Serial Communications Settings of the Option Board

To make the settings of the Ethernet Option Board, firstly, it is necessary to set the serial communica-
tions settings of the CPU Unit. It can be set by the following two methods.
1. Set by the USB port of the CPU Unit
2. Set by the Ethernet port of the Ethernet Option Board
For details on the method of connecting the CX-Programmer to the Ethernet option port, refer to 17-6
Connection Method with the CX-Programmer.
Connect the CX-Programmer to the CPU Unit, and then change the PLC Settings as follows.
Serial Option Port Tab Page

Parameter Setting
Communications Settings Select the Custom option, set the baud rate to 115200 and the format to 7,2,E.
Mode Select Host Link (default) or Host Link.
Unit Number Select 0.
When the Ethernet Option Board is applied on the CP1E CPU Unit, it is necessary to set the
baud rate to 115,200 and the mode to Host Link.
At the following settings, ERR LED of the Ethernet Option Board will be flashing.
Check and change the settings. (It is possible to change settings either by USB or by Ethernet.)
Baud rate: 9,600
Unit number: 0
However, except the settings mentioned above, ERR LED will be lit if the communications is impos-
sible between the CPU Unit and the Ethernet Option Board. Check and change the settings.
If setting the mode to Host Link and the baud rate to any value except 9,600 or 115,200, the
CP1E CPU Unit cannot be connected with Ethernet. Change the PLC Settings by USB.

17-3 Settings
17-3-1 Ethernet Option Board Setup
The Ethernet Option Boards system settings can be set using the Web browser of a personal computer
or other devices connected with Ethernet. The setting values are saved in the Ethernet Option Boards
EEPROM.
The settings will be read from the allocated words when the power of the CP1E CPU Unit is turned ON
again.
Web browser of Internet Explorer
Ethernet Option Board

Connect to the Ethernet Option Board from
the Web browser using the Ethernet Option
Boards IP address
http://192.168.250.1/E00.htm
Hub
Ethernet
CP1E N/NA
CPU Unit IP ADDRESS:
EEPROM
SUBNET MASK:
COMMERR
10BASE-T
100BASE-TX
17-3 Settings
* Use the default settings 192.168.250.1 The setting values are saved
in this example. in the EEPROM.
Set the system settings from the Web Browser.
Additional Information 17
If the Ethernet Option Boards IP address cannot be set by the Web browser function, it can be
17-3-1 Ethernet Option Board Setup

set in the IP address display/setting area (D1355 and D1356) in the allocated words in the DM
area.

17-3-2 Transferring Data from the CPU Unit

The Ethernet Option Board can read data from the allocated words in the DM area and CIO area of the
CPU Unit.
DM area allocation:
Display the initial settings of the Ethernet Option Board using the Web browser function.
CIO area allocation:
Store the status of the Ethernet Option Board.
CPU Unit Ethernet

Option Board
I/O memory IP ADDRESS:
SUBNET MASK:
COMM ERR
10BASE-T
100BASE-TX
Read the Internal system setup

DM area allocation Initial settings
initial settings
D1300
Port(right)
D1454
When the power is

ON or the board is Web browser function
restarted
Ethernet
CIO area allocation Internal status
Read the
80 status Status
Port(right)
82
Each cycle
Note The initial settings of the Ethernet Option Board cannot be set in the allocated words in the DM area or in the
CX-Programmers system settings.
Confirmation on the Settings of the Ethernet Option Board

The settings of the Ethernet Option Board can be confirmed by the following two methods.
Web browser function: Confirm from the Web browser of a computer connected with Ethernet.
Allocated words in the DM area (D1300 to D1356): The setting values will be read to the CPU Unit
from the Ethernet Option Board when the power is ON. Confirm the PLC memory with the CX-Pro-
grammer.
Confirmation on the Status of the Ethernet Option Board

The status of the Ethernet Option Board can be confirmed by the following two methods.
Web browser function: Confirm from the Web browser of a computer connected with Ethernet.
Allocated words in the CIO area (CIO 80 to CIO 82): The status is stored in the CPU Unit from the
Ethernet Option Board every 3 to 5 seconds. It is used for the status confirmation in the ladder pro-
grammer.

17-3-3 Default Settings

The default settings of the Ethernet Option Board are shown in the following tables.
Make the initial settings by the Web browser function if the settings are not as follows.
Common Settings of the FINS/UDP and FINS/TCP Methods
Item Initial settings
IP Address 192.168.250.1
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
FINS Node Address 1
Baud Rate Auto
IP Router Table None (IP router not enabled)
Using the FINS/UDP Method

FINS/UDP Port 9,600
Address Conversion Mode Auto (Dynamic)
IP Address Table None
FINS/UDP Option Destination IP address is changed
dynamically
Broadcast Option All 1 (4.3 BSD)
17-3 Settings
Using the FINS/TCP Method
FINS/TCP Port 9,600
FINS/TCP Connection Setup None
FINS/TCP Protected Use protection function according to IP 17
address
17-3-3 Default Settings

The following diagram describes how to restore the initial settings of the Ethernet Option Board.
Auxiliary Area Initializing Flag

(A525.01) is turned ON.
OFF when the initialization is
completed.
Confirm A525.01 is OFF
Auxiliary Area Restart Flag

(A525.09) is turned ON.
OFF when the Ethernet Option
Board is restarted.
Confirm A525.09 is OFF
The initialization of the Ethernet

Option Board is completed.

FINS Node Address of the Ethernet Option Board

The FINS node address of the Ethernet Option Board is factory-set to 1.
Local FINS Node Address=1
It can be changed in the Settings from the Web browser. The setting range is 1 to 254.
IP Address of the Ethernet Option Board

The IP address of the Ethernet Option Board (Local IP address) is factory-set to 192.168.250.1.
Local IP Address=192.168.250.1
Local IP address can be set by the following two methods.
Method 1: Set in the Settings from the Web browser
Method 2: Set to 0.0.0.0 from the Web browser, and then set in the allocated words in the DM area
(D1355 and D1356) by the ladder programmer
If the local IP address is set neither by method 1 nor by method 2 (at default settings), it remains
192.168.250.1.
IP address
Factory setting
192.168.250.1 Except 192.168.250.1
IP ADDRESS:
When setting neither in the
SUBNET MASK:
allocated words in the DM area
nor by the Web browser function Method 1: Set by the Web browser Method 2: Set to 0.0.0.0 from the Web
function browser, and then set in the allocated
words in the DM area
COMM ERR
10BASE-T
100BASE-TX
Remains the default setting

192.168.250.1 It is the IP address set in the It is the IP address set in the allocated
Settings from the Web browser words in the DM area (D1355, D1356)
Confirmation on Local IP Address

The local IP address can be confirmed in the allocated words in the DM area (D1355 and D1356),
when the power of the PLC is turned OFF and then ON again.

17-3-4 Web Browser Setting Function

The Ethernet Option Boards Web window is displayed by accessing the URL from the Web browser.
The Web server supports the multi-language function. The supported language are English, Chinese
and Japanese. Before setting, users should select the appropriate language in the following URL.
English page: http://(Ethernet Option Boards IP address)/E00.htm
Chinese page: http://(Ethernet Option Boards IP address)/C00.htm
Japanese page: http://(Ethernet Option Boards IP address)/J00.htm
In this example, use the following procedure to set the IP address using Internet Explorer version 6.0
and the Ethernet Option Boards English Web pages.
1 Connect to the Ethernet Option Board from the Web browser using the Ethernet Option Boards
default IP address.
http://192.168.250.1/E00.htm
17-3 Settings
17

2 Input the default password ETHERNET and click the Login Button.

3 Select Settings from the menu on the left side of the window to display the Settings Menu.
4 Select 1. IP address and Protocols - System to display System menu.
5 Make the required settings (i.e., the IP address in this example).

6 After entering the correct values, click the Transfer Button to transfer the settings to the Ethernet
Option Board.
7 To enable the new settings, turn the power to the Ethernet Option Board OFF and ON again, or
click the Restart Button.
The functions of the buttons are as follows.
Button Function
Transfer Transfer the entered values from the personal computer to the Ethernet Option
Board. (The new settings are invalid until the Ethernet Option Board has been reset.)
Cancel Cancel the entered values.
Restart Restart the Ethernet Option Board to enable the new settings after transfer.
The Restart button is invalid to the PLC.
System setup for the Ethernet Option Board is as follows.
System Format
17-3 Settings
17
Item Contents Default

IP Address Set the local IP address for the Ethernet Option Board. 192.168.250.1
Setting range: 00.00.00.00 to 223.255.255.255
Subnet Mask Set the subnet mask for the Ethernet Option Board. 255.255.255.0
This is required if a method other than the IP address table method is
used for address conversion.
FINS Node Address Set the local FINS node address for the Ethernet Option Board. 1
Setting range: 1 to 254
FINS/UDP Port Specify the local UDP port number to be used for the FINS communica- 9,600
tions service. The UDP port number is the number used for UDP identi-
fication of the application layer (i.e., FINS communications service).
Setting range: 1 to 65,535


FINS/TCP Port Specify the local TCP port number to be used for the FINS communica- 9,600
tions service. The TCP port number is the number used for TCP identifi-
cation of the application layer (i.e., the FINS communications service in
this case).
Setting range: 1 to 65,535
Make the settings so that the TCP port number 80 for HTTP does not
overlap.
The port number setting only has an effect on the FINS/TCP server
function, not on the FINS/TCP client function. FINS/TCP client port
will switch from 3,000 to 65,535 automatically for connection.
Use Input Port No. Check this checkbox, if you want the user defined port number for UDP Unchecked
or TCP to be in effect.
Address Conversion Select any of the following as the method for finding and converting IP Auto
Mode addresses from FINS node addresses. (Enabled for FINS/UDP only.) (dynamic)
Auto (dynamic): Automatic generation (dynamic)
Auto (static): Automatic generation (static)
Manual: IP address table method
Auto & Manual: Combined method
FINS/UDP Option Select to dynamically change the remote (destination) IP address for Change
FINS/UDP or not. To prohibit dynamic changes, check the second box. dynamically
Broadcast Option Set the method for specifying IP addresses for broadcasting in All 1
FINS/UDP. (4.3BSD)
All 1 (4.3BSD): Broadcast with host number set to all ones.
All 0 (4.2BSD): Broadcast with host number set to all zeros.
Normally the default setting should be used.
FINS/TCP Protected When this option is selected, if the FINS/TCP connection is set to a Unchecked
server, and if an IP address other than 0.0.0.0 is set to destination IP
address, any connection request from other than the setting IP address
will be denied.
Select this option to prevent faulty operation (by FINS commands) from
specific nodes from affecting the PLC.
HTTP Server Setup

WEB Password Set the password for accessing the Ethernet ETHERNET
Option Boards settings and status monitor-
ing information.
Port Number Set the port No. used to connect to the Web 80
browser.

IP Address Table
Set the IP address table that defines the relationship between FINS node addresses and IP addresses.
With FINS/UDP, this is enabled only when the IP address table method is set to the IP address conver-
sion method.

FINS Node Address Set the node address for the remote device. None
IP Address Set the related IP address for the remote None
device.
17-3 Settings
IP Router Table
Set the IP router table when the Ethernet Option Board is to communicate through the IP router with
nodes on another IP network segment. 17

IP Network Address Set the network ID from the IP address. None
Router IP Address Set the related IP address of a router con- None
nected to a network.

FINS/TCP Connection Setup

No. Shows the connection number. This is a network API ---
used when TCP is used for the FINS communica-
tions service. Up to 2 can be used at a time, and
they are identified by connection numbers 1 to 2.
The Ethernet Option Board can thus simultaneously
execute the FINS communications service by TCP
with up to 2 remote nodes.
IP Address When the Ethernet Option Board is used as a server: 0.0.0.0
If the option is selected to use IP addresses to pro-
tect, set the IP addresses as required at clients
from which connection is permitted. If not set for
those connections, the default setting can be
used.
When the Ethernet Option Board is used as a client:
Set the IP address for the remote Ethernet Unit
(i.e., the server) that is to be connected by
FINS/TCP. It is required that an IP address be set
for the remote Ethernet Unit.
Auto-allocated If the client (normally a personal computer) applica- From 251
FINS node tion supports FINS/TCP, and if FINS node addresses to 252, for
are not fixed, the client will take 0 as its node connection
address. Then, when a FINS command arrives, the No. 1 to 2
number set here (from 251 to 252) will automatically
be allocated as the clients FINS node address.

Unit Information
Parameter Contents
Model Show the model information of the Ethernet Option
Board.
Version Show the version information of the Ethernet Option
Board.
IP Address Show the IP address of the Ethernet Option Board.
Subnet Mask Show the subnet mask of the Ethernet Option Board.
17-3 Settings
FINS/UDP Port Number Show the FINS/UDP port number of the Ethernet
Option Board.
Use Input Port Number Show the effective port number setting mode.
Broadcast Setting Show the broadcast setting of the Ethernet Option
Board.
IP Address Conversion Show the IP address conversion method of the Ether- 17
net Option Board.
Ethernet Address Show the MAC ID of the Ethernet Option Board.

Unit Status
Parameter Contents
Error Flags Indicate the operating status and errors that occurred
when the Ethernet Option Board is turned ON.
Total Number of Packets Show the total number of packets received by the Ether-
Received net Option Board.
Total Number of Receive Show the total number of errors detected while the
Errors Ethernet Option Board was receiving.
The types of errors detected are short packet errors,
alignment errors, CRC errors, frame length errors and
communication controller overflow errors.
Total Number of Packets Show the total number of packets sent by the Ethernet
Sent Option Board.
Total Number of Errors Show the total number of errors detected while the
Sent Ethernet Option Board was sending.

FINS Status
Parameter Contents
Node Show the FINS node address.
Connection Type Show the protocol used by connection with the related
node address.
Local Port No. Show the port number of the Ethernet Option Board for
connection with the related node address.
Remote IP Show the IP address of the related node address.
17-3 Settings
Remote Port No. Show the remote port number of the related node
address for connection.
TCP Connection No. If the connection is the FINS/TCP, show the connection
number (1 to 4).
TCP Status If the connection is the FINS/TCP, show the current con-
nection status.
17
The details of TCP status are listed as the following table.
Status Meaning

CLOSED Connection closed
LISTEN Waiting for connection
SYN SENT SYN sent in active status
SYN RECEIVED SYN received and sent
ESTABLISHED Already established
CLOSE WAIT FIN received and waiting for completion
FIN WAIT1 Completed and FIN sent
CLOSING Completed and exchanged FIN. Awaiting ACK.
LAST ACK FIN sent and completed. Awaiting ACK.
FIN WAIT2 Completed and ACK received. Awaiting FIN.
TIME WAIT After closing, pauses twice the maximum segment life
(2MSL).
The function of the button is as follows.

Button Function
Send Show the FINS status of the selected No.

Error Log
Parameter Contents
No. Show the error recorder number.
Error Code Show the error code of the error recorder.
Detail Code Show the detail error code of the error recorder.
Date Show the date of the error recorder.
The functions of the buttons are as follows.

Button Function
Send Show the error log of the selected No.
Clear Error Log Clear the error log table.

17-4 Memory Allocations
17-4-1 DM Area Allocation
The memory allocation about system setup is shown as the following diagram. These data will be allo-
cated to the DM area of PLC. The range of the DM area is D1300 to D1456.
Offset D15 D0
D1300 Mode setting (1 word)
D1301 FINS/TCP port number (1 word)
D1302 FINS/UDP port number (1 word)
D1303
IP address (2 words)
D1304
D1305
Subnet mask (2 words)
D1306
D1307 Reserved (1 word)

D1308
to IP address table (97 words)
D1404
D1405
to IP router table (33 words)
D1437
D1438
to FINS/TCP connection setup (11 words)
D1448
D1449 17
to HTTP server setup (5 words)
D1453

D1454 FINS node address (1 word)
D1455
Using IP Address Display/Setting Area (2 words)
D1456
Note 1 D1300 to D1454 can only display all of the settings stared in the unit. Modification in this area is invalid to
the CP1W-CIF41 Ethernet Option Board.
2 D1455 and D1456 will display the IP address used by the CP1W-CIF41 when the power is turned ON.
3 When the IP address is illegal, such as using CLASS D, CLASS E IP address, the values in D1303 and
D1304 will be different from the ones in D1455 and D1456, and the CP1W-CIF41 will temporarily use the
default IP address (192.168.250.1). Use this IP address to modify the IP address settings through Web
browser.
4 When the system settings are wrong, A525 can be used to reset CP1W-CIF41.
Refer to Appendix A-2 for details.

Mode Setting
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
D1300 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Broadcast address
IP address conversion method
FINS/UDP port number
FINS/TCP port number
FINS/UDP destination IP mode
FINS/TCP protect function
Bit Mode Settings

0 Reserved Always 0.
1 Broadcast address 0: 4.3BSD specifications
1: 4.2BSD specifications
2 to 3 IP address conversion method 00, 01: Automatic generation method
10: IP address table reference method
11: Combined method
4 FINS/UDP port number 0: Default (9600)
1: Unit setup value
5 FINS/TCP port number 0: Default (9600)
1: Unit setup value
6 FINS/UDP destination IP mode 0: Enable (Dynamically)
1: Disable (Static)
7 FINS/TCP protect function 0: Disable (Only FINS/TCP Server)
1: Enable (Only FINS/TCP Server)
8 to 15 Reserved Always 0.
FINS/TCP and FINS/UDP Port Number
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
D1301 FINS/TCP port number (hex)
D1302 FINS/UDP port number (hex)
When displaying 0000, the port number is 9600.
IP Address
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
D1303 (1)(2) (3)(4)
D1304 (5)(6) (7)(8)
The IP address is (1)(2).(3)(4).(5)(6).(7)(8) (hex)

Subnet Mask
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
D1305 (1)(2) (3)(4)
D1306 (5)(6) (7)(8)
The Subnet mask is (1)(2).(3)(4).(5)(6).(7)(8) (hex)
IP Address Table
D1308 D1309 to D1311 D1402 to D1404
Pointer of IP IP Address table IP address table

address table records records
Pointer of IP Address Table

Point to the last recorder in IP address table. For example, if the last recorder number in IP address
table is 6, the value of this word is 6.
IP Address Table Records

Each IP address table record has 6 bytes. The max number of records is 32. The configuration of
the 6 bytes of data in each record is as shown in the following diagram.
1 6 bytes
00
17
FINS node IP address
number

IP Router Table
D1405 D1406 to D1409 D1434 to D1437
Pointer of IP IP router table IP router table

router table records records
Pointer of IP Router Table

Point to the last recorder in IP router table. For example, if the last recorder number in IP router table
is 6, the value of this word is 6.
IP Router Table Records

Each IP router table record has 8 bytes. The max number of records is 8. The configuration of the 8
bytes of data in each record is as shown in the following diagram.
1 8 bytes
IP Network address Router IP address

(Network ID)

FINS/TCP Connection Setup
Offset 15 8 7 0
D1438 FINS/TCP Port Settings
D1439 FINS/TCP connection No.1 FINS/TCP connection No.1
D1444

Reserved (Always 0)
D1448
FINS/ TCP Port Settings

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
D1438 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Protect setting
(Connection No.2)
Protect setting
(Connection No.1)
Bit Settings Unit operation

1 Protect setting 0: The IP address of FINS/TCP connection No.1 is not
under the protection.
1: The IP address of FINS/TCP connection No.1 is
5 Protect setting 0: The IP address of FINS/TCP connection No.2 is not
1: The IP address of FINS/TCP connection No.2 is
FINS/TCP Connection No.1 to 2

Each FINS/TCP connection number has 5 bytes. The configuration of the 5 bytes of data in each
number is as shown in the following diagram.
Destination IP address Auto-allocated

FINS node

HTTP Server Setup

Offset 15 8 7 0
D1449
HTTP Password

D1452
D1453 HTTP Port number
If the password for accessing the Ethernet Option Boards Web page is forgotten, find out it in this
area. It is written in ASCII format.
FINS Node Address

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
D1454 FINS node address (hex)
The setting range is 0~ FE (hex).

Using IP Address Display/Setting Area
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
D1455 (1)(2) (3)(4)
D1456 (5)(6) (7)(8)
The IP address is (1)(2).(3)(4).(5)(6).(7)(8) (hex)

If the local IP address in the system setup is set to a value other than 0.0.0.0, this area will act as an 17
IP address display area and the local IP address in the system setup will be read and stored here
when the power is turned ON or the Ethernet Option Board restarted.

If the local IP address in the system setup is set to 0.0.0.0, this area will act as an IP address setting
area. The value will be read by the Ethernet Option Board when the power is turned ON or the
Ethernet Option Board restarted and is used as the local IP address.
If the IP address for accessing the Ethernet Option Board through Web browser is forgotten, find out it
in this area.
Note When IP address in system setup area and DM area are all set to 0.0.0.0, the IP address will be
192.168.250.1 (FINS node address).

17-4-2 CIO Area Allocation

The memory allocation about communication services status in the CIO area of PLC is shown as the
following diagram. The range of the CIO area is CIO80 to CIO82.
Offset D15 D0
CIO 80 Service Status
CIO 81 Error Status
CIO 82 FINS/TCP Connection Status
Service Status
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
CIO 80 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit Name Unit operation

14 Link Status 0: The link between hubs is terminated.
1: A link is established between hubs.
Bit 15 is used for detect power condition of PLC, so do not change it at any time. Otherwise the
CP1W-CIF41 Ethernet Option Board will generate error.

Error Status
The status of errors that occur at the Ethernet Option Board is reflected as shown in the following dia-
gram.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
CIO 81 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Band rate disagreement IP address setting error

Address disagreement IP address table error
EEPROM error IP router table error
Bit Name Correction

2 IP address setting The following cannot be used as IP address set-
error tings.
Host IDs that are all 0 or all 1.
Network IDs that are all 0 or all 1.
Subnetwork IDs that are all 1.

Addresses beginning with 127 (7F hex).
Reset the IP address.
3 IP address table Correct the IP address table. If the problem cannot be
error resolved, replace the CPU Unit.
4 IP router table error Correct the IP router table. If the problem cannot be
resolved, replace the CPU Unit.
13 Baud rate disagree- Make sure that the baud rate setting of the Serial 17
ment Option Port is 115,200 bps. Change the baud rate of
the Serial Option Port.
17-4-2 CIO Area Allocation

14 Address disagree- Make sure that the node number and the last byte of
ment the IP address are the same and then set other host
IDs to 0. Change the address conversion method.
15 EEPROM error Restart the PC. If the problem cannot be resolved,
replace the Ethernet Option Board.
FINS/TCP Connection Status
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
CIO 81 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit Switch Unit operation

0 FINS/TCP Connection No.1 0: The connection is terminated.
1: A connection is established.
1 FINS/TCP Connection No.2 0: The connection is terminated.
1: A connection is established.

17-5 Trouble Shooting
17-5-1 Error Log

The Ethernet Option Board provides an error log that records errors occurred during Ethernet Option
Board operation. The contents of the error log can be read or cleared from the Web Brower.
Logged Errors
The following errors are recorded in the error log.
Errors in network operation
Errors in data transfers
Error in the CPU unit
Error Log Table

Each error is recorded as one record in an error log table. Up to 20 records can be saved. If more than
20 errors occur, the oldest errors will be deleted from the error log and the most recent error will be
recorded.
The following information is recorded in the error log table.
Main error code (see table later in this section)
Detailed error code (see table later in this section)
Time stamp (from the clock in the CPU unit)
Note During the initialization of the Ethernet Option Board, if an error occurs, the error log time stamp will record
as 2000-00-00 00:00:00.
Error Log Location

When an error is detected, the error codes and time stamp are recorded in the error log in RAM inside
the Ethernet Option Board. Serious errors are also recorded in EEPROM. The maximum number of
errors that can be saved to EEPROM is 20 for the CP1L and CP1H. The errors recorded in EEPROM
will be saved even if the unit is restarted or power is turned OFF.

17-5-2 Error Codes

The error codes and ERR LED are described in the following table. The detailed error code will provide
detailed information on an error.
Error ERR Detailed error code
Meaning Correction EEPROM
code LED 1st byte 2nd byte
0002 LIT CPU Unit service Monitor time (ms) Set the PLC Settings on Saved
monitoring error the Serial Option Port Tab
as follows, and then turn
the power ON again.
Baud: 115200
Format: 7, 2, E
Mode: Host Link
0015 FLASH CPU Unit fatal error Eliminate the cause of the ---
error in the CPU Unit.
0110 --- Too many relay points Commands Reconstruct the network ---
(send failed) Bit 15: OFF or correct the routing
tables so that commands
Bits 08 to 14: SNA
are sent to within a 3-

Bits 00 to 07: SA1 level network range.
0111 --- Command too long Check the command for- ---
(send failed) Responses mat and set the correct
Bit 15: ON command data.
0112 --- Header error (send Bits 08 to 14: DNA Check the command for- ---
failed) mat and set the correct
Bits 00 to 07: DA1
command data.
0117 --- Internal buffers full; Change the network so ---
packet discarded that traffic is not concen- 17
trated.
0123 --- Internal send buffers Change the network so ---
17-5-2 Error Codes

full; packet discarded that traffic is not concen-
trated.
0125 --- Time out error Resend the command. ---
021A FLASH Logic error in setting 00 04: Unit Recreate the data speci- Saved
table Setup fied by the 2nd byte of the
detailed error code.
03C0 FLASH FINS/TCP setting 01 to 02: 01: Set the FINS/TCP ---
error Connection No. Automatically allo- settings correctly.
cated
FINS node address
duplication
02:
Destination
IP address error
03:
Destination
port number error
03C2 --- FINS/TCP packet 01 to 02: 03: Resend the command. ---
discarded Connection No. Reception There is too much load ---
error (traffic) on the Ethernet
04: Option Board. Correct the
Transmission error system so that traffic is
not concentrated.

Error ERR Detailed error code

Meaning Correction EEPROM
code LED 1st byte 2nd byte
03C3 --- FINS/UDP Packet 00 01 to FE The automatic genera- ---
discarded Node address tion (static) method was
used as the IP address
conversion method, so
remote IP address infor-
mation in internal memory
could not be changed.
03C8 --- Socket Error Arbitrary Resend the packet or the ---
destination node is not in
the network.
03D0 FLASH System setup sum Reset the value of system Saved
value error setup area, Restart CPU
Unit.
0601 LIT Option Board error Arbitrary Restart the CPU Unit. If Saved
the problem persists,
replace the Ethernet
Option Board.
0602 LIT Option Board mem- 01: Read error 06: Error log Restart the CPU Unit. If Saved
ory error 02: Write error the problem persists, (except
replace the Ethernet error log)
Option Board.
--- FLASH Serial Option Port Set the PLC Settings on ---
Communications Set- the Serial Option Port Tab
tings error as follows, and then turn
the power ON again.
Baud: 115200
Format: 7, 2, E
Mode: Host Link

17-5-3 Error Status

The Ethernet Option Board will output error status to the following word in CIO 80 of the CPU Unit. This
information can be used in troubleshooting errors.
Bit Error Correction
02 IP address setting The following cannot be used as the IP address of the Ethernet Option Board.
error All bits in the host ID are 0 or 1.
All bits in the network ID are 0 or 1.
All bits in the subnet ID are 1.
The IP address begins with 127 (0x7F).
Reset the IP address.
03 IP address table The IP address table information is incorrect. Reset the IP address table. If the
error problem cannot be resolved, replace the CPU Unit.
04 IP router table error The IP router table information is incorrect. Reset the IP router table. If the prob-
lem cannot be resolved, replace the CPU Unit.
13 Baud rate disagree- Set the PLC Settings on the Serial Option Port Tab as follows, and then turn the
ment power ON again.
Baud: 115200
Format: 7,2,E

Mode: Host Link
Unit Number: 0
Except the settings mentioned above, ERR LED will be lit without error codes.
14 Address disagree- The local IP address host number and FINS node address do not agree. Confirm
ment whether they agree or not.
The local IP address of the Ethernet Option Board is 192.168.250.1.
The default FINS node address of the Ethernet Option Board is 1.
Change the settings either in the allocated words in the DM area or by the Web
browser function to make the local IP address host number and FINS node 17
address be the same. In addition, Change the Address Conversion Mode to
Manual or Auto & Manual.
17-5-3 Error Status

15 EEPROM error Turn the power of the CPU Unit OFF and ON again to restart the Ethernet Option
Board.
When the values set by the Web browser function are wrong, the local IP address in valid at that
time will be saved, not the values set in the words D1355 and D1356. Confirm the data of D1303
and D1304 in the PLC memory for the settings from the Web browser, after connecting the
CX-Programmer online by USB.

17-6 Connection Method with the

CX-Programmer
The CX-Programmer version 9.12 or higher can be connected online to the Ethernet Option Board with
Ethernet. The connection method shows below.
In the following example, the Ethernet Option Board is connected without making any setting.
Example
A (except 1) FINS node address Default: 1

Display in Workstation Node Number on the Network
Type Tab in CX-Programmers Change PLC Dialog
Box
Auto-generation in the CX-Programmer

Select Auto-detect in Workstation Node
Number
Set to 192.168. 250. A (A is any value except 1)

IP address Default: 192.168. 250. 1
Set IP address in Windows Local Area Connection
Properties Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) - Properties
Computer CX-Programmer Ethernet Option Board
Network typeEthernet
Ethernet
Computer Ethernet Option Board

IP address 192.168. 250.A 192.168. 250.1
(Set by manual on Windows) (Default)
Decision direction
FINS node address A 1
(Auto-generation in the (Default)
CX-Programmer)
Confirm the Communications Settings on the Serial Option Port Tab in the PLC Settings Dialog
Box of the CP1E CPU Unit. If the mode is set to Host Link and the baud rate to 9,600 or other
values except 115,200, the CP1E CPU Unit cannot be connected with Ethernet. ERR LED of the
Ethernet Option Board will be lit. Change the PLC Settings by USB port.

Procedure
1 Connect the Ethernet Option Board to the computer

Use cross cables when connecting directly, use straight cables when connecting with hubs.
2 Set computer's IP address by manual

(1) Select Local Area Connection in Windows' Network Connection Tab. Right-click and
select Properties in the pop-up menu.
(2) Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) - Properties.
(3) Select Use the following IP address, and then set computer's IP address by manual.
17-6 Connection Method with the CX-Programmer

Set computer's IP address to 192.168.250.A.
The setting range of the post number A is 2 to 254.
For example, set to 192.168.250.2.
3 Register the target PLC using the CX-Programmer

(1) CX-Programmer's Change PLC Dialog Box
(a) Set Device Name to the target PLC, PLC0 for example.
(b) Select Ethernet in Network Type.
(c) Click the Settings Button on the right side of Network Type.
(2) Network Settings [Ethernet] Dialog Box
(a) The settings in the Netwok Tab are as follows.
Set the network address to 0 (default) and the node address to 1 in FINS
Destination Address settings.
Set Frame Length to 540 bytes max. 17
Set Response Timeout(s) to 5.
(b) The settings in the Driver Tab are as follows.
FINS node address generates automatically from the IP address

in the computer.
FINS node address is the computers

IP address host number.
In this example, it is 2.
Set the UDP port number to

9600 (default).
Set the Ethernet Option Boards IPaddress

to 192.168.250.1.

The default setting for Address Conversion Mode of the Ethernet Option Board is
Auto (Dynamic), so slecet Auto-detect in the field of Workstation Node Number.
Therefore, according to computer's IP address, computer's FINS node address is set
automatically in the CX-Programmer. At that time, IP address post number and FINS
node address are the same.
In this example, 2 is displayed according to the host number of computer's IP
address 192.168.250.2 set by manual, and it is invalid to change the setting.
Set IP address to 192.168.250.1, which is the Ethernet Option Board's IP address.
Set FINS/UDP Port to 9600 (default), which is the UDP port number in the FINS
communications service.
4 Connect the target PLC online

Select Work Online in the PLC menu.

17-7 Network Installation
17-7-1 Devices Required for Constructing a Network
The basic configuration for a 100Base-TX Ethernet System consists of one hub to which nodes are
attached in star form using twisted-pair cable. The devices shown in the following table are required to
configure a network with 100Base-TX-type CP1W-CIF41, so prepared them in advance.
Network device Contents
1. Ethernet Option Board The Ethernet Option Board is a Communication Unit
(CP1W-CIF41) that connects a CP1E N/NA-type CPU Unit to
100Base-TX Ethernet networks.
(They can also be used as 10Base-T.)
2. Twisted-pair cable This is twisted-pair cable for connecting 100Base-TX
type Ethernet Option Board to the hub, with an RJ45
Modular Connector at each end.
Use a category 3, 4, 5, or 5e UTP (unshielded twisted
pair) or STP (shielded twisted-pair) cable.
3. Hub This is a relay device for connecting multiple nodes in
17-7 Network Installation

a star LAN.
17-7-2 Network Installation
Basic Installation Precautions

Take the greatest care when installing the Ethernet System, being sure to follow ISO 802-3 specifica-
tions. You must obtain a copy of these specifications and be sure you understand them before
attempting to install an Ethernet System. Unless you are already experienced in installing communi-
17
cations systems, we strongly recommend that you employ a professional to install your system.
Do not install Ethernet equipment near sources of noise. If noise-prone environments are unavoid-
17-7-1 Devices Required for Constructing a Network

able, be sure to take adequate measures against noise interference, such as installing network com-
ponents in grounded metal cases, using optical links in the system, etc.
Precautions on Laying Twisted-pair Cable
Basic Precautions
Press the cable connector in firmly until it locks into place at both the hub and the Ethernet Option
Board.
After laying the twisted-pair cable, check the connection with a 10Base-T cable tester.
Environment Precautions
The UTP cable is not shielded, and the hub is designed for use in OA environments. In environ-
ments subject to noise, construct a system with shielded twisted-pair (STP) cable and hubs suit-
able for an FA environment.
Do not lay the twisted-pair cable together with high-voltage lines.
Do not lay the twisted-pair cable near devices that generate noise.
Do not lay the twisted-pair cable in locations subject to high temperature or high humidity.
Do not lay the twisted-pair cable in locations subject to excessive dirt and dust or to oil mist or
other contaminants.

Precaution on Hub Installation
Environment Precautions
Do not install the hub near devices that generate noise.
Do not install the hub in locations subject to high temperature or high humidity.
Do not install the hub in locations subject to excessive dirt and dust or to oil mist or other contam-
inants.
Hub Connection Methods

If more hub ports are required, they can be added by connecting more than one hub. There are two
possible connection methods for hubs: Cascade and stacked.
Cascade Connections
Connect two hubs to each other as follows:
Connect an MDI port to an MDI-X port with a straight cable;
Connect two MDI ports with a cross cable;
Connect two MDI-X ports with a cross cable.
Note It is very difficult to distinguish cross cables and straight cables by appearance. Incorrect cables will cause
communications to fail. We recommend using cascade connections with straight cables whenever possible.
With cascade connections, up to 5 segments can be connected using up to 4 repeaters (i.e., 4
hubs).
Stack Connections
Connect the hubs using special cables or special racks.
Normally there is no limit to the number of hubs in a stack, and each stack is treated as one hub.
Some hubs, however, are limited in the number of hubs per stack.
Hub
Four stackable hubs Two stackable hubs
Stack cable Stack cable

17-8 Comparison with Previous Models

Item Previous Models New Models
Model number CS1W-ETN21 CP1W-CIF41
CJ1W-ETN21
Physical layer 100/10Base-TX 100/10Base-TX (Auto-MDIX)
Number of nodes 254 254
PLC maintenance via the Internet Can send commands, including Not supported
FINS commands, by e-mail over
the Internet from a computer to
the PLC.
Server specification Specification by IP address or by Not supported
host name
FINS commu- Prerequisite to rout- When multiple communica- Not Supported
17-8 Comparison with Previous Models

nications ing tables tions Units are mounted on the (For the CP1L/CP1H CPU Units,
service network when sending or receiving FINS
When routing tables are used commands from other nodes on
for other PLCs on the same the same Ethernet network by exe-
network cuting SEND, RECV or CMND
instructions)
Automatic IP address A computer automatically acquir- Same as previous models
acquisition ing IP addresses can send com-
mands to the PLC and receive
responses.
FINS communication Possible, with Automatic alloca- Same as previous models
with computer without tion by Ethernet Option Board
fixed node address (Client FINS automatic node
address allocation function,
TCP/IP only) 17
Handling TCP/IP With FINS communications, both With FINS communications, both
UDP/IP and TCP/IP (with up to16 UDP/IP and TCP/IP (with up to 2
simultaneous connections and all simultaneous connections) possi-
can be set to client) possible. ble.
Simultaneous connec- Possible (with both UDP/IP and Same as previous models
tion of multiple appli- TCP/IP)
cations in a computer
Mail functions Supported Not Supported
FTP server function Supported Not Supported
Socket services function Supported Not Supported
Automatic clock information adjustment Supported Not Supported
FINS frame length 2,012 552 (CP1E)
1,016 (CP1L/CP1H)
Buffer numbers 392K bytes 8K bytes
Inner bus Parallel Serial port
Note Limited by the CP1W-CIF41 inner bus protocol (Host Link, 7,2,E, 115200 bps), the system response perfor-
mance is longer than the existing Ethernet Unit. Please consider the FINS command processing time and
buffer limitation when using the CP1W-CIF41 Ethernet Option Board.


18
Programming Device Operations
This section describes the use of the CX-Programmer to create a ladder programs to
operate the CP1E, transfer the program to the CP1E, and debug the program. It also
describes other basic functions of the CX-Programmer.
18-1 Programming Devices Usable with the CP1E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2

18-2 Overview of CX-Programmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-3
18-2-1 CX-Programmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-3
18-2-2 CX-Programmer Flow from Startup to Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-3
18-2-3 Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-6
18-3 Creating a Ladder Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-7
18-3-1 Inputting a Ladder Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-7
18-3-2 Saving and Reading Ladder Programs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-14
18-3-3 Editing Ladder Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-15
18-4 Connecting Online to the CP1E and Transferring the Program . . . . . . . 18-18 18
18-4-1 Connecting Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-18
18-4-2 Changing Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-19
18-4-3 Transferring a Ladder Program and the PLC Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-20
18-4-4 Starting Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-21
18-5 Online Monitoring and Debugging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-23
18-5-1 Monitoring Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-23
18-5-2 Force-set/Reset Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-25
18-5-3 Online Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-26

18 Programming Device Operations
18-1 Programming Devices Usable with

the CP1E
The Programming Devices that can be used with the CP1E are listed in the following table.
Compatible Saved pro-
Unit version of Support for Applicable
Product Model CX-Programmer gram file Reference
CP1E CPU Unit Smart Input CPU Unit
versions extension
CX-Programmer WS02-CXPC Version 8.2 or Version 1. Not .CXP Refer to the CP1E-20D-
(CX-One) 1-V8 higher (See note.) supported CX-Programmer CP1E-30D-
Operation Manual CP1E-40D-
(Cat. No. W446).
WS02-CXPC Version 9.03 or Version 1. Supported All units are
1-V9 higher supported
Micro PLC Edition WS02-CXPC Version 8.2 or Version 1. Not .CXP Described in this CP1E-20D-
CX-Programmer 2-V8 higher supported section. CP1E-30D-
(CX-One Lite) CP1E-40D-
WS02-CXPC Version 9.03 or Version 1. Supported All units are
2-V9 higher supported
CX-Programmer WS02-CXPC Version 1.0 Version 1. Supported .CXE CP1E-20D-
for CP1E 3 CP1E-30D-
CP1E-40D-
Note 1 To use CX-Programmer version 8.2 with a CP1E CPU Unit, the CX-One version 3 auto-update must be
installed.
2 Use the CX-Programmer version 9.12 or higher, when CP1W-CIF41 is applied.

This section describes the unique applications and functions of the Micro PLC Edition CX-Pro-
grammer version 9.03 or higher/CX-Programmer for CP1E. In the remainder of this section,
CX-Programmer refers to the Micro PLC Edition CX-Programmer version 9.03 or higher/
CX-Programmer for CP1E.
When using the full version of CX-Programmer provided in CX-One, refer to the CX-Program-
mer Operation Manual (Cat. No. W446).
A Programing Console cannot be used for the CP1E. Use the CX-Programmer.
The CX-Programmer for CP1E and CX-Programmer (CX-One/CX-One Lite) can be used at the same time.
The CX-Programmer (CX-One/CX-One Lite) and the CX-Programmer for CP1E can be installed on
the same computer and both applications can be run at the same time.
Using Project Files Saved with the CX-Programmer (.CXP) on the

CX-Programmer for CP1E
The CX-Programmer for CP1E cannot open a .CXP project created on the CX-Programmer
(CX-One/CX-One Lite). Use programming from a project saved in a .CXP file on the CX-Program-
mer for CP1E according to the following procedure.
1 Start the CX-Programmer (CX-One/CX-One Lite) and CX-Programmer for CP1E together.
2 Copy the rungs of the program to be used from the Ladder Programming Window of the CX-Pro-
grammer (CX-One/CX-One Lite), and paste them into the CX-Programmer for CP1E.
Files created with the CX-Programmer for CP1E (.CXE) can be opened with CX-Programmer
version 8.2 and higher.

18-2 Overview of CX-Programmer

This section describes the preparations that must be completed before a ladder program can be cre-
ated, including connecting the CP1E to the computer and installing the USB driver.
18-2-1 CX-Programmer
The CX-Programmer is a programming application for creating the ladder programs that are executed in
a CP1E CPU Unit.
In addition to ladder program creation, the CX-Programmer also has functions that are needed to set up
and operate the CP1E, including functions for debugging ladder programs, displaying addresses and
present values, monitoring, setting the connected PLC, programming, and monitoring.
The CX-Programmer has fewer sub-menus, making it relatively simple.
The installation of the CX-Programmer is described in 4-1-5 Installing the Software in the CP1E CPU
Unit Hardware Users Manual (Cat. No. W479).
For details on the operation of the CX-Programmer, refer to the CX-Programmer Online Help.

18-2-2 CX-Programmer Flow from Startup to Operation
The flow of using the CX-Programmer from startup through starting PLC operation is shown below.
1 Start CX-Programmer Select Start - Programs - OMRON - CX-One - CX-Programmer -

CX-Programmer .
2 Create new project Select CP1E in the Change PLC Dialog Box.
3 Create program Example: Press the C Key to input a NC input condition.

18
4 Save program Select File - Save As.
18-2-1 CX-Programmer
5 Connect online to the CP1E Select PLC - Work Online.
6 Change operating mode Select PLC - Operating mode - Program.
Select PLC - Transfer - Transfer [PC PLC].

7 Transfer program/PLC system
settings
8 Restart the CP1E Once turn OFF the power supply to the CP1E CPU Unit, then turn
ON again.
9 Start operation
CP1E CPU Unit operation will start.

Start CX-Programmer
Select Start - Programs - OMRON - CX-One - CX-Programmer.
The CX-Programmer will start.
The title display will appear, followed by the Main Window.
Names and Functions of Parts of the Main Window

This section describes the names and functions of each part of the Main Window of the CX-Programmer.
For details on the functions and operation of CX-Programmer, refer to the CX-Programmer Online Help.
Main Window
Title Bar
Displays the name of the project.
Main Menu
Displays the menus from which commands are selected.
Toolbar
Displays the icons for executing commands.

Project Tree and Project Workspace

Used to manage programs and settings.
Sections
Allow ladder programming to be split up into a number of parts.
Ladder Section Window
A window that is used to create and edit ladder programs.
I/O Comment Bar
Displays the name, address, value, and I/O comment of the symbol selected with the cursor.

Output Window
Displays messages, such as search results and errors.
Status Bar
Displays information such as the PLC name, online/offline status, and position of the active cell.
Ladder Section Window
1
2

4
3
4
Rung Number
Program Address
Rung Header 18
If a rung is incomplete, a red line will be displayed on the right side of the rung header.
Bus Bar
18-2-2 CX-Programmer Flow from Startup to Operation

18-2-3 Help
The CX-Programmer Help describes all the operations of CX-Programmer. It provides an introduction
to the various windows and panes and describes basic operations, ladder program creation, and moni-
toring. It also describes each of the instructions, including operand notation and contents.
Accessing CX-Programmer Help

Press the F1 Key from the CX-Programmer.
The Help Window will be displayed.
Accessing the CX-Programmer Instruction Reference

For an explanation of an instruction used in ladder programming, refer to the CX-Programmer Instruc-
tion Reference.
Displaying the Instruction Reference from the Main Menu of the

CX-Programmer
Select Instruction Reference - CP1E from the Help Menu.
The CX-Programmer Instruction Reference Window will be displayed.
Displaying the Instruction Reference while Creating a Ladder Program

While creating an instruction in a ladder program in Smart Input Mode, press the F1 Key to display
the Instruction Reference page for the instruction being edited.
Accessing the CP1E I/O Memory Reference

To check the CP1E I/O memory address map from the CX-Programmer, select I/O Memory Reference
from the Help Menu.

18-3 Creating a Ladder Program

This section describes the use of CX-Programmer to create a ladder program.
18-3-1 Inputting a Ladder Program

This section shows how to input a ladder program for an example application using the CX-Programmer
commands.
Creating a New Project

To use the CX-Programmer, the first step is to create a new project. To create a new project, we must
specify the PLC type and CPU Unit model for which the ladder program and data to be created will be
used.
1 Select New from the File Menu.The

Change PLC Dialog Box will be dis-
played.

2 The CP1E will already be selected
as the Device Type.
18

3 Click the Settings Button.

The PLC Type Settings Dialog Box
will be displayed.
4 Select a CPU Unit model in the CPU

Type box, and then click the OK But-
ton. The PLC Type Settings Dialog
Box will close.
5 Confirm that USB is displayed as

the network type, and then click the
OK Button.
The Change PLC Dialog Box will
close, and the Main Window will be
displayed for a new project.
If USB is not displayed for the network type, refer to 4-2-2 Installing the USB Driver in the CP1E
CPU Unit Hardware Users Manual (Cat.No.W479), and check that the USB driver has been
installed correctly.

Entering NO and NC Input Conditions

For a NO input condition using the LD instruction, press the L or C Key and select LD. For an OR
input condition, press the O or W Key and select OR.
For a NC input condition, press the L or / Key, and then select LD NOT. For an OR NOT input condi-
tion, press O or X and select OR NOT.
Press the Enter Key, and then enter the address.
Inputting a NO Input Condition
1 Press either the L or C Key. LD

0.00 will be displayed.

2 Press the Enter Key.
Bit (1/1) will be displayed and
0.00 will be displayed in reverse
video.
3 If the address is not CIO 0.00, input

the correct address from the key-
board. For example, input 0.02.
18
To select an Auxiliary Area bit*,

press the Down Cursor Key to move
the cursor to the Auxiliary Area List,
press the Enter Key, and then select
a bit from the list.
* Condition Flag or previously regis-
tered Auxiliary Area bit.

This completes inputting the LD
instruction.

The following instruction variations can be input.

Upward differentiation (@)
Downward differentiation (%)
Immediate refreshing (!)
Example: Immediate refreshing (!) specified.
The symbols indicating these instruction variations will be added to the beginning of the instruc-
tion whenever they are input regardless of whether the cursor is before (example: |LD), in the
middle (example:L|D), or at the end (example: LD|) of the instruction.
After an instruction has been entered, the variation can be changed as follows.
@: Upward differentiation
%: Downward differentiation
!: Immediate refreshing
Shift + 0: No differentiation
Inputting an OUTPUT Instruction

To input an OUTPUT instruction, press the O Key and select OUT.
To input an OUTPUT NOT instruction, press the O or Q Key, and then select OUT NOT.
Press the Enter Key, and then enter the address.
Input Example
1 Press the O Key.

OUT 100.00 will be displayed.

An OUTPUT instruction will be dis-
played with 100.00 in reverse
video.

3 For an address other than CIO

100.00, input the address from the
keyboard. Here, 100.02 has been
input.

This completes inputting the OUT-
PUT instruction.
Inputting Instructions
A mnemonic can be entered directly as a character string.
When you enter the first letter, a list of candidate mnemonics will be displayed. Use the Up Cursor and
Down Cursor Keys to move up and down through this list, and then press the Enter Key to make a
selection. Then, input the operands.
Example: TIM Instruction
1 Press the T Key.

A list of instructions beginning with T
will be displayed.
18

Timer number (1/2) will be dis-
played, and 0 will be displayed in
reverse video.
3 Input the timer number.

For example, input 3 and then
press the Enter Key.
4 Input the timer set value.

For example, input #10.


This completes inputting the TIM
instruction.
Copying Rungs Using the Automatic Address Increment Function

When rungs are copied and then pasted, it is possible to automatically increment the addresses by the
specified number when pasting the rungs.
Example: When the following rung is copied, the bit addresses can be incremented by +16, and the
word address can be incremented by +10 when pasting the rung.
1 Select the above rung and then select Address Increment Copy from the Edit Menu.
The following dialog box will be displayed.
2 In the Offset Area set the Bit Field to 16 and the CH Field to 10 for this example.
Click the Paste Button.
As shown below, the addresses are automatically incremented and the rung is pasted as the
next rung.

Addresses are
automatically incremented
when the rung is pasted.
Bits:
Example: Incrementing by +16 Bits (One Word)
Example: CIO 0.00 is incremented to CIO 1.00.
Words:
Example: Incrementing by +10 Words
Example: D100 is incremented to D110.
Automatic Creation of Symbol Names and I/O Comments

If there are symbol names or I/O comments in the rung that was copied, executing the Address
Increment Copy Command will automatically create symbol names and I/O comments.
Automatic Symbol Name Creation
Example: Example:

The symbol name Sensor02 is automatically The symbol name LAMP_Blue_1 is automatically
created from the symbol name Sensor01. created from the symbol name LAMP_Blue.
Automatically
incremented.
Example:
The symbol name ALARM_1 is automatically
created from the symbol name ALARM.
Automatic I/O Comment Creation
Any number at the end of When there are no numbers in the I/O
an I/O comment is
incremented by 1.
comment, sequential numbers starting
from 1 will be added after an underbar.
18
Automatically incremented.
Automatic Creation Rules

By default, automatic creation is governed by the following rules.
Target Automatic creation rule Description
Symbol names Increment the numbers The symbol name is searched for a number starting from the
found from tail. end, and any number that is found is incremented by 1.
If no number is found, an underbar and a sequential number
starting from 1 are appended.
I/O comments Increment the numbers The I/O comment is searched for a number starting from the
found from tail. end, and any number that is found is incremented by 1.
If no number is found, an underbar and a sequential number
starting from 1 are appended.

Other rules may also be applicable.

Click the Advanced Button to select options. The options are enabled when the Paste Button is
clicked.
Target Automatic creation rule Description

Symbol names Increment the numbers found The symbol name is searched for a number starting from
from head. the beginning, and any number that is found is incre-
mented by 1.
If no number is found, an underbar and a sequential
number starting from 1 are appended.
Assign a new number to the And underbar and sequential number, starting from 1,
end of the symbol name. are appended to the end of the symbol name.
I/O comments Increment the numbers found The I/O comment is searched for a number starting from
from head. the beginning, and any number that is found is incre-
mented by 1.
If no number is found, an underbar and a sequential
number starting from 1 are appended.
Assign a new number to the An underbar and a sequential number starting from 1
end of the I/O comment. are appended to the end of the I/O comment.
Attach same I/O comment. The same I/O comment is used for the copy.
18-3-2 Saving and Reading Ladder Programs

Always save the ladder program that you have created. This section describes how to check, save, and
read a ladder program.
Checking a Ladder Program for Errors

You can check for errors in a program by compiling it.
1 Select Compile All PLC Programs

from the Program Menu.
Compiling will start. Once compiling

has been completed, the results of
the program check will be displayed
in the Output Window.

2 If an error was found, double-click

the error message displayed in the
Output Window.
The cursor will move to the location
of the error. Correct the ladder pro-
gram as required.
Note When there is more than one error,
press the Shift + J keys to search
for errors in order.
Saving a Ladder Program

Once created, a ladder program must be saved. Ladder programs are saved in projects.
1 Select Save As from the File Menu.

The Save CX-Programmer File Dia-
log Box will be displayed.

2 Specify the save location, input the
file name, and then click the Save
Button.
The CX-Programmer project file will
be saved.
18
18-3-3 Editing Ladder Programs

A ladder program can be edited in the CX-Programmer. Also, I/O comments and rung comments can
be input.
Inputting and Editing I/O Comments
Inputting an I/O Comment with the Ladder Editor

In Smart Input Mode, an I/O comment can be input after an operand has been input using the Com-
ment Dialog Box.
Note The Comment Dialog Box shown above is displayed only when the Show with comment dialog Option is
selected on the Options - Diagrams Dialog Box. The Options - Diagrams Dialog Box is accessed by select-
ing Options from the Tools Menu.

Inputting by Editing I/O Comments

Multiple I/O comments can be input or changed from an address list.
1 Select Edit I/O Comment from the

Edit Menu.
The I/O Comment Editing Window

will be displayed.
2 Input I/O comments or double-click

the address for which the I/O com-
ments are to be changed. Inputting
the I/O comment will be enabled, so
input the I/O comment.

Inputting Rung Comments

Comments can be added to rungs in the program.
1 Double-click the header of the rung

to which a comment is to be
attached.
The Rung Properties Dialog Box will
be displayed.
2 Input a comment into the Comment

Field on the General Tab Page.

3 Close the Rung Properties Dialog
Box.
The input rung comment will be dis-
played in the ladder program.
18

18-4 Connecting Online to the CP1E and

Transferring the Program
This section describes how to make an online connection between the CX-Programmer and the CP1E,
and then transfer a ladder program to the CP1E.
18-4-1 Connecting Online

To enable transferring programs from the CX-Programmer to the CP1E, it is first necessary to place the
CX-Programmer online with the CP1E.
Online is the state in which communications is possible between the computer and the CP1E.
CX-Programmer
Go online and then transfer the program.
CP1E
1 Open the project containing the program to be transferred from the CX-Programmer.
2 Select Work Online from the PLC

Menu of the CX-Programmer.
A dialog box to confirm going online
will be displayed.
3 Click the Yes Button.

Once the online connection has

been established, the color of the
Ladder Section Window will change
to light gray.
18-4 Connecting Online to the CP1E and Transferring the Program

If it is not possible to establish an online connection, check the PLC type setting and the commu-
nications settings. To check them, double-click New PLC1 [CP1E] Offline in the project tree. For
details on these settings, refer to Creating a New Project in 18-3-1 Inputting a Ladder Program.
18-4-2 Changing Operating Modes

The operating mode can be changed to PROGRAM mode.
The procedure for changing to PROGRAM mode is given below.
1 Select Operating Mode - Program

from the PLC Menu.
A dialog box to confirm changing the
operating mode will be displayed.
18
18-4-2 Changing Operating Modes

The operating mode will be changed.
The operating mode is displayed in

the project tree.
Change to PROGRAM mode before transferring the PLC Setup and ladder program.

18-4-3 Transferring a Ladder Program and the PLC Setup

A ladder program created with the CX-Programmer can be transferred to the CP1E.
1 Change to PROGRAM mode, select Operating Mode - Program from the PLC Menu, and then
click the Yes Button.
2 Select Transfer - Transfer [PCPLC]

from the PLC Menu. The Download
Options Dialog Box will be displayed.
3 Click the OK Button.

A dialog box to confirm the transfer
will be displayed.
To transfer the PLC Setup, select the
Settings Check Box.
For details on the transfer options, refer to the CX-Programmer Online Help.

5 Click the OK Button.

This completes transferring the lad-
der program.
18-4 Connecting Online to the CP1E and Transferring the Program

18-4-4 Starting Operation
To start operation, turn ON the power or change the operating mode to RUN mode.

Operation will not be started when the power is turned ON if the PLC Setup is set so that the
PLC enters PROGRAM mode at startup.
Use the following procedure to change the operating mode to RUN mode. To perform trial operation for
debugging or adjustments, change the operating mode to MONITOR mode.
18
18-4-4 Starting Operation

Always confirm the safety of the controlled system before changing to MONITOR or RUN mode.

1 Select Operating Mode - Run from

the PLC Menu.
A dialog box to confirm changing the
operating mode will be displayed.

The CP1E will change to RUN
mode, and operation will start.
PROGRAM mode cannot be changed to MONITOR or RUN mode when the user program, PLC
Setup settings and DM area data in the CPU Units are being backed up. Change the operating
mode after the backup is completed.

18-5 Online Monitoring and Debugging

This section describes how to use CX-Programmer to monitor and debug a ladder program.
18-5-1 Monitoring Status
Displaying Execution Status

It is possible to display the execution status of a ladder program. This enables checking the execution of
the ladder program.
Change the CP1Es operating mode to MONITOR mode to display the execution status.
The execution status of the ladder program will be displayed.

Displaying the Execution Status for More than One Location
The Ladder Section Window can be split. This enables displaying multiple locations within a ladder pro-
gram so that you can check them at the same time.
1
18
18-5-1 Monitoring Status

Window Frames
You can drag the frames in the window to display different views of the program in the Ladder Sec-
tion Window. The window can be split into up to four sections.
Monitoring Specified Addresses

You can specify addresses to check bit status and word contents.
1 While online, select Window - Watch Window from the View Menu.
2 Input an address.
The bit status or word contents will
be displayed. For BOOL data, 0 indi-
cates OFF.
When entering an address, place a period between the word address and bit number. For
example, to input the address of bit 04 in CIO 0, input 0.04.
An address can be input by dragging it from the Ladder Section Window and dropping it into
the Watch Window. By dragging and dropping the header of a rung, all of the addresses on
that rung can be input.

18-5-2 Force-set/Reset Bits

Input bits can be controlled from CX-Programmer regardless of input status from the input devices. This
is used to establish input and output conditions when performing trial operation, or to see the effect of

establishing conditions when debugging.
Bits that can be Force-set/Reset

I/O bits
Word Area bits (W)
Timer Completion Flags
Holding Area Bits (H)
Counter Completion Flags

Always check the safety of the system before force-setting or force-resetting a bit and before
18
releasing forced status.
Force-setting 18-5-2 Force-set/Reset Bits
Force-setting a bit.
1 Set the CP1E operating mode to either MONITOR or PROGRAM mode.
2 Move the cursor to an input condi-

tion for the input bit that is to be
force-set.

3 Right-click and select Force - On.
The input bit will be force-set. A

symbol indicating the force-set sta-
tus will be displayed at the input con-
dition.
Select On to turn ON a bit and Off to turn OFF a bit.

To cancel forced status, select Cancel.
18-5-3 Online Editing
About Online Editing

A ladder program running on the CP1E can be edited online.
This can be done while the CP1E is in MONITOR mode or PROGRAM mode.
Using the CX-Programmer, it is possible to either change part of a ladder program running on the CP1E , or
make an addition to the program.
Online editing is used to make minor changes to the ladder program without actually stopping the oper-
ation of the CP1E.
When a ladder program has been changed using online editing, the cycle time may increase
by one or more cycles, or it may not be possible to read an input signal.
Major changes, such as moving a rung, copying, inserting, or deleting, should be done offline
and then the program should be transferred to the CP1E again.
After completing online editing, the results of editing are backed up to backup memory, result-
ing in a longer cycle time. While this is being done, the BKUP indicator will be lit, and the
CX-Programmer will indicate the progress.
An increase of one cycle will be 16ms maximum daring online editing and 8% of cycle time
during back up.

Online Editing Procedure
1 Change the CP1Es operating mode to MONITOR or PROGRAM mode.
2 Click the header of the rung to be edited.
3 Select Online Edit - Begin from the

PLC Menu.
The gray color will be cleared from
the Ladder Section Window to indi-
cate that the ladder program can be
edited.
4 Edit the ladder program.

5 Select Online Edit - Send
Changes from the PLC Menu.
The edited rung will be transferred 18
to the CP1E.
18-5-3 Online Editing


A pp
Appendices
A-1 Instruction Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2

A-1-1 Sequence Input Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
A-1-2 Sequence Output Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
A-1-3 Sequence Control Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
A-1-4 Timer and Counter Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
A-1-5 Comparison Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
A-1-6 Data Movement Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
A-1-7 Data Shift Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15
A-1-8 Increment/Decrement Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-17
A-1-9 Symbol Math Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-18
A-1-10 Conversion Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-22
A-1-11 Logic Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-26
A-1-12 Special Math Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-27
A-1-13 Floating-point Math Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-27
A-1-14 Table Data Processing Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-30
A-1-15 Data Control Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-31
App
A-1-16 Subroutine Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-35
A-1-17 Interrupt Control Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-36
A-1-18 High-speed Counter/Pulse Output Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-37
A-1-19 Step Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-44
A-1-20 Basic I/O Unit Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-45
A-1-21 Serial Communications Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-49
A-1-22 Clock Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-50
A-1-23 Failure Diagnosis Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-51
A-1-24 Other Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-51
A-2 Auxiliary Area Allocations by Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-52
A-2-1 Read-only Words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-52
A-2-2 Read/Write Words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-70
A-3 Response Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-80
A-3-1 I/O Response Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-80
A-3-2 Interrupt Response Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-82
A-3-3 Serial PLC Link Response Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-83
A-3-4 Pulse Output Start Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-84
A-3-5 Pulse Output Change Response Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-84
A-4 PLC Operation for Power Interruptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-85
CP1E CPU Unit Software Users Manual(W480) A-1

Appendices
A-1 Instruction Functions

The CP1E CPU Units support the following instructions.
Refer to the CP1E CPU Unit Instructions Reference Manual (Cat. No. W483) for details.
A-1-1 Sequence Input Instructions

Instruction Mnemonic Variations Symbol/Operand Function
LOAD LD @/%/!/!@/!% Bus bar Indicates a logical start and creates an ON/OFF execution condi-
tion based on the ON/OFF status of the specified operand bit.
Starting point
of block
LOAD NOT LD NOT @/%/!/!@/!% Bus bar Indicates a logical start and creates an ON/OFF execution condi-
tion based on the reverse of the ON/OFF status of the specified
operand bit.
Starting point
of block
AND AND @/%/!/!@/!% Symbol Takes a logical AND of the status of the specified operand bit and
the current execution condition.
AND NOT AND NOT @/%/!/!@/!% Symbol Reverses the status of the specified operand bit and takes a logi-
cal AND with the current execution condition.
OR OR @/%/!/!@/!% Bus bar Takes a logical OR of the ON/OFF status of the specified operand
bit and the current execution condition.
OR NOT OR NOT @/%/!/!@/!% Bus bar Reverses the status of the specified bit and takes a logical OR
with the current execution condition.
AND LOAD AND LD --- Takes a logical AND between logic blocks.
Logic block Logic block
LD
to Logic block A
LD
to Logic block B
AND LD Serial connection between

logic block A and logic block B.
A-2 CP1E CPU Unit Software Users Manual(W480)

Appendices

OR LOAD OR LD --- Takes a logical OR between logic blocks.
Logic block
LD
to Logic block A
Logic block
LD
to Logic block B
OR LD Parallel connection between

logic block A and logic block B.
NOT NOT --- Reverses the execution condition.

CONDITION UP --- UP(521) turns ON the execution condition for one cycle when the
UP(521)
ON execution condition goes from OFF to ON.
CONDITION DOWN --- DOWN(522) turns ON the execution condition for one cycle when
DOWN(522)
OFF the execution condition goes from ON to OFF.
A-1-2 Sequence Output Instructions

OUTPUT OUT ! Outputs the result (execution condition) of the logical processing
to the specified bit.
OUTPUT NOT OUT NOT ! Reverses the result (execution condition) of the logical processing,
and outputs it to the specified bit.
KEEP KEEP ! S (Set) Operates as a latching relay.

KEEP(011)
R (Reset)
B Set

B: Bit
Reset
S execution
condition
R execution
condition
Status of B
App
DIFFERENTI- DIFU ! DIFU(013) turns the designated bit ON for one cycle when the
DIFU(013)
ATE UP execution condition goes from OFF to ON (rising edge).
B
Execution
A-1-2 Sequence Output Instructions
B: Bit condition
Status of B
One cycle
DIFFERENTI- DIFD ! DIFD(014) turns the designated bit ON for one cycle when the
DIFD(014)
ATE DOWN execution condition goes from ON to OFF (falling edge).
B
Execution
B: Bit condition
Status of B
One cycle
SET SET @/%/!/!@/!% SET turns the operand bit ON when the execution condition is ON.
SET
B Execution
condition of SET
B: Bit
Status of B

Appendices

RESET RSET @/%/!/!@/!% RSET turns the operand bit OFF when the execution condition is ON.
RSET
B Execution
condition of RSET
B: Bit
Status of B
MULTIPLE BIT SETA @ SETA(530) turns ON the specified number of consecutive bits.
SETA(530)
SET
D
N1
N2 bits are set
N2 to 1 (ON).
D: Beginning word
N1: Beginning bit
N2: Number of bits
MULTIPLE BIT RSTA @ RSTA(531) turns OFF the specified number of consecutive bits.
RSTA(531)
RESET
D
N1
N2 N2 bits are
reset to 0
D: Beginning word (OFF).
N1: Beginning bit
N2: Number of bits
SINGLE BIT SETB @/!/!@ SETB(532) turns ON the specified bit in the specified word when
SETB(532)
SET the execution condition is ON.
D
Unlike the SET instruction, SETB(532) can be used to reset a bit
N in a DM word.
D: Word address
N: Bit number
SINGLE BIT RSTB @/!/!@ RSTB(533) turns OFF the specified bit in the specified word when
RSTB(533)
RESET the execution condition is ON.
D
Unlike the RSET instruction, RSTB(533) can be used to reset a bit
N in a DM word.
D: Word address
N: Bit number

Appendices
A-1-3 Sequence Control Instructions

END END --- Indicates the end of a program.
END(001)
NO OPERA- NOP --- --- This instruction has no function. (No processing is performed for
TION NOP(000).)
INTERLOCK IL --- Interlocks all outputs between IL(002) and ILC(003) when the exe-
IL(002)
cution condition for IL(002) is OFF. IL(002) and ILC(003) are nor-
mally used in pairs.
Execution Execution
condition ON condition OFF
Execution
condition
Normal Outputs
Interlocked section execution
of the program interlocked.
INTERLOCK ILC --- All outputs between IL(002) and ILC(003) are interlocked when
ILC(003)
CLEAR the execution condition for IL(002) is OFF. IL(002) and ILC(003)
are normally used in pairs.
MULTI-INTER- MILH --- When the execution condition for MILH(517) is OFF, the outputs
MILH (517)
LOCK DIFFER- for all instructions between that MILH(517) instruction and the next
ENTIATION N MILC(519) instruction are interlocked. MILH(517) and MILC(519)
HOLD D are used as a pair.
N: Interlock number MILH(517)/MILC(519) interlocks can be nested (e.g., MILH(517)-
D: Interlock Status Bit MILH(517)-MILC(519)-MILC(519)).
If there is a differentiated instruction (DIFU, DIFD, or instruction
with a @ or % prefix) between MILH(517) and the corresponding
MILC(519), that instruction will be executed after the interlock is

cleared if the differentiation condition of the instruction was estab-
lished.
MULTI-INTER- MILR --- When the execution condition for MILR(518) is OFF, the outputs
MILR (518)
LOCK DIFFER- for all instructions between that MILR(518) instruction and the next
ENTIATION N MILC(519) instruction are interlocked.MILR(518) and MILC(519)
RELEASE D are used as a pair.
N: Interlock number MILR(518)/MILC(519) interlocks can be nested (e.g., MILR(518)-
D: Interlock Status Bit MILR(518)-MILC(519)-MILC(519)).
If there is a differentiated instruction (DIFU, DIFD, or instruction
with a @ or % prefix) between MILR(518) and the corresponding
MILC(519), that instruction will not be executed after the interlock
App
is cleared even if the differentiation condition of the instruction was
established.
MULTI-INTER- MILC --- Clears an interlock started by an MILH(517) or MILR(518) with the
MILC (519)
LOCK CLEAR same interlock number.
N
A-1-3 Sequence Control Instructions
All outputs between MILH(517)/MILR(518) and the corresponding
N: Interlock number MILC(519) with the same interlock number are interlocked when
the execution condition for MILH(517)/MILR(518) is OFF.
JUMP JMP --- When the execution condition for JMP(004) is OFF, program exe-
JMP(004)
cution jumps directly to the first JME(005) in the program with the
N same jump number. JMP(004) and JME(005) are used in pairs.
N: Interlock number Execution condition
Instructions in
this section
are not
executed and
Instruc- Instructions out-put status
tions jumped is maintained.
ex- The instruction
ecuted execution time
for these
instructions is
eliminated.

Appendices

CONDITIONAL CJP --- The operation of CJP(510) is the basically the opposite of
CJP(510)
JUMP JMP(004). When the execution condition for CJP(510) is ON, pro-
N gram execution jumps directly to the first JME(005) in the program
with the same jump number. CJP(510) and JME(005) are used in
N: Interlock number
pairs.
Execution condition
Instructions in
this section are
not executed
and out-put
Instruc- status is
tions Instructions
jumped maintained.
ex- The instruction
ecuted execution time
for these
instructions is
eliminated.
JUMP END JME --- Indicates the destination of a jump instruction.

JME(005)
N
N: Interlock number
FOR-NEXT FOR --- The instructions between FOR(512) and NEXT(513) are repeated
FOR(512)
LOOPS a specified number of times. FOR(512) and NEXT(513) are used
N in pairs.
N: Number of loops
Repeated N times
Repeated program section
BREAK LOOP BREAK --- Programmed in a FOR-NEXT loop to cancel the execution of the
BREAK(514)
loop for a given execution condition. The remaining instructions in
the loop are processed as NOP(000) instructions.
N repetitions Condition a ON
Repetitions
forced to
end.
Processed as
NOP(000).
FOR-NEXT NEXT --- The instructions between FOR(512) and NEXT(513) are repeated
NEXT(513)
LOOPS a specified number of times. FOR(512) and NEXT(513) are used
in pairs.

Appendices
A-1-4 Timer and Counter Instructions

HUNDRED-MS TIM --- TIM/TIMX(550) operates a decrementing timer with units of 0.1-s.
TIM
TIMER (BCD) The setting range for the set value (SV) is 0 to 999.9 s for
N TIM(BCD) and 0 to 6,553.5 s for TIMX(Binary).
S
ON
N: Timer number Timer input OFF
S: Set value
SV
Timer PV
TIMX --- 0
TIMX(550)
(Binary)
N
Completion ON
S Flag OFF
N: Timer number Timer Input Turned OFF before Completion Flag

S: Set value Turns ON
ON
Timer input
OFF
SV
Timer PV
0
Completion ON
Flag OFF
TEN-MS TIMH --- TIMH(015)/TIMHX(551) operates a decrementing timer with units

TIMH(015)
TIMER (BCD) of 10-ms. The setting range for the set value (SV) is 0 to 99.99 s
N for TIMH(BCD) and 0 to 655.35 s for TIMHX(Binary).
S
ON
N: Timer number Timer input OFF
S: Set value
Timer PV SV
TIMHX ---
TIMHX(551) 0
(Binary)
N
Completion ON
Flag OFF
S

N: Timer number
S: Set value Timer Input Turned OFF before Completion Flag Turns
ON
ON
Timer input OFF
Timer PV SV
0
Completion ON
Flag OFF
ONE-MS TMHH --- TMHH(540)/TMHHX(552) operates a decrementing timer with

TMHH(540)
App
TIMER (BCD) units of 1-ms. The setting range for the set value (SV) is 0 to 9.999 s
N for TMHH(BCD) and 0 to 65.535 s for TMHHX(Binary).
S The timing charts for TMHH(540) and TMHHX(552) are the same
N: Timer number as those given above for TIMH(015).
S: Set value
Timer input ON
TMHHX --- OFF
TMHHX(552) SV
(BCD)
N Timer PV 0
S Completion ON
Flag OFF
N: Timer number
S: Set value
Timer Input Turned OFF before Completion
Flag Turns ON
Timer input ON
OFF
SV
Timer PV 0
Completion ON
Flag OFF

Appendices

ACCUMULA- TTIM --- TTIM(087)/TTIMX(555) operates an incrementing timer with units
Timer TTIM(087)
TIVE TIMER (BCD) input of 0.1-s. The setting range for the set value (SV) is 0 to 999.9 s for
N TTIM(BCD) and 0 to 6,553.5 s for TTIMX(Binary).
S
ON
Reset Timer input OFF
input
N: Timer number Timer PV SV
S: Set value
Timing
TTIMX --- resumes.
Timer TTIMX(555)
(Binary) input
PV
maintained.
N 0
S
Completion ON
Reset Flag OFF
input
N: Timer number Reset input ON

OFF
S: Set value
LONG TIMER TIML --- TIML(542)/TIMLX(553) operates a decrementing timer with units
(BCD) TIML(542) of 0.1-s that can time up to approx. 115 days for TIML(BCD) and
D1 49,710 days for TIMLX(Binary).
D2 Timer input ON
OFF
S
SV
D1: Completion Flag Timer PV
D2: PV word
S: SV word
0
TIMLX ---
TIMLX(553) Completion Flag ON
(Binary) (Bit 00 of D1) OFF
D1
D2
S
D1: Completion Flag
D2: PV word
S: SV word
COUNTER CNT --- Count CNT/CNTX(546) operates a decrementing counter. The setting
CNT
(BCD) input range for the set value (SV) is 0 to 9,999 for CNT(BCD) and 0 to
N 65,535 for CNTX(Binary).
S
ON
Reset
input Count input OFF
N: Counter number ON
S: Set value Reset input
OFF
CNTX ---
Count CNTX(546) SV
(Binary) input Counter PV
N
S 0
Reset ON
input Completion
Flag OFF
N: Counter number
S: Set value

Appendices

REVERSIBLE CNTR --- CNTR(012)/CNTRX(548) operates a reversible counter.
Increment CNTR(012)
COUNTER (BCD) input
Decrement N
input
Reset S Increment input
input
N: Counter number Decrement input

S: Set value
Counter PV
CNTRX --- 0
Increment CNTRX(548)
(Binary) input
Decrement N
input SV
Counter PV
Reset S
input
+1
0
N: Counter number
S: Set value
ON
Completion Flag
OFF
SV 1
Counter PV
ON
Completion Flag
OFF
RESET CNR @ CNR(545)/CNRX(547) resets the timers or counters within the

TIMER/ (BCD) CNR(545) specified range of timer or counter numbers. Sets the set value
COUNTER (SV) to the maximum of #9999 for CNR(BCD) and #FFFF for
N1 CNRX(Binary).
N2
N1: 1st number in range

N2: Last number in range
CNRX @
(Binary) CNRX(547)
N1
N2
N1: 1st number in range

N2: Last number in range
App

Appendices
A-1-5 Comparison Instructions

Symbol Com- LD, AND, OR + --- Input comparison instructions compare two values (constants
LD
parison =, <>, <, <=, >, and/or the contents of specified words) and create an ON execu-
(Unsigned) >= Symbol and option tion condition when the comparison condition is true.
Symbol Com- LD, AND, OR + --- S1 Input comparison instructions are available to compare signed or
parison (Dou- =, <>, <, <=, >, unsigned data of one-word or double length data.
S2
ble-word, >= + L
LD ON execution condition when
unsigned) comparison result is true.
Symbol Com- LD, AND, OR + --- <
AND
parison =, <>, <, <=, >,
(Signed) >= +S Symbol and option
Symbol Com- LD, AND, OR + --- S1

ON execution
parison (Dou- =, <>, <, <=, >, condition when
S2
ble-word, >= +SL AND comparison result
is true.
signed)
<
OR
Symbol and option
S1
S2 OR
One-word
S1: Comparison data 1
Double length
S1: 1st word of comparison data 1
S2: 1st word of comparison data 2
<
ON execution condition when

comparison result is true.
Time Compari- LD, AND, OR + --- Time comparison instructions compare two BCD time values and
LD (LOAD):
son = DT, <> DT, create an ON execution condition when the comparison condition
< DT, <= DT, Symbol is true.
> DT, >= DT C There are three types of time comparison instructions, LD (LOAD),
S1 AND, and OR. Time values (year, month, day, hour, minute, and
second) can be masked/unmasked in the comparison so it is easy
S2
to create calendar timer functions.
C: Control Word
AND:
Bits 00 to 05 of C specify whether or not the time data will be
Symbol masked for the comparison. Bits 00 to 05 mask the seconds,
minutes, hours, day, month, and year, respectively. If all 6 val-
C
ues are masked, the instruction will not be executed, the execu-
S1 tion condition will be OFF, and the Error Flag will be turned ON.
S2
15 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
C 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
OR:
Masks seconds data when ON.
Symbol Masks minutes data when ON.
Masks hours data when ON.
C Masks day data when ON.
Masks month data when ON.
S1 Masks year data when ON.
S2
C: Control word
S1: 1st word of present time
S2: 1st word of comparison time
UNSIGNED CMP ! Compares two unsigned binary values (constants and/or the con-
COMPARE CMP(020) tents of specified words) and outputs the result to the Arithmetic
S1 Flags in the Auxiliary Area.
S2 Unsigned binary
comparison

Arithmetic Flags
(>, >=, =, <=, <, <>)

Appendices

DOUBLE CMPL --- Compares two double unsigned binary values (constants and/or
UNSIGNED CMPL(060) the contents of specified words) and outputs the result to the Arith-
COMPARE S1 metic Flags in the Auxiliary Area.
S2 Unsigned binary
comparison
S1: Comparison data 1 S1+1 S2+1
Arithmetic Flags
(>, >=, =, <=, <, <>)
SIGNED CPS ! Compares two signed binary values (constants and/or the con-
BINARY COM- CPS(114) tents of specified words) and outputs the result to the Arithmetic
PARE S1 Flags in the Auxiliary Area.
S2 Signed binary
comparison

Arithmetic Flags
(>, >=, =, <=, <, <>)
DOUBLE CPSL --- Compares two double signed binary values (constants and/or the
SIGNED CPSL(115) contents of specified words) and outputs the result to the Arith-
BINARY COM- S1 metic Flags in the Auxiliary Area.
PARE
S2 Signed binary
comparison
S1: Comparison data 1 S1+1 S2+1
Arithmetic Flags
(>, >=, =, <=, <, <>)
TABLE COM- TCMP @ Compares the source data to the contents of 16 words and turns
PARE TCMP(085) ON the corresponding bit in the result word when the contents are
S equal.
T Comparison R
1: Data
R are equal.
0: Data
aren't equal.
S: Source data

T: 1st word of table
R: Result word
T: First word of table
T Comparison data 0
T+1 Comparison data 1
to to
T+15 Comparison data 15
UNSIGNED BCMP @ Compares the source data to 16 ranges (defined by 16 lower limits
App
BLOCK COM- BCMP(068) and 16 upper limits) and turns ON the corresponding bit in the
PARE S result word when the source data is within the range.
T Ranges
1: In range
0: Not in range
A-1-5 Comparison Instructions
R
Lower limit Upper limit R
S: Source data T to T+1 0
T: 1st word of table
R: Result word T+2 1
Source data to T+3
T+28 to T+29 14
T+30 to T+31 15
B: First word of block
B Lower limit value 0

B+1 Upper limit value 0
B+2 Lower limit value 1
to to
B+30 Lower limit value 15

Appendices

AREA RANGE ZCP --- Compares the 16-bit unsigned binary value in CD (word contents
COMPARE ZCP(088) or constant) to the range defined by LL and UL and outputs the
CD results to the Arithmetic Flags in the Auxiliary Area.
LL
UL
CD: Comparison data (1 word)

LL: Lower limit of range
UL: Upper limit of range
DOUBLE ZCPL --- Compares the 32-bit unsigned binary value in CD and CD+1 (word
AREA RANGE ZCPL(116) contents or constant) to the range defined by LL and UL and out-
COMPARE CD puts the results to the Arithmetic Flags in the Auxiliary Area.
LL
UL
CD: Comparison data (2 words)

LL: Lower limit of range
UL: Upper limit of range
A-1-6 Data Movement Instructions

MOVE MOV @/!/!@ Transfers a word of data to the specified word.
MOV(021)
S Source word
D
S: Source
D: Destination
Bit status not
changed.
Destination word
DOUBLE MOVL @ Transfers two words of data to the specified words.

MOVE MOVL(498)
S S+1
S
D
S: 1st source word Bit status not
D: 1st destination word changed.
D D+1
MOVE NOT MVN @ Transfers the complement of a word of data to the specified word.
MVN(022)
S Source word
D
S: Source
D: Destination Bit status
inverted.
Destination word

Appendices

MOVE BIT MOVB @ Transfers the specified bit.
MOVB(082)
S
C
D
S: Source word or data
C: Control word
D: Destination word
C: Control Word
15 8 7 0
C m n
Source bit: 00 to 0F
(0 to 15 decimal)
Destination bit: 00 to 0F
(0 to 15 decimal)
MOVE DIGIT MOVD @ Transfers the specified digit or digits. (Each digit is made up of 4
MOVD(083) bits.)
S 15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0
C C 0 l n m
n
D
m
S: Source word or data S
C: Control word
D: Destination word
l
D
C: Control Word
15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0
C 0 n m
First digit in S (m): 0 to 3

Number of digits (n): 0 to 3
0: 1 digit
1: 2 digits
First digit in D ( ): 0 to 3 2: 3 digits
3: 4 digits
Always 0.
MULTIPLE BIT XFRB @ Transfers the specified number of consecutive bits.

TRANSFER XFRB(062)
C
S
D
App
C: Control word
S: 1st source word
D: 1st destination word
A-1-6 Data Movement Instructions
C: Control Word
15 8 7 4 3 0
C n m
First bit in S ( ): 0 to F
(0 to 15)
First bit in D (m): 0 to F
(0 to 15)
Number of bits (n): 00 to FF
(0 to 255)

Appendices

BLOCK XFER @ Transfers the specified number of consecutive words.
TRANSFER XFER(070)
N
S N words
to to
D S+(N1) D+(N1)
N: Number of words
S: 1st source word N: Number of Words
D: 1st destination word The possible range for N is 0000 to FFFF (0 to 65,535 decimal).
15 0
S
to
S+(N-1)
15 0
D
to
D+(N-1)
BLOCK SET BSET @ Copies the same word to a range of consecutive words.
BSET(071)
Source word Destination words
S
St
St
E
S: Source word
St: Starting word
E: End word
E
DATA XCHG @ Exchanges the contents of the two specified words.

EXCHANGE XCHG(073)
E1 E1 E2
E2
E1: 1st exchange word

E2: Second exchange word
SINGLE DIST @ Transfers the source word to a destination word calculated by add-
WORD DIS- DIST(080) ing an offset value to the base address.
TRIBUTE S
S Bs Of
Bs
Of
S: Source word
Bs: Destination base address
Of: Offset
Bs+n
DATA COL- COLL @ Transfers the source word (calculated by adding an offset value to
LECT COLL(081) the base address) to the destination word.
Bs
Bs Of
Of
D
Bs: Source base address Bs+n

Of: Offset
D: Destination word

Appendices
A-1-7 Data Shift Instructions

SHIFT REGIS- SFT --- Data Operates a shift register.
TER input SFT(010)
E St+1, St+2 St
Shift St
input
Reset E
input Lost Status of data
input for each
St: Starting word shift input
E: End word
REVERSIBLE SFTR @ Creates a shift register that shifts data to either the right or the left.
SHIFT REGIS- SFTR(084)
TER C
St E St Data input
E Shift
direc-
E St tion
Data
C: Control word input
St: Starting word
E: End word C: Control Word
15 14 13 12
Shift direction
1 (ON): Left
0 (OFF): Right
Data input
Shift input
Reset
WORD SHIFT WSFT @ Shifts data between St and E in word units.

WSFT(016)
S E St
St Lost
S: Source word

St: Starting word
E: End word
ARITHMETIC ASL @ Shifts the contents of Wd one bit to the left.

SHIFT LEFT ASL(025)
Wd: 100CH
Wd 15 0
1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1
Wd: Word
0
CY
1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0
App
ARITHMETIC ASR @ Shifts the contents of Wd one bit to the right.
SHIFT RIGHT ASR(026)
Wd: 100CH
Wd 15 0
1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1
Wd: Word
A-1-7 Data Shift Instructions
0
CY
0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1
ROTATE LEFT ROL @ Shifts all Wd bits one bit to the left including the Carry Flag (CY).
ROL(027)
Wd
Wd: Word
ROTATE ROR @ Shifts all Wd bits one bit to the right including the Carry Flag (CY).
RIGHT ROR(028)
Wd Wd+1 Wd
Wd: Word

Appendices

ONE DIGIT SLD @ Shifts data by one digit (4 bits) to the left.
SHIFT LEFT SLD(074)
E S t
St
Lost
E
St: Starting word

E: End word
ONE DIGIT SRD @ Shifts data by one digit (4 bits) to the right.
SHIFT RIGHT SRD(075)
E S t
St
Lost
E
St: Starting word
E: End word
SHIFT N-BITS NASL @ Shifts the specified 16 bits(NASL) or 32 bits(NSLL) of word data to
LEFT NASL(580) the left by the specified number of bits.
D
C
D: Shift word Shift n-bits

C: Control word
DOUBLE NSLL @
SHIFT N-BITS NSLL(582)
Contents of
LEFT D "a" or "0"
Lost shifted in
C
N bits
D: Shift word
C: Control word C: Control word
NASL
15 12 11 8 7 0
C
0
No. of bits to shift: 00 to 10 Hex
Always 0.
Data shifted into register
0 Hex: 0 shifted in
8 Hex: Contents of rightmost bit shifted in
NSLL
15 12 11 8 7 0
C
0
Always 0.
0 Hex: 0 shifted in

Appendices

SHIFT N-BITS NASR @ Shifts the specified 16 bits(NASR) or 32 bits(NSRL) of word data
RIGHT NASR(581) to the right by the specified number of bits.
D
C
D: Shift word Contents of

C: Control word "a" or "0"
shifted in Lost
DOUBLE NSRL @
SHIFT N-BITS NSRL(583) N bits
RIGHT D
C: Control word
C NASR
D: Shift word 15 12 11 8 7 0
C: Control word
C
0
Always 0.
0 Hex: 0 shifted in
NSRL
15 12 11 8 7 0
C
0

Always 0.
0 Hex: 0 shifted in
A-1-8 Increment/Decrement Instructions

INCREMENT ++ @ Increments the 4-digit hexadecimal content of the specified word
App
BINARY ++(590) by 1.
Wd
Wd Wd
Wd: Word A-1-8 Increment/Decrement Instructions
DOUBLE ++L @ Increments the 8-digit hexadecimal content of the specified words
INCREMENT ++L(591) by 1.
BINARY Wd
Wd+1 Wd Wd+1 Wd
Wd: Word
DECREMENT @ Decrements the 4-digit hexadecimal content of the specified word

BINARY (592) by 1.
Wd
Wd Wd
Wd: Word
DOUBLE DEC- L @ Decrements the 8-digit hexadecimal content of the specified

REMENT L(593) words by 1.
BINARY Wd
Wd+1 Wd Wd+1 Wd
Wd: 1st word
INCREMENT ++B @ Increments the 4-digit BCD content of the specified word by 1.
BCD ++B(594)
Wd Wd Wd
Wd: Word

Appendices

DOUBLE ++BL @ Increments the 8-digit BCD content of the specified words by 1.
INCREMENT ++BL(595)
BCD Wd Wd+1 Wd Wd+1 Wd
Wd: 1st word
DECREMENT B @ Decrements the 4-digit BCD content of the specified word by 1.

BCD B(596)
Wd Wd 1 Wd
Wd: Word
DOUBLE DEC- BL @ Decrements the 8-digit BCD content of the specified words by 1.
REMENT BCD BL(597)
Wd Wd+1 Wd Wd+1 Wd
Wd: 1st word
A-1-9 Symbol Math Instructions

SIGNED + @ Adds 4-digit (single-word) hexadecimal data and/or constants.
BINARY ADD +(400)
WITHOUT Au Au (Signed binary)
CARRY
Ad Ad (Signed binary)
+
R
CY will turn
Au: Augend word ON when CY R (Signed binary)
Ad: Addend word there is a
R: Result word carry.
DOUBLE +L @ Adds 8-digit (double-word) hexadecimal data and/or constants.

SIGNED +L(401)
BINARY ADD Au+1 Au (Signed binary)
Au
WITHOUT
Ad + Ad+1 Ad (Signed binary)
CARRY
CY will
R turn ON
when there CY R+1 R (Signed binary)
Au: 1st augend word is a carry.
Ad: 1st addend word
R: 1st result word
SIGNED +C @ Adds 4-digit (single-word) hexadecimal data and/or constants with

BINARY ADD +C(402) the Carry Flag (CY).
WITH CARRY Au
Au (Signed binary)
Ad
R Ad (Signed binary)
Au: Augend word + CY

Ad: Addend word
R: Result word CY will turn
ON when CY R (Signed binary)
there is a
carry.
DOUBLE +CL @ Adds 8-digit (double-word) hexadecimal data and/or constants

SIGNED +CL(403) with the Carry Flag (CY).
BINARY ADD Au
WITH CARRY Au+1 Au (Signed binary)
Ad
Ad+1 Ad (Signed binary)
R
+ CY
Au: 1st augend word
CY will
Ad: 1st addend word
turn ON
R: 1st result word when there CY R+1 R (Signed binary)
is a carry.

Appendices

BCD ADD +B @ Adds 4-digit (single-word) BCD data and/or constants.
WITHOUT +B(404)
CARRY Au Au (BCD)
Ad Ad (BCD)
+
R
CY will turn
Au: Augend word ON when CY R (BCD)
Ad: Addend word there is a
carry.
R: Result word
DOUBLE BCD +BL @ Adds 8-digit (double-word) BCD data and/or constants.
ADD WITH- +BL(405)
OUT CARRY Au Au+1 Au (BCD)
Ad Ad+1 Ad (BCD)
+
R
CY will turn
Au: 1st augend word ON when CY R+1 R (BCD)
Ad: 1st addend word there is a
carry.
R: 1st result word
BCD ADD +BC @ Adds 4-digit (single-word) BCD data and/or constants with the
WITH CARRY +BC(406) Carry Flag (CY).
Au
Au (BCD)
Ad
R Ad (BCD)
Au: Augend word + CY

Ad: Addend word
CY will turn
R: Result word ON when
there is a CY R (BCD)
carry.
DOUBLE BCD +BCL @ Adds 8-digit (double-word) BCD data and/or constants with the
ADD WITH +BCL(407) Carry Flag (CY).
CARRY Au
Au+1 Au (BCD)

Ad
R Ad+1 Ad (BCD)
Au: 1st augend word + CY

Ad: 1st addend word
R: 1st result word
CY will turn
ON when CY R+1 R (BCD)
there is a
carry.
SIGNED @ Subtracts 4-digit (single-word) hexadecimal data and/or constants.

BINARY SUB- (410)
TRACT WITH- Mi Mi (Signed binary)
OUT CARRY
App
Su Su (Signed binary)
R
CY will turn
Mi: Minuend word ON when CY R (Signed binary)
Su: Subtrahend word there is a
R: Result word borrow.
DOUBLE L @ Subtracts 8-digit (double-word) hexadecimal data and/or con-

SIGNED L(411) stants.
BINARY SUB- Mi
TRACT WITH- Mi+1 Mi (Signed binary)
OUT CARRY Su
Su+1 Su (Signed binary)
R
CY will turn
Mi: Minuend word ON when
CY R+1 R (Signed binary)
Su: Subtrahend word there is a
R: Result word borrow.

Appendices

SIGNED C @ Subtracts 4-digit (single-word) hexadecimal data and/or constants
BINARY SUB- C(412) with the Carry Flag (CY).
TRACT WITH Mi
CARRY Mi (Signed binary)
Su
R Su (Signed binary)
CY
Mi: Minuend word
Su: Subtrahend word
ON when CY R (Signed binary)
there is a
borrow.
DOUBLE CL @ Subtracts 8-digit (double-word) hexadecimal data and/or con-

SIGNED CL(413) stants with the Carry Flag (CY).
BINARY WITH Mi
CARRY Mi+1 Mi (Signed binary)
Su
Su+1 Su (Signed binary)
R
Mi: Minuend word CY
Su: Subtrahend word CY will turn
R: Result word ON when
there is a CY R+1 R (Signed binary)
borrow.
BCD SUB- B @ Subtracts 4-digit (single-word) BCD data and/or constants.

TRACT WITH- B(414)
OUT CARRY Mi Mi (BCD)
Su Su (BCD)
R
CY will turn ON
Mi: Minuend word when there is a CY R (BCD)
Su: Subtrahend word carry.
R: Result word
DOUBLE BCD BL @ Subtracts 8-digit (double-word) BCD data and/or constants.

SUBTRACT BL(415)
WITHOUT Mi Mi +1 Mi (BCD)
CARRY
Su Su+1 Su (BCD)
R
CY will turn
Mi: 1st minuend word
Su: 1st subtrahend word there is a
borrow.
R: 1st result word
BCD SUB- BC @ Subtracts 4-digit (single-word) BCD data and/or constants with the
TRACT WITH BC(416) Carry Flag (CY).
CARRY Mi
Mi (BCD)
Su
R Su (BCD)
Mi: Minuend word

CY
Su: Subtrahend word
ON when CY R (BCD)
there is a
borrow.
DOUBLE BCD BCL @ Subtracts 8-digit (double-word) BCD data and/or constants with
SUBTRACT BCL(417) the Carry Flag (CY).
WITH CARRY Mi
Mi +1 Mi (BCD)
Su
R Su+1 Su (BCD)
Mi: 1st minuend word CY

Su: 1st subtrahend word
R: 1st result word
CY will turn
there is a
borrow.

Appendices

SIGNED * @ Multiplies 4-digit signed hexadecimal data and/or constants.
BINARY MUL- *(420)
TIPLY Md Md (Signed binary)
Mr (Signed binary)
Mr
R
Md: Multiplicand word R +1 R (Signed binary)
Mr: Multiplier word
R: Result word
DOUBLE *L @ Multiplies 8-digit signed hexadecimal data and/or constants.

SIGNED *L(421)
BINARY MUL- Md Md + 1 Md (Signed binary)
TIPLY
Mr
Mr + 1 Mr (Signed binary)
R
Md: 1st multiplicand word
R+3 R+2 R+1 R (Signed binary)
Mr: 1st multiplier word
R: 1st result word
BCD MULTI- *B @ Multiplies 4-digit (single-word) BCD data and/or constants.

PLY *B(424)
Md (BCD)
Md
Mr Mr (BCD)
R
Md: Multiplicand word R +1 R (BCD)

Mr: Multiplier word
R: Result word
DOUBLE BCD *BL @ Multiplies 8-digit (double-word) BCD data and/or constants.
MULTIPLY *BL(425)
Md Md + 1 Md (BCD)
Mr
Mr + 1 Mr (BCD)
R

Md: 1st multiplicand word R+3 R+2 R+1 R (BCD)
Mr: 1st multiplier word
R: 1st result word
SIGNED / @ Divides 4-digit (single-word) signed hexadecimal data and/or con-

BINARY /(430) stants.
DIVIDE Dd
Dd (Signed binary)
Dr
R Dr (Signed binary)
Dd: Dividend word

(Signed binary)
App
Dr: Divisor word R +1 R
R: Result word
Remainder Quotient
DOUBLE /L @ Divides 8-digit (double-word) signed hexadecimal data and/or con-

SIGNED /L(431) stants.
BINARY Dd
DIVIDE Dd + 1 Dd (Signed binary)
Dr
R Dr + 1 Dr (Signed binary)
Dd: 1st dividend word
Dr: 1st divisor word
R: 1st result word R+3 R+2 R+1 R (Signed binary)
Remainder Quotient
BCD DIVIDE /B @ Divides 4-digit (single-word) BCD data and/or constants.

/B(434)
Dd (BCD)
Dd
Dr (BCD)
Dr
R
R +1 R (BCD)
Dd: Dividend word
Dr: Divisor word Remainder Quotient
R: Result word

Appendices

DOUBLE BCD /BL @ Divides 8-digit (double-word) BCD data and/or constants.
DIVIDE /BL(435)
Dd Dd + 1 Dd (BCD)
Dr
Dr + 1 Dr (BCD)
R
Dd: 1st dividend word

R+3 R+2 R+1 R (BCD)
Dr: 1st divisor word
R: 1st result word Remainder Quotient
A-1-10 Conversion Instructions

BCD-TO-BINA BIN @ Converts BCD data to binary data.
RY BIN(023)
S (BCD) R (BIN)
R
S: Source word
R: Result word
DOUBLE BINL @ Converts 8-digit BCD data to 8-digit hexadecimal (32-bit binary)
BCD-TO-DOU- BINL(058) data.
BLE BINARY S
(BCD) R (BIN)
R
(BCD) R+1 (BIN)
S: 1st source word
R: 1st result word
BINARY-TO- BCD @ Converts a word of binary data to a word of BCD data.

BCD BCD(024)
S (BIN) R (BCD)
R
S: Source word
R: Result word
DOUBLE BCDL @ Converts 8-digit hexadecimal (32-bit binary) data to 8-digit BCD
BINARY-TO- BCDL(059) data.
DOUBLE BCD S
(BIN) R (BCD)
R
(BIN) R+1 (BCD)
S: 1st source word
R: 1st result word
2'S COMPLE- NEG @ Calculates the 2's complement of a word of hexadecimal data.
MENT NEG(160)
2's complement
S (Complement + 1)
R (S) (R)
S: Source word
R: Result word

Appendices

DATA MLPX @ Reads the numerical value in the specified digit (or byte) in the
DECODER MLPX(076) source word, turns ON the corresponding bit in the result word (or
S 16-word range), and turns OFF all other bits in the result word (or
16-word range).
C
R 4-to-16 bit conversion
C
S: Source word
C: Control word l=1 (Convert 2 digits.)
R: 1st result word
n=2 (Start with second digit.)
4-to-16 bit decoding

(Bit m of R is turned ON.)
R
R+1
8-to-256 bit conversion

C
l=1 (Convert 2 bytes.)
n=1 (Start with first byte.)

(Bit m of R to R+15 is turned ON.)
R+1
R+14
R+15
R+16
R+17
Two 16-word ranges
are used when l
specifies 2 bytes.
R+30
R+31
C: Control Word
4-to-16 bit decoder

15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0
C 0 l n
Specifies the first digit/byte

to be converted
0 to 3 (digit 0 to 3)
Number of digits/bytes to be converted

0 to 3 (1 to 4 digits)
Always 0.
Conversion process
App
0: 4-to-16 bits (digit to word)
15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0
C 1 l n

to be converted
0 or 1 (byte 0 or 1)

0 or 1 (1 or 2 bytes)
Always 0.
Conversion process
1: 8-to-256 bits (byte to 16-word range)

Appendices

DATA DMPX @ FInds the location of the first or last ON bit within the source word
ENCODER DMPX(077) (or 16-word range), and writes that value to the specified digit (or
S byte) in the result word.
R 16-to-4 bit conversion C

FInds leftmost bit
C (Highest bit address)
S: 1st source word l=1 (Convert

R: Result word 2 words.)
C: Control word

(Location of leftmost Leftmost bit Rightmost bit
bit (m) is writ-ten to R.)
n=2 (Start with digit 2.)
256-to-8 bit conversion C
l=0 (Convert one 16-word range.)
Leftmost bit
Finds leftmost bit

(Highest bit address)

(The location of the leftmost bit in the
16-word range (m) is written to R.)
n=1 (Start with byte 1.)
C: Control Word
15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0
C 0 l n

to receive converted data.
0 to 3 (digit 0 to 3)

0 to 3 (1 to 4 digits)
Bit to encode
0: Leftmost bit (highest bit address)
1: Rightmost bit (lowest bit address)
Conversion process
0: 16-to-4 bits (word to digit)
15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0
C 1 l n

to receive converted data.
0 or 1 (byte 0 or 1)
0 or 1 (1 or 2bytes)
Bit to encode
0: Leftmost bit (highest bit address)
1: Rightmost bit (lowest bit address)
Conversion process
1: 256-to-8 bits (16-word range to byte)

Appendices

ASCII CON- ASC @ Converts 4-bit hexadecimal digits in the source word into their
VERT ASC(086) 8-bit ASCII equivalents.
S Di
Di First digit to convert
D
S: Source word
Di: Digit designator
Number of
digits (n+1)
Left (1) Right (0)
DI: Digit Designator
Digit number: 3 2 1 0
Specifies the first digit in S to be converted (0 to 3).
Number of digits to be converted (0 to 3)

0: 1 digit
1: 2 digits
2: 3 digits
3: 4 digits
First byte of D to be used.
0: Rightmost byte
1: Leftmost byte
Parity 0: None
1: Even
2: Odd
ASCII TO HEX HEX @ Converts up to 4 bytes of ASCII data in the source word to their
HEX(162) hexadecimal equivalents and writes these digits in the specified
S destination word.

Di C: 0021
D Di
First byte to convert
S: 1st source word
Di: Digit designator Left (1) Right (0)
D: Destination word
Number of digits (n+1)
First digit to write
DI: Digit Designator App

Digit number: 3 2 1 0
Specifies the first digit in D to receive converted

data (0 to 3).
Number of bytes to be converted (0 to 3)
0: 1 digit
1: 2 digits
2: 3 digits
3: 4 digits
First byte of S to be converted.

0: Rightmost byte
1: Leftmost byte
Parity 0: None
1: Even
2: Odd

Appendices
A-1-11 Logic Instructions

LOGICAL AND ANDW @ Takes the logical AND of corresponding bits in single words of
ANDW(034) word data and/or constants.
I1 I1. I2 R
I2
I1 I2 R
R 1 1 1
I1: Input 1
I2: Input 2
1 0 0
R: Result word 0 1 0
0 0 0
DOUBLE ANDL @ Takes the logical AND of corresponding bits in double words of
ANDL(610) word data and/or constants.
LOGICAL AND
I1
(I1, I1+1). (I2, I2+1) (R, R+1)
I2
I1, I1+1 I2, I2+1 R, R+1
R
1 1 1
I1: Input 1
I2: Input 2 1 0 0
R: Result word
0 1 0
0 0 0
LOGICAL OR ORW @ Takes the logical OR of corresponding bits in single words of word
ORW(035) data and/or constants.
I1
I1 + I2 R
I2
I1 I2 R
R
1 1 1
I1: Input 1
I2: Input 2 1 0 1
R: Result word
0 1 1
0 0 0
DOUBLE ORWL @ Takes the logical OR of corresponding bits in double words of

ORWL(611) word data and/or constants.
LOGICAL OR
I1
(I1, I1+1) + (I2, I2+1) (R, R+1)
I2
I1, I1+1 I2, I2+1 R, R+1
R
1 1 1
I1: Input 1
I2: Input 2 1 0 1
0 0 0
EXCLUSIVE XORW @ Takes the logical exclusive OR of corresponding bits in single

OR XORW(036) words of word data and/or constants.
I1 I1. I2 + I1.I2 R
I2
I1 I2 R
R 1 1 0
I1: Input 1
I2: Input 2
1 0 1
0 0 0
DOUBLE XORL @ Takes the logical exclusive OR of corresponding bits in double

EXCLUSIVE XORL(612) words of word data and/or constants.
OR I1 (I1, I1+1). (I2, I2+1) + (I1, I1+1). (I2, I2+1) (R, R+1)
I2
I1, I1+1 I2, I2+1 R, R+1
R
1 1 0
I1: Input 1
I2: Input 2
1 0 1
0 0 0

Appendices

COMPLE- COM @ Turns OFF all ON bits and turns ON all OFF bits in Wd.
MENT COM(029)
Wd Wd Wd: 1 0 and 0 1
Wd: Word
DOUBLE COML @ Turns OFF all ON bits and turns ON all OFF bits in Wd and Wd+1.
COMPLE- COML(614)
MENT Wd (Wd+1, Wd) (Wd+1, Wd)
Wd: Word
A-1-12 Special Math Instructions

ARITHMETIC APR @ Calculates the sine, cosine, or a linear extrapolation of the source
PROCESS APR(069) data.
C The linear extrapolation function allows any relationship between
S X and Y to be approximated with line segments.
R
C: Control word
S: Source data
R: Result word
BIT COUNTER BCNT @ Counts the total number of ON bits in the specified word(s).
BCNT(067)
N N words
S Counts the number of
to ON bits.
R
S+(N 1) Binary
result
N: Number of words

S: 1st source word
R: Result word R
N: Number of words
The number of words must be 0001 to FFFF (1 to 65,535 words).
A-1-13 Floating-point Math Instructions

App
FLOATING TO FIX @ Converts a 32-bit floating-point value to 16-bit signed binary data
16-BIT FIX(450) and places the result in the specified result word.
S Floating-point data
S+1 S (32 bits)
R A-1-12 Special Math Instructions
S: 1st source word

R: Result word Signed binary data
R (16 bits)
FLOATING TO FIXL @ Converts a 32-bit floating-point value to 32-bit signed binary data
32-BIT FIXL(451) and places the result in the specified result words.
S Floating-point data
S+1 S (32 bits)
R
S: 1st source word
R: 1st result word Signed binary data
R+1 R (32 bits)
16-BIT TO FLT @ Converts a 16-bit signed binary value to 32-bit floating-point data
FLOATING FLT(452) and places the result in the specified result words.
S Signed binary data
S (16 bits)
R
S: Source word
R: 1st result word Floating-point data
R+1 R (32 bits)

Appendices

32-BIT TO FLTL @ Converts a 32-bit signed binary value to 32-bit floating-point data
FLOATING FLTL(453) and places the result in the specified result words.
S Signed binary data
S+1 S (32 bits)
R
S: 1st source word

R: 1st result word Floating-point data
R+1 R (32 bits)
FLOATING- +F @ Adds two 32-bit floating-point numbers and places the result in the
POINT ADD +F(454) specified result words.
Au Augend (floating-point
Au+1 Au data, 32 bits)
Ad
R Addend (floating-point
Au: 1st augend word

+ Ad+1 Ad data, 32 bits)
AD: 1st addend word

R: 1st result word Result (floating-point
R+1 R data, 32 bits)
FLOATING- F @ Subtracts one 32-bit floating-point number from another and

POINT F(455) places the result in the specified result words.
SUBTRACT Mi Minuend
Mi+1 Mi (floating-point data,
Su 32 bits)
R Subtrahend
Su+1 Su (floating-point
data, 32 bits)
Mi: 1st Minuend word
Su: 1st Subtrahend word
FLOATING- *F @ Multiplies two 32-bit floating-point numbers and places the result
POINT *F(456) in the specified result words.
MULTIPLY Md Multiplicand
Md+1 Md (floating-point
Mr data, 32 bits)
R
Mr+1 Mr
Multiplier
(floating-point data,
32 bits)
Md: 1st Multiplicand word
Mr: 1st Multiplier word
FLOATING- /F @ Divides one 32-bit floating-point number by another and places

POINT DIVIDE /F(457) the result in the specified result words.
Dd Dividend
Dd+1 Dd (floating-point data,
Dr 32 bits)
R Divisor
Dr+1 Dr (floating-point data,
32 bits)
Dd: 1st Dividend word
Dr: 1st Divisor word
R: 1st result word Result
R+1 R (floating-point data,
32 bits)

Appendices

FLOATING LD, AND, or OR --- Compares the specified single-precision data (32 bits) or con-
Using LD:
SYMBOL + stants and creates an ON execution condition if the comparison
COMPARISON Symbol, option result is true.
=F, <>F, <F,
<=F, >F, or >=F S1 LD connection ON execution condition when
S2 comparison result is true.
<F
Using AND: S1
Symbol, option S2
S1 ON execution condition when

AND connection comparison result is true.
S2
Using OR: <F

S1
Symbol, option
S2
S1
S2 OR connection

<F
S1
ON execution condition when
S2
comparison result is true.
FLOATING- FSTR @ Converts the specified single-precision floating-point data (32-bit

POINT TO FSTR(448) decimal-point or exponential format) to text string data (ASCII) and
ASCII S outputs the result to the destination word.
C: First Control Word
C
D 0 hex: Decimal format

1 hex: Scientific notation
Total characters
S: 1st source word
C: Control word Data format 2 to 18 hex (2 to 24 characters, see note)
D: Destination word
Fractional digits 0 to 7 hex (see note)
Note There are limits on the total number of characters and the
number of fractional digits.
ASCII TO FVAL @ Converts the specified text string (ASCII) representation of sin-
FLOATING- FVAL(449) gle-precision floating-point data (decimal-point or exponential for-
POINT S mat) to 32-bit single-precision floating-point data and outputs the
result to the destination words.
D
App
S: Source word
A-1-13 Floating-point Math Instructions

Appendices
A-1-14 Table Data Processing Instructions

SWAP BYTES SWAP @ Switches the leftmost and rightmost bytes in all of the words in the
SWAP(637) range.
N Byte position is swapped.
R1
N: Number of words
R1: 1st word in range R1
FRAME FCS @ Calculates the FCS value for the specified range and outputs the
CHECKSUM FCS(180) result in ASCII.
C
R1 R1
D W (Table length)
C: First control word

R1: First word in range
D: First destination word ASCII conversion
Calculation
FCS value
C: First control word

15 0
C
W: Number of words/bytes in range

&1 to &65535 (decimal) or
#0001 to #FFFF (hex)
15 14 13 12 11 0
C+1 00 0000 0000 0000
0
Starting byte (Valid only when bit 13 is 1.)
0: Leftmost byte
1: Rightmost byte
Calculation units
0: Words
1: Bytes
0

Appendices
A-1-15 Data Control Instructions

PID CON- PIDAT --- Executes PID control according to the specified parameters. The
TROL WITH PIDAT(191) PID constants can be auto-tuned with PIDAT(191).
AUTOTUNING S C: First Parameter Word
C 15 0
D C Set value (SV)
C+1 Proportional band (P)
S: Input word C+2 Integral constant (Tik)
C: 1st parameter word
D: Output word C+3 Derivative constant (Tdk)
C+4 Sampling period()
15 8 7 4 3 2 1 0
C+5 0
Forward/reverse
designation
PID constant update
timing designation
Manipulated variable
output setting
2-PID parameter()
15 14 13 12 11 8 7 4 3 0
C+6 0 0 0
Output range
Integral and derivative unit
Input range
Manipulated variable output limit control
15 0

C+7 Manipulated variable output lower limit
C+8 Manipulated variable output upper limit
15 14 13 12 0
C+9 0 0 0
AT Calculation Gain
AT Command Bit
15 0
C+10 Limit-cycle Hysteresis
App
C+11
Work area
(30 words: Cannot be used by user.)
C+40 A-1-15 Data Control Instructions

Appendices

TIME-PRO- TPO --- Inputs the duty ratio or manipulated variable from the specified
PORTIONAL TPO (685) word, converts the duty ratio to a time-proportional output based
OUTPUT S on the specified parameters, and outputs the result from the spec-
ified output.
C
C: First Parameter Word
R
Bits 04 to 07 of C specify the input type, i.e., whether the input
S: Input word word contains an input duty ratio or manipulated variable. (Set
C: 1st parameter word
these bits to 0 hex to specify a input duty ratio or to 1 hex to
R: Pulse output bit
specify a manipulated variable.)
The following diagram shows the locations of the parameter
data.
15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0
C
Manipulated variable
range
Input type
Input read timing
Output limit function
15 0
C+1 Control period
C+2 Output lower limit
C+3 Output upper limit
C+4
Work area
C+5 (3 words, cannot be used by user)
C+6
R: Pulse Output Bit

Specifies the destination output bit for the pulse output.
Normally, specify an output bit allocated to a Transistor Output
Unit and connect a solid state relay to the Transistor Output
Unit.
SCALING SCL @ Converts unsigned binary data into unsigned BCD data according
SCL(194) to the specified linear function.
S Scaling is performed
R (unsigned BCD) according to the linear
P1 function defined by points
A and B.
R
Point B P (BCD)
S: Source word Converted
P1 + 1 (BIN) value
P1: 1st parameter word Point A
R: Result word P1 + 2 (BCD)
Converted
P1 + 3 (BIN)
value
S (unsigned binary)
P1: First Parameter Word
15 0
P1
Scaled value for point A (Ar)

0000 to 9999 (4-digit BCD)
15 0
P1+1
Unscaled value for point A (As)

0000 to FFFF (binary)
15 0
P1+2
Scaled value for point B (Br)

0000 to 9999 (4-digit BCD)
15 0
P1+3
Unscaled value for point B (Bs)

0000 to FFFF (binary)

Appendices

SCALING 2 SCL2 @ Converts signed binary data into signed BCD data according to
SCL2(486) the specified linear function. An offset can be input in defining the
S linear function.
P1 Positive Offset Negative Offset

R (signed BCD) R (signed BCD)
R
S: Source word
P1: 1st parameter word
Y
R: Result word
Y
Offset X
X
S (signed binary) S (signed

Offset binary)
Offset of 0000
P1 Offset (Signed binary) R (signed BCD)
P1 + 1 Y (Signed binary)
P1 + 2 X (Signed BCD)
Y
Offset = 0000 hex
X
S (signed
binary)
15 0
P1
Offset of linear function

8000 to 7FFF (signed binary)
15 0

P1+1

15 0
P1+2
0000 to 9999 (BCD)
Note P1 to P1+2 must be in the same area.
App
A-1-15 Data Control Instructions

Appendices

SCALING 3 SCL3 @ Converts signed BCD data into signed binary data according to
SCL3(487) the specified linear function. An offset can be input in defining the
S linear function.
P1 Positive Offset Negative Offset
R R (signed binary) R (signed binary)

Max conversion
S: Source word Max.
P1: 1st parameter word conver-
R: Result word sion
Y Y
X X
Offset Offset S (signed BCD)
Min.
conver- S (signed BCD)
sion Min. conversion
Offset of 0000
R (signed binary)
Max.
conver-
sion
Y
X
S (signed BCD)
Min. conversion
15 0
P1
Offset of linear function

15 0
P1+1
X
0001 to 9999 (BCD)
15 0
P1+2
Y
15 0
P1+3
Maximum conversion
15 0
P1+4
Minimum conversion
Note P1 to P1+4 must be in the same area.

Appendices

AVERAGE AVG --- Calculates the average value of an input word for the specified
AVG(195) number of cycles.
S S: Source word
N
R
S: Source word
N: Number of cycles N: Number of cycles
R: Result word
R+1 Pointer
Average Valid Flag
Average
R+2
R+3
N values
R+N+1
A-1-16 Subroutine Instructions

SUBROUTINE SBS @ Calls the subroutine with the specified subroutine number and
CALL SBS(091) executes that program.
N
Execution condition ON
N: Subroutine number

Main program
Subroutine
program
(SBN(092) to
RET(093))
App
Program end
SUBROUTINE SBN --- Indicates the beginning of the subroutine program with the speci-
A-1-16 Subroutine Instructions
ENTRY SBN(092) fied subroutine number.

N
N: Subroutine number
or
Subroutine region
SUBROUTINE RET --- Indicates the end of a subroutine program.

RETURN RET(093)

Appendices
A-1-17 Interrupt Control Instructions

SET INTER- MSKS @ Sets up interrupt processing for I/O interrupts or scheduled inter-
RUPT MASK MSKS(690) rupts. Both I/O interrupt tasks and scheduled interrupt tasks are
N masked (disabled) when the PC is first turned on. MSKS(690) can
be used to unmask or mask I/O interrupts and set the time inter-
C vals for scheduled interrupts.
N: Interrupt number
C: Control data
I/O
interrupt
Mask (1) or unmask (0)
interrupt inputs 2 to 7.
Time interval
Scheduled
interrupt Set scheduled interrupt
time interval.
CLEAR CLI @ Clears or retains recorded interrupt inputs for I/O interrupts or sets
INTERRUPT
CLI(691) the time to the first scheduled interrupt for scheduled interrupts.
N N = 102 to 107
C
Interrupt Interrupt
input n input n
N: Interrupt number
C: Control data
Internal Internal
status status
Recorded interrupt cleared Recorded interrupt retained
N=4
MSKS(690)
Execution of scheduled
interrupt task.
Time to first
scheduled interrupt
DISABLE DI @ Disables execution of all interrupt tasks.

INTERRUPTS DI(693)
ENABLE EI --- Enables execution of all interrupt tasks that were disabled with
INTERRUPTS EI(694) DI(693).
DI
Disables execution of all

interrupt tasks.
EI
Enables execution of all

disabled interrupt tasks.

Appendices
A-1-18 High-speed Counter/Pulse Output Instructions

MODE CON- INI @ INI(880) can be used to execute the following operations
TROL INI(880)
To start or stop comparison of a high-speed counter's PV to the
P comparison table registered with CTBL(882).
C To change the PV of the high-speed counter.
NV To change the PV of the pulse output (origin fixed at 0).
P: Port specifier To stop pulse output.
C: Control data
NV: First word with new PV INI instruction executed
New origin Present origin

Pulse output
PV
Example: Setting the Present Position as the Origin
Execution condition
@INI
#0002 C2: Control data (example for changing PV)
D100 S:First word with new PV
15 0
D100 #0 0 0 0
D101 #0 0 0 0
P: Port Specifier
0000 hex Pulse output 0

0010 hex High-speed counter 0

1000 hex PWM(891) output 0
C: Control Data
0000 hex Starts comparison.

0001 hex Stops comparison.
App
0002 hex Changes the PV.
0003 hex Stops pulse output.
NV: First Word with New PV

A-1-18 High-speed Counter/Pulse Output
If C is 0002 hex (i.e., when changing a PV), NV and NV+1 con-

tain the new PV. Any values in NV and NV+1 are ignored when
C is not 0002 hex.
Instructions
15 0
NV Lower word of new PV
NV+1 Upper word of new PV
For Pulse Output or High-speed Counter Input:

0000 0000 to FFFF FFFF hex
For Interrupt Input in Counter Mode:

0000 0000 to 0000 FFFF hex

Appendices

HIGH-SPEED PRV @ Reads the High-speed counter PV and pulse output PV.
COUNTER PV PRV(881)
P: Port Specifier
READ P
C 0000 hex Pulse output 0
D 0001 hex Pulse output 1
P: Port specifier 0010 hex High-speed counter 0

C: Control data
D: First destination word
1000 hex PWM(891) output 0
C: Control Data
0000 hex Reads the PV.

0001 hex Reads status.
0002 hex Reads range comparison results.
P = 0000 or 0001: Reads the output fre-
quency of pulse output 0 or pulse output 1.
C = 0003 hex
P = 0010: Reads the frequency of
00 3 hex high-speed counter input 0.
C = 0013 hex: 10-ms sampling method
C = 0023 hex: 100-ms sampling method
C = 0033 hex: 1-s sampling method
D: First Destination Word
15 0
D Lower word of PV
D+1 Upper word of PV
2-word PV
Pulse output PV, high-speed counter input PV,
high-speed counter input frequency for high-speed counter input 0
15 0
D PV
1-word PV
Status, range comparison results

Appendices

REGISTER CTBL @ Registers a comparison table and performs comparisons for a PV
CTBL(882)
COMPARISON of high-speed counter 0 to 5. An interrupt task between 0 to 15 will
TABLE P be executed when an execution condition is turned ON.
C Rotary Encoder
TB Built-in input
P: Port specifier
C: Control data
TB: First comparison table word
Present value Present value matches set target value
Time
Interrupt task
Cyclic tasks
(ladder programs) Interrupt occurs Ladder diagram
END
END
I/O refresh
P: Port specifier


C: Control data
Registers a target value comparison table

0000 hex
and starts comparison.
Registers a range comparison table and
0001 hex
performs one comparison.
Registers a target value comparison table.
0002 hex
Comparison is started with INI(880).
Registers a range comparison table. Com-
0003 hex
parison is started with INI(880).
App
TB: First comparison table word
TB is the first word of the comparison table. The structure of the
comparison table depends on the type of comparison being per-
formed.
A-1-18 High-speed Counter/Pulse Output
For target value comparison, the length of the comparison table

is determined by the number of target values specified in TB.
The table can be between 4 and 19 words long, as shown
Instructions
below.
15 0
TB Number of target values 0001 to 6 hex (1 to 6 target values)
TB+1 Lower word of target value 1

TB+2 Upper word of target value 1
TB+3 Interrupt task number for target value 1
TB+16 Lower word of target value 6

TB+17 Upper word of target value 6
TB+18 Interrupt task number for target value 6
Interrupt Task Number

15 14 12 11 87 4 3 0
0 0 0 0

Direction 00 to 0F hex (0 to 15)
OFF: Incrementing,
ON: Decrementing

Appendices

REGISTER CTBL @ For range comparison, the comparison table always contains
CTBL(882)
COMPARISON six ranges. The table is 30 words long, as shown below. If it is
TABLE P not necessary to set six ranges, set the interrupt task number to
C FFFF hex for all unused ranges.
TB 15 0
TB Lower word of range 1 lower limit
P: Port specifier TB+1 Upper word of range 1 lower limit
C: Control data
TB: First comparison table word TB+2 Lower word of range 1 upper limit
TB+3 Upper word of range 1 upper limit
Range 1 interrupt task number
TB+25 Lower word of range 6 lower limit

TB+26 Upper word of range 6 lower limit
TB+27 Lower word of range 6 upper limit
TB+28 Upper word of range 6 upper limit
TB+29 Range 6 interrupt task number

0000 to 000F hex: Interrupt task number 0 to 15
AAAA hex: Do not execute interrupt task.
FFFF hex: Ignore the settings for this range.
Note Always set the upper limit greater than or equal to the lower
limit for any one range.
SPEED OUT- SPED @ Sets the output pulse frequency for a specific port and starts pulse
SPED(855)
PUT output without acceleration or deceleration.
P
Pulse frequency
M
F
P: Port specifier
M: Output mode
F: First pulse frequency word
Target frequency
Time
SPED(885) executed.
P: Port specifier

M: Output mode
15 12 11 87 4 3 0
M
Mode
0 hex: Continuous
1 hex: Independent
Direction
0 hex: CW
1 hex: CCW
Pulse output method
1 hex: Pulse + direction
Always 0 hex.
F: First pulse frequency word
15 0
F Lower word of target frequency 0 to 100000 Hz
(0000 0000 to 0001 86A0 hex)
F+1 Upper word of target frequency
The value of F and F+1 sets the pulse frequency in Hz.

Appendices

SET PULSES PULS @ Sets the number of output pulses.Actual output of the pulses is
PULS(886) started later in the program using SPED(885) or ACC(888) in
P independent mode.
T P: Port specifier
N
P: Port specifier
T: Pulse type 0001 hex Pulse output 1
N: Number of pulses
T: Pulse type
0000 hex Relative

0001 hex Absolute
N: Number of pulses
15 0
N Lower word with number of pulses
N+1 Upper word with number of pulses
Relative pulse output:

0 to 2, 147, 483, 647, (0000 0000 to 7FFF FFFF hex)
Absolute pulse output:
-2, 147, 483, 648 to 2, 147, 483, 647, (8000 0000 to 7FFF FFFF hex)
PULSE OUT- PLS2 @ Performs trapezoidal positioning control as the following time
PLS2(887)
PUT chart. Sets the target frequency, starting frequency, acceleration
P and deceleration rate and direction.
M
Target frequency Acceleration
S Deceleration rate
rate
F
P: Port specifier Specified number
M: Output mode of pulses
Starting frequency
S: First word of settings table
F: First word of starting frequency
P: Port Specifier

M: Output Mode
15 12 11 87 4 3 0
M
Relative/absolute specifier
0 hex: Relative pulses
1 hex: Absolute pulses
Direction
0 hex: CW
1 hex: CCW
Pulse output method
App
Always 0 hex.
S: First Word of Settings Table A-1-18 High-speed Counter/Pulse Output

15 0
S1 Acceleration rate
1 to 65535 Hz (#0001 to FFFF)
Instructions
S1+1 Deceleration rate

Specify the increase or decrease in the
frequency per pulse control period (4 ms).
S1+2 Lower word with target frequency 1 to 100,000 Hz

(0000 0000 to 0001 86A0 hex)
S1+3 Upperword with target frequency
Specify the frequency after acceleration/deceleration in Hz.
S1+4 Lower word with number of output pulses

S1+5 Upper word with number of output pulses
Relative pulse output: 0 to 2, 147, 483, 647

(0000 0000 to 7FFF FFFF hex)
Absolute pulse output: -2, 147, 483, 648 to 2, 147, 483, 647
(8000 0000 to 7FFF FFFF hex)

Appendices

PULSE OUT- PLS2 @ F: First Word of Starting Frequency
PLS2(887)
PUT The starting frequency is given in F and F+1.
P
15 0
M
F Lower word with starting frequency 0 to 100000 Hz
S (0000 0000 to 0001 86A0 hex)
F+1 Upper word with starting frequency
F
Specify the starting frequency in Hz.
P: Port specifier
M: Output mode
F: First word of starting frequency
ACCELERA- ACC @ Outputs pulses to the specified output port at the specified fre-
ACC(888)
TION CON- quency using the specified acceleration and deceleration rate.
TROL P
M Acceleration
Target frequency and
S deceleration
rate
P: Port specifier
M: Output mode
P: Port Specifier

M: Output Mode
15 12 11 87 4 3 0
M
Mode
0 hex: Continuous mode
1 hex: Independent mode
Direction
0 hex: CW
1 hex: CCW
Pulse output method
Always 0 hex.
S: First Word of Settings Table
15 0
S Acceleration/deceleration rate 1 to 65535 Hz (#0001 to FFFF)
Specify the increase or decrease in the
frequency per pulse control period (4 ms).
S+1 Lower word with target frequency 0 to 100000 Hz

(0000 0000 to 0001 86A0 hex)
S+2 Upper word with target frequency
Specify the frequency after acceleration or deceleration in Hz.

Appendices

ORIGIN ORG @ Performs an origin search or origin return operation.
SEARCH ORG(889)
1
Origin Proximity
P Input Signal 0
C Origin Input
Signal
1
0
Pulse frequency
Origin search high speed Origin search deceleration rate
P: Port specifier
C: Control data Origin search
acceleration rate
Deceleration point Origin search low speed
Origin search
initial speed
Time
Start Decelerate from high to low speed Stop
Execution of ORG Indicated by the Origin Indicated by the

Proximity Input Signal Origin Input Signal
(Example for reversal mode 1

and method 0 (described later))
The following parameters must be set in the PLC Setup before

ORG(889) can be executed.
Origin search Origin return

Origin Search Function Origin Search/Return Initial
Enable/Disable Speed
Origin Search Operating Origin Return Target
Mode Speed
Origin Search Operation Origin Return Acceleration
Setting Rate
Origin Detection Method Origin Return Deceleration
Origin Search Direction Rate
Setting
Origin Search/Return Initial
Speed
Origin Search High Speed
Origin Search Proximity
Speed

Origin Compensation
Origin Search Accelera-
tion Rate
Origin Search Deceleration
Rate
Limit Input Signal Type
Origin Proximity Input Sig-
nal Type
Origin Input Signal Type
Positioning Monitor Time
App
P: Port Specifier

0001 hex Pulse output 1 A-1-18 High-speed Counter/Pulse Output
C: Control Data
15 12 11 87 4 3 0
Instructions
Always 0 hex.
Always 0 hex.
Pulse output method

Mode
0 hex: Origin search
1 hex: Origin return

Appendices

PULSE WITH PWM @ Outputs pulses with the specified duty factor from the specified
VARIABLE PWM port.
DUTY FACTOR P
F
D
P: Port specifier
F: Frequency
D: Duty factor
Built-in output
PWM output
100% Period is determined

by frequency
15%
Duty factor:15%
50%
Duty factor:50%
P: Port Specifier
PWM output 0 (duty factor: in increments of

1000 hex
1%, frequency 0.1 Hz)
PWM output 0 (duty factor: in increments of
1100 hex
1%, frequency 1 Hz)
F: Frequency
F specifies the frequency of the PWM output between 2.0 and
6,553.5 Hz (0.1 Hz units, 0014 to FFFF hex), or between 2 and
32,000 Hz (2 Hz units, 0002 to 7D00 hex).
D: Duty Factor
0.0% to 100.0% (0.1% units, 0000 to 03E8 hex)
D specifies the duty factor of the PWM output, i.e., the percent-
age of time that the output is ON.
A-1-19 Step Instructions

STEP DEFINE STEP --- When defining the beginning of a STEP(008) functions in following 2 ways, depending on its position
step, a control bit is specified as and whether or not a control bit has been specified.
follows: (1)Starts a specific step.
(2)Ends the step programming area (i.e., step execution).
STEP(008)
B
B: Bit
When defining the end of a step, a

control bit is not specified as fol-
lows:
STEP(008)
STEP START SNXT --- SNXT(009) is used in the following three ways:
SNXT(009)
(1)To start step programming execution.
B (2)To proceed to the next step control bit.
B: Bit (3)To end step programming execution.

Appendices
A-1-20 Basic I/O Unit Instructions

I/O REFRESH IORF @ Refreshes the specified I/O words.
IORF(097)
CP1W Expansion Units,
St I/O bit area CP1W Expansion I/O Units
E St
I/O refreshing
St: Starting word
E: End word
E
7-SEGMENT SDEC @ Converts the hexadecimal contents of the designated digit(s) into
DECODER SDEC(078) 8-bit, 7-segment display code and places it into the upper or lower
S 8-bits of the specified destination words.
Di
Di
D Number of digits
First digit to convert
S: Source word
Rightmost 8 bits (0)
7-segment
15 12 11 87 43 0
Di 0 1/0 m n
First digit of S to convert (0 to 3)

0: Digit 0 (bits 0 to 3 of S)
Number of digits to convert
0 to 3: 1 to 4 digits
First half of D to receive converted data
0: Rightmost 8 bits (1st half)
1: Leftmost 8 bits (2nd half)
Not used; set to 0.
App

Appendices

DIGITAL DSW --- Reads the value set on an external digital switch (or thumbwheel
SWITCH DSW (210) switch) connected to an Input Unit or Output Unit and stores the
INPUT I 4-digit or 8-digit BCD data in the specified words.
O I: Input Word (Data Line D0 to D3 Inputs)

Specify the input word allocated to the Input Unit and connect
D
the digital switchs D0 to D3 data lines to the Input Unit as shown
C1 in the following diagram.
C2 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
I: Data input word (D0 to D3) I
O: Output word
D: 1st result word D3 D0
C1: Number of digits D2 D1
Leftmost 4 digits D1 D2 Rightmost
C2: System word
D0 D3 4 digits
O: Output Word (CS/RD Control Signal Outputs)

Specify the output word allocated to the Output Unit and con-
nect the digital switchs control signals (CS and RD signals) to
the Output Unit as shown in the following diagram.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
O
CS0
CS1
One Round Flag CS signals
CS2
RD0 Read signal CS3
C1: Number of Digits

Specifies the number of digits that will be read from the exter-
nal digital switch. Set C1 to 0000 hex to read 4 digits or 0001
hex to read 8 digits.
C2: System Word
Specifies a work word used by the instruction. This word can-
not be used in any other application.
15 0
C2
System word
(Cannot be accessed by the user.)

Appendices

MATRIX INPUT MTR --- Inputs up to 64 signals from an 8 8 matrix connected to an Input
MTR (213) Unit and Output Unit (using 8 input points and 8 output points) and
I stores that 64-bit data in the 4 destination words.
I: Input Word
O
Specify the input word allocated to the Input Unit and connect
D
the 8 input signal lines to the Input Unit as shown in the following
C diagram.
I: Data input word 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
O: Output word
I
C: System word 0
1
2
3
4 Bits 00 to 07
5 correspond to
6 Input Unit inputs
7 0 to 7.
O: Output Word (Selection Signal Outputs)

nect the 8 selection signals to the Output Unit as shown in the
following diagram.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
O
0
1
2
3
4 Bits 00 to 07
5 correspond
6 to Output Unit
7 outputs 0 to 7.
C: System Word

15 0
C
System word
App

Appendices

7-SEGMENT 7SEG --- Converts the source data (either 4-digit or 8-digit BCD) to 7-seg-
DISPLAY OUT- 7SEG (214) ment display data, and outputs that data to the specified output
PUT S word.
O: Output Word (Data and Latch Outputs)
O
C
nect the 7-segment display to the Output Unit as shown in the
D following diagram.
Converting 4 digits
S: 1st source word
O: Output word 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
C: Control data
D: System word O
One Round Flag

LE3 D0
LE2 D1
Latch outputs 4-digit data
LE1 D2
LE0 D3 output
Converting 8 digits
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
O
One Round
Flag LE3 D0
LE2 D1
Latch Leftmost
LE1 D2
outputs 4-digit data
LE0 D3
output
D0
D1
D2 Rightmost 4-digit
D3 data output
C: Control Data
The value of C indicates the number of digits of source data
and the logic for the Input and Output Units, as shown in the fol-
lowing table. (The logic refers to the transistor outputs NPN or
PNP logic.)
Displays data
Source data Displays latch input logic C
input logic
4 digits (S) Same as Out- Same as Output Unit 0000
put Unit
Different from Output Unit 0001
Different from Same as Output Unit 0002
Output Unit
8 digits (S, S+1) Same as Out- Same as Output Unit 0004
put Unit
Different from Same as Output Unit 0006
Output Unit
D: System Word
15 0
D
System word

Appendices
A-1-21 Serial Communications Instructions

TRANSMIT TXD @ Outputs the specified number of bytes of data without conversion
TXD(236) from the RS-232C port built into the CPU Unit or the serial Option
Board according to the start code and end code specified for
S
no-protocol mode in the PLC Setup.
C C: Control word
N
15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0
C
S: 1st source word
C: Control word
N: Number of bytes Byte order
0000 to 0100 hex 0: Most significant bytes first
(0 to 256 decimal) 1: Least significant bytes first
RS and ER signal control
0: No RS and ER signal control
1: RS signal control
Always 0
2: ER signal control
3: RS and ER signal control
Serial port specifier
1: CPU Units RS-232C port
2: Serial Option Board port
RECEIVE RXD @ Reads the specified number of bytes of data starting with the
RXD(235) specified first word from the RS-232C port built into the CPU Unit
or the serial Option Board according to the start code and end
D
code specified for no-protocol mode in the PLC Setup.
C C: Control Word
N
15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0
D: 1st destination word C
C: Control word
N: Number of bytes to store Byte order
0000 to 0100 hex 0 Hex: Most significant byte
(0 to 256 decimal) to least significant byte
1 Hex: Lest significant byte
Always 0 to most significant byte
CS and DR signal monitoring

0: No CS and DR signal monitoring
1: CS signal monitoring
2: DR signal monitoring
3: CS and DR signal monitoring.
Serial port specifier
1: CPU Units RS-232C port
2: Serial Option Board port
App
A-1-21 Serial Communications Instructions

Appendices
A-1-22 Clock Instructions

CALENDAR CADD @ Adds time to the calendar data in the specified words.
ADD CADD(730)
15 8 7 0
C C Seconds
Minutes
T C+1 Day Hour
R C+2 Year Month
C: 1st calendar word +

T: 1st time word 15 8 7 0
R: 1st result word T Minutes Seconds
T+1 Hours
15 8 7 0
R Minutes Seconds
R+1 Day Hour
R+2 Year Month
CALENDAR CSUB @ Subtracts time from the calendar data in the specified words.
SUBTRACT CSUB(731)
15 8 7 0
C C Seconds
Minutes
T C+1 Day Hour
R C+2 Year Month

C: 1st calendar word
T: 1st time word 15 8 7 0
R: 1st result word T Minutes Seconds
T+1 Hours
15 8 7 0
R Minutes Seconds
R+1 Day Hour
R+2 Year Month
CLOCK DATE @ Changes the internal clock setting to the setting in the specified
DATE(735) source words.
ADJUSTMENT
S
CPU Unit
S: 1st source word
Internal clock
Minutes Seconds
New
setting Day Hour
Year Month
00 Day of week

Appendices
A-1-23 Failure Diagnosis Instructions

FAILURE FAL @ Generates or clears user-defined non-fatal errors. Non-fatal errors
ALARM FAL(006) do not stop PC operation.
N Also generates non-fatal errors with the system.
S FAL Error Flag ON
Corresponding Executed
N: FAL number FAL Execution of FAL Number Flag ON
S: 1st message word N FAL(006) Error code written to A400
or error generates a Error code and time
0000
code to generate non-fatal error written to Error Log Area
with FAL ERR Indicator flashes
number N.
SEVERE FALS --- Generates user-defined fatal errors.

FALS(007)
FAILURE Fatal errors stop PC operation.
ALARM N Also generates fatal errors with the system.
S
FALS Error Flag ON
Error code written to A400
N: FALS number Execution of Error code and time/date
S: 1st message word FALS(007) written to Error Log Area
or error code to generate generates a
fatal error ERR Indicator lit
with FALS
number N.
A-1-24 Other Instructions

SET CARRY STC @ Sets the Carry Flag (CY).
STC(040)
CLEAR CLC @ Turns OFF the Carry Flag (CY).

CARRY CLC(041)
EXTEND WDT @ Extends the maximum cycle time, but only for the cycle in which
WDT(094) this instruction is executed.
MAXIMUM
CYCLE TIME T
T: Timer setting
App
A-1-23 Failure Diagnosis Instructions

Appendices
A-2 Auxiliary Area Allocations by

Address
The following table lists the data provided in the Auxiliary Area in order of the addresses of the data.
A-2-1 Read-only Words

Address Status
Related
after Status at Write
Name Function Settings flags,
Words Bits mode startup timing
settings
change
A0 10-ms Incrementing This word contains the system timer Retained Cleared Every 10 ms
Free Running Timer used after the power is turned ON. after power is
A value of 0000 hex is set when the turned ON
power is turned ON and this value is
automatically incremented by 1 every
10 ms. The value returns to 0000 hex
after reaching FFFF hex (655,350 ms),
and then continues to be automatically
incremented by 1 every 10 ms.
Note The timer will continue to be

incremented when the operating
mode is switched to RUN mode.
Example: The interval can be counted
between processing A and processing
B without requiring timer instructions.
This is achieved by calculating the dif-
ference between the value in A0 for
processing A and the value in A0 for
processing B. The interval is counted in
10 ms units.
A1 100-ms Incrementing This word contains the system timer Retained Cleared Every 100 ms
Free Running Timer used after the power is turned ON. after power is
A value of 0000 hex is set when the turned ON
power is turned ON and this value is
automatically incremented by 1 every
100 ms. The value returns to 0000 hex
after reaching FFFF hex (6,553,500
ms), and then continues to be automat-
ically incremented by 1 every
100 ms.
Note The timer will continue to be

incremented when the operating
mode is switched to RUN mode.
Example: The interval can be counted
between processing A and processing
B without requiring timer instructions.
This is achieved by calculating the dif-
ference between the value in A0 for
processing A and the value in A0 for
processing B. The interval is counted in
100 ms units.
A99 00 UM Read Protection Indicates whether all of the ladder pro- OFF: UM not Retained Retained When protec-
Status grams in the PLC are read-protected. read-protected tion is set or
ON: UM cleared
read-protected.

Appendices
Address Status
Related
settings
change
A100 to Error Log Area When an error has occurred, the error Error code Retained Retained Refreshed A500.14
A199 code, error contents, and error's time Error contents: when error A300
and date are stored in the Error Log Address of Aux. Area occurs. A400
Area. Information on the 20 most word with details or
recent errors can be stored. 0000 hex if there is
Each error record occupies 5 words; no related word.
the function of these 5 words is as fol- Seconds: 00 to 59,
lows: BCD
First word: Error code (bits 0 to 15)
First word + 1: Error contents (bits 0 to Minutes: 00 to 59,
15) BCD
First word + 2: Minutes (upper byte), Hours: 00 to 23, BCD
Seconds (lower byte) Day of month: 01 to
First word + 3: Day of month (upper 31, BCD
byte), Hours (lower byte)
First word + 4: Year (upper byte), Month: 01 to 12, BCD
Month (lower byte) Year: 00 to 99,
BCD
Note 1 The data will be unstable if the
capacitor becomes discharged.
2 Errors generated by FAL(006)
and FALS(007) will also be
stored in this Error Log.
3 The Error Log Area can be
reset from the CX-Program-
mer.
4 If the Error Log Area is full (20
records) and another error
A-2 Auxiliary Area Allocations by Address

occurs, the oldest record in
A100 to A104 will be cleared,
the other 19 records are
shifted down, and the new
record is stored in A195 to
A199.
5 In an E-type CPU Unit, the
data will be for 1:01.01 on Sun-
day January 1, 2001.
A200 11 First Cycle Flag ON for one cycle after PLC operation ON for the first cycle ON Cleared
begins (after the mode is switched from
PROGRAM to RUN or MONITOR, for
example).
12 Step Flag ON for one cycle when step execution ON for the first cycle Cleared Cleared
is started with STEP. This flag can be after execution of
used for initialization processing at the STEP.
beginning of a step.
14 Task Started Flag When a task switches from WAIT or INI ON: ON for first cycle Cleared Cleared
App
to RUN status, this flag will be turned (including transitions
ON within the task for one cycle only. from WAIT and IN)
Note The only difference between this OFF: Other

flag and A200.15 is that this flag
also turns ON when the task
switches from WAIT to RUN sta-
tus.
15 First Task Startup Flag ON when a task is executed for the first ON: First execution Cleared Cleared
time. This flag can be used to check OFF: Not executable
whether the current task is being exe- or not being exe-
cuted for the first time so that initializa- cuted for the first
tion processing can be performed if time.
necessary.
A262 Maximum Cycle Time These words contain the maximum 0 to FFFFFFFF:
and cycle time since the start of PLC opera- 0 to 429,496,729.5 ms
A263 tion. The cycle time is recorded in (0.1-ms units)
32-bit binary. The upper digits are in
A263 and the lower digits are in A262.
A264 Present Cycle Time These words contain the present cycle 0 to FFFFFFFF:
and time. The cycle time is recorded in 0 to 429,496,729.5 ms
A265 32-bit binary. The upper digits are in (0.1-ms units)
A265 and the lower digits are in A264.

Appendices
Address Status
Related
settings
change
A270 High-speed Counter 0 Contains the PV of high-speed counter Cleared Refreshed
and PV 0. A271 contains the upper 4 digits and each cycle
A271 A270 contains the lower 4 digits. during the
Cleared when operation starts. overseeing
processes.
Refreshed
when PRV
instruction is
executed to
read the PV.
A272 High-speed Counter 1 Contains the PV of high-speed counter Cleared Refreshed
and PV 1. A273 contains the upper 4 digits and each cycle
A273 A272 contains the lower 4 digits. during the
Cleared when operation starts. overseeing
processes.
Refreshed
when PRV
instruction is
executed to
read the PV.
A274 00 High-speed Counter 0 These flags indicate whether the PV is Cleared Refreshed
Range 1 Comparison within the specified ranges when each cycle
Condition Met Flag high-speed counter 0 is being operated during the
in range-comparison mode. overseeing
01 High-speed Counter 0 processes.
Cleared when operation starts.
Range 2 Comparison Refreshed
Cleared when range comparison
Condition Met Flag when PRV
table is registered.
02 High-speed Counter 0 instruction is
OFF: PV not in range executed to
Range 3 Comparison ON: PV in range read the
Condition Met Flag results of
03 High-speed Counter 0 range com-
parison.
Range 4 Comparison
Condition Met Flag
04 High-speed Counter 0
Range 5 Comparison
Condition Met Flag
Range 6 Comparison
Condition Met Flag
08 High-speed Counter 0 This flag indicates whether a compari- Cleared Refreshed
Comparison son operation is being executed for when compari-
In-progress Flag high-speed counter 0. son operation
Cleared when operation starts. starts or stops.
OFF: Stopped.
ON: Being executed.
09 High-speed Counter 0 This flag indicates when an overflow or Cleared Refreshed
Overflow/Underflow underflow has occurred in the when an over-
Flag high-speed counter 0 PV. (Used with flow or under-
the linear mode counting range only.) flow occurs.
Cleared when PV is changed.
OFF: Normal
ON: Overflow or underflow
10 High-speed Counter 0 This flag indicates whether the Cleared Setting used
Count Direction high-speed counter 0 is currently being for high-speed
incremented or decremented. The counter, valid
counter PV for the current cycle is com- during counter
pared with the PV in last cycle to deter- operation.
mine the direction.
OFF: Decrementing
ON: Incrementing

Appendices
Address Status
Related
settings
change
Condition Met Flag high-speed counter 1 is being operated during over-
in range-comparison mode for upper seeing pro-
01 High-speed Counter 1 and lower limits. cess.
Range 2 Comparison Cleared when operation starts. Refreshed
02 High-speed Counter 1 table is registered. instruction is
executed to
Range 3 Comparison OFF: PV not in range read the
Condition Met Flag ON: PV in range comparison
03 High-speed Counter 1 results for
the corre-
Range 4 Comparison
sponding
Condition Met Flag
counter.
Range 5 Comparison
Condition Met Flag
Range 6 Comparison
Condition Met Flag

OFF: Stopped.
ON: Being executed
Cleared when the PV is changed.
OFF: Normal
mine the direction.
App
OFF: Decrementing
ON: Incrementing
A276 Pulse Out- Lower four Contain the number of pulses output Cleared Refreshed
put 0 PV digits from the corresponding pulse output each cycle
port. during the
A277 Upper four
PV range: 8000 0000 to 7FFF FFFF overseeing
digits
hex processes.
A278 Pulse Out- Lower four Refreshed
put 1 PV digits (-2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647)
when the INI
A279 Upper four When pulses are being output in the instruction is
digits CW direction, the PV is incremented by executed
1 for each pulse. (PV
When pulses are being output in the change).
CCW direction, the PV is decremented
by 1 for each pulse.
PV after overflow: 7FFF FFFF hex
PV after underflow: 8000 000 hex
Note If the coordinate system is rela-

tive coordinates (undefined ori-
gin), the PV will be cleared to 0
when a pulse output starts, i.e.
when a pulse output instruction
(SPED, ACC, or PLS2) is exe-
cuted.

Appendices
Address Status
Related
settings
change
A280 00 Pulse Output 0 This flag will be ON when pulses are Cleared Refreshed
Accel/Decel Flag being output from pulse output 0 each cycle
according to an ORG, ACC or PLS2 during the
instruction and the output frequency is overseeing
being changed in steps (accelerating processes.
or decelerating).
Cleared when operation starts or
stops.
OFF: Constant speed
ON: Accelerating or decelerating
01 Pulse Output 0 This flag indicates when an overflow or Cleared Refreshed
Overflow/Underflow underflow has occurred in the pulse when the PV
Flag output 0 PV. is changed
Cleared when operation starts. by the INI
instruction.
OFF: Normal
Refreshed
ON: Overflow or underflow when an
overflow or
underflow
occurs.
02 Pulse Output 0 ON when the number of output pulses Cleared Refreshed
Output Amount Set for pulse output 0 has been set with the when the
Flag PULS instruction. PULS
Cleared when operation starts or instruction is
stops. executed.
Refreshed
OFF: No setting
when pulse
ON: Setting made output stops.
03 Pulse Output 0 ON when the number of output pulses Cleared Refreshed at
Output Completed set with the PULS or PLS2 instruction the start or
Flag has been output through pulse output completion of
0. pulse output.
stops.
OFF: Output not completed.
ON: Output completed.
04 Pulse Output 0 ON when pulses are being output from Cleared Refreshed
Output In-progress pulse output 0. when pulse
Flag Cleared when operation starts or output starts or
stops. stops.
OFF: Stopped
ON: Outputting pulses.
05 Pulse Output 0 ON when the origin has not been Cleared Refreshed
No-origin Flag determined for pulse output 0 and goes each cycle
OFF when the origin has been deter- during the
mined. overseeing
Turned ON when power is turned processes.
ON.
Turned ON when operation starts.
OFF: Origin established.
ON: Origin not established.
06 Pulse Output 0 ON when the pulse output 0 PV Cleared Refreshed
At-origin Flag matches the origin (0). each cycle
OFF: Not stopped at origin. during the
overseeing
ON: Stopped at origin. processes.
07 Pulse Output 0 ON when an error occurred while out- Cleared Refreshed
Output Stopped Error putting pulses in the pulse output 0 ori- when origin
Flag gin search function. search
The Pulse Output 0 Output Stop Error starts.
code will be written to A444. Refreshed
when a
OFF: No error
pulse output
ON: Stop error occurred. stop error
occurs.

Appendices
Address Status
Related
settings
change
A281 00 Pulse Output 1 This flag will be ON when pulses are Cleared Refreshed
Accel/Decel Flag being output from pulse output 1 each cycle
according to an ORG, ACC or PLS2 during the
instruction and the output frequency is overseeing
being changed in steps (accelerating processes.
or decelerating).
stops.
OFF: Constant speed
ON: Accelerating or decelerating
01 Pulse Output 1 This flag indicates when an overflow or Cleared Refreshed
Overflow/Underflow underflow has occurred in the pulse when the PV
Flag output 1 PV. is changed
Cleared when operation starts. by the INI
instruction.
OFF: Normal
Refreshed
ON: Overflow or underflow when an
overflow or
underflow
occurs.
02 Pulse Output 1 ON when the number of output pulses Cleared Refreshed
Output Amount Set for pulse output 1 has been set with the when the
Flag PULS instruction. PULS
Cleared when operation starts or instruction is
executed.

stops.
Refreshed
OFF: No setting
when pulse
ON: Setting made output stops.
03 Pulse Output 1 ON when the number of output pulses Cleared Refreshed at
Output Completed set with the PULS or PLS2 instruction the start or
Flag has been output through pulse output completion of
1. pulse output.
stops.
OFF: Output not completed.
ON: Output completed.
04 Pulse Output 1 ON when pulses are being output from Cleared Refreshed
Output In-progress pulse output 1. when pulse
stops. stops.
OFF: Stopped
App
05 Pulse Output 1 No-ori- ON when the origin has not been Cleared Refreshed
gin Flag determined for pulse output 1 and goes each cycle
OFF when the origin has been deter- during over- A-2-1 Read-only Words
mined. seeing pro-
Turned ON when power is turned cesses.
ON.
Turned ON when operation starts.
OFF: Origin established.
ON: Origin not established.
06 Pulse Output 1 ON when the pulse output 1 PV Cleared Refreshed
At-origin Flag matches the origin (0). each cycle
OFF: Not stopped at origin. during over-
seeing pro-
ON: Stopped at origin. cesses.
07 Pulse Output 1 ON when an error occurred while out- Cleared Refreshed
Output Stopped Error putting pulses in the pulse output 1 ori- when origin
Flag gin search function. search
The Pulse Output 1 Output Stop Error starts.
code will be written to A445. Refreshed
when pulse
OFF: No error
output stop
ON: Stop error occurred. error occurs.

Appendices
Address Status
Related
settings
change
A283 00 PWM Output 0 ON when pulses are being output from Cleared Refreshed
Output In-progress PWM output 0. when pulse
stops. stops.
OFF: Stopped
A294 Task Number when This word contains the task number of Cyclic tasks: 0000 Cleared Cleared When pro- A298/
Program Stopped the task that was being executed when Interrupt tasks: 8000 gram error A299
program execution was stopped to 800F (task 0 to 15) occurs.
because of a program error.
Note A298 and A299 contain the pro-

gram address where program
execution was stopped.
A295 08 Instruction Processing This flag and the Error Flag (ER) will be ON: Error Flag ON Cleared Cleared When pro- A294,
Error Flag turned ON when an instruction pro- OFF: Error Flag OFF gram error A298/
cessing error has occurred and the occurs. A299
PLC Setup has been set to stop opera- PLC
tion for an instruction error. CPU Unit Setup
operation will stop and the ERR/ALM (Opera-
indicator will light when this flag goes tion when
ON. instruc-
Note The task number where the error tion error
occurred will be stored in A294 has
and the program address will be occurred)
stored in A298 and A299.
09 Indirect DM BCD Error This flag and the Access Error Flag ON: Not BCD Cleared Cleared When pro- A294,
Flag (AER) will be turned ON when an indi- OFF: Normal gram error A298/
rect DM BCD error has occurred and occurs. A299
the PLC Setup has been set to stop PLC
operation an indirect DM BCD error. Setup
(This error occurs when the content of (Opera-
an indirectly addressed DM word is not tion when
BCD although BCD mode has been instruc-
selected.) CPU Unit operation will stop tion error
and the ERR/ALM indicator will light has
when this flag goes ON. occurred)
Note The task number where the error
occurred will be stored in A294
and the program address will be

Appendices
Address Status
Related
settings
change
A295 10 Illegal Access Error This flag and the Access Error Flag ON: Illegal access Cleared Cleared When pro- A294,
Flag (AER) will be turned ON when an ille- occurred gram error A298/
gal access error has occurred and the OFF: Normal condi- occurs. A299
PLC Setup has been set to stop operation PLC
tion an illegal access error. (This error Setup
occurs when a region of memory is (Opera-
accessed illegally.) CPU Unit operation when
tion will stop and the ERR/ALM indica- instruc-
tor will light when this flag goes ON. tion error
The following operations are consid- has
ered illegal access: occurred)
Reading/writing the system area
Indirect DM BCD error (in BCD
mode)

11 No END Error Flag ON when there isnt an END instruction ON: No END Cleared Cleared A294,
in each program within a task. OFF: Normal condi- A298/
CPU Unit operation will stop and the tion A299
ERR/ALM indicator will light when this
flag goes ON.


12 Task Error Flag ON when a task error has occurred. A ON: Error Cleared Cleared A294,
task error will occur when there is no OFF: Normal A298/
program allocated to the task. A299

13 Differentiation Over- The allowed value for Differentiation ON: Error Cleared Cleared A294,
flow Error Flag Flags which correspond to differentia- OFF: Normal A298/
tion instructions has been exceeded. A299
CPU Unit operation will stop and the
flag goes ON.

App
14 Illegal Instruction Error ON when a program that cannot be ON: Error Cleared Cleared A294,
Flag executed has been stored. CPU Unit OFF: Normal A298/
operation will stop and the ERR/ALM A299
indicator will light when this flag goes
ON.
15 UM Overflow Error ON when the last address in UM (User ON: Error Cleared Cleared A294,
Flag Memory) has been exceeded. CPU OFF: Normal A298/
Unit operation will stop and the A299
flag goes ON.
A298 Program Address These words contain the program Lower digits of the Cleared Cleared A294
Where Program address of the instruction where pro- program address
Stopped gram execution was stopped due to a
(Lower digits) program error.
A299 Program Address Note A294 contains the task number of Upper digits of the Cleared Cleared
Where Program the task where program execu- program address
tion was stopped.
Stopped
(Upper digits)

Appendices
Address Status
Related
settings
change
A300 Error Log Pointer When an error occurs, the Error Log 00 to 14 hex Retained Retained Refreshed A500.14
Pointer is incremented by 1 to indicate when error
the location where the next error record occurs.
will be recorded as an offset from the
beginning of the Error Log Area (A100
to A199).
capacitor becomes
discharged.
2 The Error Log Pointer can be
cleared to 00 by turning
A500.14 (the Error Log Reset
Bit) ON.
3 When the Error Log Pointer
has reached 14 hex (20 deci-
mal), the next record is stored
in A195 to A199 when the next
error occurs.
A310 Manufacturing Lot The manufacturing lot number is stored Retained Retained
Number, Lower Digits in 6 digits hexadecimal. X, Y, and Z in
the lot number are converted to 10, 11,
A311 Manufacturing Lot
and 12, respectively.
Number, Upper Digits
Examples:
Lot number 01805
A310 = 0801, A311 = 0005
Lot number 30Y05
A310 =1130, A311 = 0005
A315 13 Option Board Error ON when the Option Board is removed Cleared Cleared Refreshed A402.00,
Flag while the power is being supplied. CPU when a A424
Unit operation will continue and the non-fatal error
ERR/ALM indicator will flash. occurs.
Note OFF when the error has been

cleared.
14 Built-in Analog I/O ON when a built-in analog I/O error Cleared Cleared Refreshed A402.00
Error Flag occurs and stops the operation of when a
built-in analog I/O. CPU Unit operation non-fatal error
will continue and the ERR/ALM indica- occurs.
tor will flash. OFF when the error has
been cleared.
15 Backup Memory Error ON when writing to the built-in Cleared Cleared Refreshed A402.00
Flag EEPROM backup memory fails. CPU when a
Unit operation will continue and the non-fatal error
ERR/ALM indicator will flash. occurs.
Note OFF when the error has been

cleared.
A316 to High-speed Counter 2 Contains the PV of high-speed counter Cleared Refreshed
A317 PV 2. each cycle
The PV is cleared when operation during the
starts. overseeing
processes.
A317 contains the upper 4 digits and
Refreshed
A316 contains the lower 4 digits.
when PRV
instruction is
executed to
read PV.
The PV is cleared when operation during the
starts. overseeing
processes.
A319 contains the upper 4 digits and
Refreshed
A318 contains the lower 4 digits.
when PRV
instruction is
executed to
read PV.

Appendices
Address Status
Related
settings
change
in range-comparison mode for upper overseeing
01 High-speed Counter 2 and lower limits. processes.
executed to
Condition Met Flag ON: PV in range results of
parison.
Range 4 Comparison
Condition Met Flag
Range 5 Comparison
Condition Met Flag
Range 6 Comparison
Condition Met Flag

OFF: Stopped.
ON: Being executed.
OFF: Normal
mine the direction.
App
OFF: Decrementing
ON: Incrementing
Condition Met Flag high-speed counter 3 is being operated during over-

in range-comparison mode for upper seeing pro-
01 High-speed Counter 3 and lower limits. cess.
executed to
parison.
Range 4 Comparison
Condition Met Flag
Range 5 Comparison
Condition Met Flag
Range 6 Comparison
Condition Met Flag

Appendices
Address Status
Related
settings
change
A321 08 High-speed Counter 3 This flag indicates whether a compari- Cleared Refreshed
OFF: Stopped.
ON: Being executed
OFF: Normal
Count Direction high-speed counter is currently being for high-speed
mine the direction.
OFF: Decrementing
ON: Incrementing
The PV will be cleared at the start of during the
operation. overseeing
processes.
A323 contains the upper four digits and
Refreshed
A322 contains the lower four digits.
when PRV
instruction is
executed to
read PV.
(Not The PV is cleared when operation during the
sup- starts. overseeing
ported processes.
by E10 A325 contains the upper 4 digits and
Refreshed
CPU A324 contains the lower 4 digits.
when PRV
Unit) instruction is
executed to
read PV.
in range-comparison mode for upper overseeing
01 High-speed Counter 4 and lower limits. processes.
executed to
parison.
Range 4 Comparison
Condition Met Flag
Range 5 Comparison
Condition Met Flag
Range 6 Comparison
Condition Met Flag

Appendices
Address Status
Related
settings
change
A326 08 High-speed Counter 4 This flag indicates whether a compari- Cleared Refreshed
OFF: Stopped.
ON: Being executed.
OFF: Normal
mine the direction.
OFF: Decrementing
ON: Incrementing

(Not Range 1 Comparison within the specified ranges when each cycle
sup- Condition Met Flag high-speed counter 5 is being operated during over-
ported in range-comparison mode. seeing pro-
by E10 01 High-speed Counter 5 cess.
CPU Range 2 Comparison Refreshed
Unit) Condition Met Flag when PRV
table is registered.
02 High-speed Counter 5 instruction is
OFF: PV not in range executed to
Range 3 Comparison ON: PV in range read the
Condition Met Flag results of
parison.
Range 4 Comparison
Condition Met Flag
Range 5 Comparison
Condition Met Flag
App
Range 6 Comparison
Condition Met Flag

OFF: Stopped.
ON: Being executed
OFF: Normal

Appendices
Address Status
Related
settings
change
A327 10 High-speed Counter 5 This flag indicates whether the Cleared Setting used
mine the direction.
OFF: Decrementing
ON: Incrementing
A339 to Maximum Differentia- These words contain the maximum See Func- Cleared Written at the A295.13
A340 tion Flag Number value of the differentiation flag num- tion col- start of opera-
bers being used by differentiation umn. tion
instructions.
A351 to Calendar/Clock Area These words contain the CPU Units Retained Retained Written every
A354 internal clock data in BCD. The clock cycle
(N/NA-t can be set from the CX-Programmer,
ype with the DATE instruction, or with a
CPU FINS command (CLOCK WRITE,
Unit 0702).
only) A351.00 to A351.07:
Seconds (00 to 59)(BCD)
A351.08 to A351.15:
Minutes (00 to 59)(BCD)
A352.00 to A352.07:
Hours (00 to 23)(BCD)
A352.08 to A352.15:
Day of the month (01 to 31)(BCD)
A353.00 to A353.07:
Month (01 to 12)(BCD)
A353.08 to A353.15:
Year (00 to 99)(BCD)
A354.00 to A354.07:
Day of the week (00 to 06)(BCD)
00: Sunday
01: Monday
02: Tuesday
03: Wednesday
04: Thursday
05: Friday
06: Saturday

capacitor becomes dis-
charged. Write the ladder pro-
gram and design the overall
system to handle any prob-
lems that might occur if this
data becomes unstable.
2 In an E-type CPU Uint, or if the
clock data is not set for an
N/NA-type CPU Unit, the data
will be for 1:01.01 on Sunday
January 1, 2001.
A360 to 01 to Executed FAL Number The flag corresponding to the specified ON: That FAL was Retained Cleared Refreshed A402.15
A391 15 Flags FAL number will be turned ON when executed when error
FAL is executed. Bits A360.01 to OFF: That FAL wasnt occurs.
A391.15 correspond to FAL numbers executed
001 to 511.
Note The flag will be turned OFF when

the error is cleared.

Appendices
Address Status
Related
settings
change
A392 04 Built-in RS-232C Port ON when an error has occurred at the ON: Error Retained Cleared Refreshed
Error Flag (CP1E built-in RS-232C port. (Not valid in NT OFF: No error when error
N/NA-type CPU Unit Link mode.) occurs.
only)
05 Built-in RS-232C Port ON when the built-in RS-232C port is ON: Able-to-send Retained Cleared Written after
Send Ready Flag able to send data in no-protocol mode. OFF: Unable-to-send transmission
(No-protocol mode)
(CP1E N/NA-type CPU
Unit only)
06 Built-in RS-232C Port ON when the built-in RS-232C port has ON: Reception com- Retained Cleared Written after
Reception Completed completed the reception in no-protocol pleted reception
Flag (No-protocol mode. OFF: Reception not
mode) (CP1E When the number of bytes was completed
N/NA-type CPU Unit specified: ON when the specified
only) number of bytes is received.
ON when the end code is received or
07 Built-in RS-232C Port ON when a data overflow occurred dur- ON: Overflow Retained Cleared
Reception Overflow ing reception through the built-in OFF: No overflow
Flag (No-protocol RS-232C port in no-protocol mode.
mode) (CP1E When the number of bytes was
N/NA-type CPU Unit specified: ON when more data is
only) received after the reception was
completed but before RXD was exe-

cuted.
ON when more data is received after
the end code was received but
ON when 257 bytes are received
before the end code.
12 Serial Option Port ON when a communications error has ON: Error Retained Cleared
Communications Error occurred at the Serial Option port. (Not OFF: No error
Flag (CP1E N30/40/60 valid in NT Link mode.)
or NA20 CPU Unit
only)
13 Serial Option Port ON when the Serial Option port is able ON: Able-to-send Retained Cleared Written after
Send Ready Flag to send data in no-protocol mode. OFF: Unable-to-send transmission
(No-protocol Mode)
(CP1E N30/40/60 or
NA20 CPU Unit only)
App
14 Serial Option Port ON when the Serial Option port has ON: Reception com- Retained Cleared Written after
Reception Completed completed the reception in no-protocol pleted reception
Flag (No-protocol mode. OFF: Reception not
N30/40/60 or NA20 specified: ON when the specified
CPU Unit only) number of bytes is received.
ON when the end code is received or
15 Serial Option Port ON when a data overflow occurred dur- ON: Reception com- Retained Cleared
Reception Overflow ing reception through Serial Option pleted
Flag (No-protocol port in no-protocol mode. OFF: Reception not
N30/40/60 or NA20 specified: ON when more data is
CPU Unit only) received after the reception was
completed but before RXD was exe-
cuted.
ON when more data is received after
the end code was received but
ON when 257 bytes are received
before the end code.

Appendices
Address Status
Related
settings
change
A393 00 to Built-in RS-232C Port The corresponding bit will be ON when ON: Communicating Retained Cleared Refreshed
07 Polled Unit Communi- the built-in RS-232C port is communi- OFF: Not communi- when there is a
cations Flags (CP1E cating with NT Link mode or Serial PLC cating normal
N/NA-type CPU Unit Link mode. response to
only) Bits 0 to 7 correspond to Units 0 to 7. the token.
00 to Built-in RS-232C Port Indicates (in binary) the number of Retained Cleared Refreshed
15 Reception Counter bytes of data received when the built-in when data is
(No-protocol Mode) RS-232C port is in no-protocol mode. received.
(CP1E N/NA-type CPU
Unit only)
A394 00 to Serial Option Port The corresponding bit will be ON when ON: Communicating Retained Cleared Refreshed
07 Polled Unit Communi- the Serial Option port is communicat- OFF: Not communi- when there is a
cations Flags (CP1E ing with NT link mode. cating normal
N30/40/60 or NA20 Bits 0 to 7 correspond to Units 0 to 7. response to
CPU Unit only) the token.
00 to Serial Option Port Indicates (in binary) the number of Retained Cleared Refreshed
15 Reception Counter bytes of data received when the Serial when data is
(No-protocol Mode) Option port is in no-protocol mode. received.
(CP1E N30/40/60 or
NA20 CPU Unit only)
A400 Error code When a non-fatal error (user-defined Cleared Cleared Refreshed
FALS or system error) or a fatal error when error
(user-defined FALS or system error) occurs.
occurs, the 4-digit hexadecimal error
code is written to this word.
Note When two or more errors occur

simultaneously, the highest error
code will be recorded.
A401 00 Other Fatal Error Flag ON when a fatal error that is not OFF: No other fatal Cleared Cleared Refreshed A314
defined for A401.01 to A401.15 occurs. error when error
Detailed information is output to the ON: Other fatal error occurs.
bits of A314.
Note There are no errors that affect

this flag at this time. This flag is
reserved by the system.
06 FALS Error Flag ON when a fatal error is generated by ON: FALS executed Cleared Cleared Refreshed A400
(fatal error) the FALS instruction. The CPU Unit will OFF: FALS not exe- when error
stop operating and the ERR/ALM indi- cuted occurs.
cator will light.
The corresponding error code will be
written to A400. Error codes C101 to
C2FF correspond to FALS numbers
001 to 511.
Note This flag will be turned OFF when
the FALS errors are cleared.
08 Cycle Time Too Long ON if the cycle time exceeds the maxi- OFF: Cycle time Cleared Cleared Refreshed PLC
Flag mum cycle time set in the PLC Setup under max. when the cycle Setup
(fatal error) (the cycle time monitoring time). CPU ON: Cycle time over time exceeds (Cycle
Unit operation will stop and the max. maximum. time mon-
ERR/ALM indicator on the front of the itoring
CPU Unit will light. time)


Appendices
Address Status
Related
settings
change
A401 09 Program Error Flag ON when program contents are incor- ON: Error Cleared Cleared Refreshed A294,
(fatal error) rect. CPU Unit operation will stop and OFF: No error when error A295,
the ERR/ALM indicator on the front of occurs. A298 and
the CPU Unit will light. The task num- A299
ber where the error occurred will be
stored in A294 and the program
address will be stored in A298 and
A299. The type of program error that
occurred will be stored in A295.08 to
A295.15. Refer to the description of
A295 for more details on program
errors.
11 Too Many I/O Points ON when the number of Expansion ON: Error Cleared Cleared Refreshed A407
Flag Units and Expansion I/O Units exceeds OFF: No error when error
(fatal error) the limit, when the number of words occurs.
allocated to these Units exceeds the
limit, are mounted.
ERR/ALM indicator on the front of the
CPU Unit will light.
14 I/O Bus Error Flag ON in the following cases: ON: Error Cleared Cleared Refreshed A404
(fatal error) When an error occurs in a data OFF: No error when error
transfer between the CPU Unit and a occurs.
Expansion Unit or Expansion I/O
Unit. If this happens, 0A0A hex will

be output to A404.
CPU Unit will light. This flag will be
turned OFF when the error is cleared.
15 Memory Error Flag ON when an error occurred in memory. ON: Error Cleared Cleared Refreshed A403.00
(fatal error) CPU Unit operation will stop and the OFF: No error when error to
ERR/ALM indicator on the front of the occurs. A403.08,
CPU Unit will light. The location where A403.09
the error occurred is indicated in
A403.00 to A403.08, and A403.09 will
be turned ON if there was an error
during automatic transfer at startup.
This flag will be turned OFF when the
error is cleared. The automatic transfer
at startup error cannot be cleared
without turning OFF the PLC.
A402 00 Other Non-Fatal Error ON when a non-fatal error that is not OFF: No other Cleared Cleared Refreshed A315
App
Flag defined for A402.01 to A402.15 occurs. non-fatal error when error
Detailed information is output to the ON: Other non- fatal occurs.
bits of A315. error
04 Battery Error Flag ON if the CPU Units battery is discon- ON: Error Cleared Cleared Refreshed PLC
(non-fatal error) nected or its voltage is low and the OFF: No error when error Setup
Detect Battery Error setting has been occurs. (Detect
set in the PLC Setup. Battery
The CPU Unit will continue operating Error)
and the ERR/ALM indicator on the front
of the CPU Unit will flash.
This flag can be used to control an
external warning light or other indica-
tor to indicate that the battery needs
to be replaced.
This flag will be turned OFF when

Appendices
Address Status
Related
settings
change
A402 10 PLC Setup Error Flag ON when there is a setting error in the ON: Error Cleared Cleared Refreshed
(non-fatal error) PLC Setup. The CPU Unit will continue OFF: No error when error
operating and the ERR/ALM indicator occurs.
on the front of the CPU Unit will flash.
15 FAL Error Flag ON when a non-fatal error is generated ON: FAL error Cleared Cleared Refreshed A360 to
(non-fatal error) by executing FAL. The CPU Unit will occurred when error A391,
continue operating and the ERR/ALM OFF: FAL not exe- occurs. A400
indicator on the front of the CPU Unit cuted
will flash.
The bit in A360 to A391 that corre-
sponds to the FAL number specified in
FALS will be turned ON and the corre-
sponding error code will be written to
A400. Error codes 4101 to 42FF corre-
spond to FAL numbers 001 to 2FF (0 to
511).

A403 00 to Memory Error Location When a memory error occurs, the ON: Error Cleared Cleared Refreshed A401.15
08 Memory Error Flag (A401.15) is turned OFF: No error when error
ON and one of the following flags is occurs.
turned ON to indicate the memory area
where the error occurred
A403.00: Ladder program
A403.04: PLC Setup
When a memory error occurs, the CPU
Unit will continue operating and the
CPU Unit will flash.
Note The corresponding flag will be

turned OFF when the error is
cleared.
10 Backup Memory Error ON when the built-in EEPROM backup ON: Error Cleared Cleared Refreshed
Flag memory is physically destroyed. OFF: No error when error is
detected.
A404 I/O Bus Error Details Contains information on I/O bus errors. 0A0A hex: Expan- Cleared Cleared Refreshed A401.14
The CPU Unit will stop operating and sion Unit error when error is
the ERR/ALM indicator on the front of detected.
the CPU Unit will light.
Note A401.14 (I/O Bus Error Flag) will
turn ON.
A407 13 to Too Many I/O Points, The 3-digit binary value of these bits 010: Too many Cleared Cleared Refreshed A401.11
15 Cause indicates the cause of the Too Many Expansion Unit and when error
I/O Points Error. Expansion I/O Unit occurs.
words
A424 00 to Error Option Board The bit corresponding to the option slot ON: Error Cleared Cleared A353.13
15 Flags turns ON when an error occurs in an OFF: No error
Option Board (A315.13 will be ON).
Bit 01: Option slot 2
A434 0 Open-circuit Detection On when AD0 open-circuit is detected Retained Cleared Refreshed
for Built-in Analog when AD0
Input 0 open-circuit is
detected.
1 Open-circuit Detection On when AD1 open-circuit is detected Retained Cleared Refreshed
for Built-in Analog when AD1
Input 1 open-circuit is
detected.
4 Built-in Analog Initial ON when the built-in analog initializa- Retained Cleared Refreshed
Flag tion is normally finished. when built-in
analog initial-
ization is nor-
mally finished.

Appendices
Address Status
Related
settings
change
A436 00 to Expansion Unit and ON when an error occurs in a OFF: No error Retained Cleared
02 Expansion I/O Unit CP-series Expansion Unit or Expan- ON: Error
Error Flags sion I/O Unit.
A436.00: 1st Unit
A436.01: 2nd Unit
A436.02: 3rd Unit
A436.03: 4th Unit
A436.04: 5th Unit
A436.05: 6th Unit
Note CP1W-TS002/TS102/AD041/DA0
41/32ER/32ET/32ET1 are each
counted as two Units.
A437 Number of Connected Stores the number of Expansion Units 0000 to 0006 hex Retained Cleared
Units and Expansion I/O Units connected as
a hexadecimal number.
Note This information is invalid only

when a Too Many I/O Points error
has occurred.
CP1W-TS002/TS102/AD041/DA0
41/32ER/32ET/32ET1 are each
counted as two Units.
A440 Max. Interrupt Task Contains the Maximum Interrupt Task 0000 to FFFF hex Cleared Cleared Written after
Processing Time Processing Time in units of 0.1 ms. the interrupt
task with the

Note This value is cleared when PLC
max. process-
operation begins.
ing time is exe-
cuted.
A441 Interrupt Task with Contains the task number of the inter- 8000 to 800F hex Cleared Cleared Written after
Max. Processing Time rupt task with the maximum processing the interrupt
time. Hexadecimal values 8000 to task with the
800F correspond to task numbers 00 to max. process-
0F. Bit 15 is turned ON when an inter- ing time is exe-
rupt has occurred. cuted.

operation begins.
A442 Total Interrupt Task Contains the Total Interrupt Task Pro- 0000 to FFFF hex Cleared Cleared Each cycle A440
Processing Time One cessing Time in one cycle in units of
Cycle 0.1ms.Sets when the value is bigger
than the last one once a cycle by com-
mon processing.
App
operation begins. The value is
unstable for CPU Unit version 1.0
or earlier.
A444 Pulse Output 0 If a Pulse Output Stop Error occurs for Retained Cleared Refreshed
pulse output 0, the error code is written when origin
Stop Error Code
to this word. search
starts.
Refreshed
when a
pulse output
stop error
occurs.
A445 Pulse Output 1 If a Pulse Output Stop Error occurs for Retained Cleared Refreshed
Stop Error Code pulse output 1, the error code is written when origin
to this word. search
starts.
Refreshed
when a
pulse output
stop error
occurs.

Appendices
A-2-2 Read/Write Words

Address Status
Related
settings
change
A500 12 IOM Hold Bit Turn ON this bit to preserve the status ON: Retained Retained Not Refreshed
of the I/O Memory when shifting from OFF: Not retained retained when power is
PROGRAM to RUN or MONITOR turned ON.
mode or vice versa.
13 Forced Status Hold Turn ON this bit to preserve the status ON: Retained Retained Not Refreshed
Bit of bits that have been force-set or OFF: Not retained retained when power is
force-reset when shifting from PRO- turned ON.
GRAM to MONITOR mode or vice
versa. Always use this bit together with
the IOM Hold Bit (A500.12), i.e., turn
them ON at the same time.
14 Error Log Reset Bit Turn this bit ON to reset the Error Log OFF to ON: Clear Retained Cleared A100 to
Pointer (A300) to 00. A199,
A300
Note 1 The contents of the Error Log
Area itself (A100 to A199) are
not cleared.
2 This bit is automatically reset
to 0 after the Error Log Pointer
is reset.
15 Output OFF Bit Turn this bit ON to turn OFF all outputs Retained Cleared
from the CPU Unit, CP-series Expan-
sion Units, and CP-series Expansion
I/O Units. The INH indicator on the
front of the CPU Unit will light while
this bit is ON.
Note This bit is cleared when the

power supply is turned OFF.
A508 09 Differentiate Monitor ON when the differentiate monitor con- ON: Monitor condi- Retained Cleared
Completed Flag dition has been established during tion established
execution of differentiation monitoring. OFF: Not yet estab-
Note This flag will be cleared to 0 lished
when differentiation monitoring
starts.
A510 Startup Time These words contain the time at which See Function col- Retained See Refreshed
to the power was turned ON. The con- umn. Function when power is
A511 tents are updated every time that the column. turned ON.
(CP1E power is turned ON. The data is stored
N/NA- in BCD.
type A510.00 to A510.07: Second (00 to
CPU 59)
Unit A510.08 to A510.15: Minute (00 to 59)
only)
A511.00 to A511.07: Hour (00 to 23)
A511.08 to A511.15: Day of month (01
to 31)
capacitor becomes
discharged.
2 In an E-type CPU Unit, or if
the clock data is not set for an
January 1, 2001.

Appendices
Address Status
Related
settings
change
A512 Power Interruption These words contain the time at which See Function col- Retained Retained Written at
to Time the power was interrupted. The con- umn. power
A513 tents are updated every time that the interruption.
(CP1E power is interrupted. The data is
N/NA- stored in BCD.
type A512.00 to A512.07: Second (00 to
CPU 59)
Unit A512.08 to A512.15: Minute (00 to 59)
only)
A513.00 to A513.07: Hour (00 to 23)
A513.08 to A513.15: Day of month (01
to 31)
Note 1 These words are not cleared
at startup.
2 The data will be unstable if the
capacitor becomes
discharged.
January 1, 2001.
A514 Number of Power Contains the number of times that 0000 to FFFF hex Retained Retained Refreshed
Interruptions power has been interrupted since the when power is
power was first turned ON. The data is turned ON.
stored in binary. To reset this value,

overwrite the current value with 0000.
Note The data will be unstable if the

capacitor becomes discharged.
A515 Operation Start Time The time that operation started as a See at left. Retained Retained See at left.
to result of changing the operating mode
A517 to RUN or MONITOR mode is stored
(CP1E here in BCD.
N/NA- A515.00 to A515.07: Seconds (00 to
type 59)
CPU A515.08 to A515.15: Minutes (00 to
Unit 59)
only) A516.00 to A516.07: Hour (00 to 23)
A516.08 to A516.15: Day of month (01
to 31)
A517.00 to A517.07: Month (01 to 12)
A517.08 to A517.15: Year (00 to 99)
Note 1 The previous start time is

stored after turning ON the
App
power supply until operation is
started.
capacitor becomes
discharged.

January 1, 2001.

Appendices
Address Status
Related
settings
change
A518 Operation End Time The time that operation stopped as a See at left. Retained Retained See at left.
to result of changing the operating mode
A520 to PROGRAM mode is stored here in
(CP1E BCD.
type 59)
Unit 59)
only) A519.00 to A519.07: Hour (00 to 23)
A519.08 to A519.15: Day of month (01
to 31)
A520.00 to A520.07: Month (01 to 12)
A520.08 to A520.15: Year (00 to 99)
Note 1 If an error occurs in operation,
the time of the error will be
stored. If the operating mode
is then changed to
PROGRAM mode, the time
that PROGRAM mode was
entered will be stored.
capacitor becomes
discharged.
January 1, 2001.
A525 01 Ethernet Option Turn ON this bit to reset the Ethernet OFF to ON: Reset Retained Cleared
Board Reset Flag Option Board mounted on the serial
(Serial Option Port) Option port.
09 Ethernet Option Turn ON this bit to restart Ethernet OFF to ON: Restart Retained Cleared
Board Restart Flag Option Board mounted on the serial
(Serial Option Port) Option port.
A526 00 Built-in RS-232C Port Turn ON this bit to restart the built-in OFF to ON: Restart Retained Cleared
Restart Bit (CP1E RS-232C port.
N/NA-type CPU Unit
Note This bit is turned OFF automati-
only)
cally when the restart processing
is completed.
01 Serial Option Port Turn ON this bit to restart the Serial OFF to ON: Restart Retained Cleared
Restart Bit (CP1E Option port. port
N30/40/60 or NA20
Note This bit is turned OFF automati-
CPU Unit only)
cally when the restart processing
is completed.

Appendices
Address Status
Related
settings
change
A528 00 Built-in RS-232C Port These flags indicate what kind of error Bits 00 and 01: Not Retained Cleared
to Error Flags (CP1E has occurred at the built-in RS-232C used.
07 N/NA-type CPU Unit port. Bit 02: ON for parity
only) They are automatically turned OFF error.
when the built-in RS-232C port is Bit 03: ON for fram-
restarted. ing error.
Only bit 5 (timeout error) is valid in
Bit 04: ON for over-
NT Link mode.
run error.
Serial PLC Link Polling Unit:
Bit 05: ON for time-
Bit 05: ON for timeout error.
out error.
Serial PLC Link Polled Unit:
Bit 03: ON for framing error. Bits 06 and 07: Not
Bit 04: ON for overrun error. used.
Bit 05: ON for timeout error.
These bits can be cleared by the
CX-Programmer.
08 Serial Option Port These flags indicate what kind of error Bits 08 and 09: Not Retained Cleared
to Error Flags (CP1E has occurred at Serial Option port. used.
15 N30/40/60 or NA20 They are automatically turned OFF Bit 10: ON for parity
CPU Unit only) when Serial Option port is restarted. error.
Only bit 5 (timeout error) is valid in Bit 11: ON for fram-
NT Link mode. ing error.
Serial PLC Link Polling Unit: Bit 12: ON for over-
Bit 13: ON for timeout error. run error.
Serial PLC Link Polled Unit:

Bit 13: ON for time-
Bit 11: ON for framing error.
out error.
Bit 12: ON for overrun error.
Bit 13: ON for timeout error. Bits 14 and 15: Not
used.
These bits can be cleared by the
CX-Programmer.
A529 FAL/FALS Number for Set a dummy FAL/FALS number to 0001 to 01FF hex: Retained Cleared
System Error Simula- use to simulate the system error using FAL/FALS numbers
tion FAL or FALS. 1 to 511
Note When FAL or FALS is executed 0000 or 0200 to

and the number in A529 is the FFFF hex: No
same as the one specified in the FAL/FALS number
operand of the instruction, the for system error sim-
system error given in the oper- ulation. (No error will
and of the instruction will be gen- be generated.)
erated instead of a user-defined
error.
A531 00 High-speed Counter 0 When the reset method is set to Retained Cleared
Reset Bit Phase-Z signal + Software reset, the
App
corresponding high-speed counter's
PV will be reset if the phase-Z signal is
Reset Bit
received while this bit is ON.
When the reset method is set to Soft-
Reset Bit
ware reset, the corresponding
03 High-speed Counter 3 high-speed counter's PV will be reset
Reset Bit in the cycle when this bit turns ON.
Reset Bit
Reset Bit
(Not supported by
E10 CPU Unit)

Appendices
Address Status
Related
settings
change
A540 00 Pulse Output 0 The pulse output 0 PV (contained in Retained Cleared A276 and
Reset Bit A276 and A277) will be cleared when A277
this bit is turned ON.
08 Pulse Output 0 This is the CW limit input signal for Retained Cleared
CW Limit Input Signal pulse output 0, which is used in the
Flag origin search. To use this signal, write
the input from the actual sensor as an
input condition in the ladder program
and output the result to this flag.
09 Pulse Output 0 This is the CCW limit input signal for Retained Cleared
CCW Limit Input Sig- pulse output 0, which is used in the
nal Flag origin search. To use this signal, write
10 Pulse Output 0 This is the positioning completed input Retained Cleared
Positioning Com- signal used in the origin search for
pleted Signal pulse output 0. The input signal from
the servo driver is output to this bit
from the ladder program to enable
using the signal.
A541 00 Pulse Output 1 The pulse output 1 PV (contained in Retained Cleared A278 and
Reset Bit A278 and A279) will be cleared when A279
this bit is turned ON.
08 Pulse Output 1 This is the CW limit input signal for Retained Cleared
CW Limit Input Signal pulse output 1, which is used in the
Flag origin search. To use this signal, write
09 Pulse Output 1 This is the CCW limit input signal for Retained Cleared
CCW Limit Input Sig- pulse output 1, which is used in the
nal Flag origin search. To use this signal, write
10 Pulse Output 1 This is the positioning completed input Retained Cleared
Positioning Com- signal used in the origin search for
pleted Signal pulse output 1. The input signal from
the servo driver is output to this bit
from the ladder program to enable
using the signal.

Appendices
Address Status
Related
settings
change
A617 00 Built-in RS232C Port- Display the present communication Parity Retained See Refreshed
Communication Set- settings of the built-in RS232C 0: Even Function when power is
tings port.Reflect the PLC Setup when column. turned ON.
power is turned ON. 1: Odd
01 Parity Retained See Refreshed
0: Yes Function when power is
column. turned ON.
1: No
02 Stop bit Retained See Refreshed
0: 2 bits Function when power is
column. turned ON.
1: 1 bit
03 Data length Retained See Refreshed
column. turned ON.
1: 8 bits
04 Start bit Retained See Refreshed
0: 1 bit (fixed) Function when power is
column. turned ON.
08 Communication Retained See Refreshed
to speed Function when power is
11 0 hex: Default (9600) column. turned ON.
3 hex: 1200
4 hex: 2400
5 hex: 4800

6 hex: 9600
7 hex: 19200
8 hex: 38400
9 hex: 57600
A hex: 115200
to mode Function when power is
15 0 hex: Default (Host column. turned ON.
Link)
2 hex: NT link (1: N)
3 hex: Non-protocol
5 hex: Host Link
7 hex: Serial PLC
Link (Slave)
8 hex: Serial PLC
App
Link (Master)
9 hex: Modbus-RTU
Easy Master
A618 00 SerialOption Port- Display the present communication Parity Retained See Refreshed
Communication Set- settings of the serial option 0: Even Function when power is
tings port.Reflect the PLC Setup when column. turned ON.
power is turned ON. 1: Odd
01 Parity Retained See Refreshed
0: Yes Function when power is
column. turned ON.
1: No
02 Stop bit Retained See Refreshed
column. turned ON.
1: 1 bit
03 Data length Retained See Refreshed
column. turned ON.
1: 8 bits
04 Start bit Retained See Refreshed
0: 1 bit (fixed) Function when power is
column. turned ON.

Appendices
Address Status
Related
settings
change
A618 08 SerialOption Port- Display the present communication Communication Retained See Refreshed
to Communication Set- settings of the serial option speed Function when power is
11 tings port.Reflect the PLC Setup when 0 hex: Default (9600) column. turned ON.
power is turned ON.
3 hex: 1200
4 hex: 2400
5 hex: 4800
6 hex: 9600
7 hex: 19200
8 hex: 38400
9 hex: 57600
A hex: 115200
to mode Function when power is
15 0 hex: Default (Host column. turned ON.
Link)
2 hex: NT link(1: N)
3 hex: Non-protocol
5 hex: Host Link
7 hex: Serial PLC
Link (Slave)
8 hex: Serial PLC
Link (Master)
9 hex: Modbus-RTU
Easy Master
A640 00 Built-in RS-232C Port Turn ON this bit to send a command Turned ON: Execu- Retained Cleared DM Area
Modbus-RTU Easy and receive a response for the built-in tion started words for
Master Execution Bit RS-232C port using the Modbus-RTU ON: Execution in built-in
(CP1E N/NA-type easy master function. progress. RS -232C
CPU Unit only) port
Note This bit will be turned OFF auto- OFF: Not executed Modbus
matically by the system when or execution com-
communications have been com- -RTU
pleted. Easy
pleted.
Master:
01 Built-in RS-232C Port ON when one command has been ON: Execution nor- Retained Cleared D01200
Modbus-RTU Easy sent and the response received for mal. to
Master Normal End the built-in RS-232C port using the OFF: Execution error D01299
Flag (CP1E N/NA-type Modbus-RTU easy master function. or still in progress.
CPU Unit only)
02 Built-in RS-232C Port ON when an error has occurred in ON: Execution error. Retained Cleared
Modbus-RTU Easy communications for the built-in OFF: Execution nor-
Master Error End Flag RS-232C port using the Modbus-RTU mal or still in
(CP1E N/NA-type easy master function. progress.
CPU Unit only) The error code is output to D01252 in
the DM fixed allocation words for Mod-
bus-RTU Easy Master.
A641 00 Serial Option Port Turn ON this bit to send a command Turned ON: Execu- Retained Cleared DM Area
Modbus-RTU Master and receive a response for Serial tion started words for
Execution Bit (CP1E Option port using the Modbus-RTU ON: Execution in built-in
N30/40/60 or NA20 easy master function. progress. RS -232C
CPU Unit only) port
Note This bit will be turned OFF auto- OFF: Not executed Modbus
matically by the system when or execution com-
communications have been com- -RTU
pleted. Easy
pleted.
Master:
01 Serial Option Port ON when one command has been ON: Execution nor- Retained Cleared D01300
Modbus-RTU Master sent and the response received for mal. to
Execution Normal Serial Option port using the Mod- OFF: Execution error D01399
Flag (CP1E bus-RTU easy master function. or still in progress.
N30/40/60 or NA20
CPU Unit only)
02 Serial Option Port ON when an error has occurred in ON: Execution error. Retained Cleared
Modbus-RTU Master communications for Serial Option port OFF: Execution nor-
Execution Error Flag using the Modbus-RTU easy master mal or still in
(CP1E N30/40/60 or function. progress.
NA20 CPU Unit only) The error code is output to D01352 in
the DM fixed allocation words for Mod-
bus-RTU Easy Master.

Appendices
Address Status
Related
settings
change
A642 Analog Adjustment 1 Stores the value set on analog 0000 to 00FF hex Retained Cleared
PV adjuster 1 as a hexadecimal value.
A643 Analog Adjustment 2 Stores the value set on analog 0000 to 00FF hex Retained Cleared
PV adjuster 2 as a hexadecimal value.
A720 Power ON Clock Data These words contain the time at which See at left. Retained Retained Written when
to 1 the power was turned ON one time power is
A722 before the startup time stored in words turned ON.
(CP1E A510 to A511.
type 59)
Unit 59)
only) A721.00 to A721.07: Hour (00 to 23)
A721.08 to A721.15: Day of month (01
to 31)
A722.00 to A722.07: Month (01 to 12)
A722.08 to A722.15: Year (00 to 99)
Note 1 All of the clock data from

A720 to A749 is cleared if the
capacitor becomes
discharged.
January 1, 2001.

to 2 the power was turned ON two times power is
(CP1E A510 to A511.
type 59)
Unit 59)
only) A724.00 to A724.07: Hour (00 to 23)
A724.08 to A724.15: Day of month (01
to 31)
A725.00 to A725.07: Month (01 to 12)
A725.08 to A725.15: Year (00 to 99)
to 3 the power was turned ON three times power is
(CP1E A510 to A511.
App
type 59)
Unit 59)
only) A727.00 to A727.07: Hour (00 to 23) A-2-2 Read/Write Words
A727.08 to A727.15: Day of month (01
to 31)
A728.00 to A728.07: Month (01 to 12)
A728.08 to A728.15: Year (00 to 99)
to 4 the power was turned ON four times power is
(CP1E A510 to A511.
type 59)
Unit 59)
only) A730.00 to A730.07: Hour (00 to 23)
A730.08 to A730.15: Day of month (01
to 31)
A731.00 to A731.07: Month (01 to 12)
A731.08 to A731.15: Year (00 to 99)

Appendices
Address Status
Related
settings
change
to 5 the power was turned ON five times power is
(CP1E A510 to A511.
type 59)
Unit 59)
only) A733.00 to A733.07: Hour (00 to 23)
A733.08 to A733.15: Day of month (01
to 31)
A734.00 to A734.07: Month (01 to 12)
A734.08 to A734.15: Year (00 to 99)
to 6 the power was turned ON six times power is
(CP1E A510 to A511.
type 59)
Unit 59)
only) A736.00 to A736.07: Hour (00 to 23)
A736.08 to A736.15: Day of month (01
to 31)
A737.00 to A737.07: Month (01 to 12)
A737.08 to A737.15: Year (00 to 99)
to 7 the power was turned ON seven times power is
(CP1E A510 to A511.
type 59)
Unit 59)
only) A739.00 to A739.07: Hour (00 to 23)
A739.08 to A739.15: Day of month (01
to 31)
A740.00 to A740.07: Month (01 to 12)
A740.08 to A740.15: Year (00 to 99)
to 8 the power was turned ON eight times power is
(CP1E A510 to A511.
type 59)
Unit 59)
only) A742.00 to A742.07: Hour (00 to 23)
A742.08 to A742.15: Day of month (01
to 31)
A743.00 to A743.07: Month (01 to 12)
A743.08 to A743.15: Year (00 to 99)
to 9 the power was turned ON nine times power is
(CP1E A510 to A511.
type 59)
Unit 59)
only) A745.00 to A745.07: Hour (00 to 23)
A745.08 to A745.15: Day of month (01
to 31)
A746.00 to A746.07: Month (01 to 12)
A746.08 to A746.15: Year (00 to 99)

Appendices
Address Status
Related
settings
change
to 10 the power was turned ON ten times power is
(CP1E A510 to A511.
type 59)
Unit 59)
only) A748.00 to A748.07: Hour (00 to 23)
A748.08 to A748.15: Day of month (01
to 31)
A749.00 to A749.07: Month (01 to 12)
A749.08 to A749.15: Year (00 to 99)
A751.11 DM Backup Restore ON when DM backup data could not Retained Cleared
Failed Flag be restored normally. If this flag turns
ON, data will not be restored from the
built-in EEPROM backup memory to
RAM.
A751.14 DM Backup Save Flag ON when A751.15 is turned ON to Retained Cleared
start the saving operation. This flag
stays ON while data is being saved
and turns OFF when finished.
A751.15 DM Backup Save Saving the specified words from the ON: Start saving. Retained Cleared
Start Bit DM Area in RAM to the built-in OFF: Execution nor-
EEPROM backup memory is started mal or still in

when this bit is turned ON. progress.
This bit will not turn OFF automatically
even when saving the data has been
completed.
If this bit is turned ON and OFF while
the DM Backup Save Flag (A751.14)
is ON, it will be ignored and the data
will not be backed up again.
Note Select the Restore D0- from
backup memory Check Box and
set the number of DM Area
words to back up in the Number
of CH of DM for backup Box in
the PLC Setup before using this
bit.
App

Appendices
A-3 Response Performance
A-3-1 I/O Response Time
The I/O response time is the time it takes from when an input turns ON, the data is recognized by the
CPU Unit, and the ladder programs are executed, up to the time for the result to be output to an output
terminal.
The length of the I/O response time depends on the following conditions.
Timing of Input Bit turning ON.
The cycle time
Minimum I/O Response Time

The I/O response time is shortest when data is retrieved immediately before I/O refresh of the CPU Unit.
The minimum I/O response time is calculated as follows:
Minimum I/O response time = Input ON delay + Cycle time + Output ON delay
Note The input and output ON delays depend on the type of terminals used on the CPU Unit or the model number
of the Unit being used.
:I/O refresh
Inputs:
Input ON delay
(Status read to
the CPU Unit.):
Cycle time Cycle time
Instruction Instruction
execution execution
Output ON delay
Outputs:
Minimum I/O
Response Time
Maximum I/O Response Time

The I/O response time is longest when data is retrieved immediately after I/O refresh period of the
CPU Unit.
The maximum I/O response time is calculated as follows:
Maximum I/O response time = Input ON delay + (Cycle time 2) + Output ON delay
:I/O refresh
Inputs:
Input ON delay
(Status read to
the CPU Unit.):
Cycle time Cycle time
Instruction Instruction Instruction
execution execution execution
Output ON delay
Outputs:
Maximum I/O Response Time

Appendices
Calculation Example
Conditions:
Input ON delay: 1 ms (normal input 0.08 to 0.11 with input constant set to 0 ms)
Output ON delay: 0.1 ms (transistor output)
Cycle time: 20 ms
Minimum I/O response time = 1 ms + 20 ms + 0.1 ms = 21.1 ms
Maximum I/O response time = 1 ms + (20 ms 2) + 0.1 ms = 41.1 ms
Input Constant Setting

Input constant setting can be set in the PLC Setup.
Increasing the input constants slowers the input response time and reduces the effects of chattering
and noise. Decreasing the input constants fasters the input response time and allows reception of
shorter input pulses (but the pulse width must be longer than the cycle time).
Input response time

Input response time
Pulses shorter than the input
response time are not received
Inputs Inputs
I/O refresh I/O refresh
CPU Unit CPU Unit

PLC Setup
Name Description Setting Default
Input Constant Settings Input Constants 00 hex: 8 ms 00 hex (8 ms)
10 hex: No filter (0 ms)
12 hex: 1 ms
13 hex: 2 ms
14 hex: 4 ms
15 hex: 8 ms
App
16 hex: 16 ms
17 hex: 32 ms
A-3-1 I/O Response Time
Note The input constants of CP1W-40EDR/EDT/EDT1 are always 16ms regardless of the settings.

Appendices
A-3-2 Interrupt Response Time
Interrupt Response Time for Input Interrupt Tasks

The interrupt response time for input interrupt tasks is the time taken from when a built-in input has
turned ON (or OFF) until the input interrupt task has actually been executed.
The length of the interrupt response time for input interrupt tasks depends on the total of the hard-
ware interrupt response time and software interrupt response time.
Item Interrupt response time Counter 0,1,2 interrupts Counter 3,4,5 interrupts
Hardware interrupt Upward differentiation: 50 s
response time Downward differentiation: 50
s
Software interrupt Minimum: 70 s Minimum: 120 s Minimum: 150 s
response time Maximum: 160 s + Wait Maximum: 230 s + Wait Maximum: 670 s + Wait
time* time* time*
* The wait time occurs when there is competition with other interrupts. As a guideline, the wait time will be 0 to
3 ms.
Note Input interrupt tasks can be executed during execution of the user program, I/O refresh, peripheral servicing,
or overseeing. (Even if an instruction is being executed, execution of the instruction will be stopped to exe-
cute the interrupt task.)
The interrupt response time is not affected by the above processing operations during which the interrupt
inputs turns ON.
Input interrupts, however, are not executed during execution of other interrupt tasks even if the input interrupt
conditions are satisfied. Instead, the input interrupts are executed after the current interrupt task has com-
pleted execution and the software interrupt response time has elapsed.
The interrupt response time of input interrupt tasks is calculated as follows:

Interrupt response time = Input ON delay + Software interrupt response time
Inputs:
Input ON delay
Ready to acknowledge
(Interrupt signal next interrupt signal
acknowledged.): Software interrupt response time
Interrupt task
execution:
Interrupt response Ladder program Return time
time for input execution time from input
interrupt task interrupt task
Cyclic task execution (main
program):
The time from when execution of the input interrupt task is completed until
execution of the cyclic task is resumed is 24 s.

Appendices
Interrupt Response Time for Scheduled Interrupt Tasks

The interrupt response time for scheduled interrupt tasks is the time taken from after the scheduled
time specified by the MSKS instruction has elapsed until the interrupt task has actually been exe-
cuted.
The length of the interrupt response time for scheduled interrupt tasks is 0.1 ms max.
There is also an error of 10 s in the time to the first scheduled interrupt (1.0 ms min.).
Note Scheduled interrupt tasks can be executed during execution of the ladder program (even while an instruction
is being executed by stopping the execution of an instruction), I/O refresh, peripheral servicing, or overseeing.
The processing operation in which the scheduled interrupt occurs does not affect the interrupt processing
time.
Scheduled interrupts, however, are not executed during execution of other interrupt tasks even if the interrupt
conditions are satisfied. Instead, the interrupts are executed in order of priority after the current interrupt task
has completed execution and the software interrupt response time has elapsed.As a guideline, the wait time
will be 0 to 3ms.
Scheduled interrupt time
Internal timer:
Software interrupt response time

Scheduled
interrupt task:

The scheduled task will not be executed while the CPU Unit suspends operation for online editing.

A-3-3 Serial PLC Link Response Performance
The response times for CPU Units connected via a Serial PLC Link (polling unit to polled unit or polled
unit to polling unit) can be calculated as shown below.
Note A PT cannot be used in the Serial PLC Link.
Maximum I/O response time (not including hardware delay) =
App
Polling unit cycle time + Communications cycle time + Polled unit cycle time + 4 ms
Minimum I/O response time (not including hardware delay) =
Polled unit communications time + 0.8 ms
A-3-3 Serial PLC Link Response Performance
Number of participat- The number of polled units to which links have been established within the
ing polled unit nodes maximum unit number set in the polling unit.
Number of non- The number of polled units not participating in the links within the maximum unit
participating polled number set in the polling unit.
unit nodes
Communications cycle Polled unit communications time Number of participating polled unit nodes +
time (ms) 10 Number of non-participating polled unit nodes + 20 Number of polled unit
nodes
Polled unit Communications time set to Standard:
communications 0.4 + 0.286 [(No. of polled units + 1) No. of link words 2 + 12]
time (ms) Communications time set to Fast:
0.4 + 0.0955 [(No. of polled units + 1) No. of link words 2 + 12]

Appendices
A-3-4 Pulse Output Start Time

The pulse output start time is the time required from executing a pulse output instruction until pulses are
output externally.
This time depends on the pulse output instruction that is used and operation that is performed.
Instruction
execution Start time
Pulse output
Pulse output instruction Start time

SPED: continuous Minimum: 500s + Wait time*
SPED: independent
ACC: continuous
ACC: independent, trapezoidal
ACC: independent, triangular
PLS2: trapezoidal
PLS2: triangular
* The wait time occurs when there is competition with other interrupts. As a guideline, the wait time will be 0 to 3 ms.
A-3-5 Pulse Output Change Response Time

The pulse output change response time is the time for any change made by executing an instruction
during pulse output to actually affect the pulse output operation.
Pulse output instruction Change response time
INI: immediate stop Minimum: 100s + Wait time* + 1 pulse output time
SPED: immediate stop
ACC: deceleration stop 1 control cycle (4 ms) minimum, 2 control cycles (8
PLS2: deceleration stop ms) maximum
SPED: speed change

ACC: speed change
PLS2: target position change in reverse direction
PLS2: target position change in same direction at
same speed
PLS2: target position change in same direction at
different speed
* The wait time occurs when there is competition with other interrupts. As a guideline, the wait time will be 0 to 3 ms.

Appendices
A-4 PLC Operation for Power

Interruptions
Overview of Operation for Power Interruptions
Power Supply Voltage Drop

If the power supply voltage falls below the specified value (85% of rated voltage) while the CPU Unit
is in RUN or MONITOR mode, operation will be stopped and all outputs will be turned OFF.
Detection of Momentary Power Interruptions

The system will continue to run if the momentary power interruption lasts less than 10 ms (2ms for
DC power supply). If power is interruped for longer than 10 ms (2ms for DC power supply), a
momentary power interruption will be detected or undetected. If the momentary power interruption is
detected, the CPU Unit will be stopped and outputs will be turned OFF.
Below 85% of rated voltage

10ms
Time
0 0 to 10 ms max.
A-4 PLC Operation for Power Interruptions

(0 to 2ms max. for
DC power supply)
Momentary power
interruption not detected
Operation continues
Supply
voltage 10 ms min.
(2ms min. for DC power supply)
Supply
voltage
Operation will continue or stop
depending on whether a
momentary power interruption
is detected.
Automatic Recovery
Operation is automatically restarted when the power supply voltage is restored.
App

Appendices
Power OFF Timing Chart

Operation always stopped at this point
Power supply
voltage: 85%
Holding time for 5 V internal
power supply after power OFF
detection: 1 ms
Power OFF detection
Power OFF Detection Time

AC: 10ms
Power OFF DC: 2ms
detected signal
Program execution
Cyclic task or interrupt task Stop
status
CPU Unit reset signal
Power OFF Detection Time: The time from when the power supply voltage drops to 85% or less the rated voltage until the
power interruption is detected.
Power Holding Time: The maximum amount of time (fixed at 1 ms) that 5 V will be held internally after power shuts
OFF.
Description of Operation
The power interruption will be detected if the 100 to 240 VAC power supply falls below 85% of the
minimum rated voltage for the power OFF detection time (10 ms minimum for AC power supply and
2ms minimum for DC power supply, not fixed).
The CPU reset signal will turn ON and the CPU Unit will be reset immediately.
Instruction Execution for Power Interruptions

The power OFF detection time of CP1E CPU Units is 10 ms minimum for AC power supply and 2ms
minimum for DC power supply. If the power interruption is detected when operating in RUN or MONI-
TOR mode, the instruction currently being executed will be stopped and then the CPU Unit will be reset.
Malfunction Countermeasures
If only a couple of Expansion I/O Units or Expansion Units are connected to the CPU Unit resulting in a
light power supply circuit load and a small current consumption, the time required by the CPU Unit to
detect a power interruption will be longer. For this reason, inputs may be incorrectly identified as being
OFF if external power supply used for an input turns OFF before the power interruption is detected. If
an external NC contact input is used or the ladder program counts the number of ON to OFF transitions,
a malfunction may occur if the external power supply turns OFF.

Appendices
Power supply Power OFF detected

voltage: 85%
Power OFF Power OFF detection time

detected singal AC: 10 ms min.
DC: 2 ms min.
Program execution
status Cyclic task or interrupt task
CPU reset signal
External power supply

input
Input signal to CP1E

If the external power supply input turns
OFF before the power interruption is
detected, the CPU Unit will read the
input as being OFF
The following diagram shows an example countermeasure for this situation.

Wiring
Emergency stop input
100 VAC
A-4 PLC Operation for Power Interruptions

External power
supply input
L1 L2 COM 0.00 0.01
CP1E
Ladder Program
External power supply

Emergency input (Enables
stop input Emergency stop emergency stop output.) Emergency
release input 0.01 stop output
0.00
App
Emergency
stop output

Appendices

Index
Symbols Memory areas and stored data ................................2-3
*D(Specifying indirect addresses Operating modes......................................................3-3
in BCD Mode)..................................................4-13, 5-12 Operation..................................................................3-2
@D(Specifying indirect addresses CTBL instruction ........................................................11-21
in Binary Mode)...............................................4-13, 5-12 CX-Programmer
Help ........................................................................18-6
Numerics Cycle time ......................................................................3-2
1:N NT Links .......................................................14-3, 14-5 I/O response time .................................................. A-80
Interrupt response time ......................................... A-82
A Cycle time response performance .............................. A-80
Absolute coordinates ................................................. 12-11 Cyclic refreshing ..........................................................4-15
Absolute positioning................................................... 12-11 D
ACC instruction .................................................12-9, 12-15
Access Error Flag(P_AER) .......................................... 5-19 Data formats ................................................................4-13
Allocated words Data Memory Area................................................5-3, 5-11
CPU Unit .................................................................. 6-3 Data refresh method ..................................................14-23
Expansion I/O Unit ................................................... 6-4 Defining origin position...............................................12-18
Allocating functions to built-in input terminals ................ 8-6 Operating mode.................................................... 12-23
Allocating functions to built-in output terminals.............. 8-8 Operation pattern .................................................12-28
Allocations for Expansion I/O Units................................ 6-4 Origin return .........................................................12-30
Allocations for Expansion Units ..................................... 6-6 Origin search operation setting ............................12-27
Always OFF Flag(P_Off) .............................................. 5-19 PLC Setup ............................................................12-19
Always ON Flag(P_On)................................................ 5-19 Differential phase input (4).........................................11-8
Automatic I/O comment creation................................ 18-13 DM Area capacity...........................................................1-2
Automatic symbol name creation ............................... 18-13 DM backup function .....................................................16-8
Auxiliary Area........................................................5-4, 5-17 E
B End code(No-protocol communications) ......................14-8
Backing up memory ....................................................... 3-5 Equals Flag(P_EQ) ...................................................... 5-19
Backup ......................................................................... 5-12 Error Flag(P_ER) .........................................................5-19
Backup area ............................................................. 3-5 E-type CPU Unit.............................................................1-2
I/O memory backup time .......................................... 3-7 Execute process settings ...............................................7-3
Backup memory ....................................................3-6, 16-8 F
Backup time ................................................................... 1-2
Bit addresses ................................................................. 5-5 FINS command .................................................14-4, 14-30
Built-in EEPROM .......................... 2-2, 2-3, 3-6, 5-12, 16-8 Forced set/reset .........................................................18-25
Built-in RAM ............................................................2-2, 2-3 Functions allocation
Built-in RS-232C Port..................................................... 7-5 Selecting functions in the PLC Setup .......................8-4
Specifying method....................................................8-4
C
G
C Mode command.............................................14-4, 14-30
Carry Flag(P_CY) ........................................................ 5-19 Global symbols ..............................................................4-6
CIO Area .................................................................5-2, 5-7 Greater Than Flag(P_GT)............................................5-19
Allocation.................................................................. 6-2 Greater Than or Equals Flag(P_GE) ...........................5-20
Circular (Ring) mode(high-speed counter)................. 11-11 H
Clock function .............................................................. 16-7
Clock Pulses .........................................................5-4, 5-21 High-speed counter interrupts...........................11-2, 11-14
Communications settings........................................7-5, 7-8 Application example .............................................11-27
Condition Flags .....................................................5-4, 5-19 Functions allocation................................................ 11-4
Connecting the Servo Drive and external sensors....... 12-5 PLC Setup ...................................................11-3, 11-16
Constants..................................................................... 4-16 Related Auxiliary Area..........................................11-26
Counter Area.................................................................. 5-4 Specifications .........................................................11-7
Resetting or maintaining ........................................ 5-16 Writing the ladder program..........................11-6, 11-16
Types ...................................................................... 5-15 High-speed counter settings ........................................7-11
Counter Completion Flags ............................................. 5-4 High-speed counters
Counter PVs................................................................... 5-4 Counting ranges ...................................................11-10
Counting ranges......................................................... 11-10 Frequency measurement......................................11-13
CPU Unit Pulse input methods...............................................11-8
I/O allocation ............................................................ 6-3 Reading the present value ................................... 11-12
Internal memory ....................................................... 2-2 Reset method .......................................................11-11
CP1E CPU Unit Software Users Manual(W480) Index-1

Holding Area........................................................... 5-3, 5-9 M
Host Link .......................................................... 14-4, 14-30 Maximum interrupt task processing time(A440CH)... 10-13
Host Link command.......................................... 14-4, 14-30 Memory areas and stored data ..................................... 2-3
I Modbus-RTU Easy Master .......................................... 14-3
DM fixed allocation words ........................... 5-12, 14-12
I/O allocation ................................................................. 6-2 Error codes .......................................................... 14-13
CPU Unit.................................................................. 6-3 Programming examples ....................................... 14-14
Expansion I/O Unit................................................... 6-4 Related Auxiliary Area ......................................... 14-13
Expansion Unit ........................................................ 6-6 Monitor mode ................................................................ 3-3
I/O memory ............................................................ 3-3, 5-2 Monitoring and debugging......................................... 18-23
Backup time ............................................................. 3-7 Forced set/reset................................................... 18-25
I/O memory Areas ................................................... 5-6 Monitoring status ................................................. 18-23
Initializing method.................................................... 3-8 Online editing....................................................... 18-26
I/O refresh ..................................................................... 3-2 MSKS instruction.............................................. 10-6, 10-11
I/O refresh timing......................................................... 4-15
I/O response time ........................................................ A-80 N
Immediate refresh ....................................................... 4-15 N/NA-type CPU Unit...................................................... 1-2
Increment pulse input .................................................. 11-8 Negative Flag(P_N) ..................................................... 5-20
Indirect addressing ...................................................... 5-12 Non-differentiated instructions..................................... 4-10
INI instruction .......................................... 11-22, 12-9, 13-3 No-protocol communications.............................. 14-3, 14-8
Input constant................................................................ 7-4 PLC Setup ............................................................. 14-9
Input constant setting .................................................. A-81 Related Auxiliary Area ......................................... 14-10
Input interrupts ............................................................ 10-5 Not Equal Flag(P_NE)................................................. 5-20
Functions allocation ............................................... 10-5 Number of connected Units........................................... 6-3
PLC Setup ............................................................. 10-4
Writing the ladder program .................................... 10-5 O
Input-differentiated instructions ................................... 4-11 Online editing ............................................................ 18-26
instruction functions....................................................... A-2 Operands....................................................................... 4-9
Instructions Operating mode at startup............................................. 7-3
Basic understanding ................................................ 4-8 Operating modes
Execution conditions.............................................. 4-10 Changing method .................................................... 3-3
Operands ................................................................. 4-9 Operating modes and operation .............................. 3-4
Specifying addresses ............................................ 4-12 The retaining of I/O memory when changing........... 3-4
Variations ............................................................... 4-10 Operation for power interruptions ................................ A-85
Internal memory ............................................................ 2-2 Timing Chart .......................................................... A-86
Interrupt input settings................................................. 7-12 ORG instruction..................................... 12-9, 12-22, 12-30
Interrupt response time ............................................... A-82 Origin return settings .......................................... 7-14, 7-16
Interrupt task ............................................................. 10-11 Origin search settings......................................... 7-13, 7-15
Interrupt task priority and order of execution............. 10-13 OUT instruction ................................................ 12-9, 12-22
Interrupt task with maximum processing time Output interrupts.......................................................... 10-2
(A441CH)............................................................... 10-13 Overflow Flag(P_OF)................................................... 5-20
Interrupts
Input interrupts....................................................... 10-3 P
Precautions.......................................................... 10-13 P_AER(Access Error Flag).......................................... 5-19
Scheduled interrupts............................................ 10-10 P_CY(Carry Flag)........................................................ 5-19
Types ..................................................................... 10-2 P_EQ(Equals Flag) ..................................................... 5-19
Interrupts functions P_ER(Error Flag)......................................................... 5-19
Interrupt response time.......................................... A-82 P_GE(Greater Than or Equals Flag)........................... 5-20
IORF instruction(I/O refresh) ....................................... 4-15 P_GT(Greater Than Flag) ........................................... 5-19
J P_LE(Less than or Equals Flag) ................................. 5-20
P_LT(Less Than Flag) ................................................. 5-20
Jogging...................................................................... 12-15 P_N(Negative Flag) ..................................................... 5-20
Application example............................................. 12-15 P_NE(Not Equal Flag)................................................. 5-20
L P_OF(Overflow Flag)................................................... 5-20
P_Off(Always OFF Flag) ............................................. 5-19
Ladder program P_On(Always ON Flag) ............................................... 5-19
Editing.................................................................. 18-15 P_UF(Underflow Flag)................................................. 5-20
Input....................................................................... 18-7 Peripheral servicing....................................................... 3-2
Saving and reading.............................................. 18-14 Phase-Z signal + software reset................................ 11-11
Transferring.......................................................... 18-18 PID temperature control .............................................. 16-2
Writing ................................................................... 18-7 PIDAT instruction ......................................................... 16-3
Less Than Flag(P_LT) ................................................. 5-20 PLC Setup ..................................................................... 7-2
Less than or Equals Flag(P_LE) ................................. 5-20 Base Settings................................................ 7-13, 7-14
Linear mode(high-speed counter) ............................. 11-10 Communications settings.................................. 7-5, 7-8
Local symbols................................................................ 4-6
Index-2 CP1E CPU Unit Software Users Manual(W480)

Execute process settings ......................................... 7-3 Security function ........................................................16-12
High-speed counter settings .................................. 7-11 Self-diagnosis ................................................................3-2
Input constant........................................................... 7-4 Serial communications
Interrupt input settings............................................ 7-12 Connecting the host computer .............................14-30
Origin return settings.............................................. 7-16 Modbus-RTU Easy Master ........................14-10, 14-11
Origin search settings ......................... 7-13, 7-14, 7-15 No-protocol communications with general
Settings .................................................................... 7-3 components .........................................................14-8
Startup data read setting.......................................... 7-3 Program-free communications with PTs ................14-5
Startup mode setting ................................................ 7-3 Serial PLC Links...................................................14-20
Timing and interrupt settings .................................... 7-3 Types of communication.........................................14-3
PLS2 instruction................................................12-9, 12-11 Serial Option Port...........................................................7-8
Positioning control...................................................... 12-11 Serial PLC Link response performance ...................... A-83
Positioning control (independent mode)..................... 12-49 Serial PLC Links ...............................................14-3, 14-20
Precautions Allocated words .................................................... 14-26
Ladder programming precautions .......................... 4-22 Data refresh method.............................................14-23
Precautions for using interrupts............................ 10-13 Example application .............................................14-28
Special program sections ....................................... 4-22 PLC Setup ............................................................14-21
Program capacity ....................................................1-2, 4-3 Related Auxiliary Area..........................................14-27
Program mode ............................................................... 3-3 Software reset............................................................11-12
Program-free communications with PTs ...................... 14-5 Specifying addresses...................................................4-12
PLC Setup and PT system settings ....................... 14-6 Specifying offsets for addresses ..................................4-19
Programmer device...................................................... 18-3 SPED instruction...............................................12-9, 12-15
Programming ................................................................. 4-2 Speed control (continuous mode) .............................. 12-47
PRV instruction ..................................... 11-12, 12-9, 12-32 Startup data read setting ...............................................7-3
Pulse + Direction input ................................................. 11-9 Step ladder program sections ......................................4-23
Pulse input methods .................................................... 11-8 Subroutines...........................................................4-2, 4-22
Pulse output change response time............................ A-84 Switching from speed control (continuous mode) to
Pulse output Start Time .............................................. A-84 positioning (independent mode).............................. 12-54
Pulse outputs ............................................................... 12-2 Symbols
Application example ............................................. 12-34 Global symbols.........................................................4-6
Changing the present value of the pulse output... 12-31 Local symbols...........................................................4-6
Defining origin position......................................... 12-18
Functions allocation ............................................... 12-4 T
Jogging................................................................. 12-15 Target value comparison.................................11-14, 11-17
Output pattern ...................................................... 12-47 Tasks.......................................................................4-2, 4-6
PLC Setup .............................................................. 12-3 Timer Area .....................................................................5-3
Positioning control ................................................ 12-11 PV refresh method .................................................5-14
Positioning control (independent mode) ............... 12-49 Resetting or maintaining.........................................5-14
Precautions when using pulse outputs................. 12-42 Types ......................................................................5-13
Reading the pulse output present value............... 12-32 Timing and interrupt settings..........................................7-3
Related Auxiliary Area.......................................... 12-33 Triangular control .......................................................12-50
Specifications ....................................................... 12-10
Speed control (continuous mode) ........................ 12-47 U
Triangular control.................................................. 12-50 Underflow Flag(P_UF) .................................................5-20
Writing the ladder program..................................... 12-9 Up/Down pulse input....................................................11-8
PWM instruction........................................................... 13-3
PWM outputs ............................................................... 13-2 V
Variable-duty-factor pulse outputs(PWM outputs)........13-2
Q Variations .....................................................................4-10
Quick-response inputs ................................................... 9-2
Functions allocation ................................................. 9-4 W
PLC Setup ................................................................ 9-3 Word address.................................................................5-5
Writing the ladder program....................................... 9-4 Work Area ...............................................................5-3, 5-8
R
Range comparison..........................................11-14, 11-20
Read protection.......................................................... 16-12
Relative coordinates .................................................. 12-11
Relative positioning .................................................... 12-11
Run mode ...................................................................... 3-3
S
Scheduled interrupts .................................................. 10-10
Writing the ladder program................................... 10-11
Sections ..................................................................4-2, 4-6
CP1E CPU Unit Software Users Manual(W480) Index-3

Index-4 CP1E CPU Unit Software Users Manual(W480)
Revision History
A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual.
Cat. No. W480-E1-04
Revision code
Revision code Date Revised content

01 March 2009 Original production
02 June 2009 Information added on pulse outputs and PWM outputs.
Information added on CX-Programmer Micro PLC Edition version 8.2
upgrading to version 9.0.
03 January 2010 Information added on E10/14, N14/60 and NA20 CPU Units.
04 June 2010 CP1W-DA021 added for CP-series Expansion Units.
Information added on CP1W-CIF41 Ethernet Option Board.
CP1E CPU Unit Software Users Manual(W480) Revision-1

Revision-2 CP1E CPU Unit Software Users Manual(W480)
OMRON Corporation Industrial Automation Company Authorized Distributor:
Tokyo, JAPAN
Contact: www.ia.omron.com
Regional Headquarters
OMRON EUROPE B.V. OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC
Wegalaan 67-69-2132 JD Hoofddorp One Commerce Drive Schaumburg,
The Netherlands IL 60173-5302 U.S.A.
Tel: (31)2356-81-300/Fax: (31)2356-81-388 Tel: (1) 847-843-7900/Fax: (1) 847-843-7787
OMRON ASIA PACIFIC PTE. LTD. OMRON (CHINA) CO., LTD. OMRON Corporation 2009 All Rights Reserved.
No. 438A Alexandra Road # 05-05/08 (Lobby 2), Room 2211, Bank of China Tower, In the interest of product improvement,
Alexandra Technopark, 200 Yin Cheng Zhong Road, specifications are subject to change without notice.
Singapore 119967 PuDong New Area, Shanghai, 200120, China
Tel: (65) 6835-3011/Fax: (65) 6835-2711 Tel: (86) 21-5037-2222/Fax: (86) 21-5037-2200 Cat. No. W480-E1-04 0610

At-CP1E CPU Unit Software

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

At-CP1E CPU Unit Software

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

At-CP1E CPU Unit Software

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Cat. No.

CP-series CP1E CPU Units

CP1E CPU Unit Software Users Manual(W480) 1

Wiring methods for the power supply

Connecting Cables for CX-Programmer Procedures for connecting the

5 Creating the Program

Error codes and remedies if a problem occurs

2 CP1E CPU Unit Software Users Manual(W480)

CP1E CPU Unit Software Users Manual (Cat. No. W480)

CP1E CPU Unit Software Users Manual(W480) 3

CP1E CPU Unit Instructions Reference Manual (Cat. No. W483)

4 CP1E CPU Unit Software Users Manual(W480)

Page Structure and Icons

5 Installation and wiring

DIN Track Installation

5-2-1 Installation Location

Precautions for Correct Use

Manual name CP1E CPU Unit Hardware Users Manual(W479) 5-3

Precautions for Safe Use

Precautions for Correct Use

References to the location of more detailed or related information.

CP1E CPU Unit Software Users Manual(W480) 5

6 CP1E CPU Unit Software Users Manual(W480)

3 CPU Unit Operation 13 PWM Outputs

CP1E CPU Unit Software Users Manual(W480) 7

CP1E CPU Unit Manuals ........................................................................................... 2

Manual Structure ....................................................................................................... 5

Safety Precautions .................................................................................................. 18

Precautions for Safe Use........................................................................................ 21

Regulations and Standards.................................................................................... 23

Related Manuals ...................................................................................................... 24

Section 2 Internal Memory in the CPU Unit

Section 3 CPU Unit Operation

Section 4 Understanding Programming

8 CP1E CPU Unit Software Users Manual(W480)

Section 5 I/O Memory

Section 6 I/O Allocation

Section 7 PLC Setup

CP1E CPU Unit Software Users Manual(W480) 9

Section 9 Quick-response Inputs

Section 11 High-speed Counters

10 CP1E CPU Unit Software Users Manual(W480)

Section 13 PWM Outputs

Section 14 Serial Communications

CP1E CPU Unit Software Users Manual(W480) 11

Section 15 Analog I/O Function

Section 16 Other Functions

Section 17 Ethernet Option Board

12 CP1E CPU Unit Software Users Manual(W480)

Section 18 Programming Device Operations

CP1E CPU Unit Software Users Manual(W480) 13

14 CP1E CPU Unit Software Users Manual(W480)

Warranty and Limitations of Liability

OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING NON-

IN NO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANTY, REPAIR, OR OTHER CLAIMS

CP1E CPU Unit Software Users Manual(W480) 15

16 CP1E CPU Unit Software Users Manual(W480)

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

ERRORS AND OMISSIONS

CP1E CPU Unit Software Users Manual(W480) 17